Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/ahnslatingrammarOOahnfrich 


Steiger's  Latin  Series. 


AHN'S 

LATIN   GRAMMAR. 

WITH 

REFERENCES  to  the  EXERCISES 

IN  THE 

FIRST,  Second  and  third  latin  books. 

BY 

Dr.  P.  HENN. 


NEW  YORK: 

B.    STEIGER&CO. 

1881. 


'  /r     n 


A 


BEQUEST. 


The  undersigned,  in  their  efforts  to  secure  the  greatest 
possible  correctness  in  their  educational  publications,  will  feel 
obliged  for  the  suggestion  of  improvements. 

JS?.  Steiger  &  Co.^  PublisTiers. 


Copyright,   1881,   by  E.  Steiger  &  Co. 

IN  MEMORIAW 


Press  of 
ML  Steiger  &  Co.,  N,  T. 


PREFACE. 


AHN'S  Latin  Grmntnar  forms  part  of  a  series  which  has  been 
undertaken  with  the  design  to  facilitate  the  study  of  Latin  for  begin- 
ners. The  author  desires  to  state  at  the  outset  that  this  volume  is 
in  no  respect  a  condensation  of  the  Firsts  Second,  and  Third  Latin 
Books.  It  is  constructed  on  a  plan  of  its  own,  and  with  a  twofold 
object  in  view:  first,  to  provide  a  complete  grammatical  course  for 
those  teachers  who  prefer  the  synthetic  method  to  the  exclusion  of 
the  analytic,  and  secondly,  to  supply  for  reference  in  study  a  really 
compendious  grammar,  which  may  answer  the  needs  of  young  scho- 
lars, while  it  is  sufficiently  comprehensive  and  full  for  more  advanced 
students  —  in  a  word,  the  first  and  also  the  last  grammar  in  the 
student's  hands. 

In  pursuance  of  this  plan,  the  Grammar  retains  from  the  First, 
Second,  and  Third  Latin  Books  the  general  statement  of  gram- 
matical facts  in  tlie  exact  form  and  language  of  those  books,  but,  of 
course,  in  the  traditional  presentation  of  synthetic  grammar.  In  the 
treatment  of  Etymology  the  following  have  been  the  leading  fea- 
tures. While  scientific  accuracy  has  been  aimed  at,  the  convenience 
of  teacher  or  learner  has  in  no  case  been  sacrificed  to  theoretical 
completeness.  Of  the  stem  theory  especially  the  author  has  meant 
Jo  place  before  the  learner  just  so  much  as  may  be  used  to  explain 
difficulties  ~  not  to  multiply  them.  The  pupil's  attention  should  be 
directed  first  to  what  most  needs  to  be  learned,  viz.:  the  etymolo- 
gical forms  themselves.  With  this  in  view,  the  Grammar  embraces 
all  the  important  features  of  the  series  which  are  of  practical 
assistance  to  the  learner,  particularly  during  the  first  year.  The 
sharp  distinction,  for  instance,  of  inflectional  endings  by  bold-faced 
type  is  a  matter  of  no  small  importance  if  we  wish  to  make  the  pupil 
from  the  very  outset  so  familiar  with  all  the  inflections  that  he  will 
recognize  them  with  promptness  and  certainty  wherever  they  occur. 

926545 


—     iV     — 

Of  course,  a  real  understanding  he  will  obtain  only  by  learning  how 
those  inflections  arose,  and  here  again  the  brief,  clear  and  practical 
rules  on  the  subject  will  be  found  to  simplify  a  very  complex  matter, 
and  to  remove  perhaps  the  greatest  difficulty  in  the  study  of  Latin 
grammar.  As  complementary  to  the  etymological  part  the  careful 
classification  and  definition  of  derivative  endings  cannot  fail  to  be 
valuable  for  constant  reference,  if  not  for  class  study. 

In  the  treatment  of  Syntax  the  points  which  have  received  par- 
ticular attention  are:  to  set  forth  the  facta  of  classical  Latin  (repre- 
sented by  Caesar  and  Cicero)  just  as  they  are  in  themselves;  to 
describe  as  fairly  and  briefly  as  possible  the  actual  uses  of  syntac- 
tical forms,  to  illustrate  them  by  carefully  selected  examples,  and, 
withal,  to  bear  constantly  in  mind  that  this  Course  is  meant  to  lead 
at  the  earliest  possible  moment  to  the  reading  of  the  classical 
authors.  It  will  be  for  professional  teachers  to  say  whether  the 
endeavor  to  reach  this  practical  end  has  been  successful. 

To  furnish  to  teachers  who  may  so  desire,  the  opportunity  of 
drilling  their  pupils  in  the  more  important  rules  and  principles  while 
they  are  learning  them,  references  to  the  corresponding  exercises 
in  the  First,  Second,  and  Third  Latin  Books  are  inserted  through- 
out this  Grammar.  The  detailed  Index  of  Subjects  will  be  found 
to  contain  every  topic  in  the  text. 

To  summarize:  the  design  of  this  Latin  Series  is  to  enable  pupils 
to  gain  a  thorough  knowledge  of  Latin  —  not  without  honest  exer- 
tions, yet  with  the  greatest  possible  ease. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


General  Division  of  the  Subject.  Page  1 

PAET   I.   -PHONOLOGY. 

Alphabet;  Classification 1 

Pronunciation 3 

Roman  Method 3 

Continental  Method 4 

English  Method 5 

Syllables '. 6 

Quantity 6 

Accent ^  7 

PART    II.  —  ETYMOLOGY. 

The  Parts  of  Speech 7 

Substantives 8-48 

Gender 8 

Number  and  Case 10 

Declensions 10 

General  Eules 11 

Fii^st  Declension 12 

Second  Declension 13 

Adjectives 16 

Third  Declension 20 

Formation  of  the  Genitive 20 

Adjectives    , 33 

Remarks  on  Certain  Gases 35 

GreeTc  Nouns 38 

Gender  in  Third  Declension 38 

Fourth  Declension 42 

Fifth  Declension 43 

Irregular  Nouns 44 

Proper  Names 47 

Adjectives 48-53 

Declension 48 

Comparison 50 

Numerals 54-59 

Numeral  Adjectives 54 

Numeral  Adverbs 58 


—      VI      — 

Pronouns Page  59-65 

Personal  Pronouns 59 

Pronouns  of  the  Third  Person 61 

Demonstrative 61 

Determinative 62 

Relative 63 

Interrogative 64 

Indefinite 64 

Pronominal  Adjectives 65 

Verbs 66-145 

Voices 66 

Tenses 67 

Moods 67 

Verbal  Nouns  and  Adjectives 68 

Numbers  and  Persons : 69 

Ilie  Four  Conjugations 69 

Simple  Forms 70 

Compound  Forms 72 

Periphrastic  Conjugation  75 

First  Conjugation  (Paradigm) 77 

Second  Conjugation  (Paradigm) 80 

Third  Conjugation  (Paradigm) 84 

Fourth  Conjugation  (Paradigm) 88 

Deponent  Verbs  (Paradigms) 92 

Appendix  to  Third  Conjugation  (Verbs  in  lo) 100 

Special  Forms  in  Conjugation 103 

Formation  of  the  Principal  Parts 105 

in  the  First  Conjugation -. 106 

in  the  Second  Conjugation 108 

in  the  Third  Conjugation 112 

Stems  in  u,  V 113 

Verbs  in  lo 114 

Stems  in  d,  t 115 

Stems  in  b,  p 118 

Stems  in  c,  g,  q,  h,  ct 119 

Stems  in  1,  m,  11,  r 121 

Stems  in  s,  K 124 

Stems  in  sc  (Inceptives) 124 

in  the  Fourth  Conjugation 129 

Irregular  Verbs 130 

Defective  Verbs 141 

Impersonal  Verbs 144 


—     VII      — 

Adverbs Page  145-151 

Primitive  and  Derivative ' 145 

Comparison 150 

Prepositions 151 

Conjunctions 152-154 

Co-ordinating 152 

Subordinating 153 

Interjections  155 

Word-formation 155  -168 

Derivation  of  Verbs 155 

of  Substantives 158 

of  Adjectives 161 

Composition  of  Verbs 164 

of  Substantives 168 

of  Adjectives 168 

PART    III.  —  SYNTAX. 

The  Sentence 169 

Subject  and  Predicate 169 

Attribute  and  Apposition 172 

Agreement  of  Pronouns 173 

The  Order  of  Words 175 

Construction  of  Cases 176-208 

Genitive  with  Substantives 176 

with  Adjectives 178 

with  Verbs 179 

Accusative^  Direct  Object 182 

two  Accusatives 183 

with  Impersonal  Verbs 184 

Idiomatic  Uses 185 

Dative  with  Verbs 185 

with  Adjectives  . .'. 189 

Ethical  Dative 190 

Ablative  of  Cause 190 

of  Means  and  Instrument 191 

of  Limitation 191 

of  Comparison 191 

of  Manner 192 

of  Quality 193 

of  Price 193 

of  Separation^  Plenty  and  Want 194 

in  Special  Constructions 196 


_  VIII  _ 

Timej  Space,  Place Page  197-207 

Use  of  Preposiiiono 

Time  

Space 

Place 

Special  Uses  of  Substantives 

of  Adjectives 

of  Pronouns 

Syntax  of  the  Verb 214-246 

Use  of  Tenses 

Sequence  of  Tensas 

Use  of  the  Indicative 

Independent  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive 

Dependent  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive 

Consecutive  and  Final  Conjunctions 

Concessive  and  Comparative  Conjunctions 

Temporal  Conjunctions 

Causal  Conjunctions 

Conditional  Conjunctions  

Relative  Clauses  with  Subjunctive 

Direct  Questions 

Indirect  Questions 

The  Imperative 

The  Infinitive 

Accusative  with  the  Infinitive 

Tenses  of  the  Infinitive 

Nominative  with  the  Infinitive 

Direct  Discourse. 

Indirect  Discourse 

Participles ,.., 

Ablative  Absolute 

Gerund 

Gerundive 

Supine  and  its  Equivalents 

Co-ordinating  Conjunctions 246  259 

Copulative 246 

Disjunctive 247 

Adversative , 248 

Causal 249 

Illative 249 

Corresponsive , , . .         24S 


—      IX     -— 

POETICAL  FORMS. 

Prosody Page  250-256 

Quantity.  General  Rules 250 

Middle  Syllables  251 

Final  Syllables 253 

Monosyllables 254 

Compounds 255 

Figures  of  Prosody 255 

Essentials  of  Yersification 257-268 

Feet.  Rhythm 257 

Dactylic  Hexameter  . 260 

Elegiac  Pentameter    261 

Iambic  Trimeter 261 

Compound  Verses 261 

Metres  of  Horace 263 

Index  of  the  Metres  of  Horace 267 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

The  Roman  Calendar 269 

Roman  Money ^  Weights^  and  Measures 272 

Abbreviations 273 

Principal  Latin  Authors 274 

Index  of  Verbs 277 

Index  of  Subjects 288 


LATIN  GRAMMAB. 


General  Division  of  the  Subject. 

1.  Latin  Grammar  is  a  description  of  the  usages  of 
the  Latin  language  according  to  the  different  ways 
in  which  words  (vocabula)  are  put  together  to  form 
speech  (oratio).     It  is  divided  into  three  parts: 

I.  Phonology  which  deals  with  the  elementary  sounds  in  the 
Latin  language. 

II.  Etymology  which  treats  of  the  forms  of  single  words  — 
Inflection  —  and  of  derivation  and  composition — Word-formation. 

m.  Syntax  which  treats  of  the  arrangement  and  combination 
of  words  in  sentences. 


Paet    FiesTo 

phonology. 

2.  Nearly  all  words  are  composed  of  articulate 
sounds.  These  are  represented  to  the  eye  by  the 
letters  of  the  Alphabet  which  is  the  same  as  the  Eng- 
lish, except  that  it  has  no  w. 

The  Latin  Alphabet  consists,  strictly,  of  but  twenty-three 
letters,  i  and  j  being  anciently  but  one  character,  as  likewise  u 
and  V.  During  the  classical  age,  y  and  z  were  recognized  as 
Greek  letters,  and  x  was  the  twenty-first  and  last  letter  of  the 
Latin  alphabet  (see  4.  below). 


—      2      — 

3,  The  Alphabetical  Names  still  most  generally  used  in  English 
schools,  are  the  English.  Yet,  it  is  more  probable  that  in  the  ancient 
spelling  of  Latin  the  letters  were  named  in  the  following  manner: 

"t  a  .  A    ;  ^\  ;  •;      '  m    M       em 

t>     B     '  bay    '  .  n     N        en 


c 

;€•  • 

•;L{ty  :   \  ' 

o 

O 

0 

d 

.  30   ' 

'   day  • '  • ' ' 

P 

P 

pay 

e 

E 

ay 

q 

Q 

koo 

f 

F 

eff 

r 

R 

er 

g 

G 

gay 

s 

S 

ess 

h 

H 

hah 

t 

T 

tay 

i 

I 

ee  (vowel) 

u 

U 

00  (vowel) 

J 

J 

ee  (consonant) 

V 

V 

00  (consonant) 

k 

K 

kah 

X 

X 

ix 

1 

li 

el 

y 

Y 

ipseelon 

z     Z 

tsaytah 

' 

The  Latin  uses  capital  initial  letters  at  the  beginning  of  sen- 
tences; also  for  all  proper  names,  and  for  substantives  and  adjectives 
derived  from  proper  names. 

4.  The  Vowels  are:  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y.  All  other  letters,  except  the 
aspirate  h,  are  consonants.  Originally,  i  and  u  were  used  both  as 
vowels  and  as  consonants,  and  supplied  the  place  of  j  and  v.  y  and 
z  occur  in  Greek  words  only. 

5.  The  Diphthongs  are:  ae,  oe,  au,  eu. 

6.  Consonaiits  are  classified  according  to  the  principal  organs 
by  which  they  are  produced,  as; 

Labials  (lip-sounds) :  b,  p,  f,  v,  m; 
Dentals  (tooth-sounds):  d,  t,  n,  s; 
Linguals  (tongue-sounds):  1,  r; 
Gutturals  (throat-sounds):  c,  g",  k,  q; 

and  according  to  the  mode  of  utterance^  as: 

Liquids  which  can  be  uttered  without  a  vowel: 
1,  m,  n,  r,  s; 

Mutes  which  cannot  be  perfectly  sounded  without  a  vowel: 
b,  c,  d,  f,  g,  k,  p,  q,  t. 

7.  Double  Consonants  are: 

z  =  dz  in  adze;  x  =  cs  (gs). 


Pronunciation. 

8.  The  Pronunciation  of  Latin  is  different  in  differ- 
ent countries.  In  the  United  States,  general  usage 
is  now  strongly  in  favor  of  either  the  Roman  or  the 
Continental  Method,  the  difference  between  these  two 
not  being  very  considerable.  Many  persons,  however, 
prefer  to  retain  the  English  Method,  which  has  been 
the  prevailing  system  of  pronunciation  among  English- 
speaking  scholars  for  the  last  two  or  three  centuries.* 

Roman  Method. 

9.  By  the  Roman,  or  Phonetic  Method,  every  letter  has 
always  the  same  sound. 

Sounds  of  the  Vowels. 

10.  As  a  general  rule,  each  simple  vowel  is  either  long  or  short. 
Yowels  marked  thus:  a  e  i  o  u  y  are  long;  marked  thus:  a  e  i 
5  ii  y  are  short. 

a  =r  a  in  father  a  =  a  in  idea 

e  =  6  in  prey  e  =  e  in  met 

i  =  i  in  machine  i  =  i  in  holiest 

o  =  o  in  bone  6  =  o  in  obey 

u  =  oo  in  boot  ti  =  i*  in  full 

f  =  iin  machine  y  =  i  in  holiest 

Sounds  of  the  Diphthongs. 

11.  Diphthongs  are  pronounced  by  the  rapid  successive  utter- 
ance of  the  elements  forming  them. 

ae  =  ay  in  aye  au  =  ou  in  house 

oe  =  o  in  world  eu  =  oy  in  hoy  (nearly) 

The  sound  of  eu  is  much  disputed;  many  scholars  contend  for  eu 
as  English  eWj  in  few. 

12.  All  diphthongs  are  long,  as:  foediis,  a  treaty. 

IS.  To  denote  that  two  successive  vowels  which  might  otherwise 
be  taken  for  a  diphthong,  are  to  be  pronounced  separately,  the 
Diaeresis  (")  is  placed  over  the  second  vowel,  as:  po6ta,  a  poet 

*  For  class-instruction  in  Latin  pronunciation  and  current  reading 
Ahn^Henn's  Latin  Beading  Charts  will  be  found  valuable. 


Sounds  of  the  Consonants. 

14.  The  Consonants  are  sounded  as  in  English,  with  the  fol- 
lowing exceptions: 

c  is  hard  and  sounds  in  all  situations  like  k,  as:  Cicero  = 
Kikero. 

ch  in  Latin  words  is  a  k;  in  Greek  words  a  k  with  the  subaddi- 
tion  of  h,  commonly  pronounced  as  ^  in  German.  The  latter  sound 
can  only  be  acquired  through  means  of  oral  instruction. 

g"  is  hard  throughout,  as  in  get^  give. 

j  has  the  sound  of  y  in  you. 

qu  =  kw  (nearly).  g"ii  and  su  before  another  vowel  when  both 
vowels  belong  to  the  same  syllable  =  giv,  sw,  as:  lingua,  lingwa; 
siietus,  swetus. 

rli  is  pronounced  like  r  simply. 

s  and  X  are  always  hard,  as  in  hiss,  axe. 

t  has  the  same  sound  as  t  in  English,  but  is  never  aspirated; 
th  is  pronounced  like  t  simply. 

V  =  t^^  in  we. 

Continental  Method. 

15,  In  the  pronunciation  of  the  vowels,  the  Con- 
tinental Method  is  identical  with  the  Roman.  As  to 
the  pronunciation  of  the  consonants,  in  which  it 
more  nearly  coincides  with  the  English  Method,  the 
following  letters  deserve  special  notice. 

t  before  i  (short  i)  with  another  vowel,  has  the  sharp  sound  of 
th  in  thin;  when  preceded  by  another  t,  s,  or  x,  or  when  i  is 
long  (i),  and  in  Greek  words,  t  retains  its  original  sound,  as; 
mix'  ti  0,  a  mixtui^e, 

c  before  e,  i,  y,  ae,  oe,  eu,  is  pronounced  like  ts  in  nets;  in 
every  other  position  it  is  hard  like  the  English  k.  ei  before  a  vowel 
has  nearly  the  same  sound  as  ti  in  the  same  position,  and  they  are 
sometimes  interchangeable. 

ch  =  k  with  the  subaddition  of  h,  has  a  hard  guttural  sound 
like  the  German  ift.  sch  is  pronounced  by  the  successive  utter- 
ance of  s  and  ch.  Neither  of  these  sounds  (ch  and  sch)  has  an 
equivalent  in  English,  and  they  must  be  learned  from  the  lips  of  a 
teacher. 


1 


—      5      — 

English  Method. 

16.  As  a  general  rule,  those  who  prefer  to  retain 
the  English  Method,  should  read  a  Latin  sentence 
just  as  if  the  words  were  English^  carefully  observing 
the  directions  which  follow,  especially  the  Rules  of 
Accent  (29-31,),  and  bearing  in  mind  that  there  are 
no  silent  letters. 

Sounds  of  the  Vowels  and  Diphthongs. 

17.  Vowels  have  their  long  English  sounds,  as  in  fate,  me, 
pine,  no,  tube,  type,  in  the  following  situations : 

at  the  end  of  a  word,  as:  dom'  i  ni,  masters;  cor'  nu,  a  horn; 
16'  8,    a  lion; 

before  another  vowel  or  diphthong,  as:  De'us,  God;  vi'a,  a 
tvay;   ja'  nii  a,    a  door; 

when  ending  an  accented  syllable;  as:  pS.'  ter,  a  father;  de'  dit, 
he  gave;  vi'viis,  living;  so' liis,  alone;  ly'ra,  a  lyre. 

Exceptions:  a  unaccented  has  the  sound  of  final  a  in  America; 
as:  men'  sa,  a  table.  In  tibi,  to  thee,  and  sil)i,  to  one's  self,  final 
i  has  its  short  sound. 

18.  Vowels  have  their  short  English  sounds,  as  in  fat,  met, 
pin,  not,  tub,  symbol,  when  followed  by  a  consonant  in  the  same 
syllable,  as:  mag'nus,  great;  fin' go,  I  fashion;  cor' pns,  a  body; 
mens,  the  mind. 

Exceptions:  post,  after,  is  pronounced  as  the  same  word  in 
English;  the  termination  es  like  the  English  word  ease,  and  the 
termination  os  like  osem  morose,  as:  a'  ves,  birds;  pu'  6  ros. 


19.  The  Diphthongs  ae  and  oe  are  pronounced  as  e  would  be 
in  the  same  place;  an  like  aw,  and  eu  like  ew,  as:  poe'na, 
punishment;  au'rum,  gold;  Euro' pa,  Europe;  Cae'sar,  Ccesar. 

Sounds  of  the  Consonants. 

20.  The  Consonants  are  pronounced,  in  general,  as  in  English. 
The  following,  however,  require  special  notice: 

c  and  g  are  soft  (like  s  and  j)  before  e,  i,  y,  ae,  and  oe,  and 

hard  in  other  situations,  as:  cen'tum,  a  hundred;  ci'vts,  a  citizen; 
ca'do,  1  fall;  ge'nu,  the  Jcnee;  gra'num,  a  grain. 


—      6      — 

ch  is  hard  like  fc,  as:  cho'riis,  a  choir. 

The  consonants  c,  s,  t,  immediately  preceded  by  the  accent,  and 
standing  before  i,  followed  by  another  vowel,  are  aspirated,  c,  s, 
and  t  taking  the  sound  of  sh,  x  that  of  ksh,  as:  so'  ci  us  (so'- 
she  us),  a  companion;  HelvO'tia  (Hel  ve' shi  a),  Switzerland. 
—  c  following  an  accented  syllable  has  also  the  same  sound  before 
eu  and  yo,  as:  ca  du' ce  us  (ca  du' she  us),  a  herald's  stajf,  — 
t  preceded  by  another  t,  s,  or  x,  has  its  hard  sound,  as:  o'  sti  um^ 
a  door;  mix'ti  6,   a  mixture. 

Syllables. 

21.  A  Syllable  is  one  or  more  sounds  pronounced 
by  a  single  impulse  of  the  voice;  it  consists  of  a 
vowel,  or  a  vowel  and  one  or  more  consonants. 

22,  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels  belongs  to  the  lat- 
ter, as:  si'tis,  thirst, 

23.  Of  several  consonants  coming  together  between  two  vowels, 
those  which  can  be  used  to  begin  a  Latin  word,  belong  to  the  next 
syllable,  as:  men'sa,  a  table;  tern' plum,  a  temple;  ca'stra,  a 
military  camp. 

24,  Compound  words  must  be  divided  into  the  words  which 
compose  them,  as:  post'  ea,  afterward.  But  if  the  former  part  has 
dropped  its  termination,  the  compound  word  is  to  be  divided  like  a 
simple  word,  as:  ta  met'  si  (contracted  from  ta'm6n  et'sl),  although. 

23.  The  last  syllable  of  the  word  is  called  the  ultima;  the  next 
to  the  last  the  penult;  the  one  before  the  penult,  the  antepenult. 

Quantity. 
The  following  are  general  Rules  of  Quantity; 

26.  A  syllable  is  long  by  nature  when  it  contains  a  long  vowel 
or  diphthong,  as:  soL  the  sun;  aurum,  gold;  by  position  when  a 
short  vowel  is  followed  by  two  or  more  consonants,  or  by  j,  x,  z; 
as:  aptus,  Jit;  collis,  hill;  saxum,  rock. 

27.  A  syllable  ending  in  a  short  vowel,  followed  by  a  mute  with 
1  or  r  is  common  (anceps),  that  is,  it  may  be  long  or  short  in  verse, 
as  in  tenebrae,  darkness;  in  prose  it  is  invariably  short. 

28.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel  is  short,  no  account  being 
taken  of  h,  as:  Deus,  God;  traho,  I  draw. 


—    1    — 

Accent. 
The  following  are  Rules  of  Accent: 

29,  Words  of  two  syllables  are  always  accented  on  the  first,  as: 
la'na,  wool 

30,  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the 
penult^  if  that  is  long,  as:  man  da'ta,  orders;  if  it  is  short,  then 
on  the  antepenult,  as:  a'  da  mas,  the  diamond. 

31,  When  -que,  -ne,  -ve  are  joined  to  a  word,  the  accent  falls 
on  the  syllable  next  before  these  words,  whether  it  be  short  or  long, 
as:  terra 'que,  and  the  earth. 


Pakt  Second. 

etymology. 

The  Parts  of  Speech. 

32.  The  classes  into  which  words  are  divided,  accord- 
ing to  their  uses,  are  called  Parts  of  Speech;  namely, 

the  Substantive,  which  is  the  name  of  a  person,  thing,  or  idea; 
as:  vl[r,  a  man;  domus,  a  house;  dies  irae,  the  day  of  wrath; 

the  Adjective,  which  is  used  to  qualify  a  noun,  as:  rar^  avis, 
a  rare  bird; 

the  Pronoun,  which  points  out  some  person  or  thing,  as:  tQ, 
thou;  hoc,  that; 

the  Verb,  which  is  used  to  assert  or  declare  something,  as:  diim 
spiro,  spero,  while  I  breathe^  I  hope; 

the  Adverb,  which  is  used  to  qualify  a  verb  or  an  adjective,  as: 
nota  bene,  mark  well; 

the  Preposition,  which  joins  a  word  to  some  other  word  to  show 
the  relation  between  them,  as:  lupus  in  fabula,  the  wolf  in  the  fable; 

the  Conjunction,  which  connects  sentences  together,  or  words 
used  in  the  same  sentence,  as:  ora  et  labora,  pray  and  work; 

the  Interjection,  which  is  an  exclamation,  expressive  of  feeling; 
as:  O  curas  hominum!  0  the  cares  of  men! 

33,  The  word  Noun  is  used  as  a  name  for  both  Nouns  and  Adjectives, 
the  former  being  distinguished  as  nouns  substantive,  or  Substantives, 
and  the  latter  as  nouns  adjective^  or  Adjectives. 


—     8     — 

34:.  Inflection  is  a  change  made  chiefly  in  the  end  J 
of  a  word,  to  show  its  grammatical  relation. 

85.  Nouns  J  Adjectives,  and  Pronouns  have  inflections  of 
Declension,  to  denote  number,  gender,  and  case.  Verbs  have 
inflections  of  Conjugation,  to  denote  voice,  mood,  tense,  number, 
and  person. 

30.  Those  parts  of  speech  which  are  not  inflected  are  called 
Particles;  these  are  Adverbs,  Prepositions,  Conjunctions,  and 
Interjections. 

Substantives. 

37.  The  Substantive  is  the  name  of  a  Person  or 
Thing  (Concrete),  or  of  a  Quality  (Abstract). 

38.  Concrete  Substantives  are  either: 

Proper,  i.  e.  peculiar  to  certain  persons  or  things,  as:  Homeriis, 
Homer;  Tiberis,  Tiber;  or 

Common  to  a  whole  class,  as:  arb5r,  a  tree;  or 

Collective,  denoting  in  the  singular  more  than  one,  as:  exercitus, 
an  army.  To  this  class  belong  also  the  names  of  Materials,  as: 
lignum,  wood. 

Gender. 

39.  There  are,  as  in  English,  three  Genders:  Mas- 
culine, Feminine,  and  Neuter.  The  gender  of  Latin 
nouns,  in  many  instances,  is  to  be  determined  by 
their  signification,  according  to  the  following 

General  Rules. 

40.  Masculine   are  the  names  of  males,  rivers,  winds,    and 
months,  as:  nauta,  a  sailor;  Rhenus,  the  Rhine;  notus,  the  south-     ': 
wind;  Aprilis,  April  - 

41.  Exceptions:  In  the  following  words,  Gender  is  determined 
by  the  termination,  and  not  by  the  distinction  of  sex: 

copiae,  troops  vigiliae,  watchmen 

custodiae,  guards  excubiae,  sentinels 

6p6rae,  laborers  mancipium,  a  slave 

auxnia,  auxiliary  troops,  j 


—     9     — 

42,  Feminine  are:  the  names  of  females,  countries,  towns, 
islands,  and  trees,  as:  virgo,  a  maid;  Aegyptus,  Egypt;  N^apolis, 
Naples;  Rhodus,  Rhodes;  pirus,  apear-ti^ee. 

43,  The  numerous  Exceptions  are  chiefly  names  of  towns, 
which,  as  to  gender,  follow  the  termination,  instead  of  the  signifi- 
cation^ as: 

Masculine:  ArgI,  Argos;  Neuter:  Saguntum,  Saguntum. 

44,  Neuter  are :  all  Indeclinable  Nouns,  terms  or  phrases  used 
as  nouns,  and  words  quoted  merely  as  such,  without  reference  to 
their  meaning,  as:  nihil,  nothing;  sclrg  tiium,  thy  knowledge;  hoc 
did,  this  (ivord)  diu, 

45,  Nouns  which  have  but  one  form  for  masculine  and  feminine 
are  said  to  be  of  Common  Gender: 

artifex,  an  artist  dux,  a  leader  testis,  a  witness 

cms,  a  citizen  heres,  an  heir  judex,  a  judge 

comSs,  a  companion      parens,  a  parent       patruSlis,  a  cousin 
custos,  a  keeper  juvenis  a  youth  vates,  a  prophet, 

46,  Names  of  Persons  with  different  terminations  to  distinguish 
masculines  and  feminines,  are  called  substantiva  niobilia;  as: 

a  protector 

a  master,  mistress 

a  conqueror 

a  teacher 

a  king,  queen. 

47,  Names  of  Animals  deserve  special  notice.  With  some  of 
them  gender  is  expressed  by  difference  of  termination,  as: 

leo,  a  lion  leaena,  a  lioness 

cervus,  a  stag  cerva,  a  hind; 

others  are  of  the  common  gender,  as: 

hic  bos,  this  ox  haec  bos,  this  cow; 

others  have  for  both  sexes  one  grammatical  gender;  these  are  called 
epicoena.  Thus  lepus,  a  hare,  is  always  masculine,  and  vulpes, 
fox,  always  feminine.  If  necessary,  the  sexes  are  distinguished  by 
mas,  male,  and  femina,  female,  as: 

vulpes  mas,  a  male  fox    lepiis  femina,  a  female  hare. 

48,  The  gender  of  Substantives  not  determined  by  their  sig- 
nification, is  to  be  ascertained  by  their  termination,  according  to 
the  Special  Rules  of  Gender  under  the  several  declensions.  Adjec- 
tives distinguish  gender  by  different  forms  in  the  same  words, 
and  agree  in  gender  with  their  Substantives, 


patron us 

patrona 

dominus 

domina 

victor 

victrix 

magister 

magistra 

rex 

reglna 

—     10     ~ 

Number  and  Case. 

49.  The  Latin,  like  the  Enghsh,  has  two  Numbers; 
the  Singular  Number  denotes  one,  the  Plural,  more 
than  one.  There  are  six  Cases  in  Latin:  the  Nomina- 
tive, Genitive,  Dative,  Accusative,  Vocative,  and  Ablative. 

The  Nominative  is  the  case  of  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  and 
answers  the  question  Who?  or  What? 

The  Genitive  may  be  translated  by  the  English  Possessive  or 
with  the  preposition  of;  it  answers  the  question  Whose?  or  Whereof? 

The  Dative  may  usually  be  translated  by  the  preposition  to  or 
for  J  answering  the  question  To  whom?  or  For  whom?  Sometimes 
it  corresponds  to  the  English  Objective. 

The  Accusative  nearly  corresponds  to  the  English  Objective; 
it  answers  the  question  Wliom?  or  What? 

The  Vocative  is  the  case  of  direct  address. 

The  Ablative  may  usually  be  translated  by  the  prepositions 
from,  by,  with;  it  answers  the  questions  Where?  Whence?  or 
Wherewith? 

50.  According  to  their  relations,  the  cases  are  divided  into 
casus  recti.  Independent  Cases,  and  casus  obliqui,  Dependent 
Cases.  Nominative  and  Vocative  are  casus  recti;  Genitive, 
Dative,  Accusative,  and  Ablative,  casus  obllqul. 

Declensions. 

51.  The  formation  of  the  several  cases  is  called 
Declension.  There  are  five  Declensions  in  Latin,  dis- 
tinguished by  the  endings  of  the  Genitive  Singular. 

First  Declension.     Genitive  Singular  ae 
Second  Declension.      ^*  ''        i 

Third  Declension.         ^^  **        is 

Fourth.  Declension.       ^^  *^         us 

Fifth  Declension.  ^^  *^        ei 

52.  The  Stem  is  that  part  of  the  word  which  remains  after  tak- 
ing away  the  Inflections;  its  last  letter  is  called  the  Characteristic. 

53.  The  stem  may  be  found  from  the  Genitive  Plural,  in  the 
First,  Second  and  Fifth  Declensions  by  cutting  off  rum;  in  the 
Third  and  Fourth  by  cutting  off  um. 


—   11   — 


54.  Case-endings  of  the  Five  Declensions.* 


FlEST  Decixension. 

Second  Declension. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular.               Plural. 

Norn 

a  (e,  as,  es)  ae 

us. 

er,  ir,  iir,  fim     i,    Neut. 

a 

Gen. 

ae  (es) 

arum 

i 

orum 

Dat. 

ae 

IS  (abus) 

o 

IS 

Ace. 

am  (en) 

as 

tim 

els,  Neut. 

a 

Voc. 

a  (a,  e) 

ae 

e,  Sr,  Ir,  to,  iim       i,     Neut. 

a 

Abl. 

a(e) 

IS  (abus) 

o 

Is 

Third  Declension. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom 

a,  6, 5,  §, 

y,  c,  1,  n,  r,  s,  t, 

X 

es,    Neut.  a  (ia) 

Gen. 

is 

lim  (ium) 

Dat. 

1 

ibus 

Ace. 

em  (im) 

Neut.  like  Nom. 

es,    Neut.  a  (ta) 

Voe. 

like  Nom. 

es,    Neut.  a  (ia) 

Abl. 

e(i) 

ibiis 

Fourth  Declension. 

Fifth  Declension. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular.               JPlural. 

Nom 

us,  u 

us,  Neut.  ua 

es                        es 

Gen. 

us 

uum 

ei,  6i                  ertim 

Dat. 

ill,  u 

ibus  (ubus) 

ei,  6i                 ebtis 

Ace. 

um,  u 

us,  Neut.  ua 

gm                     5s 

Voe. 

us,  u 

us,  Neut.  ua 

es                       6s 

Abl. 

a 

ibus  (ubus) 

e                        ebtls 

^^5.  The  following  are  General  Riiles  applying  to  all 
Declensions: 

1.  In  both  numbers  the  Vocative  is  the  same  as  the  Nominative, 
except  in  the  singular  of  nouns  in  us  of  the  Second  Declension. 

2.  Neuters  have  the  Nominative,   Accusative,  and  Vocative  alike 
in  both  numbers,  and  these  cases,  in  the  plural,  always  end  in  a. 

3.  The  Dative  and  Ablative  plural  are  alwaya  alike. 


*  This  Synopsis  of  Case-endings  is  embodied  in  Ahn-Henn's  Latin 
Paradigm  Charts,  printed  in  large  type  and  intended  for  permanent  display 
on  the  wall. 


—     12     — 

First  Declension. 

56.  Latin  nouns  which  have  ae  in  the  Genitive 
Singular,  are  of  the  First  Declension.     They  have  the 

Nominative  like  the  stem^  ending  in  a. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  men'  sS,  a  table  men'  sae,   tables 

Gen.  men' sae,  of  a  table  men  sa' riiin,  of  tables 

Dat.    men'  sae,    to  a  table  men'  sis,   to  tables 

Ace.    men'  sam,  a  table  men'  sas,   tables 

Voc.    men'  s^,    0  table  men'  sae,    0  tables 

Abl.     men'  sa,  with  a  table  men'  sis,   with  tables 

57.  The  Latin  has  no  Article;  therefore  mensa  may  be  ren- 
dered a  table,  or  the  tabley  or  table,  according  to  the  connection. 

Examples  for  Practice: 
Idina,  -ae,  the  moon  ran3<,  ~ae,   a  frog 

Stella,  -ae,  a  star  terra,  -ae,  the  earth,  land 

via,  -ae,  a  way,  road  alauda,  -ae,  a  lark 

insula,  -ae,  an  island  rosa,  -ae,  a  rose 

nauta,  -ae,  a  sailor  viola,  -ae,  a  violet     [is—is]  * 

^8,  In  composition  with  pater,  mater,  fllius,  filia,  the  word 
familia  has  in  the  Grenitive  Singular  familias,  e.  g.,  paterfamilias,  the 
father  of  a  family. 

59.  The  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural  of  dgS.,  a  goddess,  and  filiS, 
a  daughter,  end  in  abus,  viz.:  deabus,  filiabus,  to  distinguish  them 
from  the  same  cases  of  deus,  a  god,  and  fllius,  a  son. 

Greek  Nouns. 

60.  To  the  First  Declension  belong  also  some  Greek  Nouns, 
ending  in  e,  as,  es.  The  declension  of  these  nouns  in  the  plural 
differs  in  no  respect  from  that  of  Latin  nouns  of  the  First  Declension. 

Singular. 

Norn.  6  pi'  to  me,  epitome  bo'  re  as,  north-wind    py  ri'  tes,  flint 

Gen.  6  pi'  to  mes  bo'  re  ae  py  n'  tae 

Dat.  e  pi'  to  mae  bo'  re  ae  py  rl'  tae 

Ace.  g  pi'  to  men  bo'  re  am  (an)  py  rl'  ten 

Voc.  6  pi' to  me  bo' re  a  py  rl' te 

Abl.  6  pi'  to  me  bo'  r6  a  py  rl'  te 

*  These  figures  refer  to  the  ;E3ceycises  fox  translation  in  the  First^ 
Becond  and  Third  Zatin  Books. 


i 


—     13     — 

Examples  for  Practice: 
grammaiice,  -es,  grammar         Messlas,  -ae,  the  Messiah 
aloe,  -es,  the  aloe  Lucas,  -ae,  Luke 

muslce,  -es,  music  cometes,  -ae,  a  comet 

Many  of  them  have  also  regular  Latin  forms,  as:  planetes  and 
planeta,  a  planet  [loi,  102.] 

Rule  of  Gender. 

61.  Nouns  of  the  First  Declension  ending  in  a  and 

e  are  feminine;  those  in  as  and  es  are  mascuhne. 

Exceptions. 
62o  Nearly  all  the  exceptions  are  such  as  are  masculine  from 
their  signification,  according  to  the  General  Rule  above  mentioned 
{55,  1.),  as:  nauta,  a  sailor;  also  Hadria,  the  Adi^iatic. 

Second  Declension. 
63.  Latin  nouns  whose  genitive  is  i,   are  of  the 
Second  Declension.    In  the  nominative  they  end  in  us, 
er,  ir,  ur,  um.   Those  ending  in  um  are  neuter,  the 
rest  are  masculine. 

Singular. 


Norn. 

flu'  VI  fls,  a  river 

tec'  tiim,  a  roof 

Gen. 

flu'  VI 1,   of  a  river 

tec'  ti,  of  a  roof 

Dat. 

flu'  VI  0,   to  a  river 

tec'  to,  to  a  roof 

Ace. 

flu'  vi  um,   a  river 

tec'  tiim,   a  roof 

Voc. 

flu'  VI  e,  0  river 

tec'  turn,  0  roof 

Abl. 

flu'  vi  0,  with  a  river 

tec'  to,   with  a  roof 

Plural. 

Norn. 

flu'  VI 1,   rivers 

tec'  ta,   roofs 

Gen. 

flu  VI  0'  rum,  of  rivers 

tec  to'  rum,   of  roofs 

Dat. 

flu'  VI  IS,   to  rivers 

tec'  tis,  to  roofs 

Ace. 

flu'  VI  OS,  rivers 

tec'  ta,   roofs 

Voc. 

flu'  vi  T,  0  rivers 

tec' ta,  0  roofs 

Abl. 

flu'  vi  is,  with  rivers 

tec'  tis,   with  roofs 

In  Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension  the  stem  ends  in  d-,  as: 

fliivio-,  tecto-,  piiero-,  agro-. 

In  the  Genitive  Singular  11,  from  Substantives  in  iiis,  ium,  is  often 
contracted  into  1,  the  accent  remaining  unchanged,  as: 

Appius,  Gen,  AppI  consilium,  Gen.  consi'II 


—     14    — 

Examples  for  Practice: 

dSminus,  -i,  a  master^  lord  caelum,  -i,  the  heaven,  sky 

mundiis,  -i,  the  world  aumm,  -i,  gold 

anniis,  -i,  a  year  ferrftm,  -i,  iron 

morbus,  ~i,  a  disease  metallum,  -T,  a  metal 

animus,  -i,  the  mind,  soul  initium,  -i,  a  beginning 
discipulus,  -1,  a  scholar,  pupil    signuin,  -i,  a  sign 

ventus, -i,  the  wind  insectuni, -i,  an  insect 

gquus,  -i,  a  horse  pratum,  -i,  a  meadow 

ociilus,  -1,  an  eye  mendacium,  -i,  a  lie 

hortus,  -T,  a  garden  aedificium,  -i,  a  building 

[19.  20] 

64,  Words  of  the  Second  Declension,  ending  in  the  nominative 
in  er  (ir,  tir)  have  dropped  the  original  ending  us  of  the  nomi- 
native. In  most  of  them  the  e  is  only  inserted  in  the  Nominative 
and  Vocative,  and  disappears  in  the  other  cases. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

a'  ger,  a  field 

a'  gri,  fields 

Gen. 

a'  gri,   of  a  field 

a  gro'  riim,   of  fields 

Dat. 

a'  gro,   to  a  field 

a'  gris,   to  fields 

Ace. 

a'  grum,   a  field 

a'  gros,  fields 

Voc. 

a' ger,    0  field 

a' gri,    0  fields 

Abl. 

a'  gro,   with  a  field 

a'  gris,  with  fields 

Examples  for  Practice: 
magister,  -ri,  a  teacher,  master    culter,  ~ri,  a  Tcnife 
ITber,  -ri,  a  book  aper,  -ri,   a  wild  boar 

arbiter,  -ri,  a  judge  faber,  -ri,  a  smith 

auster,  -ri^  the  south  wind         minister,  -ri,  a  servant 
cancer,  -ri,  a  crab  caper,  -ri,  a  goat 

65.    In  other  words  ending  in    er,  the   e  of   the  Nominative 
belongs  to  the  stem  and  is  retained  through  all  the  cases,  as: 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

pu'  er,   a  boy 

pu'  e  ri,  boys 

Gen. 

pu'  e  ri,   of  a  boy 

pu  6  ro'  rQm,   of  boys 

Dat. 

pu'  e  ro,  to  a  boy 

pu'  e  ris,   to  boys 

Ace. 

pu'  6  rttm,   a  boy 

pu'  S  r5s,    boys 

Voc. 

pu'  er,  0  boy 

pu'  6  ri,    0  boys 

Ab^ 

pu'  6  rSj  ivith  a  boy 

pu'  6  ris,  with  boya 

—     16    — 

To  this  class  belong: 

Substantives:  adulter,-!,  an  adulterer    gener, -i,  a  son-in-law 

puer,  -i,  a  boy  socSr,  -i,  a  father-in-law 

vesper,  -i,  evening  Liber,  -i,  Bacchus 

llberi,  -orum,  children 

Adjectives:       asper,  aspera,  asperum,   rough 
lacer,  lacera,  lacerum,   torn 
miser,  misera,  miserum,  ivretched 
prosper,  prospera,  prosperum,  prosperous 
tener,  teiiera,  tenerum,   tender 
dexter,  dext(e)ra,  dext(e)rum,  right. 

Words  ending  in  fer  and  ger  from  f  ero,  /  bear,  and  g^ro,  I  carry: 

Lucifer,  -i,  light-bringer 

armiger,  -i,  an  armor-bearer 

frugifer,  frugifera,  frugiferum,  fruit-bearing 

laniffer,  laiiiffera,  lanigerfim,  wool-bearing. 

[23,  24,] 

66.  The  only  words  in  ir  and  ur  are:  vir,  -T,  a  man,  with  its 
compounds,  as:  l6vir,  -i,  a  brother-in-law,  and  the  masculine  of 
the  adjective  satur,  -a,  -um,  sated. 

67.  Proper  Nouns  in  ius  omit  e  in  the  Vocative,  as:  Anto- 
nius,  Anthony,  Antoni;  likewise  fllius,  a  son,  and  genius,  a 
guardian  angel,  make  fili  and  geni.  The  possessive  meiis,  my, 
(but  not  mea,  meum)  has  mi,  and  Deus,  God,  has  Deus.  In 
the  plural  Nominative  and  Vocative,  deus  has  dii  or  di;  Genitive: 
deoruui;  Dative  and  Ablative:  dlis,  dis. 

68.  In  the  Genitive  plural  of  the  Second  Declension  um  is 
often  found  for  orum,  especially  in  certain  words  denoting  money, 
measure,  or  weight,  as:  nummum  for  nummorum,  of  moneys; 
also  in  a  few  other  words,  as:  deiim  for  deorum,  llberum  for 
llberorum. 

69.  A  few  Greek  Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension  end  in 
5s,  6n,  instead  of  us,  fim.  Greek  Nouns  ending  in  eiis  (like 
Orpheus)  are  thus  declined: 

Norn.   Or'pheus  Dat   Or' phe  o  Voc.    Or' pheii 

Gen.     Or'  phe  i  Ace.    Or'  phe  um         Abl.    Or'  phe  o 

[101.  102.] 


—     16 


in   um 


Rule  of  Gender, 

70.  Nouns  in  us,  er,  ir  are   masculine; 

neuter. 

Exceptions. 

71.  Of  nouns  ending  in  us  the  names  of  towns,  islands,  and 
trees  are  Feminine,  as:  Corinthus,  Corinth;  Sam  lis,  Samos;  populus, 
a  poplar  J  etc.  {42) ;  also : 

alviis,  -T,  the  belly  humus,  -i,  soil 

colus,  -i,  a  distaff  vanniis,  i,  a  van  I 

and  many  Greek  words  of  frequent  occurrence,  as:  ■ 

diphthongus,  -T,  a  diphthong       methodus,  -i,    a  method 
paragraphiis,  -i,  a  paragraph     dialectus,  -i,  a  dialect 

The  following  in  us  are  Neuter: 
pelagus,  -1,  the  sea;  vulgus,  -i,  the  rabble;  virus,  -I,  poison; 

their  accusative,  as  of  all  neuters,  is  the  same  as  the  nominative, 
but  they  have  no  plural.  [^7.  ^s.] 

Adjectives  in  us,   a,  um. 

72.  Adjectives  in  us,  a,  um  are  declined  in  the 
masculine  and  neuter  like  substantives  of  the  Second 
Declension,  and  in  the  feminine  like  substantives  of 
the  First. 

bona,   boniim. 
Singular. 

/. 
bo'  na 
bo'  nae 
bo'  nae 
bo'  nam 
bo'  na 
bo'  na 

Plural. 
bo'  nae 
bo  na'  rum 

b6'  nis 
bo'  nas 
bo'  nae 
bo'  nis 


bonus, 


good 


7n. 

Nom. 

bo'  nus 

Gen. 

bo'ni 

Dat. 

bo'  no 

Ace. 

bo'  niim 

Voc. 

bo'ne 

Abl. 

bo' no 

Nom. 

bo'ni 

Gen. 

bo  no'  rum 

Dat. 

bo'  nis 

Ace. 

bo'  nos 

Voc. 

bo'ni 

Abl. 

bo'  nis 

n. 

bo' 

niim 

bo' 

ni 

bo' 

no 

bo' 

niim 

bo' 

niim 

bo' 

no 

bo' 

'  na 

bo 

no'  rum 

bo' 

nis 

bo' 

na 

bo' 

na 

bo' 

nis 

~    17    — 

Examples  for  Practice: 

sedulQs,  -a,  -um,  busy  modestiis,  -a,  -um,  modest 

timidus,  -a,  -um,  timid  beattis,  -a,  -um,  happy^  hleaaed 

rotundiis,  -a,  -vLui^round  albus,  -a,  -um,  white 

odorus,  -a,  -um,  fragrant  fulvus,  -a,  -tim,  yellow 

clams,  -a,  -um,   bright^  clear  multus,  -a,  -um,  much^  7nany 

iucidus,  -S-,  -um,  shining  magnus,  -a,-um,  great^  large 

arduus,-a,-um,  arduous^  steep  parvus,  -a,  -um,  little^  small 

umbrosus,  -a,  -um,  shady  htimanus,  -a,    um,  human 

garrulus,  -a,  -um,  garrulous  verus,  -a,  -um,  true 

®  1^1,  22.] 

73,    Substantives   and  Adjectives  of  the   First  and  Second 
Declensions  are  combined  in  the  following  manner: 

Singular. 

Norn,  nau'ta  lae'tiis,   a  merry  sailor 

Gen.  nau'tae  lae'ti,   of  a  merry  sailor 

Dat.  nau'tae  lae'to,  to  a  merry  sailor 

Ace.  nau'tam  lae'tiim,  a  merry  sailor 

Voc.  nau'ta  lae'te,   0  merry  sailor 

Abl.  nau'ta  lae'to,    with  a  merry  sailor 

Plural. 

Norn,  nau'tae  lae'ti,    merry  sailors 

Gen.  nauta'rum  laeto'rum,   of  merry  sailors 

Dat  nau'tis  lae'tTs,    to  merry  sailors 

Ace.  nau'tas  lae'tos,  merry  sailora 

Voc.  nau'tae  lae'ti,   0  merry  sailors 

Abl.  nau'tis  lae'tis,   with  merry  sailors 

Singular. 

Nonn.  coe'na  mo'dica,   a  moderate  dinner 

Gen.  coe'nae  mo'dicae,   of  a  moderate  dinner 

Dat.  coe'nae  mo'dicae,   to  a  moderate  dinner 

Ace.  coe'nam  mo'dicam,   a  moderate  dinner 

Voc.  coe'na  mo'dica,     0  moderate  dinner 

Abl.  coe'na  mo'dica,  with  a  moderate  dinner 

Plural. 

Norn,  coe'nae  mo'dicae,  moderate  dinners 

Gen.  coena'rum  modica'rum,    of  moderate  dinners 

Dat.  coe'nis  mo'dicis,  to  moderate  dinners 

Ace.  coe'nas  mo'dicas,   moderate  dinners 

Voc.  coe'nae  mo'dicae,  0  moderate  dinners 

Abl.  coe'nis  mo'dicis,    with  moderate  dinners 


—     18     — 

Singular. 

Norn,  tec'tfim  al'tum,  a  high  roof 

Gen.  tec'ti  al'ti,  of  a  high  roof 

Dat  tec 'to  al'to,   to  a  high  roof 

Ace.  tec'tflm  al'tum,   a  high  roof 

Voc.  tec 'turn  al'ttim,    0  high  roof 

Abl.  tec 'to  al'to,    with  a  high  roof 

Plural. 

Norn,  tec'ta  al'ta,   high  roofs 

Gen.  tecto'rum  alto'rum,  of  high  roofs 

Dat.  tec 'tis  al'tis,   to  high  roofs 

Ace.  tec'ta  al'ta,    Jiigh  roofs 

Voc.  tec'ta  al'ta,    0  high  roofs 

Abi.  tec 'tis  al'tis,   with  high  roofs 

Examples  for  Practice, 
poeta  clariis,  a  famous  poet       fluviiis  lattis,  a  broad  river 
formica  seduia,  the  busy  ant       colluni  longum,  a  long  neck. 


Adjectives 

in  6r,  ; 

a,  uni. 

74.  Adjectives  in  er, 

&,  um, 

are  declined  in  the 

masculine  and  neuter  like  substantives  of  the  Second 

Declension,  and  in  the  feminine, 

like  substantives  of 

the  First. 

niger,    nigra,    nigrum, 

black 

Singular. 

m. 

/ 

n. 

Nonn.     ni'  g6r 

ni'  gra 

nV  griim 

Gen.      ni'  gri 

ni'  grae 

ni'  gri 

Dat.       ni'  gro 

ni'  grae 

ni'  gro 

Ace.      ni'  griiin 

ni'  gram 

ni'  griim 

Voc.      ni'  ger 

ni'  gra 

ni'  griim 

Abl.       ni'  gro 

ni'  gra 
Plural. 

ni'  gro 

Norn,     ni'  gri 

ill'  grae 

ni'  gra 

Gen.      ni  gro'  riiiii 

ni  gra'  rum 

ni  gro'  rtim 

Dat.       ni'  gris 

ni'  gris 

ni'  gris 

Ace.       ni'  gros 

ni'  gras 

ni'  grS, 

Voc.      ni'  gri 

ni'  grae 

ni'  gra 

Abl.       ni'  gris 

ni'  gris 

ni'  gris 

19 


m. 

Norn. 

1!'  ber 

li 

Gen. 

IV  be  ri 

11' 

Dat. 

IT'  be  ro 

ir 

Ace. 

11'  be  rum 

li' 

Voc. 

ir  ber 

li' 

Abl. 

IV  be  ro 

li' 

Norn. 

11'  be  ri 

ir 

Gen. 

11  be  ro'  rum 

li 

Dat. 

11'  b6  ris 

li' 

Ace. 

li'  be  ros 

li' 

Voc. 

11'  b6  ri 

li' 

Abl. 

\V  be  ris 

li' 

libgr,   libera,    liberum,    free 
Singular. 

/.  n. 

be  ra  li'  be  rum 

be  rae  li'  be  ri 

be  rae  li'  be  ro 

be  ram  li'  be  rum 

be  ra  li'  be  rum 

be  ra  li'  be  ro 
Plural. 

be  rae  li'  be  ra 

li  be  ra'  riim  li  be  ro'  rum 

be  ris  li'  be  ris 

be  ras  li'  be  ra 

be  rae  li'  be  ra 

be  ris  li'  bS  ris 

75.  Most  adjectives  in   €r,  a,  um  drop  the  S  before  the  r 
like  niger.    Examples  are: 

aeger,  aegrS.,  aegriim,  siclc 

ereber,  crebra,  erebrum,  frequent 

rubSr,  rubra,  rubrum,  red 

pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchrum,  beautiful^  fine 

sinister,  Sinistra,  sinistrtim,  left 

pTger,  pigra,  pigrum,  lazy 

integer,  Integra,  integrum,  whole,  entire 

76.  A  few  adjectives  in  er,  a,  tim   retain  the  e  throughout, 
like  liber.     (See  65.)  125.  26,] 

77.  These  nine  adjectives  have  the  genitive  sin- 
gular in  ius,  and  the  dative  in  i  in  all  the  genders: 

Nominative, 
alius,  -a,  -ud,  another 
nullus,  -a,  -um,  no,  not  any,  no  one 
solus,  -a,  -um,  alone 
totus,  -a,  -um,  ivhole 
uUus,  -a,  -um,  any 
iinus,  -a,  -um,  one 
alter,  -a,  -um,  the  other  (of  two) 
titer,  -ra,  -rum,  ivhich  (of  two) 
neuter,  -ra,  -rum,  neither 
The  plural  is  regular  like  that  of  bonus. 


Grenitive. 

Dative. 

aliiis 

alii 

nullius 

nulli 

solius 

soil 

totius 

toti 

ullius 

ulli 

unius 

uni 

alteriiis 

altgri 

utriils 

utri 

neutrius 

neutri 

[71.  72.] 

—     20     — 

Third  Declensioiio 

78.  Nouns  whose  genitive  ends  in  is,  are  of  the 
Third  Declension.     Their  nominative  ends  in 

a,  e,  i,  6,  y,  c,  1,  n,  r,  s,  t,  and  x. 

79.  In  the  Third  Declension,  the  stem  ends  either  in  i  (Vowel- 
stem)  or  in  a  consonant  (Consonant-stem).  There  are  only  two 
u-stems,  SLi-s,  a  swine,  and  grCi-s,  a  crane.  The  stem  can  be  found 
by  cutting  off  uni  from  the  Genitive  Plural: 

avis,  a  bird        Gen.  Plur.  avium         Stem  avi- 

lapis,  a  stone  ''         lapidum         "    lapid- 

80.  All  nouns  having  the  same  number  of  syllables  in  the 
Nominative  and  Genitive  (Parisyllabic)  have  Vowel-stems  in  i. 
They  end  in  the  Nominative  in  is,  es,  e,  al,  ar,  those  in  al  and 
ar  having  lost  a  final  e. 

Norn,  navis  Gen.  iiavi-s 
'^  nubes  "  nubi-s 
^^       mare         ^'    mari-s 


Norn,  animal  (e)    Gen.  animali-s 
'^     calcar(e)        ^'    calcari-s 


81.  All  nouns  increasing  in  the  Genitive  (Imparisyllabic) 
have  Consonant-stems: 

Nom.    lapis       Gen.  lapid-is  |  Norn,  homo  Gen.    hoinin-is 

Formation  of  the  Genitive. 

82.  The  Entire  Declension  of  any  Substantive  of  the 
Third  Declension  may  be  readily  formed  by  sub- 
stituting for  the  Grenitive-ending  is,  the  proper  end- 
ings of  the  other  cases.  Hence  to  decline  a  word 
correctly,  in  this  Declension,  we  need  to  know  how 
its  Genitive  is  formed. 

But  we  must  bear  in  mind  that  Neuters  always  form  the  Accusa- 
tive and  Vocative  cases  in  both  numbers  like  the  Nominative,  and  the 
Nominative  Plural  in  a.     This  is  a  rule  of  highest  importance. 

83.  Nouns  in  a  are  Neuters  of  Greek  origin  and  change  ^  into 
atis  to  form  the  genitive,  as:  poSma,  poemS-tis. 


—    21     — 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


Singularo 

p6  6'  ma,   a  poem 
po  e'  ma  tis,    of  a  poem 
p6  6'  ma  ti,   to  a  poem 
p6  6'  ma,  a  poem 
p6  6'  ma,  0  poem 


Plural. 
p6  e'  ma  ta,  poems 
p6  6'  ma  turn,   of  poems 
p6  e  ma'  ti  bus,   to  poems 
po  6'  ma  ta,  poems 
p6  6'  ma  ta,  0  poems 


p6  6'  ma  te,  with  a  poem    p6  e  ma'  ti  bus,   with  poems 
Examples  for  Practice: 


aroma,  -tis,  a  spice  aenigma,  -tis,  a  riddle 

[63.  66,'] 

84,   Nouns  in  e  change  e  into   is    to  form  the  genitive,  as: 
rete,  retis.    They  are  Neuter. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

rg'  te,    a  net 

re'  ti  a,   nets 

Geii. 

rg'  tis,   of  a  net 

re'  ti  um,    of  nets 

Dat. 

re'  ti,   to  a  net 

rS'  ti  bus,   to  nets 

Ace. 

re'  te,   a  net 

re'  ti  a,   nets 

Voc. 

re'  tS,    0  net 

re'  ti  a;  0  nets 

Abl. 

re'  ti,   with  a  net 

r6'  ti  bGs,   with  nets 

Examples  for  Practice: 
mare,  -is,  the  sea,  ocean  cubile,  -is,  a  lair 

altare,  -is,  an  altar  conclave,  -is,  a  room 


[53.  54:] 


85,    Certam  nouns  ending  in  0  form  their  genitive  by  changing 
5  into  inis,  as:  homo,  hominis. 


Singular. 

Nom.  ho'  mo,    man 

Gen.  ho'  mi  nis,   of  man 

Dat.  ho'  mi  ni,   to  man 

Ace.  ho'  mi  nem,   man 

Voc.  ho'  mo,  0  man 

Abl.  ho' mine,    with  man 

Thus  we  have: 
homO,  -inis,  man 
nemO,  -inis,  nobody 

and  nearly  all  the  words  in  d.5  and  go,  as: 
or  do,  -inis,  order  imagO,  -inis,  an  image 

consuetud6,-inis,  habit  pulchritudO,  -inis,  beauty. 

86,    Mark:  ckrOj  flesh;  carnis,  gen.  plur.:  carnium. 


Plural, 
ho'  mi  nes,   menj  people 
ho'  mi  niini,   of  men 
ho  mi'  ni  bus,   to  men 
ho'  mi  nes,   men 
ho'  mi  nes,  0  men 
ho  mi'  ni  bus,  with  men 

turbo,  -inis,   a  ivhirlwind 
Apollo,  -inis,  Apollo 


—     22    — 


$7,    All  other  words  ending  in  8  change  S  into  5nis  to  form 
the  genitive,  as:  160,  leonis. 


Singular. 
Norn.    16'  6,  a  lion 
Gen.      16  0'  nis,    of  a  lion 
Dat.      le  0'  ni,   to  a  lion 
Ace.      le  o'  nem,   a  lion 
Voc.      le'  0,    0  lion 
Abl.       le  o'  ne,   with  a  lion 

Such   are: 
pav8,  -onis,  a  peacocJc 
pulmo,  -onis,  a  lung 
also  a  few  in  dO  and  g-O,  namely: 
harpagO,  -onis,  a  grapple-Jiook    praedO,  -onis,  a  robber 
comedo,  -onis,  a  glutton  ligO,  -onis,  a  mattock 

.      ^  [29-32.] 

Peculiar:  AniO,  -enis,  the  river  Anio. 

88,  Nouns  in  i  and  y  (Neuters  of  Greek  origin)  take  is,  yis 
in  the  genitive,  as:  sinapi,  -is,  mustard;  misy,  -yis,  copperas. 

89,  Neuters  in  c:  only  alSc,  alScis,  pickle;  lac,  lactis,  milk. 

90,  Nouns  in  1  add  is  to  the  nominative  to  form  the  genitive: 


Plural. 

16  o'  nes,   lions 

16  o'  num,   of  lions 

16  o'  ni  "biis,  to  lions 

16  o'  nes,    lions 

16  0'  nes,  0  lions 

16  o'  ni  "bus,   with  lions 

aquilO,  -onis,  the  north  wind 
pOtiO,  -onis,  a  drink(ing) 


Singular. 

Norn,  con'  sul,   a  consul 

Gen.  con'  su  lis,  of  a  consul 

Dat.  con'  su  li,  to  a  consul 

Ace.  con'  su  lem,  a  consul 

Voc.  con'  sul,  0  consul 

Abl.  con'  su  le,  with  a  consul 


sol,  sOlis,  the  sun 
sal,  salis,  salt 


Plural, 
con'  su  les,   the  consuls 
con'  su  lum,   of  the  consuls 
con  su'  li  bus,  to  the  consuls 
con'  sules,  the  consuls 
con'  su  les,  0  consuls 
con  su'  li  bus,  with  the  consuls 
Examples  for  Practice: 

exsul,   exsulis,  an  exile 
piigil,  pugilis,  a  pugilist 


91,    Nouns  in  al  change  ai  to  alis  to  form  the  genitive,  as: 
animS.1,  animalis.    They  are  Neuter. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


Singular, 
a'  ni  mal,   an  animal 
a  ni  ma'  lis,  of  an  animal 
a  ni  ma'  li,   to  an  animal 
a'  m  mal,  an  animal 
a'  ni  mal,  0  animal 


Plural, 
a  ni  ma'  li  a,   animals 
a  ni  ma'  li  um,   of  animals 
a  ni  ma'  li  bus,   to  animals 
a  ni  ma'  li  a,   animals 
a  ni  ma'  li  3»,  0  animals 


a  ni  ma'  li,  with  an  animal  a  ni  ma'  U  bQs,   with  animals 


—     23     — 

Examples  for  Practice: 
vectig&l,  -alls,  a  tax  tribunal,  -alis,  a  tribunal 

92.  m61,  honey  J  has  mellis,  and  the  plural  mellS;  fel,  gall^  has 
fellis,  but  is  without  a  plural;  both  are  Neuter.  [53.  s4.] 

93.  Nouns  in  en  form  their  genitive  by  changing  en  into 
inis,  as:  carmen,  carminis;  Nouns  in  en,  by  adding  is,  as:  r6n, 
renis.    All  in  men  are  Neuter. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  car'  men,   a  poem  car'  mi  na,  poems 

Gen.  car' mi  nis,   of  a  poem  car' mi  num,   of  poems 

Dat.  car'  mi  ni,   to  a  poem  car  mi'  ni  bus,   to  poems 

Ace.  car'  men,   a  poem  car'  mi  na,  poems 

Voc.  car'  men,  0  poem  car'  mi  na,    0  poems 

Abl.  car'  mi  ne,  with  a  poem  car  mi'  ni  btls,  with  poems 

Examples  fbr  Practice: 
nomen,  -mis,  a  name  (rSn,  rSnis)  usually  pi.:  renes, 

lumen,  -inis,  light  renilni,  the  kidneys 

omen,  -inis,  an  omen  lien,   lienis,  spleen 

lulmen,  -inis,  a  thunder-bolt      spl6n,  splenis,  spleen 
gramen,  -inis,  grass  pecten,  -inis,  a  comb    [59.  60.] 

94.  As  a  rule,  nouns  in  r,  viz.  3<r,  er,  6r,  iir,  add  is  to  form 
the  genitive,  subject,  however,  to  the  following  variations: 

Those  in  ar  form  the  Genitive  by  changing  ar  into  aris,  as: 
calcS-r,  calcaris.    They  are  Neuter. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  cal'  car,   a  spur  cal  ca'  ri  5;,    spurs 

Gen.  cal  ca'  ris,   of  a  spur  cal  ca'  ri  um,   of  spurs 

Dat.  cal  ca'  ri,    to  a  spur  cal  ca'  ri  bus,   to  spurs 

Ace.  cap  car,  a  spur  cal  ca'  ri  a,  spurs 

Voc.  cal'  car,  0  spur  cal  ca'  ri  a,    0  spurs 

Abl.  cal  ca'  ri,    with  a  spur  cal  ca'  ri  bus,   with  spurs 

Examples  for  Practice: 
exemplar,  -aris,  a  model  cochlear,  -aris,  a  spoon 

95.  Exceptions: 

Neuter*  Masculine. 

nectar,  -is,  nectar  Caesar,  -is,  Caesar 

hSpar,  -atis,  the  liver  lar,  laris,  a  household  deity 

far,  farris,  corn  par,  paris,  a  pair  [53,  64.] 


—    24    — 


96.  Nouns  in  gr  and  er  add  is  to  form  the  genitive,  as: 
anser,  ans^ris,  a  goose;  v6r,  veris,  spring;  but  imb6r,  a  shower^ 
the  names  of  months  in  ber,  and  nouns  inter,  except  later,  ahrick, 
change  er  into  ris,  dropping  the  e  before  the  r,  as:  patSr,  patris. 

Singular. 

pa'  ter,   a  father 
pa'  tris,    of  a  father 
pa'  tri,   to  a  father 
pa'  trem,  a  father 
pa'  ter,    0  father 
pa'  tre,   with  a  father 

pa'  tres,  fathers 

pa'  trum,   of  fathers 

pa'  tri  bus,   to  fathers 

pa'  tres,  fathers 

pa'  tres,   0  fathers 

pa'  tri  bus,   with  fathers 

Examples  for  Practice: 
passer,  -is,  a  sparrow  mater,  -ris,  a  mother 

miilier,  -is,  a  woman  frater,  -ris,  a  brother 

agger,  -is,  a  rampart  imber,  -ris,  a  shower 

later,  -is,  a  brick  September,  -ris,  September 

97.  Peculiar: 

it6r,  itingris,  a  way  (Neuter)        a6r,  aeris,  the  air 

Juppit^r,  Jo  vis,  Jove  aether,  aetheris,  the  upper  air 

98.  A  few  have  iuin,  instead  of  um,  in  the  Grenitive  plural: 

imber,  a  shower,  Imbrium  titer,  a  leather  sack,  iitrium 

lintgr,  a  boat,  lintrifim  venter,  the  belly ^  ventriuni 

[37.  38.] 

99.  Nouns  in  6r  change  or  into  oris  to  form  the  genitive;  as: 
c616r,  -oris. 


Nom. 

an'  ser,    a  goose 

Gen. 

an'  se  ris,   of  a  goose 

Dat. 

an'  se  ri,   to  a  goose 

Ace. 

an'  s6  rem,   a  goose 

Voc. 

an'  ser,    0  goose 

Abl. 

an'  se  re,   with  a  goose 

Nom. 

Plui 

an'  se  res,  geese 

Gen. 

an'  se  rum,    of  geese 

Dat. 

an  se'  ri  bus,  to  geese 

Ace. 

an'  se  res,    geese 

Voc. 

an'  sg  res,   0  geese 

Abl. 

an  se'  ri  bus,  with  geese 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Nonn. 

c6'  lor,   a  color 

colo' 

res,   colors 

Gen. 

CO  lo'  ris,  of  a  color 

colo' 

rum,    of  colors 

Dat. 

CO  lo'  ri,  to  a  color 

colo' 

ri  bGs,   to  colors 

Ace. 

CO  10'  rem,  a  color 

CO  10' 

res,   colors 

Voc. 

CO'  lor,    0  color 

colo' 

res,    0  colors 

Abl. 

CO  lo'  re,   with  a  color 

CO  10' 

ri  bus,   with  colors 

—     25     — 

Examples  for  Practice: 
timor,  -oris,  fear  amor,  -oris,   love 

praeceptor,  -oris,  a  teacher        sapor,  -oris,  taate 
auctor,  -oris,  an  author  odor,  -oris,  smell 

auditor,  -oris,  a  hearer  clamor,  -oris,  a  shoutj  noise 

orator,  -oris,  a  speaker  venator,  -oris,  a  hunter 

100.  The  following  have  6  short  in  the  genitive: 

arbor,  arboris,  a  tree  (  marmor,  marmoris,  marble 

memor,  memoris,  mindful  Neut.  J  aequor,  aequoris,  the  sea 

immemor,  immemoris,  forgetful  (  ador,  adoris,  spelt 

101.  Mark  the  Neuter  cor,  cordis,  hearty  and  its  Compounds: 
coneors,  -dis,  harmonious  discors,  -dis,  discordant 

[33.  34.] 

102.  Nouns  in  ur  add  is  to  the  nominative  to  form  the  genitive; 
as:  guttur,  gutturisj  they  are  Neuter. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  gut'  tur,   the  throat  gut'  tu  rS,  the  throats 

Gen.  gut'  tu  ris,  of  the  throat  gut'  tu  rum,  of  the  throats 

Dat,  gut'  tu  ri,  to  the  throat  gut  tu'  ri  bus,  to  the  throats 

Ace.  gut'  tur,  the  throat  gut'  tu  r3,,  the  throats 

Voc.  gut'  tur,  0  throat  gut'  jtu  ra,  0  throats 

Abl.  gut'  tu  re,  with  the  throat  gut  tu'  ri  bus,   with  the  throats 

103.  These  four  change  ur  into  oris,  but  are  also  Neuter: 
ebur,  -oris,  ivory  femur,  -oris,  the  thigh 
j6cur,  -5ris  (jecinoris),  the  liver  robur,  -Oris,  strength 

**  '  ^*'  ^'  [63.  64.] 

104.  There  are  two  Classes  of  nouns  in  s: 
s  after  a  vowel:  as,  es,  is,  os,  us,  aus 

s  after  a  consonant:  Is,  ns,  rs;  bs,  ps,  ms. 

105.  Nouns  in  as  change  as  into  atis  to  form  the  genitive, 
as:  aetas,  aetatis;  anas,  a  duckyh^s  anatis;  vSs,  a  surety,  vadis. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Norn. 

ae'  tas,   an  age 

ae  ta'  tes,  ages 

Gen. 

ae  ta'  tis,   of  an  age 

ae  ta'  tiiin,  of  ages 

Dat. 

ae  ta'  ti,  to  an  age 

ae  ta'  ti  biis,   to  ages 

Ace. 

ae  ta'  tern,  an  age 

ae  ta'  tes,  ages 

Voc. 

ae'  tas,  0  age 

ae  ta'  tes,  0  ages 

IL 

ae  ta'  t€,  ivith  an  age 

ae  ta'  ti  bus,   with  ages 

—     26     — 

Examples  for  Practice: 
aestas,  -atis,  summer  paupertas,  -atis,  poverty 

voluptas,  -atis,  pleasure  voluntas, -atis,  the  will 

societas,  -atis,  society  liber tas, -atis,  liberty 

difficultas,  -atis,  difficulty  varTetas,  -atis,  variety 

civitas,  -atis,  a  state  sanitas,  -atis,  health 

106.    The  following  in  as  form  their  genitives  differently: 

Norn,  as,  a  copper  Gen.   assis  Gen.  PI.  assiuni 

mas,  a  male  maris  marium 

adamas,  a  diamond  adamantis 

Slephas,  an  elephant  elephantis 

vas,  a  vessel  (Neuter)  vasis,  PI.  vasa,  -Sriiin  (2d  deol.) 

107^  fas,  right;   nefas,  wrong j  are  Indeclinable.  ^^  ^^ , 

108.  Nouns  ending  in  es  change  es  into  is  to  form  the  geni- 
tive, as:  nubes,  ntibis  (Vowel-stems).  They  have  the  same  num- 
ber of  syllables  in  the  nominative  and  genitive.  Nouns  in  es  in- 
crease in  the  genitive,  changing  es  into  itis,  as:  miles,  militis 
(Consonant-stems) . 

Singular. 


Nom. 

nu'  bes,   a  cloud 

mV  les,   a  soldier 

Gen. 

nrr  bis,    of  a  cloud 

ml'  IT  tis,   of  a  soldier 

Dat. 

nu'  bi,  to  a  cloud 

ml'  11  ti,   to  a  soldier 

Ace. 

nu'  bem,    a  cloud 

mi'  Ji  tern,   a  soldier 

Voc. 

nu'  bes,   0  cloud 

ml'  les,   0  soldier 

Abl. 

nu'  be,  with  a  cloud 

mi'  li  te,   with  a  soldier 

Plural. 

Nom. 

nil'  bes,  clouds 

ml'  It  tes,   soldiers 

Gen. 

nu'  bi  urn,  of  clouds 

ml'  ir  turn,   of  soldiers 

Dat. 

nu'  bi  bus,   to  clouds 

ml  li'  ti  bus,   to  soldiers 

Ace. 

nu'  bes,  clouds 

mi'  11  tes,   soldiers 

Voc. 

nu'  bes,    0  clouds 

mi'  li  tes,   0  soldiers 

Abl. 

nu'  bi  bus,   with  clouds 

ml  \V  ti  bus,    with  soldiers 

Examples  for  Practice: 
fames,  -is,  hunger  comes,  -itis,  a  companion 

clades,  -is,  defeat  merges,  -itis,  a  sheaf 

vulpes,  -is,  a  fox  p6des,  -itis,  a  foot-soldier 

s6des,  -is,  a  seat  gques,  -itis,  a  horseman 


21 


109,  Exceptions.    The  following  in  es  and  Ss  increase  in  the 
genitive  in  different  ways  (et-is,  et-is,  ed-is,  ed-is,  id-is,  er-is). 


abies,  -etis,  the  silver  flr 
aries,  -etis,  a  ram 
paries,  -etis,  a  wall 
interpres,  -etis,  an  interpreter 
s6ges,  -etis,  a  cro;p 
t^ges,  -etis,  a  covering 
quies,  -etis,  rest 
locuples,  -etis,  wealthy 

110,  Mark  the  solitary  nouns: 
aes,  aeris,  brass  (Neuter) 

111,  The  majority  of  nouns  ending  in  is  have  Vowel-stems, 
and  form  their  genitive  in  is,  with  an  equal  number  of  syllables. 
They  have  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular  alike. 


pes,  pedis,  a  foot 
quadrupes,  -edis,  four-footed 
compes,  -edis,  a  fetter 
heres,  -edis,   an  heir 
merces,  -edis,  a  reward 
obses,  -idis,  a  hostage 
praeses,  -idis,  a  president 
Cer6s,  -eris,  Ceres       ^^^^  ^^^ 

praes,  praedis,  surety 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Norn,     a'  vis,  a  bird 

a',  ves,   birds 

Gen.      a'  vis,   of  a 

-  bird 

a'  vi  um. 

of  birds 

Dat.      a^  vi,    to  a 

bird 

a'  vi  bus. 

to  birds 

Ace.      a'  vein,   a 

bird 

a'  ves,  birds 

Voc.      a'  VIS,  0  bird 

a'  ves,    0  birds 

Abl.       a'  ve,   with 

a 

bird 
Examples 

a'  vi  bus, 
for  Practice: 

with  birds 

amnis,  -,  a  river 

felis,  -, 

a  cat 

5vis,  -,  a  sheep 

apis,  -,  a  bee 

finis,  -, 

an  end 

panis,  -,  bread 

auris,  -,  the  ear 

hostis,  ■ 

-,  an  enemy 

piscis,  -,  a  fish 

canis,  -,  a  dog 

ignis,  -, 

.fire 

tigris,  -,  a  tiger 

civis,  -,  a  citizen 

mensis, 

-,  a  month 

vallis,  -,  a  valley 

classis,  -,  a  fleet 

natalis, 

-,  a  birthday 

vermis,  -,  a  worm 

collis,  -,  a  hill 

navis,  - 

-,  a  ship 

vestis,  -,  a  dress 

112,    Others  in  is  and  is  have  Consonant-stems  increasing  in 
the  genitive  in  different  ways  (id-is,  it-is,  er-is,  ir-is,  in-is). 


Singular. 

Norn,  la'  pis,   a  stone 

Gen.  la'  pi  dis,   of  a  stone 

Dat.  la'  pi  di,  to  a  stone 

Ace.  la'  pi  dem,  a  stone 

Voc.  la'  pis,    0  stone 

Abl.  la'  pi  de,   with  a  stone 


Plural, 
la'  pi  des,  stones 
la'  pi  dum,  of  stones 
la  pi'  di  bus,    to  stones 
la'  pi  des,  stones 
la'  pi  des,  0  stones 
la  pi'  di  biis,  with  stones 


—    28    — 


To  this  class  belong: 

cassis,  cassidis,  a  helmet  lis,  litis,  a  quarrel 

lapis,  lapidis,  a  stone  sanguis,  sanguinis,  hlood 

cinis,  cTngris,  ashes  glls,  gllris,   a  dormouse 

pulvis,  pulvSris,  dust  Samnis,  Samnitis,  a  Samnite 

euspis,  cuspidis,  a  spear  tyrannis,  tyrannidis,  tyranny 
vomis,  vom^ris,  a  plowshare 

113,  exsanguis,  -5,  bloodless,  though  a  compound  of  sanguis, 
has  in  the  genitive  exsanguis  (parisyllabic). 

114,  Mark  the  special  paradigm  of  vis,  force: 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn.  VIS,  force  vi'  res,  forces 

Gen.  —  vr  ri  flm,   of  forces 

Dat.  —  vi'  ri  bus,  to  forces 

Ace.  vim,  force  \V  res,  forces 

Voc.  VIS,   0  force  vr  res,   0  forces 

Abl.  vi,   by  force  vV  rl  hUs,  with  forces   [4^.441 

115,  Some  Nouns  in  os  form  their  genitive  by  changing  5s 
into  oris,  others  by  changing  os  into  otis.    Thus,  we  have: 


OS,   oris 
flos,  -oris,  a  flower 
mos,  -oris,  custom 
ros,  -oris,  dew 
lepos,  -oris,  charm,  wit 
OS,  oris,  the  mouth  (Neuter) 


OS,  Otis 
dos,  -Otis,  a  dowry 
cos,  -Otis,  a  grindstone 
ngpos,  -Otis,  a  grandchild 
rhinoceros,  -otis,  a  rhinoceros 
sacerdos,  -otis,  a  priest 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


flos,   a  flower 

flO'  ris,    of  a  flower 

flo'  ri,  to  a  flower 

flo'  rem,  a  flower 

flos,   0  flower 

flo'  re,   ivith  a  flower 


Singular. 


dOs,  a  dowry 

do'  tis,  of  a  dowjy 

do'  ti,    to  a  doivry 

do'  tem,   a  dowry 

dos,  0  dowry 

do'  te,   with  a  doivry 


Plural. 


flo'  res,  flowers 

flo' rum,  of  flowers 

flo'  ri  btis,  to  flowers 

flo'  res,  flowers 

flo'  res,  0  flowers 

flC  ri  bQs,  loith  flowers 


do'  tes,  dowries 

do'  turn,  of  dowries 

do'  ti  btis,   to  dowries 

do'  tes,   dowries 

do'  tes,  0  dowries 

dC  ti  btls,  with  dowries 


—    29    — 

116.  Peculiar: 

custos,  cust5dis,  a  keeper  compos,  compotes,  capable 

OS,    ossis,   a  hone  (Neuter) ;  bos,  bo  vis,  an  ox;  Plur.  N.  bovSs; 

Gen.   Plur.  ossium  G.  bourn;  D.  bobtis  or  bubus 

117.  A  few  masculine  Greek  nouns  in  os  have  ois,  as: 
heros,  -ois,  a  hero  Tros,  -ois,  a  Trojan      [35.  36.] 

118.  Of  Feminine  Nouns  in  us,  some  change  us  into  utis, 
others  into  udis  to  form  the  genitive;  as:  virtus,  virtutis;  palus^ 
paiudis. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  vir'  tiis,  virtue  vir  W  tes,    virtues 

Gen.  vir  tu'  tis,   of  virtue  vir  tii'  turn,   of  virtues 

Dat.  vir  tu'  ti,    to  virtue  vir  tu'  ti  bus,   to  virtues 

Ace.  vir  ta'  tern,  virtue  vir  tH'  tes,  virtues 

Voc.  vir'  tus,  0  virtue  vir  tu'  tes,  0  virtues 

Abl.  vir  tQ'  t6,   with  virtue  vir  tu'  ti  biis,   with  virtues 

salus,  -utis,  safety,  welfare         sSnecttts,  -utis,  old  age 
servitiis,  -utis,  slavery  paltis,  -udis,  a  marsh 

juventus,  -utis,  youth  incus,  -udis,  an  anvil 

119.  tell  us,  earthy  has  telluris,  p6ciis,  a  head  of  cattle^  an 
animalj  pecudis,  and  Yenus,  the  goddess  Venus,  Y6neris. 

120.  Notice  the  following  names  of  animals  in  us: 

mtls,  muris,  a  mouse;  Gen.  Plur.    grus,  gruis,  a  crane 

mGrium  sus,    suis,   a  swine;  Dat.  Plur. 

16pus,  Igporis,  a  hare  subus  (instead  of  suibiis) 

[51.  52.] 

121.  Of  Neuter  Nouns  in  tis  of  two  or  more  syllables,  some 
change  lis  into  5ris  to  form  the  genitive,  as:  corpiis,  corpSris; 
others  change  us  into  eris,  as:  opiis,  6pSris.  All  monosyllables, 
with  long  u,  form  their  genitive  in  uris,  as:  jus,  juris. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,  cor'  pus,   a  body  cor'  po  r^,  bodies 

Gen.  cor'  p6  ris,  of  a  body  cor'  p6  rum,  of  bodies 

Dat.  cor'  p6  ri,  to  a  body  cor  p6'  ri  btts,  to  bodies 

Ace.  cor'  pus,  a  body  cor'  p6  rft,   bodies 

Voc.  cor'  pus,  0  body  cor'  p6  r5-,  0  bodies 

Abl.  cor'  po  re,  with  a  body  cor  p5'  ri  biis,  with  bodies 


—    30    — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Norn. 

6'  pus,   a  work 

6'  pe  r3),  works 

Gen. 

6'  pe  ris,  of  a  work 

6'  pe  rum,  of  works 

Dat. 

5'  p6  ri,  to  a  work 

6  p6'  ri  bus,  to  works 

Ace. 

6'  pus,  a  work 

6'  p6  ra,  works 

Voc. 

6'  pus,  0  work 

0'  p6  ra,  0  works 

Abl. 

0'  p6  re,  with  a  work 

6  pe'  ri  bus,  with  works 

Nom. 

jus,  rights  law 

ju'  ra,  7Hghts 

Gen. 

ju'ris,  of  right 

ju'  rum,   of  rights 

Dat. 

ju'  ri,  to  right 

ju'  ri  bus,  to  rights 

Ace. 

jus,  right 

ju'  ra,  rights 

Voc, 

jus,  0  right 

ju'  ra,  0  rights 

Abl. 

ja'  re,  with  right 

ju'ribus,    with  rights 

Examplei 
frigiis,  -oris,  cold 
tempus,  -oris,  a  time 
llttis,  -oris,  a  shore 
decus,  -oris,  an  ornament 
ngmus,  -oris,  a  grove 
pectus,  -oris,  the  breast 
vulnus,  -eris,  a  wound 


for  Practice: 

munus,  -eris,  an  office^  gift 
genus,  -eris,  a  kind,  race 
onus,  -eris,  a  burden 
sidus,  -eris,   a  star,   constella- 
'  scelus,  -eris,  a  crime        [tion 
eriis,  -uris,  the  leg 
rus,  -uris,  the  country 

[61.  62,] 


122.  The  following  Greek  nouns  in  us  (Masculine  and  Fe- 
minine) deserve  special  notice: 

Trapezus,  -untis,  Trebizond         Oedipus,  -odis,  Oedipus  ' 
tripus,  -odis,  a  tripod  polypus,  -i,  a  polyp  (2d  decl.) 

123.  The  only  two  nouns  in  aus  are  laus,  laudis,  praise,  and 
fraus,  fraudis,  fraud;  fraus  has  fraudum  or  fraudifim  in  the 
genitive  plural.  [5i.] 

124.  Nouns  ending  in  bs,  ps,  and  ms  change  s  final  into  is 
to  form  the  genitive;  as:  urbs,  urbis. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

urbs,  a  city 

ur'  bes,  cities 

Gen. 

nr' his,  of  a  city 

nr' hi  um  of  cities 

Dat. 

ur'  bi,  to  a  city 

ur'  bi  btls,  to  cities 

Ace. 

ur'  bem,  a  city 

ur'  bes,  cities 

Voc. 

urbs,  Ocity 

ur'  bes,  0  cities 

Abl. 

ur'  b6,  with  a  city 

ur'  bi  btis,  with  cities 

—    31    — 

Examples  for  Practice: 
plebs,  plSbis,  the  populace  stirps,  stirpis,  a  stem 

trabs,  trabis,  a  beam  hiems,  hiemis,  winter 

125.  A  few  are  subject  to  a  variation  of  the  radical  vowel: 

adeps,  adipis,  lard  auceps,  auctipis,  a  fowler 

caelebs,  caelibis,  unmarried 

126.  Compounds  in  ceps  from  capio  have  cipis,  as: 
princeps,  -cipis,  a  chief  particeps,  -cipis,  sharing 

Compounds  in  ceps  from  c^piit  have  cipitis,  as: 
anceps,  -cTpitis,  double  praeceps,  -cipitis,  steep 

127.  All  nouns  ending  in  Is,  rs,  and  ns  change  s  final  into 
tis  to  form  the  genitive 3  as:  pars,  partis. 

Singular.  Plural, 

Norn,  pars,  a  part^  side  par'  tes,  parts 

Gen.  par'  tis,  of  a  part  par'  ti  iim,   of  parts 

Dat.  par'  ti,  to  a  part   •  par'  ti  bus,   to  parts 

Ace.  par'  tern,  a  part  par'  tes,  parts 

Voc.  pars,  0  part  par'  tes,  0  parts 

Abl.  par'  te,  with  a  part  par'  ti  bus,  with  parts 

Examples  for  Practice: 
mors,  -tis,  death  gens,  -tis,  a  tribe,  people 

infans,  -tis,  a  babe,  child  frons,  -tis,  the  forehead^  brow 

ars,  -tis,  art  parens,  -tis,  a  parent 

128.  Only  three  have  dis  in  the  genitive,  namely: 

frons,  -clis,  foliage;  glans,  -dis,  an  acorn;  juglans,  -dis,  a  walnut 

[47.  48.] 

129.  There  is  only  one  noun  in  t  (Neuter): 

caput,  capitis,  the  head,  and  its  Compounds.  [<j5.] 

130.  Nouns  in  x  form  their  genitive  by  resolving  x  into  cs  or 
gs  and  changing  final  s  into  is,  as:  dux  (=  dues),  ducisj  rex 
(=regs),  regis. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Norn. 

dux,  a  leader 

du'  ces,  leaders 

Gen. 

du'  cis,   of  a  leader 

du'  cum,  of  leaders 

Dat. 

du'  ci,  to  a  leader 

du'  ci  bus,   to  leaders 

Ace. 

du'  cem,  a  leader 

du'  ces,    leaders 

Voc. 

dux,   0  leader 

du'  ces,  0  leaders 

Abl. 

du'  c6,  with  a  leader 

dii'  ci  bus,  with  leaders 

32    ~ 


Singular. 

PlnraL 

Norn. 

rex,  a  king 

re'  ges,  A;tn5r^ 

Gen. 

re'  gis,  of  a  king 

re'  gtiin,  of  kings 

Dat. 

re'  gi,   ^0  a  king 

re' gibus,   to  kings 

Ace. 

rg'  gem,  a  king 

re'  ges,  kings 

Voc. 

rex,  0  Aring' 

re'  ges,  0  kings 

Abl. 

re'  ge,   tf^i^/i  a  A:i?igr 

re' gibus,  with  kings 

131,  Nouns  in  x  with  preceding  consonant  change  x  into  cis: 

falx,  -cis,  a  sickle  arx,  -cis,  a  citadel 

merx,  -cis,  merchandise  lanx,  -cis,  a  dish 

132,  Nouns  in  ax  have  acis,  as:  pax,  pacis,  peace* 
Exception:  fax,  facis,  a  torch. 

133,  Nouns  in  ex  have  commonly  icis,  as: 


Nom 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


Singular.  Plural 

ja'  dex,   a  judge  ju'  di  ces,  judges 

ju'  dl  cis,  of  a  judge  ju'  ^I  cum,  of  judges 

JLi'  dl  ci,  to  a  judge  ju  di'  ci  bus,   to  judges 

ju'  dl  cem,   a  judge  ju'  di  ces,  judges 

ju'  dex,  0  judge  ju'  dl  ces,  0  judges 

ju'  dl  ce,  with  a  judge  ju  di'  ci  bus,   with  judges 

Exceptions: 

remex,  rSmigis,  a  rower 
senex,  senis,  an  old  man 
supellex,  supellectilis/i/rm^ure 
vervex,  vervecis,  a  wether 
faex,  faecis,  lees 
134,    Nouns  in  ix  have  icis,  and  less  frequently  icis,  as: 


lex,  legis,  a  law 
rex,  regis,  a  king 
grex,  gregis,  a  flock 
nex,  necis,  murder 


cicatrix,  -icis,  a  wound 
cornix,  -icis,  a  crow 
radix,  -icis,  a  root 
nutrix,  -icis,  a  nurse 


pix,  -icis,  pitch 
calix,  -icis,  a  cup 
fornix,  -icis,  an  arch 
appendix,  -icis,  an  appendix 


But  nix,  snow,  has  nivis. 
135,    Nouns  in  ox  have  ocis,  as:  vox,  vocis,  a  voice. 

Exceptions: 
praecox,  praecocis,  premature  nox,  noctis,  night 

and  a  few  national  names  in  ox,  as: 

Cappadox,  -6cis,  a  Cappadocian 
Allobrox,  -ogis,  one  of  the  Allobroges, 


—     33     — 

136.  Nouns  in  ux  have  iScIs,  as:  dux,  duds,  a  leader. 

Exceptions: 
lux,  liicis,  light  conjux,  conjugis,  a  spouse 

Pollux,  Pollucis,  Pollux  frux,  friigis,  fruit 

faux,  faucis,  the  throat  ^^  ^^ 

'  '  [49.  50.] 

Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension. 

137.  Certain  adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  have 
in  the  nominative  singular  three  different  forms,  one 
for  each  gender  —  others  two,  the  masculine  and 
feminine  being  the  same  —  others  but  one,  the  same 
for  all  genders. 


138.  Adjectives  of  three  terminations  end  in  er,  is. 

g,  and 

are  declined  like  pater, 

,  avis 

;,  mare,  respectively' 

\    All  drop 

the  e 

before  r  in 

declension, 

except  c61er,  c61eris. 

celere,  swift, 

which 

retains  it. 

acer. 

acris. 

,  acrS,  sharpy  keen 

Singular. 

m. 

/ 

n. 

Nom. 

a'c6r 

a'  cris 

a' ere 

Gen. 

a'  cris 

a'  cris 

a'  cris 

Dat. 

a'  cri 

a'  cri 

a'  cri   . 

Ace. 

a'  crem 

a'  crem 

a'  ere 

Voc. 

a'  cer 

a'  cils 

a'  ere 

Abl. 

a'  cri 

a'  cri 
Plural. 

a'  cri 

Nom. 

a'  cres 

a'  cres 

a'  cri  a 

Gen. 

a'  cri  uni 

a'  cri  tun 

a'  cri  um 

Dat. 

a'  cri  bus 

a'  cri  bus 

a'  cri  bus 

Ace. 

a'  cres 

a'  cres 

a'  cri  a 

Voc. 

a'  cres 

a'  cres 

a'  cri  a 

Abl. 

a'  cri  bus 

a'  cri  bus 

a'  cri  bus 

Examples  for  Practice: 
terrestSr,  -ris,  -re,  terrestrial      Silvester,  -ris,  -rS,  woody 
paluster,  -ris,  -re,  marshy  campester,  -ris,  -rS,  level 

ceieber,  -ris,  -re,  famous  gquester,  -ris,  -re,  equestrian 

al§,cgr,-ris,  -re,   lively  saluber,  -ris,  -r§,  healthy 

putgr,  -ris,  -rS,  putrid  volucer,  -ris,  -r5,  winged 


139 »    Adjectives  of  two  terminations  end  in  Is,  €,  and  5r, 

iis  (Comparatives),  and  are  thus  declined: 

tristis,  tristg,  sad 
Singular.  Plural, 

m.  &  /.  n.  m.  &  /.  n. 

Norn     tri'stis  tri' stS  tri' stes  tri' sti  a 

Gen.     tri'  stis  tri'stis  tri'  sti  um  tri'  sti  iim 

Dat.      tri' sti  tri' sti  tri' sti  bus  tri'stibtis 

Ace.      tri' stem       tri' ste  tri' stes  tri' sti  a 

Voc.      tri'  stis  tri'  ste  tri'  stes  tri'  sti  a 

Abl.       tri' sti  tri' sti  tri' sti  bus  tri'stibtis 

Examples  for  Practice: 

siiaviSj-e,  pleasant  instabilis,  -e,  unsteady  omnis,  -e,  all,  every 

dulcis,  -6,  sweet       hiimllis,  -e,  low  similis,  -e,  like 

brevis,  -e,  short       mortalis,  -e,  mortal  facilis,  -§,  easy 

[55.  S6,] 

durior,  duriiis,  harder 
Singular.  Plural. 

m.  &  /.  n.  m.  &  /.  n. 

Nom.  dCi'  ri  or         du'  ri  us  du  ri  o'  res  du  ri  o'  rS, 

Gen.    du  ri  o'  ris     du  ri  o'  ris  du  ri  0'  rum  du  ri  o'  riim 

Dat.     du  ri  o'  ri       du  ri  o'  ri  du  ri  0'  ri  bus  du  ri  o'  ri  bus 

Ace.     du  ri  o'  rgm  du'  ri  us  du  ri  0'  res  du  ri  o'  rS, 

Voc.    du'  ri  or         du'  ri  us  du  ri  0'  res  du  ri  o'  rS» 

Abl.     du  ri  C  rS      du  ri  o'  re  du  ri  0'  ri  bQs  du  ri  o'  ri  biSs 

Examples  for  Praotico: 

excelsior,  -us,  higher  acrior,  -us,  sharper  meliSr,  -Us,  better 

liberior,  -us,  freer        levior,  -tis,  lighter  carior,  -us,  drearer 

pulchrior,  -us,  finer     felicidr,  -us,  happier  hebetidr,  -us,  duller 

[73.  74.] 

140.  As  a  rule,  adjectives  in  Sr,  is,  e,  and  is,  S  form  their 
ablative  singular  in  i,  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural 
neuter  in  ia,  and  the  genitive  plural  in  iGm;  celer,  swift,  has 
celertim. 

141.  Adjectives  of  one  termination  have  the  same  forms  in 
all  genders,  except  that  in  the  accusative  singular,  and  in  the  nomi- 
native, accusative,  and  vocative  plural,  the  neuter  is  distinguished 
from  the  masculine  and  feminine.  They  end  in  1,  r,  s,  x,  and  are 
declined  like  substantives  of  the  Third  Declension. 


m.&f. 

n. 

Norn 

.  W  lix 

fB'lix 

Gen. 

fe  li'  CIS 

Dat. 

fe  11'  ci 

Ace. 

fe  li'cem 

fe'lix 

Voc. 

W  lix 

Abl. 

fg  li'  ci 

Norn 

fe  IV  ces 

fe  11'  ci  a 

Gen. 

fe  11'  ci  urn 

Dat. 

fe  11'  ci  bus 

Ace. 

fg  11'  ces 

fe  li'  ci  a 

Voc. 

f6  11'  ces 

fe  li'  ci  a 

Abl. 

fe  li'  ci  btis 

—     36     — 

fellx,  happy,  fortunate  prtldens,  prudent,  sensible 

Singular. 

m.  c&/  n. 

prii'  dens  pru'  dens 

prii  den'  tis 
pru  den'  ti 

prii  den'  tern  prti'  dens 

pru'  dens 
pru  den'  ti 

Plural, 
pru  den'  tes  pru  den'  ti  Si 

pru  den'  ti  iiin 
pru  den'  ti  bus 

pru  den'  tes  pru  den'ti  S, 

pru  den'  tes  pru  den'  ti  & 

pru  den'  tibfis 

Examples  for  Practice: 
mendax,  -acis,  lying  sapiens,  -tis,  wise 

loquax,  -acis,  loquacious  patens,  -tis,  open 

rapax,-acis,  rapacious  dlligens,  -tis,  diligent 

velox,  -ocis,  swift  clemens,  -tis,  mild        ^^  ^^ 

142.  As  a  rule,  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  i  in  the 
ablative  singular,  but  to  this  there  are  many  exceptions.  The  neuter 
of  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural  ends  iu  ift,  and 
the  genitive  in  ium  (see  144  —147). 

Remarks  on  Certain  Cases. 
Accusatiye  Singular. 

143.  The  Accusative  in  im  is  found  exclusively: 

1.  in  Greek  nouns  in  is,  as:  basis,  a  base,  basim; 

2.  in  names  of  rivers  and  towns  in  is,  as:  Tlberis,  the  Tiber,  Ti- 
berini;  NeapolTs,  Naples,  Neapolim; 

3.  in  amussTs,  a  mason'' s  rule,  amussim;  ravis,  lioarsenes.% 
ravim;  sitis,  thirst,  sitim;  tussis,  a  cou^/i,  tussim;  vis, /orce,  vim; 

and  is  regarded  as  preferable: 

4.  in  febris,  a  fever,  febrim  (febrem) ;  pelvis,  a  baf^in,  pel^im 
(pelvem);  puppTs,  the  stern,  puppini  (puppeiu);  restls,  a  r(  p(\ 
restim  (restem);  turrlft,  a  tower,  turrim  (turrem);  securis,  an  axe^ 
securim  (securSm). 


—    36    — 

Ablatire  Sin^lan 
14:4.  The  Ablative  in  i  is  found  exclusively: 

1.  in  all  nouns  which  have  or  may  have  the  accusative  in  Im, 
and  in  clavis,  a  key,  Abl.  clavi;  navis,  a  ship,  Abl.  navi;  imb^r,  a 
shower,  Abl.  imbri;  occiput,  the  back  part  of  the  head,  Abl.  occipitT; 

2.  in  neuter  nouns  in  6,  and  those  in  SI  and  Sr  which  have  a 
long  in  the  genitive-;  also  in  par,  paris,  a  pair,  Abl.  pari; 

3.  in  those  Substantives  in  Is  and  er  which  are  originally  Ad- 
jectives, as:  famlllaris,  a  friend,  Abl.  familiari;  also  in  the' names  of 
the  months,  as:  September,  September,  Abl.  Septembri;  but  juvenis, 
a  youth,  aedllis,  an  aedile,  have  ablative  in  e,  juvene,  aedlle. 

4.  In  all  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension,  including  Par- 
ticipial Adjectives  in  ans  and  ens;  but  to  this,  there  are  many 
exceptions: 

pauper,  poor  Abl.  paup^rS    caelebs,  single 

deses,  indolent         ^'    deside       div6s,  rich 
puber,  adult  **    pubere      vetus,  old 

sospes,  safe  *'    sospite      princeps,  first 

comi)6a,possessedof  ^^    compotS   particeps,  sZiarm^r 
superstSs,  surviving       Abl.  superstitS 

All  Comparatives,  as:  altiSr,  higher,  Abl.  altiorS; 

Participles,  when  used  as  such  or  as  Substantives,  as:  sapiens, 
a  wise  man,  Abl.  sapiente;  but  vir  sapiens  has  ablative  viro 
sapient! ; 

Adjectives  used  as  proper  names,  as:  Juvenalis,  Juvenal,  AW. 
Juvenale.  [59.  eo.i 

Nominatiye  PInraL 

145.  Such  Neuters  of  Nouns,  Adjectives  and  Par- 
ticiples as  have  i  in  the  Ablative  singular  form  their 
Nominative  Plural  in  ia  instead  of  a. 

Of  Adjectives  having  <5  in  the  ablative  singular,  only  vStus  hast 
a  neuter  of  the  plural,  vgt^ra.  Of  Comparatives,  complGrSs, 
several,  has  compl&ra  and  complQrXa. 

Oenltlye  PlnraL 

146.  The  Genitive  Plural  in  lum  is  found: 

1.  in  all  nouns  having  i  in  the  a^blative  singular  (see  above  144.)  i 


Abl 

caelibe 

ii 

divite 

ii 

vgt6r6 

<( 

principS 

u 

participS 

—     37     — 


2.  in  all  nouns  in  er,  is,  and  es  having  the  same  number  of  syl- 
lables in  the  nominative  and  genitive  (parisyllahic) ^  and  in  all  pure 
Latin  words  in  s  and  x  preceded  by  a  consonant,  except  the  fol- 
lowing which  retain  um  in  the  genitive  plural: 


Gen.  Plural. 

Gen.  Plural 

vatSs,  aprophet 

vatum 

pater,  a  father 

patrum 

Strugs,  a  heap 

struum 

mater,  a  mother 

matrum 

sedes,  a  seat 

sedtim 

frater,  a  brother 

fratrum 

canis,  a  dog 

canum 

accipiter,  a  hawk 

accipitrum 

panis,  bread 

pannm 

adeps,  fat 

adipum 

juvenTs,  a  youth 

juvenuni 

(ops),  help 

opiim 

voliicris,  a  bird 

voliicriiin 

hiems,  winter 

hiemiim 

3.  in  the  following  words: 

mas,  a  male 

mariiim 

nox,  the  night 

noctmm 

mus,  a  mouse 

murium 

jus,  right 

jiiriiiin 

glis,  a  dormouse 

glirium 

nix,  snow 

niviiim 

lis,  a  quarrel 

lltium 

6s,  a  bone 

ossiiim 

vTs,  force 

viriiini 

as,  an  as  {Roman  coin) 

assium 

caro,  flesh 

carnium 

(faux),  the  throat 

fauciiim 

4.  in  names  of  nations  in  as,  -atis;  is,  -itis,  as: 


Arpinas,  an  Arpinian 
Samnis,  a  Samnite 
and  likewise  in: 
pgnates,  penates 
optimatgs,  the  aristocrats 
nostras,  our  countryman 
vestras,  your  countryman 


Gen.  Plural.  Arpinatmm 
"      "       Samnltitim 


ii 


penatmm 

oi)timatmin 
nostratium 
vestratiuin 


147,   Of  Adjectives  having  T  in  the  ablative  singular,  the  fol- 
lowing have  um  in  the  Genitive  plural: 

Tiber,  -is,  fertile  Abl.  Sing.  uberT 

memor,  -is,  mindful  **         memori 

immemor,  -is,  unmindful      **         immemori 
cicur,  -is,  tame  '^         cicuri 

vigil,  -is,  watchful  ^*         vigili 


Gen.  PL  tiberum 

''     memorum 
*'      immemorum 
^'      cicurum 
*^     vTgilum 

[103.  104.] 


Accusative  Plural. 
148.    The  Accusative  Plural  in  is  occurs  side  by  side  with  es  in 
all  nouns  which  have  ium  in  the  genitive  plural,  as:    naves  and 
navis;  and  seems  preferable  in  nouns  in  er  which  have  i  in  the 
ablative,  as:  imbri§  and  Imbres. 


—     38    — 

Datiye  and  Ablative  Plural. 

14:9.  In  the  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural,  Neuters  in  mS  liave  com- 
monly is  instead  of  ibiis;  thus:  poematis,  instead  of  poematibtis. 
See  83, 

Greek  Nouns. 

150.  Most  Greek  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension 
are  entirely  regular;  a  few,  however,  retain  certain 
peculiarities  of  the  Greek. 

151.  Proper  Names  in  t;^  of  the  first  Greek  Declension  often 
follow  the  third  in  Latin,  as:  Xerxes,  -is. 

152.  Several  feminine  nouns  in  o  have  Genitive  sing,  us,  all 
the  other  cases  ending  in  o,  as:  echo.  Gen.  echus,  Dat.  echo,  an  echo. 

153.  Many  Greek  nouns  have  Genitive  6s,  as:  lampas,  lampados, 
a  lamp —  and  Accusative  a,  as:  Salamis,  Ace.  Salamina,  Salamis; 
aer,  Aco.  aera,  air;  aether.  Ace.  aethera,  ether. 

154.  The  Vecative  sing,   drops  s  in  nouns  in  elis,  is,  ys,  and 

as  (antis),  as:  Daphnis,  Voc.  Daphni,  Baphnis;  Orpheus,  Voc.  Or- 
pheii,  Orpheus;  Atlas,  Voc.  Atla,  Atlas. 

155.  A  few  Neuters  in  6s,  as:  melos,  a  song;  pelagos,  the  sea, 
have  e  in  the  plural:  mele,  pelage. 

156.  The  ending  on  occurs  in  the  Genitive  plur.  of  a  few  titles 
of  books,  as:  Metamorphoses,  -eon. 

157.  Many  Greek  nouns  have  Plural  Norn,  es,  as:  lampas,  lam- 
pades  —  and  Accus.  as,  as:  Arabs,  ArabS-s,  Arabian;  Cyclops,  Cy- 
clopas,  a  Cyclops. 

Gender  in  Third  Declension. 

Nouns  whose  gender  is  determined  by  their  meaning  (see  40-42.) 
are  not  included  in  the  following  rules. 

I.  Masculines. 

158.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  in  6,  or,  os, 

6r,  and  es  or  es  increasing  in  the  Genitive: 

hic  sermo,  this  speech  hic  mos,  this  custom 

hic  agger,  this  mound  hic  p6s,  this  foot  (gen.  pedis) 

hic  color,  this  color  hic  caespgs,</iis  sod  (gen.  caespitis) 


~     39     — 

159,  Exceptions  in  o. 
Feminine: 

1.  Noans  in  do  and  g'6,  as:  hirundo,  a  swalloio;  origo,  origin; 
&c.    Only  the  following  in  dO  and  g-6  are  Masculine: 

ordo,  -inis,  order  ligo,  -onis,  a  mattock 

cardO,  -inis,    the  hinge  harpagO,  -oiiis,  a  grapple-hook 

(of  a  door)  margO,  -inis,  a  margin 

2.  Abstract  noxxn^  in  i6,  as:  opinio,  -onis,  an  opinion;  actiO, 
-oiiis,  a  deed;  oratiO,  -onis,  speech;  venatiO,  -onis,  hunting;  &c. 
The  following  {concrete)  nouns  in  i5  are  Masculine: 

septentriO,  -onis,  the  north  papiliO,  -onis,  a  butterfly 

scorpiO,  -onis,  a  scorpion  piigiO,  -onis,  a  dagger 

vespertiliO,  -onis,  a  bat  scTpiO,  -onis,  a  staff 

titiO,  -onis,  a  firebrand  uniO,  -onis,  a  pearl 

3.  caro,  carnis,  flesh  echo,  -us,  an  echo 

160.  Exceptions  in  or. 
Neuter. 

marmor,  marmoris,  marble      ador,  adoris,  spelt 
aequor,  aequoris,  the  sea         cor,  cordis,  the  heart 

Feminine. 

arbor,  arboris,  a  tree 

161.  Exceptions  in  os,  os. 
Feminine. 

cos,  cotis,  a  whetstone  dos,  dotis,  a  dowry 

Neuter. 

OS,  oris,  the  mouth        \  6s,  ossis,  a  bone 

162,  Exceptions  in  er,  er. 
Neuter. 

cadaver,  -is,  a  corpse  spinther,  -is,  a  bracelet 

piper,  -is,  pepper  tuber,  -is,  a  hump 

cicer,  -is,  a  chick-pea  fiber,  -is,  a  teat 

iter,  itineris,  a  journey  ver,  -is',  spring 

papaver,  -is,  the  poppy  (verber,  ^is),  a  blow 

Common. 

linter,  -ris,  a  boat 


—     40    —  I 

163.  Exceptions  in  gs,  es  imparisyllabic. 

Neuter, 
aes,  aeris,  copper 

Feminine, 

merges,  -itis,  a  sheaf  quies,  -etis     /    ,    ^ 

seges,  -etis,  a  crop  requles,  -etis  (  ^^^" 

teges,  -etis,  a  c(^vering  inquies,  -etis,  restlessness 

merces,  -edis,  a  reward  compes,  -edis,  a  fetter 

Common. 

ales,  -itis,  a  bird  quadrupes,  -edis,  a  quadruped 

II.  Feminines. 

J^ ^4.  Nouns   of  the  Third  Declension    in    as,    is, 

aus,  X,  es  not  increasing  in  the  Genitive,  and  in  s 

preceded  by  a  consonant: 

haec  tempestas,  this  storm  haec  radix,  this  y^oot 

liaec  auris,  this  ear  haec  nCibes,  this  cloud, 

haec  laus,  this  praise  haec  hiems,   this  winter. 

165.  Exceptions  in  as,  S-s. 
Masculine. 

as,  assis,  an  as  (coin)  elephas,  -antis,  an  elephant 

vas,  vadis,  a  surety  adamas,  -antis,  a  diamond 

Neuter. 

vas,  vasis,  a  vessel;  plur.  vasa,  -oriim    (2d  decl.) 
Indeclinable. 

fas,  right  nefas,  wrong 

166.  Exceptions  in  is,  is. 
Masculine. 

1.  Ail  nouns  in  nis,  as:  ignis,  >Ve;  amnis,  a  river;  &c, 

2.  Also  the  following: 

axis,  -,  an  axis  pulvis,  -eris,  dust 

collis,  -,  a  hill  lapis,  -idis,   a  stone 

orbis,  -,  a  circle  vermis,  -,  a  worm 

anguis,  -,  a  serpent  mensis,  -,  a  month 

fascis,  -,  a  bundle  piscis,  -,  a  fish 

postis,  -,  a  post  unguis,  -,  a  claw 

torquis,  -,  a  collar  fustis,  -,  a  club 

sanguis,  -inis,  blood  ensis,  ~,  a  sword 


—     41     — 

167,  Exceptions  in  x. 
Masculine. 

1.  Greek  nouns  in  ax,  as:  thorax,  a  hr east-plate; 

2.  Most  nouns  in   ex,  -icTs,  as:   cortex,  -icis,  harlc;    ciilex, 
-icis,  a  gnat;  &c.    Only  the  following  in  ex  are  Feminine: 

lex,  l6gis,  a  law  faex,  faecis,  lees 

nex,  necis,  a  murder  supellex,  -ectilis,  furniture 

(prex),  preces,  prayers 

3.  Two  in  ix: 

calix,  -icis,  a  cup  fornix,  -icis,  an  arch 

168,  Exceptions  in  s  preceded  by  a  consonant. 
Masculine. 

1.  fons,  -tis,  a  spring  pons,  -tis,  a  bridge 
mons,  -tis,  a  mountain               adeps,  -ipis,  fat 

dens,  -tis,  a  tooth 

2.  Some  nouns  in  ns,  originally  Adjectives  with  a  masculine  noun 
understood,  as: 

6riens,  -tis  (sol),  east  riidens,  -tis  (funis),  a  cable 

occidens,  -tis  (sol),  west  torrens,-tis  (fluvius),  a  torrent 

III.  Neuters. 

169.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  in 

a,  6,  i,  c,  1,  n,  t,  y,  ar,  iir,  us: 

hoc  aenigma,  this  riddle  hoc  nomSn,  this  name 

hoc  mare,  this  sea  hoc  caput,  this  head 

hoc  lac,  this  milk  hoc  calcar,  this  spur 

hoc  animal,  this  animal  hoc  fulgur,  this  lightning 

hoc  tempus,  this  time. 

170.  Exceptions. 
Masculine. 

sal,  salis,  salt  ISpiis,  -6ris,  a  hare 

sol,  solis,  the  sun  miis,  muris,  a  mouse 

turtur,  -is,  a  turtle-dove  ren,  renis,  kidney 

furfur,  -is,  bran  ITen,  liSnis,      1      .^^^ 

vuitiir,  -is,  a  vulture  splen,  splSnis  i 

salar,  -is,  trout  pecten,  -inis,  a  comb 


42     — 


Feminine. 

jiiventus,  -utis,  youth 

incus,  -udis, 

an  anvil 

sgnectus,  -utis,  old  age 

palus,  -udis, 

a  marsh 

virtus,  -litis,  virtue 

pecus,  -udis, 

a  head  of  cattle 

servitus,  -utis,  slavery 

tellus,  -uris, 

the  earth 

salus,  -utis,  safety 

BUS,  suis,  a  swine 

grus,  gruis,  a 

crane 

Fourth  Declension. 

171.  Latin  nouns  whose  genitive  ends  in  us,  are 
of  the  Fourth  Declension. 

The  Stem  of  nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension  ends  in  ii.  Mas- 
culine and  Feminine  nouns  end  in  the  Nominative  in  us;  Neuters 
in  u. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,    fruc'  tus,  fruit  fruc'  tus,  fruits 

Gen.      fruc'  tus,   of  fruit  fruc'  tu  uin,   of  fruits 

Dat.      fruc'  tu  i,   to  fruit  fruc'  ti  "bus,  to  fruits 

Ace.      fruc'  turn,  fruit  fruc'  tus,  fruits 

Voc.      fruc'  tus,    0  fruit  fruc'  tus,  0  fruits 

Abl.       fruc'  tu,  with  fruit  fruc'  ti  bus,    with  fruits 

Norn,  cor'  nu,   a  horn  cor'  nu  a,    horns 

Gen.  cor'  nus,   of  a  horn  cor'  nu  um,   of  horns 

Dat.  cor'  nu  (ui),  to  a  horn  cor'  ni  bus,  to  horns 

Ace.  cor'  nu,    a  horn  cor'  nu  S,,  horns 

Voc.  cor'  nu,  0  horn  cor'  nu  a,  0  horns 

Abl.  cor'  nu,  with  a  horn  cor'  ni  bus,  with  horns 

Examples  for  Practice; 

sensiis,  -us,  sense       olfactus,  -us,  smell  obitiis,  -us,  death 

visus,  -us,  sight  motiis,  -us,  motion  nutus,  -us,  a  nod 

gustus,  -us,  taste         fluctus,  -us,  a  flood  gelii,  -us,  (icy)  cold 

tactus,  -us,  touch        cantus,  -us,  a  song  genu,  -us,    the  knee 

172.  The  following  have  the  Dative  and  Ablative  plural  in  ubus: 
acus,  acubiis,  a  needle  artiis,  artubus,  a  joint 
arcus,  arcubus,  a  bow  partus,  p artubus,  birth 
lacus,  lacQbtis,  a  lake                   portus,  portubus,  a  harbor 
pScu,  pecubtis,  cattle                    tribiis,  trTl)ubus,  a  tribe 
quercus,  quercGbiis,  an  oak        v6ru,  v6rubiis,  a  spit 

Bp6ciiSj  spgctibtis,  a  cave 


—     43     — 

173.  domus,  a  house^  is  declined  thus: 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn.    d5' mils,   a  house  do'mus,  houses 

Gen.   ]  f  ""P^-  f,  «  ^'"'''  f:  "i^  ^'    [  Of  houses 

(do' mi,   at  home  do  mo' rum,  i 

Dat.  do'  mu  i,   to  a  house  do'  mi  bus,   to  houses 

Ace.  do' mum,  a  house,  home  do'mus  &  do'mos,  houses 

Voc.  do'  mus,  0  house  do'  mus,  0  houses 

Abl.  do' mo,  with  a  housej  from  home  do' mi  bus,  with  houses 

Rule  of  Gender. 

174,  Most  nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension  m  us 
are  masculme.     The  few  words  in  u  are  all  neuter. 

175,  Exceptions. 
Feminine. 

actis,  -us,  a  needle  mantis,  -us,  the  hand 

domiis,  -us,  a  house  porticiis,  -us,  a  gallery 

Idiis,  -iiiim  (pi.),  the  Ides  tribtls,  -us,  a  tribe 

[67.  68.  105.  106.] 

Fifth  Declension. 

176.  Nouns  which  have  ei  or  6i  in  the  genitive 

from  es  in  the  nominative  are  of  the  Fifth  Declension. 

The  Stem  of  nouns  of  the  Fifth  Declension  ends  in  e,  which 
appears  in  all  the  cases. 


Singular. 

Norn. 

di'  es,   a  day 

res,  a  thing 

Gen. 

di  e'  1,   of  a  day 

re'  i,   of  a  thing 

Dat. 

di  e'  i,   to  a  day 

r6'  i,    to  a  thing 

Ace. 

di'  em,   a  day 

rem,  a  thing 

Voc. 

di'  es,    0  day 

res,  0  thing 

Abl. 

di'  e,   with  a  day 

re,  with  a  thing 
Plural. 

Norn. 

di'  es,   days 

res,  things 

Gen. 

d!  e'  rum,    of  days 

re'  rum,   of  things 

Dat. 

di  e'  bus,   to  days 

re'  bus,  io  things 

Ace. 

di'  es,   days 

res,  things 

Voc. 

dV  es,  0  days 

res,  0  things 

Abl. 

di  e'  bus,   with  days         re'  bus,   with  things 

—    44    — 

Examples  for  Practice: 
facies,  -ei,  the  face  series,  -ei,  a  series 

effigies,  -ei,  a  likeness  superficies,  -el,  a  surface 

spes,  -ei,  hope  fides,  -ei,  faith 

glacies,  -ei,  ice  progenies,  -ei,  offspring 

177.  Of  all  the  nouns  of  the  Fifth  Declension  only  two  are  com- 
plete in  the  plural,  viz.:  dies  and  res. 

178.  The  e  of  ei  in  the  genitive  and  dative  is  long  when 
preceded  by  a  vowel,  as:  di-e-i,  and  short  when  preceded  by  a  con- 
sonant, as:  fi-de-i. 

Riile  of  Gender. 

179.  All  Nouns  of  this  declension  are  feminine,  ex- 
cept meridies,  mid-day^  and  the  plural  of  dies,  a  day, 
which  are  always  masculine. 

ISO,  In  the  singular,  dies  is  usually  masculine,  but  sometimes 
feminine,  especially  in  phrases  indicating  a  fixed  time,  or  time  in 
general,  as:  constituta  die,  on  the  appointed  day. 

[69.  70.  105.  106.] 

Irregular  Nouns. 

181.  The  Latin  has  only  a  few  Indeclinable  Nouns; 

viz.: 

fas,  right  manS,  morning 

nefas,  wrong  nihil,  nothing 

instar,  an  image,  kind  pondo,  (lit.  in  weight),  pounds 

necesse,  necessary  opus,  need 

besides  the  names  of  the  Latin  and  Greek  letters,  as:  A,  D,  alpha, 
delta,  and  some  foreign  words,  as:  sinapl,  mustard. 

182.  Some  nouns  are  Defective  in  Case,  ^.  e.,  they 
want  one  or  more  cases. 

The  commonest  of  them  are: 
(dicio),  sway,  Norn.  sing,  wanting, 
fors,  chance,  only  in  Norn.  &  AM.  sing,  forte,  by  chance. 
(frux),  fruit,  Nom.  sing,  wanting, 
grates,  thanks,  only  in  Nom.  &  Ace.  plur. 

impetus,  attack,  only  in  Nom.,  Ace.  &  Abl.  sing.  &  Nom.  <fe  Ace.  plur. 
infitias,  denial,  only  in  Ace.  with  ire,  as:   infitias  ire,  to  deny. 


—    45    — • 

n5mo,  no  one,  only  in  Dat.  &  Ace.  — Gen.  &  AW.  supplied  by  nullius, 

iiullO. 
(ops),  aid,  Norn.  sing,  wanting;  plur.  opes,  wealth,  entire, 
(prex),    prayer,  only    in    Dat.  &  Abl.   sing,   preci,   prece;  —  plur. 

prices,  prayers,  entire, 
(sordes),  fllth,  only  Aco.  &  Abl.  sing,  sordem,  sorde;  plural  entire, 
(spons),  will,  only  in  Abl.  sing,  sponte,  as:  mea  sponte,  of  my  own 

accord. 
venum,  sale,  only  in  Ace.  sing,  as:  venum  dare,  to  put  up  for  sale. 
(verber),  whip,  only  in  Abl.  sing,  verbere;  plur.  verbera,  whipping. 
(vix  or  vicis),  change,  only  in  Gen.,  Ace.  &  Abl.  sing,  (vicis,  vicera, 

vice).    In  the  plural,  only  the  Genitive  is  wanting. 
vis,  force,  only  in  Nom.,  Ace.  &  Abl.  sing.  —  Plural  entire. 

183.  Of  many  verbal  nouns  in  siis  or  tiis  of  the  Fourth  De- 
clension, only  the  Ablative  singular  is  used;  as:  jussfi  meO,  by  my 
command;  concessu,  impulsu,  permissu,  rogatu  meo. 

184.  The  Genitive  Plural  of  many  monosyllabic  words  does  not 
occur;  such  are: 

cos,  cor,  fax,  lux,  os,  pax,  ros,  sal,  sol,  ttis,  v6r. 

185.  Monosyllabic  neuters,  such  as:  aes,  jus,  rus,  are  found 
only  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative  Plural:  aera,  jura,  rCira. 

186.  Defective  in  Number  are  those  which  want 
either  the  singular  or  the  plural. 

187.  Nouns  used  in  the  Singular  only:  Sing-ularia  tantum. 

Some  nouns,  from  the  nature  of  the  things  meant,  have  no  plural, 
as:  justitTa,  justice;  fames,  hunger;  aurum,  gold.  There  are  also 
other  nouns  which  lack  the  plural,  without  any  obvious  reason,  as: 
specimen,  a  sample;  vesper,  evening;  meridies,  mid-day;  ver, 
spring. 

188.  Nouns  used  in  the   Plural    only:    Pluralia   tantum. 

The  commonest  of  them  are: 

First  Declension. 
delTcTae,  -arum,  delight  insidiae,  -arQin,  an  ambush 

dlvitiae,  -arum,  riches  nundinae,  -arum,  market-day 

exsgquiae,  -arum,  a  funeral      nuptiae,  -arGm,  a  wedding 
feriae,  -arum,  holidays  tenebrae,  -arum,  darkness 

indutiae,  -arum,  a  truce  AthSnae,  -artim,  Athens 


—     46     — 


Second  Declension, 
arma,  -orum,  armSj  weapons     llberi,  -orGm,  children 
fasti,  -oruin,  an  almanac  postgri,  -orum,  descendants 

gemlni,  -orfim,  twins  Delphi,  -orum,  Delphi 

Third  Declension. 
Alpes,  -iiini,  the  Alps  fauces,  -mm,  the  throat 

majOres,  ~um,  ancestors  mhneSj-iunLjthe  shades  of  the  dead 

189.  Some  words  have,  besides  the  general  mean- 
ing for  both  numbers,  a  special  meaning  for  the 
Plural. 

Singular, 
aedes,  -is,  a  temple 
aqua,  -ae,  water 
auxilium,  -i,  help 
castrum,  -i,  a  fort 
cOpia,  -ae,  abundance 
finis,  -,  an  end,  limit 
fortuna,  -ae,  fortune 
gratia,  -ae,  favor 
littera,  -ae,  a  letter  (of  the  al- 
phabet) 
impedlmentuin,  -i,  a  hindrance 
opera,  -ae,  a  task;  service 
(ops)  opTs,  help;  power 
pars,  -tis,  a  part 

rostrum,  -i,  a  beak 

sal,  sails,  salt 


Plural, 
aedes,  -ium,  a  house 
aquae, -arum,  medicinal  springs 
auxilia,  -orum,  auxiliary  troops 
castra,  -orum,  a  camp 
copiae,  -arum,  troops 
fines,  '-ium,  borders;  a  territory 
fortunae,  -arum,  wealth 
gratiae,  -arum,  favors;  thanks 
litterae, -arum,  an  epistle;  learn- 

ing;  literature 
impedimenta,  -orum,  baggage 
operae,  -arum,  workmen 
opes,  -um,  wealth 
partes,   -ium,    a   part   (on  the 

stage);  a  party 
rostrS.,  -orum,  a  speaker^s  plat- 
form 
sales,  -ium,  witty  sayings 


100.  Some  nouns  have  two  or  more  forms  of  De- 
clension (Heteroclites).     Such  are: 

lauriis,  -i  laurus,    us,  a  laurel-tree 

gventus,  -Us  gventiim,  -i,  an  'event 

luxuria,  -ae  luxuries,  -ei,  luxury 

materia,  -ae  materies,  -ei,  matter 

segnitia,  -ae  segnities,  -ei,  slothfulness 

elephanttis,  -i  elephas,  -antis,  an  elephant 

plebs,  -is  plebes,  -ei,  the  common  people 

vas,  vasis,  a  vessel,  etc.  etc  [io7, 108.} 


—     47     -- 

191.  The  following  have  the  plural  in  a  gender 
different  from  that  of  the  singular  (Heterogeneous 
Nouns) : 

Singular.  Plural, 

jociis,  -T,  a  jokey  jest  joci,  -orum,  &  joc^,  -orum,  jokes 

IQcus,  -1,  a  p.ace  \  !?'l'  -^5"J^'  i>«f  ^^^^  (^^  ^ooks) 

\  loca,  -orum,  j)^(^ces 

margarita,  -ae,  a  pearl  \  ^ar|arlta,  -oriim  [  ^''"'  '* 
caelum,  -i,  heaven  caeli,  -oriim,  heavens 

epiiliim,  -i,  a  banquet  gpulae,  -arum,  a  meal 

balneum,  -i,  a  bath  balneae,  -arum,    baths,  a  bathhouse 

frentim,  -T,  a  bridle  frgiii,  -orum,  &  fr6na,  -orum,  a  bit 

\107.   lOS.] 

192.  Sometimes  a  Noun  in  combination  with  an  adjective  takes 
a  special  signification,  both  parts  being  regularly  inflected,  as:  jus- 
jurandum,  an  oath;  rgspublica,  a  commonwealth. 

Singular. 


an  oath 

a  commonwealth 

Norn. 

jusjuran'diim 

res  pu'  bit  cS 

Gen. 

ju  risju  ran'di 

re  i  pu'  bli  cae 

Dat. 

ju  rijii  ran'  do 

re  1  pu'  bit  cae 

Ace. 

jCisju  ran'  diim 

rem  pu'bli  cam 

Voc. 

jus  ju  ran'  dum 

res  pu'bli  ca 

Abl. 

ju  reju  ran'  do 

re  pu'  bli  ca 

Plural. 

Nom, 

ju  raju  ran'  da 

res  pu'  bli  cae 

Gen. 

re  rum  pu  bli  ca'  rum 

Dat. 

rebus  pu'blicis 

Ace. 

ju  raju  ran' da 

res  pu'  bli  cas 

Voc. 

res  pu'  bli  cae 

Abl. 

re  bus  pu'  bli  cTs    r^^g 

Proper  Names. 

193.  The  Romans  regularly  had  three  names,  as: 
Marcus  TuUTus  Cicero. 

194.  Marcus,  the  praenomen,  corresponded  to  our  Christian 
name;  Tulllus,  the  nomen,  was  the  name  of  the  gens  or  clanship; 
the  eognomien,  or  surname^  as  Cicero,  indicated  the  particular  family 
to  which  one  belonged.    Another  species  of  surname,  agnSmen, 


—     48     — 

was  some  significant  epithet,  as:  Publius  Cornelius  Scipio  Africa- 
nus,  from  the  conquest  of  Carthage  in  Africa. 

195.  The  three  names,  however,  were  not  always  used,  com- 
monly two.  The  Romans,  when  addressing  a  person,  generally  used 
the  praenomen. 

196.  Women  had  no  personal  names,  but  were  known  only  by 
that  of  their  gens  with  a  feminine  termination,  as:  Julia,  the  daugh- 
ter of  Gains  Julius  Caesar, 

197.  The  commonest  praenomens  are  thus  abbreviated: 

A.  =  Aulus  L.  ==  Lucius  Q.  (Qu.)  =  Quintus 

App.  =  Appius  M.  =  Marcus  S.  (Sex.)  ^  SextuB 

C.  (G.)  ==  Gains  M'.  =  Manius  Serv.  =  Servius 
Cn.  (Gn.)  ==  Gnaeus  Mam.  =  Mamercus       Sp.  =  Spurius 

D.  =  Decimus  N.  (Num.)=Numerius  T.  =  Titus 

K.  =  Kaeso  P.  =  Publius  Ti.  (Tib.)  =  Tiberius. 

Adjectives. 

198.  Adjectives  and  Participles  are  in  general  de- 
clined like  substantives.  They  distinguish  gender  by 
different  forms  in  the  same  word,  corresponding  with 
their  substantives  in  Number,  Gender,  and  Case. 

199.  Some  Adjectives  denote  each  gender  by  a  different  termi- 
nation, and  consequently  have  three  terminations,  viz.: 

Of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions: 
Qs,  a,  tim,  as:  bontis,  ^a,  -um, .  good  (see  72.) 

er,  a,  urn,  as:-!^^^^^'  -^'  "^^^  /^^^  (^^^  ^^0 

I  niger,  -rS,  -rum,  black  (see  76.) 

Or,  a,  um,  only  satur,  -a,  -iim,  sated  (see  66.) 

[21,  22,  25,  26,} 

Of  the  Third  Declension: 
gr,  is,  g,  as:  acgp,  -ris,  -r§,  sharp  (see  137.)     ,^^  ^^, 

'         [oo.  OO.J 

200.  Some  Adjectives  of  the  Tliird  Declension  have  two  termina- 
tions —  one  for  the  masculine  and  feminine,  and  the  other  for  the 
neuter;  they  end  in: 

Is,  e,  as:  tristis,  -e,  sad  (see  139.) 

dr,  fis,  as:  diirior,  -Qs,  harder  (see  139.) 

[5S.  S6.   73,  74,] 


—    49    — 

201,  Some  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension   have   only  one 
termination  which  is  common  to  all  genders j  they  end  in: 

1,   as:  vigil,  wakeful  (see  90.) 
r,  as:  pauper,  poor  (see  95,) 
s,  as:  prQdens,  sensible  (see  14:1,) 
X,  as:  felix,  happy  (see  14:1,) 

[57—60,] 

Irregular  Adjectives. 

202,  The  following  Adjectives  with  their  Compounds  have  the 
Genitive  singular  in  iGs,  and  the  Dative  in  i  for  all  genders  (see  77.). 

alius,  -a,  -tid,  another  ullus,  -S,  -um,  any 

nulltis,  -a,  -iim,  no  unus,  -a,  -um,  one 

solGs,  ~a,  -uni,  alone  alt^r,  -&,  -um,  ^Tie  other  (of  two) 

totus,  -3;,  -dm,  whole  iitSr,  -r3r,  -rmn,  which  (of  two) 

neutgr,  -r3»,  -rum,  neither 


alona 


Like  ut^r  are  declined  its  compounds,  as  uterque,  iitraquS, 
utrumqug,  either.  Of  alteruter,  the  one  or  the  other  of  the  two, 
either  both  parts  are  declined;  alter  ut6r,  altera  utra,  alt^rum 
utrum;  or  only  the  latter:  alt6riiter,  alt^rutra,  alterutrum. 

[71.  72,] 

203,  Many  Adjectives  of  one  termination,  especially  such  as 
end  in  er,  §s,  6r,  5s,  fex,  are  not  used  in  the  Nominative,  Accusative, 
and  Vocative  plural  of  the  neuter  gender,  viz.: 

dgggngr,  ~is,  degenerate  comp6s,  -5tis,  capable 

pauper,  -is,  poor  artlfex,  -icis,  artificial 

ales,  -itis,  winged  inops,  inopis,  needy 

bipes,  -edis,  two-footed  rSdux,  -ucis,  returning 

dives,  -itis,  rich  sons,  -tis,  guilty 

sospes,  -itis,  safe  supplex,  -icis,  suppliant 
concolor,  -oris,  of  the  same  co-    trux,  -ucis,  fierce 

mgmor,  -is,  mindful  {lor    vigil,  -is,  wakeful 

204.  Of  ceteri,  -ae,  -S.,  the  rest,  the  Nominative  singular  mascu- 
line is  not  used,  singuli,  -ae,  -&,  one  at  a  time;  pauci,  -ae,  -3», 
few;  and  pleriqug,  pl^raeque,  pleraquS  are  not  used  in  the  singular. 


Singular. 

m. 

/. 

n. 

Norn. 

so'  lus 

so'ia 

S5'  lum, 

Gen. 

so  If  lis 

so  li'  lis 

SO  li'  tis 

Dat. 

so'  li 

SO'll 

so'li 

—     50     — 

205,  The  following  Adjectives  are  Indeclinable: 

frugl,  frugal  t6t,  so  many 

n6quam,  worthless  quot,  how  many 

206,  The  Substantives:  victSr,  victrix,  conqueror,  and  ult6r, 
ultrix,  avenger^  are  also  used  as  Adjectives  — victorious,  revenge- 
ful—  and,  in  poetry,  they  admit  even  a  neuter  of  the  plural,  as: 
arma  victrlcia,  victorious  arms. 

Comparison. 

207,  Adjectives  have  three  degrees  of  Comparison: 
the  Positive,  the  Comparative,  and  the  Superlative. 

208,  The  Positive  Degree  is  expressed  by  the  adjective  in  its 
simple  form,  as:  duriis,  hard, 

209,  The  Comparative  Degree  ends  in  or  for  the  masculine 
and  feminine,  and  in  us  for  the  neuter,  and  is  formed  by  changing 
the  genitive  ending  i  or  is  of  the  positive  into  ior,  iiis;  thus: 


Positive. 

Genitive. 

Comparative. 

excelsus,  high 

excels! 

excelsior,  excelsius 

iTber,  free 

liberi 

liberior,  liberius 

pulcher,  beautiful 

pulchri 

pulchrior,  pulchriiis 

acer,  sharp 

acris 

acrior,  acriiis 

l^vis,  light 

ievis 

levior,  levius 

sagax,  sagacious 

sagacis 

sagacior,  sagaciQs 

prudens,  prudent 

prCidentis 

prudentior,  prudontius 

210,  Comparatives  are  of  the  Third  Declension;  they  are  de- 
clined like  duridr,  duritis  (see  139,) 

211,  The  Superlative  is  formed  by  changing  the  genitive  end- 
ing i  or  is  of  the  positive  into  issimiis,  issima,  issimum;  thus: 

Positive.  Genitive.  Superlative, 

pretiosus,  valuable  prStTosi  pretiosissimus 

dlligens,  diligent  dllTgentis  diligentissimtls 

212,  Superlatives  are  declined  like  bonus,  -a,-uin  of  the  First 
and  Second  Declensions. 

213,  Adjectives  in  er  add  rimus  to  the  positive  to  form  the 
Superlative,  as: 

pulcher,  beautiful,  pulcherrimus;  ac6r,  sharp,  acerrimus. 


—    61    — 


214,  vStus,  old^  has  Superlative  vSterrlmtls,  and  matHriis, 
rijpe^  matarissinius  and  sometimes  maturriniiis. 

215.  Six  adjectives  in  ilis  form  their  Superlative  by  changing 
the  ending  is  into  limus,  as:  facilis,  facillimus.    These  are: 

facilis,  easy^  facillimiis  difflcilis,  difficulty  difficillimtis 

similis,  like^  simillimtis  dissimilis,  unlike^  dissimillimiis 

gracilis,  slender^  gracilliinus    humilis,  low^  humillimiis 

216.  Compound  adjectives  in  dicus,  ficiis,  and  vdliis  form 
their  Comparative  and  Superlative  by  changing  lis  into  entior, 
entissimus,  as: 

b^nevoliis,  benevolent         b^nSvolentiop        b6nev61entissimiis 
bengficQs,  beneficent  beneflcentior         bgngficentissimus 

magnificus,  magnificent    magnificentior      magnificentissimus 

217,  In  like  manner  are  compared: 
gggnus  (ggens),  needy         egentior 
providiis,  jjrovident  provldentior 


egentissimQs 
providentissinius 


218.  Adjectives  in  Qs,   preceded  by  a  vowel,  are  compared 
by  means  of  magis  and  maxime,   more  and  most: 

dubiiis,  doubtful  mag^is  dubius         maxime  diibius 

219.  But  adjectives  in  quQs  are  regular: 

antlqutis,  old  antlquior  antiquissiniiis 

[75-76-.] 

Irregular  and  Defective  Comparison. 

220.  The  following  adjectives  have  different  words  for  expres- 
sing the  different  degrees  of  comparison : 

bonus,  good  m61T6r,  better 

malus,  bad  P^jor,  worse 

magnus,  great  major,  greater 

parvus,  little  minor,  less^  lesser 

multus,  much  plus,  more 

221.  plus,  more^  is  thus  declined: 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn.  &.  Ace.     plus  plu'  res  plu'  rS  (plu'  ri  a) 

Gen.  plu'  ris  plu'  ri  iim  plu'  ri  iim 

Dat.  &.  Abl.         _  plu'  ri  bus         plu'  ri  bus 

complurgs,  several^  very  many,  is  declined  like  plurfis. 


optimus,  best 
pessimus,  worst 
maximiis,  greatest 
minimus,  least 
plurimiis,  most 


62  — 


222,  Mark  the  degrees  of  the  two  Indeclinable  adjectives: 

ngquam,  worthless  nSquior  ngquissimus 

frugl,  frugal  frugalior  frrigalisslmus 

223,  The  following  adjectives  have  two  Irregular  Superlatives: 

extgrus,  outward  exterior,  outer  extrSmus,  (extlraiis),  outmost 

infgriis,  below  inferior,  lower  infimiis,  imus,  lowest 

^^  .  ,  , -  ..      {latter  postremus,   )   last 

posterns,  next  posterior,  |^^^^^  postumus;  }  ?ates< 

siip^ms,  above        superior,  upper      supr^mns,  summm,  highest 


224,  The  following  adjectives  are  Defective  in  their  comparison : 
1.  Positive  wanting. 


Comparative, 
citerior,  viore  on  this  side 
interior,  inner 
prior,  prior,  former 
propior,  nearer 
ulterior,  ulterior,  further 
ocior,  swifter 
potior,  preferable 
deterior,  worse 


Superlative, 
citlmus,  most  on  this  side 
intimus,  innermost,  intimate 
primus,  foremost,  first 
proximus,  nearest 
ultimus,  furthest,  last 
ocissimus,  swiftest 
potissimiis,  most  important 
deterrimus,  worst 


II.  Comparative  wanting. 
Positive.  Superlative. 

diversus,  different  diversissimus,  most  different 

falsus,  false  falsissimus,  falsest 

incliitus,  renowned  inclutissimus,  most  renowned 

invitus,  unwilling  invitissTmus,  most  unwilling 

noviis,  new  novissimus,  latest,  last 

j^acer,  sacred  sacerrimus,  most  sacred 

vetiis,  old  v^terrimiis,  oldest 

III.  Superlative  wanting. 
Positive.  Comparative. 

juvgnis,  young  janI5r,  younger 

sgnex,  old  senior,  older 

alacer,  gay  alacrior,  gayer 

longinquus,  far  longinquior,  farther 

propinquus,  near  propinciuior,  nearer 

popularis,  popular  popularior,  more  popular 

salutaris,  salutary  saltitarior,  more  salutary 

[*77.  7«.) 


-     53    — 

225,  Some  Adjectives  are,  by  their  meaning,  excluded  from 
comparison.  Among  these  are  certain  words  implying  matter, 
time,  place,  and  person,  as:  ferrous,  iron;  hodiernus,  of  to-day; 
R5manuSj  Roman;  paternus,  paternal;  also  words  denoting  the 
lowest  or  highest  degree  of  a  quality,  as:  singiilaris,  alone  of  its 
kind,  and  Compounds  with  per  and  prae;  but  praeclarus,  re- 
nowned, and  pertinax,  very  tenacious,  are  found  in  the  Compara- 
tive and  Superlative. 

226,  Again,  there  are  Adjectives  which,  from  their  form,  or 
without  any  obvious  reason,  are  incapable  of  comparison,  viz.: 

1.  Adjectives  in  Gs,  after  a  vowel  (see  218,). 

2.  Compound  Adjectives  containing  a  verb  or  a  substantive,  as: 
particeps,  sharing;  inops,  needy;  except  Compounds  of  dico,  faciO, 
volo  (see  216,),  and  Compounds  of  ars,  cor,  mens,  as:  iners,  un- 
skilled;  concors,  harmonious;  amens,  senseless;  which  are  regularly 
compared. 

3.  Adjectives    in    ictis,    Imtls,   InQs,   iniis,  orGs,  tilus,  as: 

mSdicus,  moderate;  legitimus,  lawful;  dlutiniis,  lasting;  matutlnus, 
early;  canorus,  melodious;  sedulus,  busy, 

4.  Many  Adjectives  which  cannot  be  classed  under  distinct  head- 
ings: 

caducus,  drooping  m^rus,  mere 

ciciir,  tame  m6di6cris,  middling 

curvus,  curved  m6m6r,  mindful 

feriis,  wild  mirus,  wonderful 

gnarus,  skilful  par,  equal 

impiger,  active  impar,  unequal 

lacer,  torn  rudis,  rude 

lassus,  wearied  trCix,  fierce 

miitilus,  maimed  vagus,  vagrant 

227,  Participles,  when  used  as  Adjectives,  are  regularly  com- 
pared, as:  doctiis,  leaimed,  doctior,  doctissimus;  abstinens,  abstinent, 
abstmentior,  abstinentissimus. 

Adverbs    formed    from    Adjectives  are  compared    as  follows 


(see  440): 

carus,  dear: 

care, 

carius. 

carissimS 

mis6r,  wretched: 

misers, 

misgruis, 

miserrime 

16vis,  light: 

16vlter, 

levius, 

i^vissime 

—     54     — 


228. 

simplest 
many  ? 
1 
2 

3 
4 
5 
6 


9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
30 
40 
50 
60 
70 
80 
90 
100 
101 
200 
300 
400 


Numerals. 
Numeral  Adjectives. 
Cardinal    Numerals    express    number    in   its 
form,  and  answer  the   question   quot?  how 


I  Uniis,  una,  unflm 

II  du6,  duae,  du6 

III  tres,  tria 

lY  quattiior 

V  quinque 

VI  sex 

VII  septum 

VIII  octo 

IX  n6v6m 

X  decern 

XI  undecim 

XII  diiodecim 

XIII  tredecim   (d6cem  et  tres) 

XTV  quattuordecim  (decern  et  qnattiior) 

XV  quind^cim  (d6cem  6t  quinque) 

XVI  sedgcim  (decern  et  sex) 

XVII  septendecim  (decern  et  septum) 

XVIII  duodevlgintl   (dec6m  6t  octo) 

XIX  undeviginti  (decern  6t  nov6m) 

XX  vigintl 

XXI  unus  6t  vigintl  or  vTgintT  fin  us 

XXII  duo  et  vigintl  or  vigintl  duo 

XXIII  tr6s  et  vigintl  or  vigintl  tr6s 

XXX  triginta 

XXXX  or  XL  quadraginta 

L  quinquaginta 

LX  sexaginta 

LXX  septuaginta 

LXXX  octoginta 

LXXXX  or  XC  nonaginta 

C  centum 

CI  centum  et  uniis  or  centum  ilnus 

CC  ducenti,  -ae,  -& 

ceo  trgcenti,  -ae,  -S, 

CCCC  quadringenti,  -ae,  -a 


—     55 


500 

D  or  10 

quingenti,  ~ae,  -& 

600 

DC  or  TOO 

sescenti,  -ae,  -S, 

700 

DCC  or  lOCC 

septingenti,  -ae,  -& 

800 

DCCC 

octingenti,  -ae,  -3. 

900 

DCCCC 

nongenti,  -ae,  -S. 

1000 

M  or  CIO 

mills 

2000 

MM  or  IIM 

duo  mllia 

5000 

100 

quinqug  milia 

6000 

lOOM 

sex  mllia 

10  000 

CCIOO 

decern  milia 

50  000 

1000 

quinquaginta  milia 

100  000 

CCCIOOO 

centum  milia 

000  000 

CCCCIOOOO 

decigs  centena  mllia 

[milia 


229.  The  three  first  are  declined;  the  rest,  as  far  as  one  hun- 
dred, are  indeclinable.  Hundreds,  as:  ducenti,  ae,  a,  trecenti, 
ae,  S»,  etc.,  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

unus,  una,  unum,  one 


Singular. 

Plural. 

m.          /.             n. 

m. 

/. 

n. 

N. 

u'  nils    tl'  na      tl'  niim 

ii'ni 

u'  nae 

fi'na 

G. 

GnT'iis  uni'iis  fi  ni'  us 

u  no'  rtim 

u  na'  ruin  u  no'  rum 

D. 

u'  ni       u'  ni        u'  ni 

u'  nis 

u'  nis 

G'  nis 

A. 
V. 
A. 

u'  niim  H'  nam  u'  niirn 

u'  nos 

u'  nas 

u'na 

a' no      u'na       u' n5 

u'  nis 

u'nis 

Q'nis 

The  plural  of  Gnus  occurs  only  with  such  nouns  as  have  no  sin- 
gular, as:  una  castra,  one  camp;  unae  nuptlae,  one  marriage. 


m, 
N.  du'o 
G.  du  o'  riiiu 
du  o'  bus 

du' OS,  du'o 


duo,  diiae,  duo,  two 

/ 
du'  ae 
du  a'  rQm 
du  a'  bus 
du'  as 


n. 
dii'6 

du  o'  rum 
du  o'  bus 

du'o 


tres,  tria,  three 
m.  <&f. 


tres 
tri'  um 
tri'  bus 
tres 


n. 
tri' a 
tri'  Om 
tri'  bus 
tri' a 


du  o'  bus        du  a'  bus       du  o'  bQs 


tri 'bus        tri'  bus 


ambo,  ambae,  ambo,  both,  is  declined  like  duo. 

230,  In  the  singular  mille  is  an  Indeclinable  Adjective;  in  the 

plural  it  is  a  Substantive  and  takes  the  genitive,  as:  mille  milites, 
a  thousand  soldiers;  duo  mllia  mllitiim,  two  thousand  soldiers. 


—     56     — 

231.  From  20  to  100,  the  compound  numerals  stand  in  the 
same  order  as  the  English,  as:  viginti  unus,  twenty-one^  or  anus  6t 
vIgintL  one  and  twenty. 

232.  From  100  on,  units  follow  tens,  tens  hundreds,  etc.,  as  in 
English;  6t,  andy  is  either  omitted,  or  used  only  between  the  two 
highest  denominations,  as: 

centum  6t  quinquaginta  or  centum  quinquaginta,  150 
centum  et  quinquaginta  tres  or  centum  quinquaginta  trGs,  153. 

233.  sexcenti  is  used  indefinitely  for  any  large  number,  as  one 
thousand  in  English.  [79,  ^o.] 

234.  Ordinal  Numerals  denote  a  series,  and  answer 
the  question  quotus  ?   which  one  in  the  series  ? 


1st, 

primus, -a, -um  (pri6p,--as)          23d, 

tertius  6t  vlc6simus 

2d, 

secundus  (altSr) 

30th, 

tricesimus   or  triggsi- 

3d, 

tertius 

mus 

4th, 

quartus 

40th, 

quadragesimus 

5th, 

quintus 

50th, 

quinquagesimiis 

6th, 

sextiis 

60th, 

sexagesimus 

7th, 

Septimus 

70th, 

septuagesimiis 

8th, 

octavus 

80th, 

octogesimus 

9th, 

nonus 

90th, 

nonagesimus 

10th, 

dgcimiis 

100th, 

centesimus 

11th, 

undgcimus 

101st, 

centesimus  (6t)  primus 

12th, 

diiodgcimus 

200th, 

ducentesimus 

13th, 

tertius  dgcimus 

300th, 

trgcentSsimus 

14th, 

quartus  d6cimus 

400th, 

quadringentesimus 

15th, 

quintus  d6cimus 

500th, 

quingentesimiis 

16th, 

sextus  dgcimiis 

600th, 

sescentesimiis 

17th, 

Septimus  dgcimus 

700th, 

septingentesimus 

18th, 

octavus  dgcimus  or  diio- 

800th, 

octingentesimus 

devlcesimus 

900th, 

nongentesimus 

19th, 

nonus  decimus  or  unde- 

1000th, 

millesTmus 

vicesimus 

2000th, 

bis  millSsimus 

20th, 

vicesimus  or  vigesimus 

3000th, 

t6r  millesimiis 

21st, 

unus   6t   vicesimus  or 

10  000th, 

dgcles  milleslmils 

vlcesimiis  primus 

100  000th, 

centies  millesimus 

22d, 

altSr  6t   vicesimus    or 

1  000  000th, 

d6ci6s    centies    mill6- 

vicesimus  secundus 

simus 

5t     — 


235.  All  Ordinals  are  adjectives  in  tls,  &,  tim;  except  pri6r, 
prius,  firsts  which  is  used  instead  of  primus  in  speaking  of  two\ 
alter  is  often  used  for  secundus.  In  compounding  Ordinals,  observe 
the  same  practice  as  with  Cardinals  (see  231). 

236.  Ordinals  with  pars,  part,  expressed  or  understood,  may 
be  used  to  denote  fractions,  as:  tertia  pars,  a  third;  quarta  pars,  a 
fourth;  duae  quintae,  two  fifths,  ^g^^  ^^^j 

237.  Distributive  Numerals  answer  the  question 
quotem?  how  many  at  a  time?  and  are  declined  like 
the  plural  of  bonus. 

1.  singuli,  -ae,  -3-,  one  by  one 

2.  bini,  -ae,  -3,  two  by  two,  etc. 

3.  tern!  (trini) 


4.  quaterni 

5.  qulni 

6.  sen! 

7.  septeni 

8.  octoni 

9.  noveni 

10.  deni 

11.  undenT 

12.  duodeni 

13.  tenu  dSnl 

14.  quaterni  deni 

15.  quIni  deni 

16.  sen!  deni 


22.  vic6ui  binI 

23.  vic6ni  tern! 
30.  trlcenl 
40.  quadragSni 
50.  quinquaggni 
60.  sexageni 
70.  septuageni 
80.  octogeni 
90.  nonagem 

100.  centeni 

200.  diiceni 

300.  treceni 

400.  quadringgni 

500.  qulngeiii 

600.  sexcSnl 

700.  septinggnl 

800.  octingSnl 

900.  nongSni 
1000.  singula  milia 
2000.  bina  mIlia 
3000.  terna  milia,  etc. 


17.  septeni  den! 

18.  octoni  deni  or  duodSvIcgni 

19.  noveni  deni  or  undSvicenl 

20.  viceni 

21.  viceni  singuli 

238.   Distributives  are  used  as  follows: 

In  the  meaning  of  so  many  a  piece  or  on  each  side,  as:  Scipio 
et  Hannibal  cum  singulis  interpretibus  congressi  sunt,  Scipio  and 
Hannibal  met,  with  an  interpreter  on  each  side; 

In  multiplication,  as:  bis  bina,  twice  two; 

Instead  of  Cardinals,  when  a  noun  is  plural  in  form,  but  singular 
in  meaning,  as:  bina  castra,  two  camps.  But  with  these,  uni,  -ae,  -3- 
is  used  instead  of  singuli,  and  trin!  instead  of  term;  as:  tinae  Utt0- 
rae,  one  letter;  trinae  littSrae,  three  letters. 


—     58     — 

239.  Multiplicative  Numerals  answer  the  question 
quotuplex?  how  many  fold?  They  are  adjectives  in 
ex,  icis. 

simplex,  -icis,  single  quincuplex,  fivefold 

duplex,  twofold,  double  septemplex,  sevenfold 

triplex,  threefold,  triple  decemplex,  tenfold  i 

quadruplex,  fourfold  centuplex,  a  hundredfold  1 

240.  Proportional  Numerals  answer  the  question 
quotuplus?  how  many  times  as  great?  and  are  adjec- 
tives in  us,  ft,  uni.     Only  a  few  are  commonly  used. 

simplus,  -a,  -flm,  simple  quadruplus,  four  times  as  great 

diiplus,  twice  as  great  septuplus,  seven  times  as  great 

tripliiSj  three  imes  as  great         octuplus,  eight  times  as  great 

Numeral  Adverbs. 

241.  Numeral  Adverbs  answer  the  question  quoti- 
ens?  how  often?  Being  adverbs,  they  are  indeclinable. 

1.  s6m61,  once  21.  semel  St  vicTes 

2.  bis,  twice  22.  bis  et  vicies 

3.  ter,  thrice  23.  t6r  et  vleies 

4.  quater,  four  times,  etc.  30.  tricles 

5.  quinquies  40.  quadragies 

6.  sexies  50.  quinquagies 

7.  septies  60.  sexagies 

8.  octies  70.  septuagies 

9.  n6vi5s  80.  octOgles 

10.  dScles  90.  nonagles 

11.  undecTSs  100.  centles 

12.  duodScigs  200.  ducentigs 

13.  terdecies  (tr6dgci6s)  300.  tr6eenti6s 

14.  quaterdecies  (quattuordecles)  400.  quadringentigs 

15.  quinquigsdecies  (quindeci^s)  500.  quingenties  " 

16.  sexiesdecles  600.   sescenties 

17.  septiesdgcies  700.   septingenties 

18.  duodgvicies  (octies  dScigs)  800.  octingentigs 

19.  undevlcles  (novles  dScles)  900.  nongentles 

20.  vicieB  1000,  mines 


—    59      - 

2000.  bis  m!lT6s  100  000.  centigs  mili6s 

3000.  ter  milies  1  000  000.  milies  miligs 

10  000.  dgcles  mines  2  000  000.  bis  mllies  milles 

242.  The  Accusative  and  Ablative  neuter  of  Ordinals  are  used 
as  Adverbs  of  order,  thus: 

primum,  prirao,  flrst^  at  first; 

(secundum,  s6cundo)  commonly:  itSriim,  secondly; 

tertium,  tertiO,  thirdly. 

[81,  82,\ 

Pronouns. 

243.  Pronouns  distinguish  the  Person  speaking,  or 
the  First  Person,  from  the  Person  spoken  to,  or  the 
Second  Person,  and  the  object  spoken  of.  Third  Person. 
Accordingly,  we  have  pronouns  of  the  First,  Second, 
and  Third  persons  which  are  used  either  substantively 
or  adjectively,  or  both  substantively  and  adjectively. 

244.  Strictly  speaking,  the  Pronouns  of  the  First 
and  Second  Persons  are  the  only  Personal  Pronouns, 
because  they  apply  to  Persons,  and  to  these  only. 

245.  The  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  First  Person  are: 

Possessive. 
Singular. 


m6tis,  mSft,  mSum,  my 


Substantive. 

Norn. 

6'g6,    / 

Gen. 

mh'  T,   of  me 

Dat. 

mV  hi,   to  me 

Ace. 

me,  me 

Voc. 

— 

Abl. 

me,  from  me 

Norn. 

nos,  we 

Gen. 

no'  stram     ^^  ^^ 
no'  stri          "^ 

Dat 

no'  bis,  to  us 

Ace. 

nos,  us 

Voc. 

— 

Abl. 

no'  bis,  from  us 

Plural 


noster,  nostra,  nostrtlm,  our 


60 


246.  The  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  Second  Person  are: 


Substantive. 


Nom. 

tQ,   thou 

Gen. 

tii'i,  of  thee 

Dat. 

iV  bi,  to  thee 

Ace. 

te,  thee 

Voc. 

tu,  0  thou 

Abl. 

t6,  fi^om  thee 

Nom. 

vos,  ye  or  you 

Gen. 

ve' strum)     . 
ve'  strl     )   -^  ^ 

Dat 

vO'  bis,   to  you 

Ace. 

vos,  you 

Voc. 

vos,  0  ye  or  0  you 

Abl. 

vo'  bis,  /rom  2/0 w 

Singular. 


PossEssin. 


tutls,  tiia,  tuum,  ^/ty,  your 


Plural. 


vester,  vestrft,  vestrttm,  your 


The  Genitiyes  nostrum,  vestrtlm  are  used  partitively  in  reference 
to  number. 

247.  The  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  Third  Person 
(he,  she,  it,  they  J  are  wanting  in  Latin;  they  are  re- 
presented by  the  Determinative  is,  ea,  id,  he,  she,  it. 


Substantive. 

Possessive. 

Singular. 

m. 

/. 

n. 

N. 

is 

6' a 

id 

he,  shey  it 

G. 

6' jus 

6' jus 

6' jus 

of  him,  etc. 

{supplied  by  the  Gen.) 

D. 

g'l 

€'i 

e'i 

to,  for  him 

ejus,  hiSf  herSf 

A. 

6' urn 

6' am 

id 

him,  her,  it 

its 

A. 

6'o 

g'a 

e'o 

from,  by  him 

Plural. 

N.  1'  1,  6'  1       6'  ae            6'  a  they 

G.  e  o'  rum      6  a'  rum      e  o'  rum  of  them              eorum,  6ariim, 

D.  i'  IS,  g'  Is    V  Is,  g'  is    1'  Is,  6'  Is  to,  /or  them           ^Orum,  ^/leir 

A.   e'  OS            6'  as             €'  a  ^/lem                      or  ^/leir^ 

A.   ris,  6' Is    i'ls,  6' IS    i'ls,  6' is  from,  by  them 

Pronouns  of  the  Third  ferson,  froni  their  signification,  cannot 
have  a  Vocative. 


—     61     — 
248.  The  Reflexive  Pronoun  of  the  Third  Person  is: 

Substantive.  Possessive. 

Singular. 
Nom.  

Gen.  su' 1,   of  him  (self),  her  (self)  ^  it  (self J  vw       .w     .^ 

Dat.   sV  bi,  to  him(self),  her(self),  it(self)  '''t'w'sf  y/fo"^.^'       ' 

Ace.   se,  him(self),  her(self),  it(self)  ^^^'^^'  ^^^  ^^^ 
Abl.   se,  with  him(self),  her(self),  it(self) 


Nom. 


Plural. 


Gen.  SUM   of  them(selves)  ^.^     sua,suttm,  their 

Dat.  si'  bi,  to  them  (selves)  '        '  ' 

Ace.  se,  them  (selves) 

Abl.  se,  w;i</i  them(selves) 


own 


249,  Possessives  are  declined  like  Adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  Declensions;  but  meiis  has  the  Voc.  Smg.  Masc.  mi  (see  67). 

250,  From  nostSr  and  vestSr  come  the  Patrial  Adjectives: 
nostras,  -atis,  of  our  country;  vestras,  -atis,  of  your  country. 

251,  The  particle  -mSt  is  joined  for  emphasis  to  all  forms  of 
ego,  except  nostrum;  to  all  forms  of  tu,  except  tu  and  vestrum; 
to  sibi,  s6  and  the  forms  of  siuis;  as:  egomSt,  /  myself  -te  is 
joined  to  tu:  tutg,  yourself;  -pte  is  joined  to  the  Ablative  Singular 
of  the  Possessive,  as:  suapte  manCi,  by  his  own  hand;  se,  the 
Accusative  of  sui,  is  often  doubled,  as:  sese.  [;s?7.  28,  83,  84,} 

Pronouns  of  the  Third  Person. 
Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

252,  The  proper  Demonstratives  are: 

hie,  this;  ist§,  that;  ille,  that  (yonder). 
Singular.  Plural, 

hic,  haec,  h5c,  this  (of  mine) 


m. 

/. 

n. 

m.             f. 

n. 

N.  hic 

haec 

h5c 

hi             hae 

haec 

G.  huMus 

hu'jus 

hu'jus 

ho'  rum   ha'  rum 

ho'  rum 

D.  hii'ic 

hu'ic 

hu'  ic 

his           his 

his 

A.   hunc 

banc 

h8c 

hos           has 

haec 

A.   hoc 

hac 

hoc 

his           his 

his 

—     62     — 

istS,  ista,  isttld,  that  (of  yours) 

Singular.  Plural. 

m.             /            ,  n,  m.  /.  n. 

N.  i'  stS        i'  sta  i'  stfid  i'  sti  i'  stae  i'  st3» 

G.  i  sti'  us  i  sti'  us  i  sti'  us  i  sto'  rum  i  sta'  rum  i  sto'  rum 

D.  i'  sti        i'  sti  i'  sti  i'  stis  i'  stis  i'  stis 

A.    i'  stiim    i'  st^m  i'  stud  i'  stos  i'  stas  i'  sta 

A.  i' sto        i' sta  i' sto  i' stis  i' stis  i' stis 

ille,  1113,,  iHQd,  that  (yonder) 

N.  iV  le  11'  la  11'  lud  11'  li  11'  lae  il'  la 

G.  11  li'  lis  11  li'  lis  11  li'  lis  11  lo'  rum  11  la'  rum  11  lo'  rtim 

D   iP  li  11'  li  11'  li  11'  lis  11'  lis  11'  lis 

A.  iFliim  11' lam  il' lud  11' los  11' las  11' la 

A.  il'lo  il'la  11' io  il' lis  11' lis  11' lis 

253,  Ist6  and  ille  have  forms  in  c,  but  only  in  the  Nominative, 
Accusative  and  Ablative  singular,  and  in  the  Nominative  and  Accusative 
plural  (neuter  only),  thus: 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn,    istic     istaec  istoc  (commonly  isttic)  istaec 

Ace.      istunc  istane  istoc  (       "         isttic)  istaec 

Abl.       istoc     istac  istoc 

254,  Forms  of  hic  ending  in  s,  and  the  neuter  h6c  are  found 
with  the  intensive  -ce,  ^s:  hujuscS,  hocce.  There  is  also  an  Inter- 
rogative form  with  -ne,  hicinS,  haecine,  hocinS  ?  this  here? 

[S3,   86t] 

Determinative  Pronouns. 

255,  Certain  pronouns  connected  with  the  Demonstratives  in 
meaning,  are  ordinarily  called  Determinatives.    These  are: 

is,  he,  that;  idgm,  the  same;   ipse,  he,  self. 

IS,  ^a,  id,  he,  she,  it;  that,  I 


Singular. 

Plural. 

m. 

/. 

n. 

m. 

/ 

n. 

Nom. 

Is 

g'a 

id 

i'l,    c'T 

e'  ae 

e'a 

Gen. 

6' jus 

6' jus 

6' jus 

6  o'  rum 

e  a'  rum 

e  o'  rum 

Dat. 

6'i 

e'l 

6'i 

i'ls,   e'ls 

I'ls,  e'ls 

I'is,  e'ls 

Ace. 

6'um 

6' am 

Id 

g'os 

e'as 

6' a 

Abl. 

6'0 

6' a 

6'0 

i'ls,  6' is 

I'ls,  6' is 

I'ls,  e'ls 

—     63     — 
IdSm,  gadgm,  idSm,  the  same. 


m. 

Nom. 

I'dSm 

Gen. 

ejus'  dem 

Dat. 

6  V  dem 

Ace. 

6  un'  d6m 

Abl. 

6  C  d6m 

Singular. 

/. 

n. 

6'  a  dem 

i'dem 

ejus'  dem 

6  jus'  dem 

6  r  dem 

€  r  dSm 

e  an'  dem 

rdem 

6  a'  d6m 

eO'dem 

Plural. 

• 

€  ae'  dem 

6'  a  dem 

g  a  run'  dem 

e  0  ruu'  d$m 

6  IS'  dem,  i  IS' 

dem 

e  is'  dem,    i  is'  dgm 

6  as'  d6m 

e'  a  dem 

6  IS'  dem,  i  Is' 

'  d6m 

6is'd6m,  ils'dgm 

Mom.  1  V  d6m,  6  i'  d$m 

Gen.  g  0  run'  d^m 

Dat.  6  Is'  dem,  i  Is'  dem 

Ace.  e  OS'  dem 

Abl.  6  IS'  d^m,  i  is'  d^m 

ipsg,  ipsa,  ipsum,  he^  shCj  it;  self. 

Singular.  Plural. 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

N.  ip' se       ip' sS.  ip' sum  ip' si  ip' sae  ip'sS 

G.  ip  si'  lis  ip  si'  iSs  ip  si'  fis  ip  so'  rtun  ip  sa'  rum  ip  so'  rfim 

D.  ip'  si        ip'  si  ip'  si  ip'  sis  ip'  sis  ip'  sis 

A.   ip'  stlin   ip'  sam  ip'  siim  ip'  sos  ip'  sas  ip'  s& 

A,  ip' so       ip'sa  ip' so  ip' sis  ip' sis  ip' sis 


[85,  86,] 


Relative  Pronouns. 

256.   Tlie  Relative  Pronoun  is 

qui,  quae,  quod,  who^  whichf  that. 
Singular.  Plural. 


m. 

/ 

n. 

VI. 

/. 

n. 

N. 

qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

G. 

cu'jus 

cu'jus 

cu'jus 

quo'  rum 

qua'  rum 

quo'  rum 

D. 

cul 

cut 

CUl 

qui'  bus 

qui'  bus 

qui'  bus 

A. 

quem 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

A. 

quo 

qua 

quo 

qui'  bus 

qui'  biis 

qui'  bus 

257.    Ancient  and  rare  forms:   quis  (queis)  for  quibiis;  qui 
for  quo,  qua,    chiefly  with  -cum;  qulcuni  =  quOcum,  with  whom. 


—     64     — 

258.  The  following  are  General  Relatives: 

Adjective.      quicunque  quaecunqug        quodcunqu^,  whichever 

Substantive,  quisquls,  whoever       —  quidquid,  whatever 

259.  They  are  declined  in  the  same  manner  as  the  simple  words; 
cunque  is  invariable;  of  quisquis  both  parts  are  declined,  but  it  is 
generally  used  in  these  two  forms  only:  quisquis,  ichoever;  quid- 
quid,  whatever.  [87.  ss,] 

Interrogative  Pronouns. 

260.  The  Interrogative  (that  is  question-asking)  pronouns  are: 

m.  f.  n. 

Substantive.    ^   quis  ?  who?  quid?  what? 

Adjective.  qui?  quae?  qnod^  which? 

Subst  and  Adj.  uter  ?  utra  ?  utrmn?  who?  which  of  two? 

Singular. 

Nonn.  quis?  who?  quid?  whatt 

Gen.    cu'jus?  whose?  cCi'jus?  of  what? 

Dat.     cui?  to  or  for  whom?  cul?  to  or  for  what? 

Ace.     quem?  whom?  quid?  what? 

Abl.     quo? /ro??i  or  with  whom?    quo?  from  or  with  what? 

261.  The  Plural  of  quis,  quid?  who^  ivhat?  and  both  numbers 
of  qui,  quae,  quod?  which?  are  the  same  as  the  forms  of  the  Ee- 

lative  qui,  quae,  quod,  who^  which. 

« 

262.  For  the  Declension  of  iitSr  see  77. 

263.  To  all  cases  of  quis?  quid?  the  particle  nam  (literally 
for)  may  be  appended  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  answering  to  our 
English  pray^  as:  quidnam  agis?  pray^  what  are  you  doing? 

264.  From  ciijus,  whose?  comes  the  Patrial  Adjective 

cCijas,  -atis,  of  whose  country?  [87.  88,] 

Indefinite  Pronouns. 

265.  The  following  are  Indefinite  Pronouns: 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

quTs  (subst.  & 

adj.) 

quae  or  qua 

quid  (subst.),  any 

one 

qui  (adj.) 

quae  or  qua 

quod  (adj.),  any  one^  any 

aliquTs  (subst. 

&  adj.) 

aliqua 

aliquid  (subst.),  somCy  some  one 

aliqui  (adj.) 

aliqua 

aliqu(5d  (adj.),  some,  some  one 

quldam  (subst. 

&  adj.)  quaedam 

(quiddam  (subst.) 
(quoddam  (a^.) 

]  a  certain 

j      one 

—     66     — 


quispiam  (snbst.  &  adj.)  quaepiam 
quisquam  (subst.)  — 

quisqug  (subst.  &  a^.)   quaeque 

quivis  (subst.  &  adj.)      quaevis 
quilibgt  (subst.  &  adj.)    quaelibet 


j  quidpiam  (subst.) 
(quodpiam  (adj.) 
quidquam  (subst.), 
j  quidque  (subst.) 
(quodque  (adj.) 
j  quidvis  (subst.) 
(  quodvis  (adj.) 
{ quidlibgt  (subst.) 
(quodlib^t  (adj.) 


\  some  one, 
)      some 
any  one  (no pi.) 

>  each  one 

^    any  one 
\  you  please, 
r  any  one 
J  you  like 


266.  They  are  all  declined  like  the  Interrogatives,  except  ali- 
quis,  which  has  in  the  feminine  singular  and  the  neuter  plural  ali- 
qua.  They  take  quid  in  the  neuter  when  used  substantively,  and 
quod  when  used  adjectively;  quisquam,  any  one,  is  almost  always  a 
substantive,  and  used  in  negative  sentences. 

267.  unusquisqug,  unSquaeque,  unumquidque,  imumquodquS, 
each  one,  every  one,  each,  is  used  only  in  the  singular,  and  both 
unus  and  quisqu6  are  declined:  Gen.  aniiiscujusqug,  Dat.  finicuTqug, 
and  so  on. 

268.  Akin  to  Indefinite  Pronouns  are  Indefinite  Adjectives: 
ulliis,  -S»,  -um,  any  aliGs,  -a,  -ud,  another 
nullGs,  -5.,  -um,   no                     alter,  -a,-iini,  the  other  (of  two) 
nonnullus,  -&,  -Gni,  some  neuter,  -ra,  -rum,  neither 

To  ullus  and  null  us  the  corresponding  nouns  are:  nemO  (-inis), 
nobody y   and  nihil  (indeclinable),  nothing. 

269.  Mark  the  following  Pronominal  Adjectives: 


Demonstrative, 
talis,  -e,  such 
tantus,  -Sr,  -tini,  so  great 
tot,  so  many 

Interrogative. 
qualTs,  -e  ?  luhat?  of  what  sort? 
quantfls,  -&,  -iiin  ?  how  greats 
quot?  how  many? 


Relative, 
qualis,  -e,  such  as 
quantQs,  -S,  -iim,  as  great 
quot,  as  many  as 

Indefinite, 
aliquantiis,  -a,  -um,  some,  con- 

sidei^able 
aliquot,  some 

Of  these  tot,  quot, 'aliquot  are  indeclinable,  the  rest  are  declined 
like  adjectives. 

They  are  called  Correlatives,  when  used  in  pairs,  so  that  one 
refers  or  answers  to  the  other,  as:  talis,  .qualis,  such.,  as;  like., 
like;  tantus.  .quantus,  so  great,  .as;  tot.  .qu6t,  so  many,  .as; 

189,  90,] 


—     66     — 

Verbs. 

270.  The  Essential  Characteristic  of  a  verb  is  that 
it  ascribes  some  action,  state,  or  quality  to  a  subject. 
Verbs,  like  Nouns  and  Pronouns^  have  their  inflec- 
tion, or  changes  of  form  in  order  to  express  certain 
changes  of  meaning;  this  inflection  is  called  their 
Conjugation. 

The  forms  of  Conjugation  are: 

Voices,  genera;  Tenses,  temp6ra;  Moods,  mOdi; 
Numbers  and  Persons,  numeri  et  personae. 

Voices. 

271.  Some  verbs  are  usually  followed  by  an  object 
signifying  that  at  which  the  action  of  the  verb  is 
directed.  They  are  said  to  be  Transitive  Verbs  and 
express  an  assertion  in  two  forms,  called  the  Active 
Voice  and  the  Passive  Voice. 

272.  The  Active  Voice  denotes  that  the  action  proceeds  from 
the  subject,  as:  canis  pu6rum  mordebat,  the  dog  hit  the  hoy.  The 
Passive  denotes  that  the  subject  receives  the  action  of  the  verb, 
as:  puer  niordebatur  a  cane,  the  hoy  was  hitten  hy  the  dog. 

273.  Other  verbs,  again,  express  an  action  which  is  limited  to 
the  subject,  as:  puer  currit,  the  hoy  runs.  They  are  called  In- 
transitive Verbs,  and  from  their  nature  cannot  be  regularly  used 
in  the  Passive  Voice. 

274.  Transitive  verbs  may  be  used  without  any  expressed  ob- 
ject ( absolutely ),  as:  puer  scribit,  the  hoy  lointes. 

275.  A  Reflexive  Verb  is  one  that  represents  the  action  as 
exerted  by  the  subject  upon  itself  The  Passive  Toice  often  has  a  re- 
flexive meaning,  as:  occasio  datur,  the  occasion  offers^  presents  itself . 

276.  The  Active  and  Passive  Voices  in  Latin  are 
equivalent  to  the  corresponding  English  forms. 
Many  verbs  are  only  used  in  the  Passive  form,  but 
with  an  active  or  reflexive  signification;  they  are 
called  Deponents. 


—     6T     — 

277.  Some  verbs  which  form  their  Perfect  like  Deponents^  are 
called  Semi-Deponents,  as: 

audeo,  -ere,  to  dare  ausiis  sum,  /  dared 

gaudeo,  -ere,  to  rejoice  gavisiis  sum,  /  rejoiced 

soleo,  -ere,  to  he  wont  solitus  sum,  /  was  wont 

fido,  -ere,  to  trust  fisiis  sum,  /  trusted 

278.  Some  Active  Verbs  have  a  Perfect  Passive  Participle 
with  Active  meaning,  viz.: 

ceno,  -are,  to  dine  c6natus,  having  dined 

l)randeo,  -ere,   to  breakfast  pransus,   having  treakfasted 

poto,  -are,  to  drink  potus,  having  drunk 

jlro, -are,  to  swear  jtiratus,  having  swoim 

279.  Again,  a  few  Active  verbs  have  a  Passive  meaning;  thoy 
are  sometimes  called  Neutral  Passives,  viz.: 

vapulare,  to  he  flogged;  v6nTr6  (venum  Tre,  to  go  to  sale)^  to  he  sold. 

l^enses. 

280.  There  are  Six  Tenses  in  Latin,  viz.: 

Of  Continued  Action 
the  Present,  as:  scribo,  /  am  writing; 

the  Imperfect,  used  chiefly  for  description  or  repeated  action, 
as:  scribebam,  I  ic as  writing ; 

the  Future,  as:  scribam,  I  shall  write. 

Of  Completed  Action 
the  Perfect,    either  definite   or   nistorical,   as:    scrips!,  /  have 
vritten  (definite),  or:  Itvrote  (historical); 

the  Pluperfect,  as:  scripsSram,  I  had  written; 

the  Puture  Perfect,  as:  scripsero,  T shall  have  written. 

The  Passive  has  the  same  tenses.     (For  Particulars  see  Syntax.) 

Moods. 

281.  The  Moods  are  three,  Indicative,  Subjunctive, 
and  Imperative. 

282.  The  Indicative  is  used  for  direct  assertions  or  interro- 
gations, corresponding,  without  any  auxiliary,  to  the  three  forms  of 
an  English  verb,  viz.:  the  Simple,  Progressive,  and  Emphatic,  as: 
scribo,  I  write^  am  writing^  do  write. 


—     68     — 

283,  The  Subjunctive  represents  the  action  of  the  verb  as 

something  merely  entertained  by  the  mind  and  dependent  on  other 
circumstances,  as:  amarem,  /  should  love. 

284,  The  Imperative  is  used  to  express  a  command^  wish, 
advice,  or  exhortation,  as:  este  diligentes,  pueri,  he  diligent,  boys! 

285,  These  three  moods  wliich  are  limited  by  person,  number, 
and  time  are  called  the  Finite  Verb. 

Verbal  Nouns  and  Adjectives. 

286,  Outside  of  the  Finite  Verb,  and  partaking  of 
the  nature  of  nouns,  are  certain  Verbal  Forms  which 
are  so  important  that  they  are  always  given  with  the 
inflectional  forms,  as  part  of  the  conjugation  of  the  verb. 

287,  The  Infinitive  is  not  limited  to  a  particular  number  or 
person,  as  the  ordinary  verbal  forms,  but  is  really  a  Verbal  Noun, 
as:  amare,  to  love. 

288,  The  Gerund  is  a  verbal  noun  of  the  Second  Declension, 
used  only  in  the  singular,  and  wanting  the  nominative  and  vocative; 
it  corresponds  to  the  English  Participial  Infinitive  in  ing^  as:  amandi, 
of  loving. 

289,  The  Gerundive  difiers  from  the  Gerund  only  in  having 
adjective  terminations  in  lis,  a,  fiiii,  thus:  Gerund,  amandi,  of  lov- 
ing; Gerundive,  amandiis,  -S;,  -uiii,  to  be  loved,  deserving  to  be 
loved. 

290,  The  Participle  gives,  like  the  English  Participle,  the 
meaning  of  the  verb  in  the  form  of  an  Adjective. 

291,  A  Latin  verb  may  have  four  Participles:  two  in  the 
Active,  the  Present  and  the  Future  —  amans,  loving;  amatiirus, 
about  to  love;  and  two  in  the  Passive,  the  Perfect,  amatus,  loved, 
and  the  Future,  commonly  called  Gerundive;  amandus,  deserving 
to  be  loved. 

292,  The  Supine  is  a  verbal  noun  of  the  Fourth  Declension, 
having  only  the  accusative  and  ablative  singular,  as;  amatQin, 
amatu,  to  love. 


—    69    — 

Numbers  and  Persons. 

293.  There  are  two  Numbers,  Singular  and  Plural, 
and  three  Persons:  First,  Second,  and  Third, 

294,  The  Personal  Endings  for  each  of  the  three  persons, 
both  singular  and  plural,  active  and  passive,  are  as  follows: 


Peeson. 

Active. 

Passive. 

Sing.  1.  / 

-5,  -m      am-o 

-r 

amo-r 

2.  thou,  you 

-s              ama-s 

-ris 

ama-ris 

3.  he,  she,  it 

-t              ama-t 

-tur 

ama-tiir 

Plur.  1.  we 

-mus       ama-mus 

-mur 

ama-niiir 

2.  you 

-tis           ama-tis 

^mini 

ama-miiii 

3.  they 

-nt           ama-nt 

-ntur 

ama-ntur 

The  Imperative 

has  the  following  terminations: 

Sing.  2. 

ama 

-rS 

ama-re 

^'     3.             -to 

ama-to 

-tor 

ama-tor 

Plur.  2.             -te, 

-tote         ?>ma-te 

-mini 

ama-mini 

"     3.             -nto                  ama-nto 

-nt6r 

ama-ntor 

The  Perfect  Indicative  (active)  has  the  special  terminations: 
Sing.  2.   -sti        amavi-sti  Plur.  2.  -stis  amavi-stis 

^'     3.  -erunt     amav-erunt 

The  Four  Conjugations. 

295.  Verbs  are  inflected  in  four  regular  Conjuga- 
tions, distinguished  by  the  ending  of  the  Present  In- 
finitive Active,  viz.: 

I.  First  Conjugation  -are;  stem  ending  in  a; 
II.  Second  Conjugation -ere;   "         "       in  e; 
III.  Third  Conjugation -ere;     '*         ^'       in  a  consonant  or  fi; 
ly.  Fourth.  Conjugation  -ire;    ^^         ''       in  i. 

296.  Besides  the  Present  Infinitive  we  need  to  know 
the  Present  Indicative  Active,  First  Person, 

the  Perfect  Indicative  Active,  First  Person, 

the  Former  Supine, 
in  order  to  understand  the  whole  inflection  of  any 
verb.    Hence  these  four  are  called  the  Principal  Parts 


—     TO     — 


or  Stem-forms,  and  in  describing  any  verb  these   are 

given.  Their  regular  forms  are  seen  in  the  following: 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.                  Perf.  Ind.             Supine. 

I.    amo  amarg,  to  love            amavi            amatiiin 

II.    moneS  monerg,  to  advise      moniil             monitum 

III.  16go  legere,    to  read          legi                 lectum 

IV.  audio  audire,  to  hear           audivi             auditiim 

297.  The  Principal  Parts  being  known,  the  rest  of 
the  conjugation  is  found  by  the  following  rules. 

Simple  Forms  of  the  Verb. 

298.  From  the  Present  Indicative  are  formed: 
the  Present  Subjunctive  by  changing 


I. 

II. 

III. 

lY. 


-o 


into 


-em 
-earn 
-am 
-lam 


am-o 
mon-eo 
leg-o 
aud-io 


the  Imperfect  Lidicative  by  changing 


I. 

II. 

III. 

lY. 


-eo 

-o 

-15 


into 


-abam 
-ebam 
-ebSm 
-lebam 


am-o 
mon-eo 
leg-o 
aud-io 


the  Future  Indicative  by  changing 


I. 

II. 

III. 

lY. 


~o 
-eo 
-o 
~io 


into 


-abo 
-eb3 
-am 
-iS,m 


am-o 
mon-eo 
leg-o 
aud-io 


the  Present  Participle  by  changing 


I. 

11. 

III. 

lY. 


-o  into  -ans 

-eo  ' '  -ens 

-o  ' '  -ens 

-io  * '  -iens 


am-o 
mon-eo 
leg-o 
aud-io 


am-em 

mon-eam 

leg-Sm 

aud-iSm 


am-abSm 
mon-ebam 
16g-ebS,m 
aud-ieb^m 

am-abo 

mon-ebo 

16g-am 

aud-Iam 

am-ans 

mon-ens 

leg-ens 


aud-iens 


the  Gerundive  (and  the  Gerund)  by  changing 


I. 
n. 
III. 
lY. 


-o  mto 

-go  '' 

-o  '' 

-io  '' 


-andus 
-endiis 
-endus 
-iendus 


am-o 
mon-eo 
leg-o 
aud-i5 


am-andQs 
mon-endQs 
Igg-endQs 
aud-iendtis 


—    71    — 

299,  From  the  Present  Infinitive  are  formed: 

the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  Active  by  adding  m: 
I.  amare,  amarS-m  III.  16g6r6,  16gere-m 

II.  moiiere,  moiiere-m  lY.  audirS,  audire-m 

the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  Passive  by  adding  r: 
I.  amare,  amar6-r  III.  Ieg6r6,  leger6-r 

II.  monere,  m5n6re-r  IV.  audlrg,  audire-r 

the  Present  Imperative  Active  by  dropping  r6: 

I.  ama-re,  ama  III.  Igg6-re,  lege 

II.  mone-re,  mon6  IV.  audl-re,  audi 

the  Present  Imperative  Passive  identically: 

I.  amarg  II.  mongrg  III.  16g6re  TV.  audlrg 

the  Present  Infinitive  Passive  by  changing 

I.        5      into      i  amar-6  amar-i 

II.       S        ^*        1  moner-S  moner-i 

III.       6rg   **        i  leg-erS  l^g-i 

lY.        5        *'        i  audIr-6  audlr-i 

300.  From  the  Perfect  Indicative  are  formed: 

the  Pluperfect  Indicative  by  changing  i  into  firam: 

I.  amav-i,  amav-eram  III.  I6g-i,  l6g-eram 

II.  monu-i,  m6iiu-er5/in  lY.  audiv-T,  audlv-er5;in 

the  Future  Perfect  by  changing  i  into  6ro: 
I.  amav-i,  araav-ero  III.  ISg-i,  l6g-6ro 

II.  monu-i,  monu-ero  lY.  audlv-i,  audiv-ero 

the  Perfect  Subjunctive  by  changing  i  into  erim: 

I.  amav-i,  amav-erim  III.  ISg-i,  leg- grim 

n.  monu-i,  monu-erim  lY.  audiv-i,  audiv-erim 

the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  by  changing  i  into  iss6m: 

I.  amav-i,  amav-issem  III.  I6g-i,  I5g-iss6m 

II.  monu-i,  monu-issem  lY.  audiv-i,   audlv-issem 

the  Perfect  Infinitive  by  changing  i  into  iss6: 

I.  amav-i,  amav-iss6  III.  I5g-i,  leg-issS 

II.  monu-i,  m6nu-iss6  lY.  audiv-i,  audiv-issS 


—     72     — 

SOio  From  the  Supine  are  formed: 

the  Perfect  Participle  by  changing  una  into  us: 
1.  amat-iim,  amat-us  III.  lect-Qm,  lect-iis 

II.  monit-um,  monit-iis  IV.  audlt-um,  audit-iis 

the  Future  Participle  by  changing  um  into  urus: 

I   amat-um,  amat-uriis  III.  lect-uni,  lect-urus 

II.  monit-iiin,  monit-urus  IV  audit-iim,  audlt-uriis 

302.  Of  the  active  tenses  of  continued  action,  viz.: 
Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future,  those  ending  in  6  be- 
come passive  by  changing  o  into  or;  those  ending  in 
m,  by  changing  m  into  r,  as: 

I.  am-o,  am-5r  III.  16g-o,  16g-5r 

ame-m,  ame-r  lega-m,  lega^r 

II.  mone-o,  m6n6-5r  IV.  audi-o,  audi-or 
monea-m,  monea-r  audia-iu,  audia-r 

To  Teacheks.  As  the  theory  of  conjugation  is  beset,  to  the  beginner, 
by  some  special  diflficulties,  it  seems  best  that  the  Paradigms  themselves 
should  be  made  very  familiar,  before  the  systematic  study  of  the  foregoing 
rulis  is  taken  up.  At  this  stage,  AHN-HENITS  J'ara dig^m  Charts  ex- 
hibiting the  Essentials  of  Latin  Conjugation,  will  greatly  help  in  mastering 
one  of  the  numerous  difficulties  of  the  language. 

Compound  Forms. 

303.  All  the  rest  are  compound  forms,  made  by 
the  aid  of  the  Auxiliaoy  verb  esse,  to  he: 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  M. 

Perfect.               Supine. 

sum 

ess6, 

to  he 

fuT                      — 

Indicative. 

Present 

Perfect. 

sum,  /  am 

fu'  T,    I  have  been  (was) 

Ss,  thou  art 

fii  i'  sti,    thou  hast  been 

est,  7ie,  she^  it  is 

fu'  it,   he  has  been 

su'  mus,  we  are 

fu'  i  mus,   we  have  been 

e'  stis,  you  are 

fu  i'  stis,  you  have  oeen 

sunt,  they  are 

fu  6'  runt,    they  have  been 

—  n  — 


Imperfect. 
6'  ram,   /  was 
6'  ras,  nwu  wast 
6'  rat,  he  was 
6  ra'  mus,  we  were 
e  ra'  tis,  you  were 
6'  rant,  they  were 


ro, 


Future. 
/  shall  he 


ris,  thou  wilt  he 


e' 

6' 

6'  rit,  he  will  he 
6'  ri  mus,   we  shall  he 
6'  ri  tIs,  you  will  he 
g'  runt,  they  will  he 


Indicative. 

Pluperfect, 
fu'  6  ram,   /  had  heen 
fu'  6  ras,  thou  hadst  heen 
fu'  e  rat,    he  had  heen 
fu  6  ra'  mus,   we  had  heen 
fu  e  ra'  tis,   you  had  been 
fu'  e  rant,  they  had  heen 

Future  Perfect. 
fu'  g  r6,  /  shall  have  heen 
fu'  6  ris,  thou  wilt  have  heen 
fu'  6  rit,   /le  wiZ?  /iai;e  heen 
fu  e  ri  mus,  we  shall  have  heen 
fu  6  ri  tis,   2/02^  tt^iZZ  have  heen 
fu'  e  rint,   they  will  have  heen 


Subjunctive. 


Sim, 


Present. 

may  I  he* 


Perfect. 


sis,  he  thoUj  or  may  you  he 
sit,  let  him  he  (may  he  he) 
si'  mus,  let  us  he 
si'  tis,  he  ye^  or  may  ye  he 


fu'  6  rim,  /  may  have  heen 
fu'  e  ris,    thou  may  est  have  been 
fu'  e  rit,  he  may  have  heen 
fil  e  ri  mus,  we  may  have  heen 
f u  e  ri  tis,   you  may  have  been 


sint,  let  them  he  (may  they  he)       fu'  e  rint,  they  may  have  heen 

Imperfect. 
es'  s6m,  /  should  he  (were) 
es'  sSs,  thou  ivouldst  be 
es'  set,  he  would  he 
es  s6'  mus,  we  should  he 
es  s6'  tis,  you  would  he 
es'  sent,  they  would  be 


Pluperfect, 
fu  is'  sem,   /  should  have  been 
fu  is'  ses,  thou  wouldst  have  been 
fu  is'  set,  he  would  have  heen 
fu  is  se'  mus,  we  should  have  heen 
fu  is  s6'  tis,  you  would  have  been 
fu  is'  sent,  they  would  have  been 

Future. 
Sim,  /  may  be  about  to  be 
sis,   thou  mayest  he  about  to  be 
sit,  he  may  he  about  to  be 
si'  mus,   we  may  be  about  to  be 
si'  tis,   you  may  be  about  to  be 
sint,  they  may  he  about  to  he 

•*    The  rendering  of  the  Subjunctive  here  given  shows  the  most  fre- 
quent meanings  of  its  forms  when  used  independently. 


fu  tu'  riis,  -a,  -um  - 


fu  til'  ri,   -ae,  -a 


—  u 


Present. 
Future. 


Present. 
Perfect. 
Future. 


Imperative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

6s,   be  thou  e'  ste,   be  ye 

e'  sto,  thou  Shalt  be  e  sto'  t6,    ye  shall  be 

e'  sto,  he  shall  be  sun'  to,   they  shall  be 

Infinitive. 
es'  se,  to  be 
fu  is'  se,   to  have  been 
fu  tu'  mm,  -am,  -iim  es'se,  or  fo'rS,  to  be  about  to  be 


Future  Participle,     fu  tu'  riis,  -a,  -iimi,   about  to  be 

304.  The  Future  Perfect  is  wanting  in  the  Subjunctive  which  is 
represented,  when  necessary,  by  the  Subjunctive  of  the  Perfect  or 
Pluperfect,  according  to  the  connection  of  the  sentence. 


805,   The  verb  esse  has  no  Gerund 
but  the  Future. 


or  Supine,  and  no  Participle 


306. 

Compounds  of  esse. 

Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Inf. 

Perfect.        Supine. 

absum 

abesse,  to  be  absent^ 

be  away 

afui            — 

adsum 

adesse,  to  be  present 

adfuT 

dSsum 

deesse,  to  be  wanting 

defiii 

in  sum 

iness6,  to  be  in 

infuT 

intersum 

interesse,  to  be  betw 

'een 

interfui       — 

obsum 

obesse,  to  be  in  the 

way 

obfui 

praesum 

praeesse,  to  be  over 

praeful        — 

prosum 

prodessg,  to  be  useful 

proful 

subsum 

subessg,  to  be  undent 

r 

wanting 

supersum 

superesse,  to  remain  over 

superfui 

307.  All  these  Compounds  are  conjugated  like  sum;  but  prosum 

nserts  a  d  when  pro  would  be  followed  by  e. 

thus: 

Present. 

Imperf.  Indie. 

Imperf.  Subj. 

Future. 

prosum 

proderam 

prodessem 

proderO 

prodgs 

prodgras 

prodesses 

proderis 

prodest 

proderat 

prodesset 

proderit 

prosumus 

prodgramus 

prodessemus           proderlmus 

prodestis 

proderatis 

prodessetis 

prOderiljs 

prosunt 

proderant 

prodessent 

proderunt 

Imperative. 

Infinitive. 

prod^s 

prodeste 

prodesse 

prOdestO 

prodestotg 

—     75     — 

308.  Neither  sura  nor  any  of  its  compounds  has  a  present 
participle,  except:  praesens,  -tis,  present;  absens,  -tis,  absent; 
ess6  is  also  compounded  with  potis,  pdte,  able,  in  the  verb  poss6. 
For  its  inflection  see  401.  [iis.  lie,] 

309.  The  Perfect,  Pluperfect  and  Future  Perfect,  and 

also   the    Perfect    Infinitive  in  the  Passive  Voice    are 

compound  forms,  made  up  of  the  Perfect  Participle 

and  the   verb    esse   as  an  auxiliary,  as: 

Perf.         a  ma'  tus,  -a,  -um  sum,  /  have  been  or  was  loved 
Perf.  Inf.  a  ma'  tus,  -a,  -um  es's6,  to  have  been  loved 
Pluperf.     a  ma'  tus,  -S,  -flm  eram,  /  had  been  loved 
Put.  Perf.  a  ma'  tus,  -3.,  -um  6rO,  /  shall  have  been  loved 
Put.  Inf.    a  ma'  ttis,  -&,  -um  f6r6,  to  be  about  to  be  loved 

310.  In  the  compound  tenses  of  the  Passive,  the  Participle  is 
treated  as  an  adjective,  agreeing  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
subject  of  the  verb,  as: 

bellum  paratum  est,  war  has  been  prepared. 

Periphrastic  Conjugation. 
811.  The    Periphrastic    Conjugation   is    formed    by 
combining  the  tenses  of  esse  with  the  Future  Parti- 
ciple (Active),  and  with  the  Gerundive  (Passive). 

312.  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation. 

Indicative. 
Present,      amaturus,  -S,  -dm  sum,  /  am  about  to  love 
Imperf.       amaturus,  -S,,  -um  eram,  /  was  about  to  love 
Future.       amaturus,  -a,  -iim  ero,  /  shall  be  about  to  love 
Perfect.       amaturfls,  -a,  -um  ful,  /  have  been,  or  was  about  to  love 
Pluperf.      amaturiis,  -S,,  -um  fueram,  /  had  been  about  to  love 
Fut.  Perf.  amaturus,  -&,  -iim  fuero,  /  shall  have  been  about  to  love 

Subjunctive. 

Present,  amaturus,  -&,  -um  sim,  /  may  be  about  to  love 

Imperf.  amaturiis,  -3»,  -iim  ess6m,  /  should  be  about  to  love 

Future.  (wanting) 

Perfect.  amaturfis,  -S.,  -iim  fugrim,  I  may  have  been  about  to  love 

Pluperf.  amaturiis,  -a,  -um  fuissSm,  /  should  have  been  about  to 

Fut.  Perf.  (wanting)  [love 


—     re- 


present,     araatiirus,  -a, 
Perfect.      amaturus,  -3., 


313. 

Present. 

Imperf. 

Future. 

Perfect. 

Pluperf. 


Passive 

amandus,  -S.,  - 
amandiis,  -a,  - 
amaiidfis,  -a,  • 
amandus,  -&,  - 
amandus,  -a. 


Put.  Perf.  amandtts,  -3, 


Present. 

Imperf. 

Future. 

Perfect. 

Pluperf. 

Fut.  Perf. 

Present. 
Perfect. 


amandus,  -&, 
amandus,  -5,, 
(wanting) 
amandGs,  -S., 
amandus,  -a, 
(wanting) 


Infinitivb. 
-tim  ess6,  ^o  he  about  to  love 
-um  fuissS,  to  have  been  about  to  love 

Periphrastic  Conjugation. 
Indicative. 
-um  sum,  /  have  to  he  loved 
-um  gram,  /  had  to  he  loved 
-um  ero,  /  shall  have  to  he  loved 
-um  fill,  /  (have)  had  to  he  loved 
-iim  fiigram,  /  had  had  to  he  loved 
-um  fiierO,  /  shall  have  had  to  he  loved 

Subjunctive. 
-um  Sim,  /  may  have  to  he  loved 
-um  ossem,  /  should  have  to  he  loved, 

-iim  filerim,  /  may  have  had  to  he  loved 
-um  f liissem,  /  should  have  had  to  he  loved 


amandus,  -a, 

amandQs,  -&,  -tim  fiiisse. 


Infinitive. 
iim  esse,  to  have  to  he  loved 


to  have  had  to  he  loved 

314,  Impersonal  Periphrastic  Conjugation. 

The  Neuter  of  the  Gerundive  with  est,  erat,  etc.,  is  used  imper- 
sonally, if  what  is  said  holds  good  of  people  in  general,  as:  vlven- 
dum  est,  we  or  you  must  live;  moriendiim  est,  we  or  you  must  die. 
But  the  person  hy  whom  may  also  be  added  in  the  dative,  thus: 

mihi  seribendum  est,  J  must  or  should  write 
tibi  seribendum  est,  thou  must  or  shouldst  write 
el  seribendum  est,  he  must  or  should  write 
nobis  seribendum  est,  tve  must  or  should  write 
vobis  seribendum  est,  you  must  or  should  write 
els  seribendum  est,  they  must  or  should  write 

[171,  172.] 

315,  The  Future  Infinitive  Passive  is  a  compound  form  made 
up  (jf  the  Supine  and  iri  (lit.  to  he  gone),  which  is  the  Infinitive 
Passiim  of  the  verb  ire,  to  go. 

I.  amatum  Tri  III.  lectum  iri 

II.  monitum  iri  IV.  audltum  Iri 


—    TY    — 


316.     First  Conjugation. 

Pres.  Ind.  &  Prcs.  Inf. 
amo,  -arS,  to  love 

Indicative. 


—  Active  Voice. 

Perfect.  Supine, 

araavi  amatum 

Subjunctive. 


a'  mo,  /  love 
a'  mas,  thou  lovest 
a'  mat,    he  loves 
a  ma'  mils,    we  love 
a  ma'  tis,   you  love 
a'  mant,   they  love 


Present. 

a'  mem,    may  I  love 
a'  mes,   love  thou 
a'  met,   let  Jiim  love 
a  me'  mus,  let  us  love 
a  me'  tis,  love  ye 
a'  ment,   let  them  love 


a  ma'  bam,  I  ivas  loving 
a  ma'  bas,  tJwu  wast  loving 
a  ma'  bat,  he  was  loving 
a  ma  ba'  mus,  we  were  loving 
a  ma  ba'  tis,  you  were  loving 
a  ma'  baut,  they  were  loving 


Imperfect. 

a  ma'  rem,  I  should  love 
a  ma'  res,  tltou  wouldst  love 
a  ma'  ret,  he  would  love 
a  ma  re'  miis,  we  should  love 
a  ma  re'  tis,  you  would  lore 
a  ma'  rent,   they  would  love 


a  ma'  bo,  I  shall  lore 
a  ma'  bis,  thou  wilt  love 
a  ma'  bit,  he  will  love 
a  ma'  bi  mus,  we  shall  lore 
a  ma'  bi  tis,  you  will  lore 
a  ma'  bunt,  they  will  love 

a  ma'  vi,  /  have  loved 

a  ma  vi'  sti,  thou  hast  loved 

a  ma'  vit,  he  has  loved 

a  ma'  vi  mus,  we  hare  loved 

a  ma  vi'  stis,  you  have  loved 

a  ma  ve'  runt,  they  hare  loved 


Future. 

a  ma  tii'  riis, 
-a,  -tim 

a  ma  tu'  ri, 
-ae,  -a 


Sim 

\ 

SIS 

sit 

f  he  about 

si'  mus   1 

[     to  love 

si'  tis 

git 

} 

Perfect. 


a  ma'  vS  rim,  I  may  have  loved 
a  ma'  ve  ris,  tJiou  mayest  have  l. 
a  ma'  ve  rit,   he  may  have  loved 
a  ma  ve  ri  mils,   we  may  have  L 
a  ma  ve  ri  tis,  you  may  hare  I 
a  ma'  v6  rint,    they  may  have  I. 


Pluperfect, 
a  ma'  vS  ram,  /  had  lored         a  ma  vis'  sem,   /  should  have  I. 
a  ma'  ve  ras,  thou  hadst  loved    a  ma  vis'  ses,   thou  wouldst  h.  L 
a  ma'  ve  rat,  he  had  loved  a  ma  vis'  sgt,  he  would  have  I. 

a  ma  ve  ra'  mils,  we  had  loved  a  ma  vis  se'  mils,  we  should  h.  I. 
a  ma  ve  ra'  tis,  you  had  loved  a  ma  vis  se'  tis,  you  would  h,  I, 
a  ma'  ve  rant,  they  had  loved     a  ma  vis'  sent,   they  would  h.  L 


—    78    — 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Future  Perfect. 

a  ma'  v6  ro,  /  slmll  have  loved  (wanting) 

a  ma'  ve  ris,  thou  wilt  have  loved 

a  ma'  ve  rit,  he  will  have  loved 

a  ma  ve  ri  mus,  we  shall  have  loved 

a  ma  ve  ri  tis,  you  will  have  loved 

a  ma'  ve  rint,  they  will  have  loved 

Imperative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Present,   a'  ma,  love  thou  a  ma'  te,  love  ye 

Future,    a  ma'  to,  thou  shalt  love        a  ma  to'  te,  ye  shall  love 
a  ma'  to,  he  shall  love  a  man'  to,  they  shall  love 


Present. 
Perfect. 
Fut.  Sing. 

u 

Plur. 


Present. 
Future. 


Infinitive, 

a  ma'  re,  to  love 

a  ma  vis'  sS,  to  have  loved 
Norn,   a  ma  tu'  riis,  -a,  -um  es'  se 
Ace.     a  ma  tu'  riiin,  -am,  -um    es'  se 
Norn,   a  ma  tu'  ri,  -ae,  -a  es'se 
Ace.     a  ma  tu'  ros,  -as,  -a  es'  se 


-ff)  be  about  to  love 


Participles. 
a'  mans,   a  man'  tis,    loving 
a  ma  tti'  rtis,  a  ma  tu'  ra,  a  ma  tii'  rum,  about  to  love 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

317. 


Gerund. 
a  man'  di,  of  loving 
a  man'  d.5,  for  loving 
a  man'  duni,  loving 
a  man'  do,  by  loving 


Supine, 


F'irst  Conjugation 

Indicative. 


a  ma'  tum ) 
a  ma'  tu     ) 


to  love 


[117—130,] 


Passive  Voice. 


a  mor,  /  am  loved 
a  ma'  ris,  thou  art  loved 
a  ma'  tur,  he  is  loved 
a  ma'  mur,  we  are  loved 
a  ma'  mi  ni,  you  are  loved 
a  man'  tur,  they  are  loved 


SURTUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

a'  mer,  may  I  be  loved 
a  me'  ris,  be  thou  loved 
a  me'  tur,  let  him.  be  loved 
a  me'  mur,  let  us  be  loved 
a  me'  mi  ni,  be  ye  loved 
a  men'  tur,  let  them  be  loved 


79     — 


Indicative.  Subjttnctive. 

Imperfect, 
a  ma'  bar,  /  ivas  loved  a  ma'  r§r,  /  should  he  loved 

a  ma  ba'  ris,  thou  wast  loved     a  ma  re'  ris,  thou  wouldst  be  L 
a  ma  ba'  tur,  he  was  loved         a  ma  re'  tiir,  he  would  be  loved 
a  ma  ba'  niiir,  we  were  loved     a  ma  re'  iiiiir,  we  should  be  loved 
a  ma  ba'  mi  ni,  you  ivere  loved,  a  ma  re'  mi  ni,  you  would  be  I. 
a  ma  ban'  tur,  they  were  loved    a  ma  ren'  tur,  they  would  be  I 

Future, 
a  ma'  bor,  I  shall  be  loved  (wanting) 

a  ma'  be  ris,  thou  wilt  be  loved. 
a  ma'  bi  tur,  he  will  be  loved 
a  ma'  bi  mur,  we  shall  be  loved 
a  ma  bi'  mi  ni,  you  will  be  loved. 
a  ma  bun'  tur,  they  will  be  loved 

Perfect. 

/  have  been  or  was  loved  I  may  have  been  loved 

i  sum  ( Sim 

a  ma'  ttls,  -&,  -um  -<  Ss  a  ma'  tus,  -a,  -Qm  -J  sis 

( est  ( sit 

C  sii'  mils  (  si'  mus 

a  ma'  ti,  -ae,  -S.       -|  e'  stis  a  ma'  ti,  -ae,  -a      }  si'  tis 

(  sunt  ( sint 


Pluperfect. 
/  had  been  loved  I  might  have  been  loved 

i  e'  ram  (  es'  sSm 

a  ma'  tus,  -a,  -Um  -^  e'  ras  a  ma'  tus,  -a,  -urn  -J  es'  ses 
( 6'  rat  (  es'  s6t 

i  6  ra'  mus  r  es  s6'  mus 

a  ma'  ti,  -ae,  -a        ■<  e  ra'  tis  a  ma'  ti,  -ae,  -S,      -J  es  s6'  tis 
(6' rant  fes'sent 


/  shall  have  been  loved 
re'rO 
a  ma'  tus,  -a,  -um  -]  e'  ris 
f  e'  rit 


Future  Perfect. 


(wanting) 


a  ma'  ti,  -ae,  -a 


(6'ri 
•]  6'  ri 
(6'ru 


mus 
tis 
runt 


—     80     — 

Imperative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Pres.   a  ma'  re,  be  thou  loved  a  ina'  mi  ni,  be  ye  loved 

Fut.    a  ma'  tor,  thou  shalt  be  loved 

a  ma'  tor,  he  shall  be  loved      a  man'  tor,  they  shall  be  loved 


to  have  been  loved 


Infinitive. 
Present.  a  ma'  ri,  to  be  loved 

Perfect  Sing.    Nom.  a  ma'  tus,  -a,  -um  es'  s6 

'^       Ace.     a  ma' turn,  -3.iii,  -um  es'  se 
Plur,    Nom.  a  ma'  ti,  ~ae,  -a  es'  se 
^^      Ace.     a  ma'  tos,  -as,  -3;  es'  se 
Future.  a  ma'  tiim  i'  ri,  to  be  about  to  be  loved 

Participles. 
Perfect.        a  ma'  tiis,     a  ma'  ta,     a  ma'  tiim,  lovedj   beloved,    or 

having  been  loved 
Gerundive,    a  man'  dus,     a  man'  dS,     a  man'  dum,    to   be  lovedj 

deserving  to  be  loved 


Examples 
agito,  -are,  to  agitate 
educo,  -are,  to  bring  up 
6vito,  -are,  to  avoid^  shun 
administro,  -are,  to  govern 
turbo,  -are,  to  trouble 
conservo,-are,  to  preserve 
multo,  -are,  to  punish 


for  Practice: 

spero,  -are,  to  hope  for 
occo,  -are,  to  hai^row 
comparo,  -are,  to  compare 
cavo,  -lire,  to  (make)  hollow 
lacero,  -are,  to  tear  into  pieces 
expugiio,  -are,  to  capture 
vasto,  -are,  to  lay  waste 

121.   122,] 


318.     Second  Conjugation.  —  Active  Voice. 


Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf. 
moneo,  -ere,  to  advise 

Indicative. 

mo'  n€  o,  I  advise 
mo'  nes,  thou  advisest 
mtV  net,  he  advises 
mo  ne'  miis,  we  advise 
mo  ne'  tis,  you  admse 
mo'  nent,  they  advise 


Perfect, 
monui 


Supine. 

monitQm 


Subjunctive. 
Present. 

mo'  ne  am,  may  I  advise 
mo'  ne  as,  admse  thou 
mo'  ne  at,   let  him  advise 
mo  ne  a'  miis,  let  us  advise 
mo  ne  a'  tis,   advise  ye 
mo'  ne  ant,  let  them  advise 


he  about 


-^     81     — 

Indicative.  Subjttncjtive. 

Imperfect. 
mone'bam,  I  was  advising       mo  ne' r6m,  I  should  advise 
mo  ne' bas,  thou  wast  advising  mo  ne' res,  thou  wouldst  advise 
mo  lie'  bat,  he  was  advising        mo  ne'  ret,  he  would  advise 
mo  lie  ba'  iiius,  we  tvere  advis^g  mo  ne  re'  miis,  we  should  admse 
mo  lie  ba'  tis,  you  ivere  advis'g  mo  ne  re'  tis,  you  would  advise 
mo  lie'  baut,  they  were  advis'g   mo  ne'  rent,  tliey  would  advise 

Future, 

mo  ne'  bo,  I  shall  advise  .    ....  _^^  (  sim 

mo  ne'  bis,  thou  wilt  advise  ^     ^       '  -<  sis 

mo  ne'  bit,  he  will  advise  ~  '  ~  (sit 

mo  ne'  bi  miis,  rve  shall  advise  -    -  ^^,  ^  (  si'  mus  ^  to  advise 

mo  ne'  bi  tis,  you  will  advise  ^         x    '  i  si'  tis     \ 

mo  ne'  bunt,  they  will  advise  '  (  siut        / 

Perfect. 

mo'  nil  i,  /  (have)  advised  mo  nil'  e  rim,    /  may  have  adv^d 

mo  nil  i'  sti,  thou  hast  advised  m()  nil'  e  ris,  thou  may  est  have  a. 
mo'  nil  it,  he  has  advised  mo  nu'  e  rit,  he  may  have  adv^d 

mo  nil'  i  miis,  ive  have  advised  mo  nii  e  ri  mus,  we  may  have  a. 
mo  nii  i'  stis,  you  have  advised  mo  nii  e  ri  tis,  you  may  have  a. 
mo  nu  e'  runt,^/ie^  have  advised  mo  nii'  e  rint,  they  may  have  a. 

Pluperfect. 

mo  nii'  e  ram,  /  had  advised      mo  nu  is'  sem,  /  should  have  a. 
m(5  nu'  e  ras,  thou  hadst  advised  mo  nii  is'  ses,  thou  wouldst  h.  a, 
mo  nii'  e  rat,  he  had  advised        mo  nii  is'  set,  he  would  have  a. 
mo  nii  e  ra'  miis,  we  had  adv'd  mo  nii  is  se'  miis,  we  should  h.  a, 
mo  nii  e  ra'  tis,  you  had  adv^d    mo  nu  is  se'  tis,  you  would  h.  a, 
mo  nil'  e  rant,  they  had  advised  mo  nii  is'  sent,  they  would  h.  a. 

Future  Perfect. 

mo  nu' e  ro,  I  shall  have  advised  (wanting) 

1110  nii'  e  ris,  thou  wilt  have  adv^d  : 

ni5  nii'  e  rit,  he  will  liaise  advised 

mo  nii  e  ri  miis,  we  shall  have  a.        . 

mo  nii  e  ri  tis,  you  will  have  a. 

mo  nil'  e  rint,  they  will  have  a. 


82    — 


Imperative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Pres.  mo'ne,  advise  thou  mo  nS' t€,  advise  ye 

Put.    mo  ne'  to,  thou  shalt  advise    mo  ne  to'  tS,   ye  shall  advise 
mo  ne'  to,  he  shall  advise        mo  nen'  to,  they  shall  advise 


Infinititk. 
Pres.  rao  ne'  rS,  to  advise 

Perf.  mo  nu  is'  se,  to  have  advised 

Put.  Sing.   Norn,  mo  ni  tu'  rfls,  -S.,  -Qm  es'  se 
'<      Ace.     mo  ni  tn '  rttm,  -am, -um  es' 
Plur.   Norn,  mo  ni  tu'  ri,  -ae,  -3.  es'  s6 


s6 


to   be  about  to 
advise 


Ace.    mo  ni  til'  ros,  -as,  -^  es'  s6 


Participles. 
Pres.  mo'  nens,  mo  nen'  tis,  advising 
Put.   mo  ni  tu'  riis,    mo  ni  tu'  ra,  mo  ni  tu'  rum,  about  to  advise 


Gerund. 
Gen.     mo  nen'  di,  of  advising 
Dat.     mo  nen'  do,  for  advising 
Ace.      mo  nen'  dtim,  advising 
Abl.      mo  nen'  do,  by  advising 

319.     Second  Conjugation. 


Supine. 


mo'  ni  turn  / 
mo'  ni  tu      ) 


to  advise 


[12S.  1:^6  ] 

Passive  Voice. 


Indicative. 

mo'  ne  6r,  I  am  advised 
mo  ne'  ris,  thou  art  advised 
mo  ne'  tur,  he  is  advised 
mo  ne'  mur,  we  are  advised 
mo  ne'  mi  ni,  you  are  advised 
mo  nen'  tur,  they  are  advised 


Subjunctive. 
Present. 

mo'  nS  ar,  may  I  be  advised 
mo  ne  a'  ris,  be  thou  advised 
mo  ne  a'  tur,  let  him  be  advised 
mo  ne  a'  mur,  let  us  be  advised 
mo  ne  a'  mi  ni,  be  ye  advised 
mo  ne  an'  tur,    let  them  be  adv^d 


Imperfect, 
mo  ne'  bar,  I  teas  advised  mo  ne'  rer,  I  should  be  advised 

mo  ne  ba'  ris,  thou  wast  advised  mo  ne  re'  ris,  thou  tvouldst  6.  a. 
mo  ne  ba'  tur,  he  was  advised    mo  ne  re'  tur,  he  would  b.  a. 
mo  ne  ba'  mur,  we  were  advised  mo  ne  re'  miir,  we  should  b.  a. 
mo  ne  ba'  mi  ni,  you  were  adv^d  mo  ne  re'  mi  ni,  you  loould  b.  a, 
m5  ne  ban'  ttir,  they  were  adv'd  mo  ne  ren'  tur,  they  would  b.  a. 


83 


Indicative. 

Future. 
mo  ne'  bor,  I  shall  he  advised 
mo  ne'  be  ris,  thou  wilt  be  adv^d 
mo  ne'  bi  tiir,  he  will  be  advised 
mo  ne'  bi  iniir,  we  shall  be  adv'd 
mo  ne  bi'  mi  ni,  you  ivill  be  adv^d 
mo  ne  bun'  tiir,  they  will  be  a. 


SUBJUNCTR'E. 

(wanting) 


Perfect. 

/  have  been  or  was  advised  I  may  have  been  advised 

( sum  ( Sim 

mo'  ni  tus,  -a,  -um  }  es  mo'  ni  tus,  -&,  -um  ^  sis 

(  est  (  sit 

su'  mus  (  si'  mils 

mo'  ni  ti,  ~ae,  -3»     -^  e'  stis  mo'  ni  ti,  -ae,  -S»     -<  si'  tis 


sunt 


(sint 


Pluperfect. 


I  had  been  advised 


mo'  ni  tus,  -a,  -iim 


mo'  ni  ti,  -ae,  -a 


li 


/  should  have  been  advised 
e'  ram  (  es'  sSm 

e'  ras  mo'  m  tiSs,  -a,  -  iim  -<  es'  ses 
e'  rat  (  es'  set 

e  ra'  mus  (  es  s6'  mus 

e  ra'  tis  mo'  ni  ti,  -ae,  -a     -|  es  se'  tis 
e'  rant  /  es'  sent 


Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  been  advised 
re'ro 
mo'  ni  tvis,  -a,  -um  -|  e'  ris 
( e'  rit 
(  e'  ri  mus 
m(5'  ni  ti,  -ae,  -a     -^  e'  ri  tis 
f  e'  runt 


(wanting) 


Imperative. 
Singular.  Plural 

Pres.  mo  ne'  re,  be  thou  advised      mo  ne'  mi  ni,  be  ye  advised 
Fut.    mo  ne'  tor,   thou  shalt  be  a. 

mo  ne'  t5r,  he  shall  he  adv.    mo  nen'  tdr,  they  shall  be  adv* 


84     — 


Infinitive. 
Pres.  m6  ne'  rl,  to  be  advised 

Perf.  Sing.  Nom.  mo'  ni  tus,  -5.,  -ttm  es'  sg 
^*      Ace.     mo' nitiim,-ain,-uin  es'se 
Plur.  Nom.  mo'  ni  ti,  -ae,  -S.  es'  s6 
**      Ace.     mo'  ni  tos,  -as,  -Si  es'  s6 
Fut.  mo'  ni  turn  i'  ri,  to  he  about  to  he  advised 


■  to  have  been  advised 


Pabticiples. 
Perfect.  mo'  ni  tus,    mo'  nl  ta,    mo'  ni  tiiin,  advised 

Grerundive.  mo  nen'  dtis,    mo  nen'  d^,    mo  nen'  diim,   to 

advised,  deserving  to  he  advised 

Examples  for  Practice*. 


be 


habeo,  -ere,  to  have,  maintain 
adhibeo,  -ere,  to  employ,  apply 
pareo,  -ere,  to  obey 
taceo,  -ere,  to  be  silent 
placeo,  -ere,  to  please 
praebeo,  -erS,  to  afford^  give 


debeo,  -ere,  to  owe 
exerceo,  -ere,  to  exercise 
noceo,  -ere,  to  hurt,  do  harm 
terreo,  -ere,  to  frighten 
val6o,  -ere,  to  avail,  he  well 
coerceo,  -ere,  to  restrain 

[127.  128,] 


320.     Third  Conjugation.  —  Active  Voice. 


Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf. 
16go,  -ere,  to  read 

Indicative. 

16'  go,  /  read 
le'  gis,  thou  readest 
16'  git,  he  reads 
le'  gi  mus,  we  read 
le'  gi  tis,  you  read 
le'  gunt,  they  read 


Perfect. 

I6gi 


Supine. 
lectum 


SUBJUNCTIVK 

Present. 

16'  gS;in,  may  I  read 
16'  gas,   read  thou 
16'  gat,  let  him  read 
16  ga'  iiitts,  let  us  read 
16  ga'  tis,  read  ye 
16'  gant,  let  them  read 

Imperfect. 
16  ge'  bam,  I  was  reading  16'  ge  rem,  I  should  read 

16  ge'  bas,  thou  wast  reading      16'  ge  res,  thou  wouldst  read 
16  ge'  bat,   he  was  reading  le'  ge  ret,  he  would  read 

16  ge  ba'  mfis,  we  were  reading  16  ge  re'  mils,  we  should  read 
16  ge  ba'  tis,  you  were  reading  16  ge  re'  tis,  you  ivould  read 
16  ge'  baut,  they  were  reading    16'  ge  rent,   they  would  read 


85      — 


Indicativb. 

le'  gS^m,  I  shall  read 
16'  ges,  thou  wilt  read 
IS'  get,  he  will  read 
le  ge'  mils,  we  shall  read 
le  ge'  tis,  you  will  i^ead 
le'  geiit,  they  will  read 

le'  gi,  I  (have)  read 

16  gi'  sti,  thou  hast  read 

IS'  git,  he  has  read 

le  gi  mils,  we  have  read 

Is  gi'  stis,  you  have  rend 

le  ge'  runt,  ^/le^/  '^^^'^  ^'^«^ 


Future. 


Subjunctive. 


lee  til'  riis, 
-a,  -um 

lee  tu'  ri, 
-ae,  -a 


Sim 

SIS 

sit 

si'  mils 
si'  tis 
sint 


he  about 
to  read 


le'  ge  ram,  /  had  i^ead 
Is'  gS  ras,  ^/lot^  hadst  read 
Is'  gS  rat,  he  had  read 
is  ge  ra'  miis,  ive  had  read 
Is  ge  ra'  tis,  7/oit  had  read 
IS'  gS  rant,  they  had  read 


Perfect. 

«IS'  ge  rim,  I  may  have  read 
IS'  ge  ris,  ^/lou  may  est  have  read 
Is'  ge  rit,  he  may  have  read 
Is  ge  ri  miis,  t(;6?  ?7ia2/  have  read 
Is  ge  ri  tis,  you  may  have  read 
IS'  ge  rint,  ^/ie^/  iwa?/  have  read 

Pluperfect. 


le  gis'  sem   I  should  have  read 
le  gis'  seSjthou  wouldst  have  read 
Is  gis'  set,  he  would  have  read 
is  gis  se'  mus,  we  should  have  r. 
is  gis  se'  tis,  you  would  have  r. 
le  gis'  sent,  they  would  have  read 


Future  Perfect. 
le'  ge  ro,  I  shall  have  read 
le'  ge  ris,  thou  wilt  have  read 
Is'  ge  rit,  he  will  have  read 
Is  ge  ri  mus,  we  shall  have  read 
Is  ge  ri  tis,  you  will  have  read 
Is'  gS  rint,  they  will  have  read 

Imperative. 
Preso  Sing,  le'  gS,  read  thou  Plur. 

Put.     '^     le' gi  tn,  thou  Shalt  read      " 
"     IS'  gi  to,  /le  shall  read         '' 


(wayiting) 


le'  gi  tS,  reac?  2/^ 

le  gi  to'  te,  ye  shall  regd 

le  gun'  to,  they  shall  read 


Infinitive. 
Pres.  le'  gg  rg,  ^o  rm(? 

Perf,  is  gis'  se,  to  have  read 

Put.  Sing.  Norn,  lee  tu'  rus,  -a,  -iim  es'se 

''  Ace.     lee  tu' riim, -am, -Qm  es'se 

Plur.  Norn,  lectu'ri,  -ae, -5-   es'se 

'^  Ace.    lectu'ros,  -as, -&  es'se 


to  be  about  to  read 


86 


Pabticiples. 
Pres.  le'  gens,  16  gen'  tis,   reading 
Put.    lee  tu'  riis,    lee  tu'  rS,,   lee  tu'  rum, 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

321. 


Gerund. 
le  gen'  di,  of  reading 
16  gen'  do,  for  reading 
16  gen'  dum,  reading 
16  gen'  do,  by  reading 


about  to  read 
Supine. 


lee' 
lee' 


turn) 

tu     i 


to  read 

[133.  134,] 

Third  Conjugatidti.  —  Passive  Voice. 


Indicative. 

16'  g5r,  /  am  read 
16'  ge  ris,  thou  art  read 
le'  gi  tur,  he  is  read 
16'  gi  mur,  we  are  read 
16  gi'  mi  ni,  you  are  read 
16  gun'  tur,  they  are  read 


Present. 
16' £ 


Subjunctive. 


16  ge' bar,  I  was  read 
16  ge  ba'  ris,  thou  wast  read 
16  ge  ba'  tur,  he  was  read 
16  ge  ba'  mur,  we  were  read 
16  ge  ba'  mi  ni,  you  were  read 
16  ge  ban'  tur,  they  were  read 


!•,  may  I  be  read 
16  ga'  ris,  be  thou  read 
16  ga'  tur,  let  him  be  read 
16  ga'  mur,  let  us  be  read 
16  ga'  mi  ni,  be  ye  read 
16  gan'  tur,  let  them  be  read 

Imperfect. 

le'  ge  rer,  I  should  be  read 
le  ge  re'  ris,  thou  wouldst  be  read 
16  ge  re'  tur,  he  would  be  read 
16  ge  re'  mur,  we  should  be  read 
16  ge  re'  mi  ni^you  would  be  read 
16  ge  ren'  tur,  they  would  be  read. 


Future. 
16' gar,  I  shall  be  read  (wanting) 

16  ge'  ris,  thou  wilt  be  read 
16  ge'  tur,  he  will  be  read 
16  ge'  miir,  ive  shall  be  read 
16  ge'  mi  ni,  you  will  be  read 
]g  gen'  tur,  they  will  be  read 

Perfect. 
/  was  or  have  been  read  I  may  have  been  read 

( Slim  ( Sim 


lee'  ttis,  -a,  -Qm  -j  es 

(est 


lee'  ti,  -ae,  -a 


lee'  tQs,  -a,  -um  -^  sis 

sit 
su' mus  f  si 'ill  us 

es'tis  lee' ti,  -ae, -a      -|  si' tis 

sunt  ( sint 


—    8T 


Indicative. 
/  had  been  read 

Subjunctive. 
Pluperfect. 

/  should  have  been  read 

i  e'  ram 

i  es'  s6m 

lee'  tus,  -a,  -Gm  -]  e'  ras 

lee'  tiis,  -a,  -um  }  es'  ses 

(  e'  rat 

1  es'set 

C  e  ra'  miis                                      (  es  s6'  mus 

lee' ti,  -ae,  -a      -]era'  tis 

lee'  ti,  -ae,  -&      -j  es  sg'  tis 

(6'  rant 

(  es'  sent 

Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  been  read 

rg'ro 
lee'  ttis,  -a,  -tim  -]  e'  ris 

(wanting) 

(  6'  rit 
(  6'  ri  mils 
lee'  ti,  -ae,  -a      -|  e'  rl  tis 
(  e'  runt 

Imperative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Pres.  16'  ge  re,  be  thou  read  le  gi'  mi  ni,  be  ye  read 

Fut.    le'  gi  tor,  thou  shall  be  read 

16'  gi  t5r,  he  shall  be  read      16  gun'  t6r,  they  shall  be  read 

Infinitive. 
Pres.  IS'gi,  to  be  read 

Perf.  Sing.  Nom.  lee' tiis,  -&,  -um  es'  se 

*^  Ace.    lec' tiim, -am, -um  es'se 

Plur.  Nom.  lee'  ti,  -ae,  -S  es'  se  f  ^^  ^^^'^  ^^''^^  ^'^^^^^ 

"'  Ace.    lee'  tOs,  -as,  -a  es'  se 
Fut.  lee'  turn  T'  ri,  to  be  about  to'be  read 

Participles. 
Perfect.        lee'  tfis,  lee'  ta,   lee'  tum,   read 

Gerundive,    le  gen'  dus,    le  gen'  da,    le  gen'  dum,  to  be  read,  de- 
serving to  be  read 

Examples  for  Practice: 
Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect.  Supine. 

emo,  -erg,  to  buy  gmi  emptum 

serlbo,  -ere,  to  write  seripsi  scriptum 

ago,  -ere,  to  drive  figi  actum 

acuo,  -Sre,  to  ivhet  S.cui  aefitiim 

[13S,  136,] 


—     88     — 


322,     Fourth  Conjugation.  —  Active  Voice. 
Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect.  Supine. 


audio,  -ire,  to  hear 
Indicative. 

au'  (li  o,  /  hear 
au'  dis,  thou  hearest 
au'  dit,  he  hearts 
au  di'  miis,  we  hear 
au  di'  tis,  you  hear 
au'  di  unt,  they  hear 


audivi 


auditum 


SUBJUNCTIYE. 

Present. 

au'  di  am,  may  I  hear 
au'  di  as,  hear  thou 
au'  di  at,  let  him  hear 
au  di  a'  iiiiis,  let  us  hear 
au  di  a'  tis,  hear  ye 
au'  di  ant,  let  them  hear 


Imperfect, 
au  di  e'  bam,  /  was  hearing         au  di'  rem,  /  should  hear 
au  di  e'  bas,  thou  wast  hearing    au  di'  res,  thou  loouldst  hear 
au  di  e'  bat,  he  ivas  hearing         au  di'  ret,  he  would  hear 
au  di  e  ha' mus^  we  were  hearing  au  di  re'  miis,  we  should  hear 
au  di  e  ba' tis,  you  ivere  hearing  au  di  re'  tis,  you  would  hear 
au  di  e'  bant,  tlieytcere  hearing    au  di'  rent,  they  would  hear 


Future. 


au'  di  am,  I  shall  hear 
au'  di  es,  thou  wilt  hear  . 
au'  di  et,  he  will  hear 
au  di  e'  mus,  we  shall  hear 
au  di  e'  tis,  you  will  hear 
au'  di  ent,  they  will  hear 


au  di'  vi,  /  (have)  heard 

au  di  vi'  sti,  thou  hast  heard 

au  di'  vit,  he  has  heard 

au  di'  vi  mus,  we  have  heard 

au  di  vi'  stis,  you  have  heard 

au  di  ve'  runt,  they  have  heard 


au  ditu'  riis, 
-a,  -iim 

au  di  tu'  ri, 
-ae,    a 


Sim 

sis 

sit 

si'  mus 

si'  tis 

sint 


he  about 
to  hear 


Perfect. 

au  di'  ve  rim,  I  may  have  heard 
au  di'  ve  ris,  thou  may  est  have  h. 
au  di'  ve  rit,  he  may  have  heard 
au  di  ve  ri  mus,  we  may  have  h. 
au  di  ve  ri  tis,  you  may  have  h. 
au  di'  ve  rint,  they  may  have  h. 


au  di'  ve  ram,  /  had  heard 
au  di'  ve  ras,  thou  hadst  heard 
au  di'  ve  rat,  he  had  heard 
au  di  ve  ra'  mus,  ive  had  heard 
au  di  ve  ra'  tis,  you  had  heard 
au  di'  ve  rant,  they  had  heard 


Pluperfect. 


au  di  vis'  sgm,  /  should  have  h. 
au  di  vis'  ses,  thouwouldst  h.  //. 
au  di  vis'  set,  he  would  have  h. 
au  di  vis  se'  mus,  we shouldh.  h, 
au  di  vis  se'  tis,  you  would  h.  h. 
au  di  vis'  sent,  they  would  h.  h. 


—     89 


Indicative.  SuBJUNcmvE. 

Future  Perfect, 
au  di'  ve  ro,  I  shall  have  heard  (wanting) 

au  di'  ve  ris,  thou  wilt  have  heard 
au  di'  ve  rit,  he  will  have  heard 
au  di  ve  ri  nius,  we  shall  have  h, 
au  di  ve  ri  tis,  you  will  have  h. 
au  di'  ve  rint,  they  will  have  h. 

Impebative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Pres.  au'  di,  hear  thou  au  di'  tS,  hear  ye 

Fut.   au  di'  to,  thou  shatt  hear        au  di  to'  te,  ye  shall  hear 
au  di'  to,  he  shall  hear  au  di  un'  to^  they  shall  hear 

Infinitive. 
Pres.  au  di'  rg,  to  hear 

Perf.  au  di  vis'  s6,  to  have  heard 

Fut.  Sing.  Norn,  au  dl  tu'  rus,  -&,  -um  es'  se 

'^  Ace.     au  dl  tu'  rum,  -ani,-um  es'se  ' 

Plur.  Nom.  au  di  tu'  ri,  -ae,  -a  es'  se 

'^  Ace.     audlta'ros,  -as,  -&  es'se 


■  to  be  about  to  hear 


Present,  au'  di  ens, 
Future,    au  di  tu'  rus, 


Participles. 
au  di  en'  tis,    hearing 

au  di  tu'  ra,    au  di  tu'  riini,  about  to  hear 


Gerund. 
Gen.  au  di  en'  di,  of  hearing 
Dat.    au  di  en'  do,  for  hearing 
Ace.   au  di  en'  dum,  hearing 
Abl.    au  di  en'  do,  by  hearing 

323.     Fourth  Conjugation. 

Indicative. 


Supine. 


au  di'  turn  ) 

au  di'  tu      f 


to  hear 


[155.  150.] 


Passive  Voice. 

Subjunctive. 


au'  di  or,  /am  heay^d 
au  di'  ris,  thou  art  heai^d 
au  di'  tur,  he  is  heard 
au  di'  niiir,  we  ai^e  heai^d 
au  di'  mi  ni,  you  are  heard 
au  di  un'  tur,  they  are  heard 


Present. 

au'  di  ar,  may  I  be  heard 
au  di  a'  ris,   be  thou  heard 
au  di  a'  tur,  let  him  be  heard 
au  di  a'  miir,  let  us  be  heard 
au  di  a'  mi  ni,  be  ye  heard 
au  di  an'  tur,    let  them  he  heard 


—     90     — 

Indicative.  Subjunctivb. 

Imperfect, 

au  d5  e'  l>3.r,  I  was  heard  an  di'  rer,  /  should  be  heard 

au  di  e  ba'  ris,  thou  wast  heard  au  di  re'  ris,  thou  wouldst  he  h. 
au  di  e  ba'  tur,  he  was  heard     au  di  re'  tur,  he  would  he  heard 
au  di  e  ba'  mur,  we  were  heard  au  di  re'  mur,  we  should  he  h. 
au  di  e  ba'  mi  ni,  you  ivere  h.    au  di  re'  mi  ni,  you  would  he  h. 
au  di  e  ban'  tur,  they  were  h.      au  di  ren'  tur,  they  would  he  h. 

Future, 
au'  di  ar,  /  shall  he  heard  (wanting) 

au  di  e'  ris,  thou  wilt  he  heard 
au  di  e'  tur,  he  will  he  heard 
au  di  e'  mur,  tve  shall  he  heai^d 
au  di  e'  mi  ni,  you  will  he  heard 
au  di  en'  tur,  they  will  he  heard 


Perfect, 


/  was  or  have  heen  heard 
i  sum 

au  dV  ttis,  -a,  -um  4  es 
(est 
( su'  mus 

au  dl'  ti,  -ae,  -a      4e'  stis 
(sunt 


/  may  have  heen  heard 
( si]  11 

an  di'  tils,  -&,  -um  }  sis 
(sit 
(  si'  mus 

au  di'  ti,  -ae,  -a      -|  sT'  tis 
(  sint 


Pluperfect. 
I  had  been  heard  I  should  have  heen  heard 

^6' ram  r  es' sem 

au  di'  tiis,  -a,  -Gm  |  e'  ras  au  di'  tiis,  -a,  -um  -|  es'  ses 
(6' rat  (es'set 

6ra'  mus  ress6'  mus 

au  di'  ti,  -ae,  -3.      -^  6  ra'  tis  au  di'  ti,  -ae,  -a      -]  es  s6'  tis 
^'  rant  /  es'  sent 


/  shatl  have  heen  heard 
e'  ro 
au  di'  tus,  -a,  -um  -^  e'  ris 

6'  rit 


Future  Perfect, 


(wanting) 


au  di'  ti,  -ae,  -& 


^  S'  ri  mus 
J  6'  ri  tis 
(  e'  runt 


—    91     -. 

Impebative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Pres.  au  di'  re,  be  thou  heard        au  di'  mi  ni,  he  ye  heard 
Put.    au  di'  tor,  thou  shalt  be  h. 

au  di'  tor,  he  shall  be  heard  au  di  un'  tor,  they  shall  be  heard 

Infinitive. 
Pres.  au  di'  ri,  to  be  heard 

Perf.  Sing.  Nom.  au  di'  tiis,  -a,  -fim    es'  se      ^ 

"  Ace.    au  dr  tarn,  -am,  -iiin   es'  sP  (  ^^  ^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^,.^ 

Plur.  Nom.  au  di' ti,  -ae,  -&   es's6  | 

"  Ace.    au  dr  tos, -as, -a  es'se         J 
Put.  au  dr  tiiin  i'  ri,  to  be  about  to  be  heard 

Pabticiples. 
Perfect,      au  di'  tQs,    au  di'  ta,    au  di'  tiim,  heard 
Gerundive,  au  di  en'  dQs,  au  di  en'  da,  au  di  en'dfim,  to  he  heard, 
deserving  to  be  heard 

Examples  for  Practice: 
dormio,  -irg,  to  sleep  vestio,  -irg,  to  clothe 

custodio,  -ir6,  to  guard  l6nio,  -irS,  to  appease 

erudio,  -irS,  to  instruct  nutrio,  -ire,  to  nourish 

impedio,  -ire,  to  hinder  puniS,  -ir§,  to  punish 

condio,  -irS,  to  season  finio,  -ir€,  to  finish 

[157.  158.] 

Deponent  Verbs. 

324,  Deponent  Verbs  have  the  form  of  the  PassiAC 
Yoice  with  an  active  signification,  as:  hortor,  hortatus 
sum,  hortari,  to  exhort,  the  Perfect  hortatus  sum 
representing  at  the  same  time  the  Supine  liortatuiii. 

325,  Deponent  Verbs  have  Pour  Participles: 
the  Present  Participle,  as:  hortans,  exhorting 

tlie  Perfect  Participle,  as:  hortatus,  having  exhorted 

the  Put.  Part.  Act.,  as:  hortaturus,  being  about  to  exhort 

the  Put.  Part.  Pass.,  as:  hortandiis,  to  be  exhorted. 

326,  The  Future  Infinitive  is  always  to  be  given  in  the  active 
form,  thus:  hortaturus  ess6,  to  be  about  to  exhoi-t  (not  hortatum  Tri). 


—    92     — 
327.     Deponent  of  the  First  Conjugation. 


Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf. 
hortor,  -ari,  to  exhort 


Perfect. 

hortatiis  sum 


Indicative. 

/  exhort 
hor'  tor 
hor  ta'  ris 
hor  ta'  tur 
hor  ta'  miir 
hor  ta'  mi  ni 
hor  tan'  tur 


Present. 


Subjunctive. 

/  may  exhort 
hor'  ter 
hor  te'  ris 
hor  te'  tiir 
hor  te'  miir 
hor  te'  mi  ni 
hor  ten'  tur 


I  was  exhorting 
hor  ta'  b^r 
hor  ta  ba'  ris 
hor  ta  ba'  tur 
hor  ta  ba'  mtir 
hor  ta  ba'  mi  ni 
hor  ta  ban'  tur 


Imperfect. 


/  should  exhort 
hor  ta'  rer 
hor  ta  re'  ris 
hor  ta  re'  tur 
hor  ta  re'  mur 
lior  ta  re'  mi  ni 
hor  ta  ren'  tur 


/  shall  exhort 
lior  ta'  bor 
hor  ta'  be  ris 
hor  ta'  bi  tur 
hor  ta'  bi  miir 
lior  ta  bi'  mi  ni 
hor  ta  bun'  tur 


Future. 

/  may  he  about  to  exhort 
i  Sim 
hor  ta  ta'  rus,  -S,  -um  }  sis 
(sit 

\  si'  miis 
hor  ta  tu'  ri,  -ae,  -H    }  si'  tis 
/  sint 


Perfect. 


/  (have)  exhorted 

i  sum 
hor  ta'  tGs,  -a,  -um    •<  es 
(est 


/  may  have  exhorted 

i  Sim 
hor  ta'  tus,  -a,  -um    <  sis 
(sit 


hor  ta'  ti,  -ae,  -a 


C  su'  mus  C  si'  miis 

-j  e'  stis      hor  ta'  ti,  -ae,  -a        }  si'  tis 
( sunt  (  sint 


—     93     — 


Indicative.                                            Subjunctive. 
Pluperfect. 

/  had  exhorted 

/  should  have  exhorted 

( e'ram 

(  es'  sem 

hor  ta'  tus,  -a,  -ilm  \  e'  ras 

hor  ta'  tus,  -a,  -iim  }  es'  s6s 

(e'rat 

(  es'  set 

6  ra'  miis 

^  es  s6'  mus 

hor  ta'  ti,  -ae,  -a    -<  e  ra'  tis 

horta'ti,  -ae,  -^     -J  esse' tis 

(  e'  rant 

(  es'  sent 

FutuTt  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  exhorted 

i  e'  ro 
hor  ta'  tQs,  -a,  -iim  -]  e'  ris 

(wanting) 

(  6'  rit 

i'  6'  ri  mus 

lior  ta'  ti,  -ae,  -a  \  g'  n  tis 

f  e'  runt 

Impeeative. 
Singular.  l*lural. 

Pres.  hor  ta'  rg,  exhort  thou  hor  ta'  iiii  ni,  exhort  ye 

Fut.    hor  ta'  tor,  thou  shalt  exhort 

hor  ta'  tor,  he  shall  exhort     hor  tan'  tor,  they  shall  exhort 

Infinitive. 

Pres.  hor  ta'  ri,  to  exhort 

Perf.  Sing.  Nom.  hor  ta'  tus,  -a,  -um  es'  se       ^ 

^'      Ace.    hor  ta'  tum,  -am,  -umi  es'  se   [  ,     ,  r,     .  7 

TjT       .,        1,      x-.x-  «       r    -  r^^^  ^^^^6  exhorted 

Plur.  Nom.  hor  ta'  ti,  -ae,  -3,  es'  se 

^'      Ace.    hor  ta' tos,  -as,  -&  es' se  ) 

Put.  Sing.  Nom.  hor  ta  tu'rus,  -a,  -ttm  es'  se    1 

**      Ace.    hortatu'riim, -am, -limes' se   (  /o  he  about  to 
Plur.  Nom.  hor  ta  tu'ri,  -ae,  -a  es'se         (  exhort 

^^      Aec.    hortatu'ros,  -as,  -H    es'se     j 

Participles. 
Present.      hor' tans,  hor  tan' tis,    exhorting 
Perfect.       hor  ta'  tus,    hor  ta'  ta,    hor  ta'  tum,   having  exhorted 
Put.  Aci     hor  ta  tii'  rus,   hor  ta  tli'  ra,  hor  ta  tu'  rum,  about  to 

exhort 
Gerundive,  hor  tan'  dus,   hor  tan'  da,  hor  tan'  dum,  to  be  exhorted 


94     -' 


Geettnd.  Supine. 

Gen.    hor  tan'  di,  of  exhorting 
Dat.     hor  tan'  do,  for  exhorting 
Ace.     hor  tan'  dum,  exhorting  hor  ta'  tQm  ' 

Abl.     hor  tan'  do,  by  exhorting  hor  ta'  tu      ! 

Examples  for  Practice: 


to  exhort 


pisc6r,  -ari,  to  fish 
imit5r,  -ari,  to  imitate 
rScordor,  -ari,  to  r 677}  ember 
proeliSr,  -ari,  to  fight 
laetor,  -ari,  to  rejoice  (at) 
vendr,  -ari,  to  hunt 


arbitror,  -ari,  to  regard 
con5r,  -ari,  to  try 
comitor,  -ari,  to  accompany 
vagor,  -ari,  to  roam 
mlror,  -ari,  to  admire 
minor,  -ari,  to  threaten 

[161,  162. 


328.    Deponent 

Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres. 
vereor,  -eri,  to 

Indicative. 

I  fear 
v6'  rg  or 
v6  re'  ris 
ve  re'  tiir 
v6  re'  mur 
v6  re'  mi  iii 
ve  ren'  tiir 

I  was  fearing 
ve  r6'  bar 
v6  re  ba'  ris 
v6  re  ba'  tur 
ve  re  ba'  mfir 
v6  re  ba'  mi  ni 
ve  re  ban'  tur 

/  shall  fear 
v6  re'  b6r 
v6  re'  be  ris 
v6  re'  bi  tur 
v6  re'  bi  mur 
v6  rS  bi'  mi  ni 
v6  re  bun'  tur 


of  the  Second  Conjugation, 

.Inf. 
fear 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


Future. 


Perfect. 
veritiis  sum 

Subjunctive, 

/  may  fear 
ve'  re  ar 
ve  re  a'  ris 
ve  re  a'  tiir 
ve  rS  a'  mfir 
vg  re  a'  mi  nl 
v6  re  an'  tiir 

I  should  fear 
v6  re'  r6r 
ve  re  re'  ris 
ve  re  re'  ttir 
ve  re  re'  miir 
ve  re  re'  mi  ni 
ve  re  ren'  tur 

/  may  be  about  to  fear 

n  tu'  rus, 
-a,  -lim 


ve  ri  tu'  ri,     j 
-ac,     a       j 


SIS 
Sit 

si'  mus 
si'  tis 
slnt 


95     — 


Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 

/  (have)  feared 

/  may  have  feared 

i  sum                                             i  Sim 
4  es             ve'  ri  tus,  -&,  -Gm     ■<  sis 
(  est                                               (  sit 

ve'ri  tiis,  -a,    ilm 

I  sii'  mus                                         I  si'  mus 
^  e'  stis        v6'  ri  ti,  -ae,  -a         -|  si'  tis 

v§'  ri  ti,  -ae,  -a 

( sunt                                              ( sint 

Pluperfect. 

/  had  feared 

/  should  have  feared 

i  e'  ram                                            C  es'  sem 

v6'  ri  tus,  -a,  -tim 

-<  6'  ras        v6'  rt  tGs,  -a,  -tiin     -J  es'  ses 

( 6'  rat                                          ( es'  s6t 

^  e  ra'  mus                                      (  es  s6'  mus 

ve'riti,  -ae,  -& 

•]  6  ra'  tis     vg'  ri  ti,  -ae,  -a        -|  es  s6'  tis 

(  6'  rant                                          (  es'  sent 

Future  Perfect. 

/  s/ia??  ^ai;^  feared 

g'ro                             (wanting) 

ve'  ri  tGs,  -a,  -iim 

'  6'ris 

(  e'  rit 

i  e'  ri  mus 

^•^'  ri  ti,  -ae,  ~a 

-]  e'  ri  tis 

(  e'  runt 

Impeeative. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Pres.  ve  re'  re,  fear  thou                  ve  re'  mi  ni,  fear  ye 

Fut.   ve  re'  t6r,  thou  shalt  fear 

v6  re'  tor,  he  shall  fear          v^  ren'  tor,  they  s-hall  fear 

Infinitive. 

Pres.  ve  re'  ri,  to  fear 

Perf.  Sing.  Nom.  ve'  ri  tus,  -a,  -iim   es'  sg 

'^      Ace      ve'  ri  turn,  -am,  -iim  es'  se 

Plur.    Nom.  ve'  ri  ti,  -ae,  -a   es'  se 

"      Ace.     ve' ri  tos,  -as,  -a   es' se 

Fut.  Sing.   Nom.  vg  ri  tu'  rus,  -a,  -um  es'  s6  ) 

*'      Ace.     ve  ri  tu' rfim, -am, -Qmi  es'sO      f 

Plur.    Nom.  v6  ri  tu'  ri,  -ae,  -a  es'  s6  T 

''      Ace.     v6  ri  tu' rSs,  -as,  -a   es' s6  J 


1o  hare  feared 


to  be  about  to 
fear 


PARTICIPIiES. 

ve'  reus,    ve  ren'  tis,  fearing 
ve'  ri  tQs,  v6'  ri  t^-,  ve'  ri  tuin^  having  feared 
ve  li  tu'  rus,  v6  ri  tii'  r3.,  v6  ri  tti'  rum,  about  to  fear 
Gerundive,  ve  ren'  diis,  v6  ren'  da,  ve  ren'  duin,  to  be  feared 
Gerund.  Supine. 

v6  ren'  di,  of  fearing 
v6  ren'  do,  for  fearing 

ve  ren'  dum,  fearing  ve'  ri  turn  \  .    ^     , 

ve  ren'  do,    by  fearing  ve'  ri  tii      ( 

Examples  for  Practice: 
liceor,  -eri,  to  bid  tuedr,  -eri,  to  look  to 

polliceor,  -eri^  to  promise  intiieor,  -eri,  to  look  at 

mgrgor,  -eri,  to  deserve  revSredr,  -eri,  to  respect 

[103.  104.] 

329.    Deponent  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 


Present. 
Perfect. 
Put.  Act. 


Gen, 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 


Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf. 
sequor,  -i,    to  follow 

Indicative. 


Present. 


se'  quor,  I  folloiv 
s6'  que  ris 
s6'  qui  tur 
s6'  qui  mur 
se  qui'  mi  m 
se  quun'  tur 

Imperfect. 
s6  que'  bar,  /  ivas  following 
se  que  ba'  ris 
se  que  ba'  tiir 
se  que  ba'  mur 
se  que  ba'  mi  iii 
se  que  ban'  tui* 


/  shall  follow 
se'  quar 
se  que'  ris 
se  que'  tur 
se  que'  mtir 
s6  que'  mi  ni 
s6  quen'tur 


Future. 


Perfect. 

secuttis  sum 

Subjunctive. 

se'  quSr,  /  may  follow 

se  qua'  ris 

se  qua'  tur 

se  qua'  mur 

se  qua'  mi  ni 

s6  quan'  tur 

se'  querer,  I  should  follow 

s6  que  re'  ris 

se  que  re'  tur 

se  que  re'  miir 

se  que  re'  mi  ni 

se  que  ren'  tur 

/  may  be  about  to  follow 


se  cu  til'  rtis, 
-a,  -um 

se  cfi  tu'  ri, 
-ae,  -a 


sim 

■{  sis 
sit 

si'  mus 
si'  tis 
sint 


— •    97 


Indicative. 
/  (have)  followed 
s6cu'ttls,  -Slj  -tlm 

s6  cu'  ti,  -ae,  -a 

/  Jiad  followed 
sS  ctl'  tQs,    ~&,  -van 

s6  cd'  ti,  ~ae,  -S, 


Subjunctive. 
Perfeoi. 

/  may  have  followed 
'  sum  r  Sim 

gs  sg  cii'  tiSs,  -a,  -iim  ^  sis 

'  est  ( sit 

su'  mus  }  aV  mus 

[  e'  stis       s6  cu'  ti,  -ae,  -&        ^  sr  tis 
.  sunt  ( Bint 


Pluperfeoi 

/  should  have  followed 


g'  ram 
6' ras 
e'rat 
6  ra'  mus 
6  ra'  tis 
e'  rant 


sS  cu'  tiis,  -&,  -um 


s6  cti'  ti,  -ae,  -H 


es'  sem 
es'  s6s 
es'  set 
es  se'  mus 
68  se'tifl 
es'  sent 


/  shall  have  followed 
sgcu'ttis,    -a,  -tini 

s6cu'ti,   -ae,  -a 


Future  Perfeot. 

e'  ro  (wanting) 

6'  ris 

e'  rit 

S'  ri  mus 

e'  ri  tis 

6'  runt 

Impebative. 
Singular.  Plur&l. 

Pres.    s6'  que  rg,  /o??oii?  ^/ioz^  se  qui'  mi  ni,  follow  ye 

Put.    se'quitdr,  thou  shalt  follow 

s6'  qui  tdr,  he  shall  follow      s6  quun'  tor,  they  shall  follow 

Inhnitive. 
Pres.  eS'qui,  to  follow 

Perf.  Sing.  Norn  s6  cti'  tQs,  -S,  -urn  es'  s6 

^'  Ace.    se  cu'  turn,  -am,  -lim  es'  se 

Plur.  Norn,  se  cu'  ti,  -ae,  -a   es'  se 

**  Ace.    s6  cu'  tSs,  -as,  ~&  es'  se 

Put.  Sing.  Norn.  sS  cu  tu'rtis  -S,  -tim  es'  se 

*'  Ace.    s6  ca  tu'rGm,-am,-umes'se 

Plur.  Norn.  s6  cu  tu'  ri,  -ae,  -a   es'  se 

*^  Ace.    sectitu'ros,  -as,  -3.  es' se 


■to  have  followed 


to  be  about  to  follow 


—    98 


Paeticiples. 
Preient.     se'  quens,  s6  quen'  tis,  following 
Perfect.      sScu'tGs,  sScu'ta,  secu'tuin,  having  followed 
Fut.  Act.    se  cii  tu'  rtis,  s6  cu  tu'  ra,  se  cu  tu'  rum,  about  to  follow 
Gerundive,  se  quen'  dtis,  s6  quen'  da,  se  quen'  dum,    to  he  followed 


Geeund. 
Gen.     s6  quen'  di,  of  following 
Dat     se  quen'  do,  for  following 
Ace.     s6  quen'  dum,  following 
Abl.      se  quen' do,  hy  following 


Supine. 


se  cu'  turn )  ,     .  „ 
s6cu'tu     \^o  follow 


Examples  for  Practice: 
Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf. 
loqudr,  -i,  to  speak 
fru5r,  -T,  to  enjoy 
fungdr,  -i,  to  discharge 


f 


Perfect, 
locutus  sum 
fruetus  sum 
functiis  sum 

[165.  166.] 


330.    Deponent  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation. 


Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf. 
blandior,  -iri 
Indicative, 

blan'  dT  6r,  I  flatter 

blan  di'  ris 

blan  di'  tiir  , 

blan  di'  miir 

blan  di'  mi  ni 

blan  di  un'  tur 


Perfect. 

blanditus  sum 

_         .  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

blan'  di  S-r,  /  may  flatter 

blan  di  a'  ris 

blan  di  a'  tiir 

blan  di  a'  miir 

blan  di  a'  mi  ni 

blan  di  an'  tur 


Imperfect, 
blan  di  e'bar,  I  was  flattering  blan  di'  rer,  /  should  flatter 
blan  di  e  ba'  ris  blan  di  re'  ris 

blan  di  e  ba'  tur  blan  di  re'  tur 

blan  di  e  ba'  miir  blan  di  re'  nitir 

blan  di  e  ba'  mi  ni  blan  di  re'  mi  ni 

l)lan  di  e  ban'  tur  blan  di  ren'  tur 


blan'  di  5r,  /  shall  flatter 

blan  di  e'  ris 

blan  di  e'  tur 

blan  di  e'  mur 

blan  di  e'  mi  ni 

blan  di  en'  tur 


Future, 
blan  di  tu'riis, 
-a,  -tim 

blan  di  W  ri, 
-ae,  -a 


sim 

sis 

sit 
C  si'  mus 
-J  si'  tlS 
(sint 


be  about 
to  flatter 


—    99    — 


INDICATIVB. 

SuBJUNcrrvB. 
Perfect. 

/  (have)  flattered 

/  may  have  flattered 

i  sum                                             C  Sim 

blan  dr  tus,  -a,  -urn  ■ 

}  es             blan  dr  tiis,  -a,  -flm  }  sis 

(est                                                ( sit 

1 

C  su'  mus                                        i  s!'  mus 

blan  di'  ti,  -ae,  -a    - 

1  e'  stis       blan  di'  ti,  -ae,  -a     -j  si'  tis 

(  sunt                                              (  sint 

/  had  flattered 

Pluperfect. 

/  should  have  flattered 

i  e'  ram                                            (  es'  s6m 

blan  di'  tiis,  -a,  -ttm  - 

1  6'  ras        blan  di'  tiis,  -a,  -iim  J  es'  s^s 

(6' rat                                             (es'set 

1 

fe  ra'miis                                       (  es  s6'mus 

blan  dl'  ti,  -ae,  -S,     - 

1  e  ra'  tis     blan  di'  ti,  -ae,  -a    -]  es  s5'  tls 

1 

(  e'  rant                                          (  es'  sent 

Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  flattered 

blan  dl'  tus,  -a,  -liin  - 

(e'  Yd                             (wanting) 
}  e'  ris 

(  e'  rit 

1 

f  6'  rimus 

blan  dr  ti,  -ae,  -a     - 

1  6'  ri  tis 

1 

fe'  runt 

Imperative 
Singular.  Plural. 

Pres.  blan  di'  re,  flatter  thou  blan  di'  mi  ni,  flatter  ye 

Put.    blan  di'  tor,  thou  shalt  flatter 

blan  di'  tor,  he  shall  flatter     blan  di  im'  tor,  they  shall  flatter 

Infinitive. 
Pres.  blan  di'  ri,  to  flatter 

Perf.  Sing.  Nom.  blan  di'  tiis,   -a,  -um  es'  se  ^ 

'*      Ace.    blan  di' tiim, -aTn,-iiin  es' s6  f 

Plur.   Nom.  blan  di'  ti,  -ae,  -a   es'  se  j^  ^^  ^^^^  flattered 

'^      Ace.    blan  di'  tos,  -as,  -a  es'  se  j 

Put.  Sing.  Nom.  blan  di  tu'riis,  -a,  -iiin  es' se  \ 

'^      Ace.    blan  di  tu'  riim,  -am,  -ttm  es'  se  f  to  he  about  to 

Plur.   Nom.  blan  di  tu'  ri,  -ae,  -a  es'  s6  [         flatter 

**      Ace.    blan  di  tu'  ros,  -as,  -a  es'  se  J 


—    100   — 

Pabticiples. 
Present,     blan'  dl  ens,  blan  dl  en'  tis,  flattering 
Perfect,      blan  di'  tQs,   blan  di'  ta,    blan  di'  tflni,    having  flattered 
fut.  Act.    blan  di  tu'  rQs,   blan  di  tu'  ra,  blan  di  tii'  riim,     about 

to  flatter 
Ckrundive.  blan  dl  en'  dQs,  blan  dl  en'  da,  blan  di  en'  diim,   to  he 
flattered 

Gebund.  Supine. 

Gen.  blandlen'di,  of  flattering 
Dat.   blan  dl  en'  do,  for  flattering 

Ace.    blan  dl  en'  dQm,  flattering  blan  di'ttini)  ^  Hatter 

Abl.    blan  dl  en'  do,  by  flattering  blan  di'  tu     ) 

Examples  for  Practice: 
largldr,  ~iri,  to  bestow  partiSr,  -iri,  to  share,  divide 

raentidr,  -iri,  to  lie  p6tI5r,  -iri,  to  possess  one^s  self 

moli5r,  -iri,  to  strive  sortiSr,  -iri,  to  draw  lots 

[167.  168.] 

Appendix  to  the  Third  Conjugation. 
Yerbs  in  io. 
331.  Some  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation  insert 
1  before  the  ending  of  the  Present,  as:  capere,  io 
take;  capio,  /  take.  This  i  appears  Hkewise  in  all 
the  other  forms  derived  from  the  Present  and  In- 
finitive, but  not  before  another  i  or  e,  except  in  the 
third  person  of  the  future  active:  capiet,  he  will  take. 


Active 

Voice. 

Fres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf. 

Perfect.               Supine. 

capIS,  -grg,  to  take 

cepi               captiini 

Indicative. 

/  take 
ca'  pi  0 

Present. 

Subjunctive. 

/  may  take 
ca'  pi  am 

ca'  pis 
ca'  pit 
ca'  pi  miis 
ca'  pi  tis 
ca'  pi  unt 

ca'  pi  as 
ca'  pi  at 
ca  pi  a'  miis 
ca  pi  a' tis 
ca'  pi  ant 

—     101     — 


Indicative. 

/  was  taking 
ca  pi  6'  bam 
ca  pi  e'  bas 
ca  pi  6'  bat 
ca  pi  6  ba'  mus 
ca  pi  6  ba'  tis 
ca  pi  6'  bant 

/  shall  take 
ca'  pi  am 
ca'  pi  6s 
ca'  pi  6t 
ca  pi  6'  mus 
ca  pi  6'  tis 
ca'  pi  ent 


Imperfeot. 


Future. 


SUBJUNCTrVB. 

/  might  take 
ca'  p6  rSm 
ca'  p6  r$8     . 
ca'  p?  ret 
ca  p6  r6'  D)us 
ca  p^  r^'  tis 
ca'  p6  rent 

/  may  be  about  to  take 

^     i  Sim 
cap  tu'  rtis,  * 

-a,  -iim 


SIS 

sit 


cap  tfi 
-ae. 


,  «      (si'mus 

^^;    ^  si' tis 

'  -*     (sint 


/  have  taken  or  /  took 
ce'  pi  (like  leg!) 


Pres, 
Put. 


Perfect. 

/  may  have  taken 
c6'  p6  rim  {like  legSrim) 

Pluperfect. 
/  had  taken  I  might  have  taken 

c6'  pS  ram  {like  Iggeram)  c6  pis'  s6m  {like  I6giss6m) 

Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  taken 
c6'  p6  ro  {like  legSro)  (wanting) 

Impkrative. 
Singular.  Plural, 

ca'  pe,  take  thou  ca'  pi  te,   take  ye 

ca'  pi  to,  thou  shalt  take         ca  pi  to'  t6,  i/^  s^aZZ  <aA:^ 
ca'  pi  to, 


Pres. 
Perf. 

Fut.  Sing. 

u 

Plur. 


thou  shalt  take 

he  shall  take  ca  pi  un'  to,  they  shall  take 

Infinitive. 

ca'  p6  re,  to  take 

c6  pis'  se,  to  have  taken 
Norn,  cap  tu'  rtis,  -3.,  -Gm   es'  s6 
Ace.     cap  tu'  riim,  -^m,  -Qm  es'se 
Norn,  captu'ri,  -ae,  -&  es's6 
Ace.    cap  tu'  ros,  -as,  -&   es'  s6 

Paeticiples. 
Present,     ca'  piens,  -tis,  taking 
Future,     cap  tu'  rQs,  -a,  -tun,  a6ow^  to  take 


■  to  be  about  to  take 


—    102    — 


Gerukd. 
Gen.    ca  pi  en'  di,  of  taking 
Dat.    ca  pi  en'  do,  for  talcing 
Ace.     ca  pi  en'  dum,  talcing 
Abl.     ckiyien''^Qj  by  talcing 


Supine. 


^''p'/,^'"!  to  tote 

cap'tu    1 


Passive  Voice. 


Present. 


Subjunctive. 


Indicative. 

/  am  taken 
ca'  pi  or 
ca'  p6  ris 
ca'  pi  tur 
ca'  pi  mur 
ca  pi'  mi  ni 
ca  pi  un'  tur 

/  was  taken 
ca  pi  6'  bar 
ca  pi  6  ba'  ris 
ca  pi  6  ba'  tur 
ca  pi  g  ba'  mur 
ca  pi  e  ba'  mi  nl 
ca  pi  e  ban'  tur 

/  shall  he  taken 
ca'  pi  ar 
ca  pi  6'  ris 
ca  pi  6'  tur 
ca  pi  g'  mur 
ca  pi  6'  mini 
ca  pi  en'  tur 

Perfect. 
I  was  or  have  been  taken 
cap'  tiis,  -a,  -Hnx  sum,  &q. 

Pluperfect. 
/  had  been  taken  I  might  have  been  taken 

cap'  ttis,  -a,  -iim  S'  ram,  &c.      cap'  ttls,  -a,  -iim  es'  s6m,  &c, 

Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  been  taken 
cap'  ttis,  -a,  -tlm  6'  rO,  &c.  (wanting) 


Future. 


/  may  be  taken 
ca'  pi  ar 
ca  pi  a'  ris 
ca  pi  a'  tur 
ca  pi  a'  mur 
ca  pi  a'  mi  ni 
ca  pi  an' tur 

/  might  be  taken 
ca'  pe  r6r 
ca  p6  rg'  ris 
ca  p6  re' tur 
ca  pe  r5'  mur 
ca  pe  re'  mi  ni 
ca  pe  ren'  tur 


(wanting) 


I  may  have  been  taken 
cap'  tus,  -a,  -um  sim,  &c. 


—     103    — 

Imperative. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Pres.  ca'  pe  re,  be  thou  taken  ca  pi'  ml  ni,  be  ye  taken 

Put.    ca'  pi  tor,  thou  shalt  be  taken 

ca'  pi  tor,  he  shall  be  taken     ca  pi  un'  tor,  they  shall  be  taken 

.  Infinitive. 
Pres.  ca'  pi,  to  be  taken 

Perf.  Sing.  Nom.  cap'  tiis,  -a,  -uin  es'  s5 

^^      Ace.     cap'  tflm,  -am,  -tini    es'  se   ,   ,    , 
Plur.  Nom.  cap'  ti,  -ae,  -a  es'  s6  ^  ^^  '^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^ 

"      Ace.     cap'  tos,  -as,  -a   es'  se 
Put.  cap'  turn  i'  ri, 

PAETICaPLES. 

Perfect.        cap'  tiis,  -a,  -um,   taken 

Gerundive,   ca  pi  en'  dus,    ca  pi  en'  da,    ca  pi  en'  dum,    to  be   taken 

332.  Verbs   of  the    Third   Conjugation   ending   in 

lo,  lor,  are  the  following: 

Active  Verbs, 
capio,  -ere,  to  take  jacio,  -er5,  to  throw 

cupio,  -ere,  to  desire  pario,  -ere,  to  bring  forth 

facio,  -ere,  to  make  quatio,  -er<5,  to  shake 

fodio,  -ere,  to  dig  rapio,  -ere,  to  seize 

fugio,  -ere,  to  flee  sapio,  -ere,  to  be  wise 

and  Compounds  of  the  obsolete 
[-lacio,  /  entice]  [-specie,  /  see] 

Deponent  Verbs, 
gradior,  -i,  to  go  patior,  -i,  to  suffer 

morior,  -i,  to  die  U37.  issj] 

For  their  Principal  Parts  see  368, 

Special  Forms  in  Conjugation. 

333.  The   following   Special   Forms   are   found  in 

many  verbs: 

Perfects  in  avT,  evi,  ivT,  and  the  tenses  derived  from  them, 
drop  the  v  before  s  or  r,  and  contract  the  vowels  throughout,  ex- 
cept those  in  ivi,  v^^hich  do  not  admit  the  contraction  of  i-e  before 
r.    In  like  manner  novi,  /  know,  and  its  compounds  are  contracted. 


~     104     — 

avi  evi 

Perfect. 
Ind.  


ama^isti         amasti  delevisti         delestl 


amavistis        amastis  dSlevistis  d^lestis 

amaveriint     amarunt  deleverunt  delerunt 

SuBj.  amaverim       amarim,  &c.         d6lev6riin  delerim,  &c. 

Inf.    amavisse         amasse  d^levisse  d6less6 

Pluperfect. 

Ind.    amaverim      amar^m^  &c.        deleveram  delerSm,  &c. 

SuBj.  amavissem     amassem,  &c.      delevissem  delessem,  &c. 

Future  Perfect. 

Ind.    amavgro         amaro,  &c.  deleverS  delerO,  &c. 

ivi  ovi 

Perfect. 


XJND. 

audivisti 

audisti 

audistis 
audierunt 
audierim,  &c. 

audisse 

Pluperfec 
audieram,  &c. 
audissem,  <fec. 

novisti 

nosti 

SUBJ 

Inf. 
Ind. 

SUBJ 

audivistis 

audiverunt 

audiverim 

audivisse 

audivSram 
audivissem 

novistis 

nOverunt 

noverim 

novissS 

t. 
noveram 

novissSm 

nostis 
norunt 
norim,  &c. 

nosse 

noram,  &c. 

nossem,  Ac. 

Puture  Perfect. 

Ind.  audivero    audiero,  &c.    nOvero      

Mark  that  the  Puture  Perfect  of  novi  is  novero  uncontracted. 

334.    In  the  Perfect  Ind.  Act.  (3rd  pers.  plur.)  erS  for  erunt  is 
often  found,  thus: 

amaverS  for  amaverunt,  they  (have)  loved 
monuerS   ^^    monuerunt,  they  (have)  advised 
legerS       "    legerunt,  they  (have)  read 
audlverS  *^    audiverunt,  they  (have)  heard 


—     105     — 

335.  In  the  second  person  of  the  FassiTe  we  often  find  rt  for 
ris,  thus: 

amerS      for  ameris,  thou  mayest  be  loved 
amabare   *^    amabaris,  thou  wast  loved 
amarere    '^    amareris,  thou  mightest  he  loved 
amabere    ^^    amabgris,  thou  wilt  he  loved 
This  ending,  however,  is  rarely  used  in  the  Present  Indicative, 
but  almost  exclusively  in  the  Future. 

336.  The  Imperatives  of  dicere,  to  say;  ducerg,  to  lead;  facerg, 
to  make,  and  ferre,  to  hear,  are:  die,  due,  fac,  fer,  respectively. 
Compounds  follow  the  simple  verbs,  except  those  of  facio  which 
change  Sl  into  i,  as:  perfic^,  achieve  thou  (see  368.). 

337.  The  Gerund  and  Grenindive  of  the  3d  and  4th  Conjugations, 
instead  of  endl,  endus,  may  end  in  undi  and  undiis,  especially 
after  i,  as: 

capiundus,  to  he  taken;  rSpetundus,  to  he  reclaimed. 

338.  For  the  Imperative  of  scio,  /  know,  the  future  form  sclto 
is  always  used  in  the  singular,  and  scltotg  in  the  plural. 

1169.  170.] 

Formation  of  the  Principal  Parts. 
55.9.  In  forming  the  principal  parts  of  any  verb, 
we  take  for  a  starting  point  its  stem,  which  is  either 
a  Vowel-stem  or  a  Consonant-stem,  according  as  it  ends 
either  in  a  vowel  or  a  consonant. 

340.  The  First  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  whose  stem 
ends  in  a,  as:  3,ina-re,  Stem:  ^ma. 

341.  The  Second  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  whose  stem 
ends  in  e,  as:  mone-re.  Stem:  indne. 

342.  The  Fourth  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  whose  stem 
ends  in  i,  as:  audi-re,  Stem:  audi. 

343.  The  Third  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  whose  stem 
ends  in  a  consonant,  as:  leg-ere,  Stem:  leg;  or  in  u  (v),  as:  st3.- 
tii-ere,  Stem:  statu.  Stems  in  u  follow  the  Consonant-conjugation. 

344.  As  a  rule.  Vowel-stems  undergo  no  change 
except  in  some  cases   the  contracting  of  the  final 


—     106 


vowel  with  the  termination,  as:  amo  contracted  fron 

ama-o;  they  form  the  Perfect  and  Supine  by  adding 

respectively  vi,  tum,  to  the  stem,  thus: 

Stem.  Perfect.  Supine. 

I.    ama-re,  to  love  ama-vi  ama-tuni 

II.    dele-re,   to  deUroy  del6-vi  dele-ttini 

lY.    audi-re,  to  hear  audi-vi  audi-tuni 

34:5.  Consonant-stems  are  liable  to  various  changes 
which  will  be  considered  below  under  Third  Con- 
jugation. 

VERBS  OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

34:6.  As  already  explained,  the  First  Conjugation  contains  al 
the  vowel-stems  in  a,  and  forms  the  Perfect  and  Supine  })y  adding 
respectively  vi,  turn,  to  the  stem.  Or,  in  other  words,  in  the  Firs 
Conjugation  the  Regular  Forms  of  the  Principal  Parts  are  these 

Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect.  Supine. 

-o  -are  -avi  -atum 

amo  amare,  to  love    amavi  amatiiin 

Those  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjugation  which  form  thei] 
Perfect  and  Supine  differently  are  the  following: 

347,  Perfect  in  ui,  Supine  in  Itum  (tGm). 


crepo,  -are,  to  creak 

crepm 

crepitiim                  ' 

increpo,  -are,  to  scold 

increpiii 

incrgpituin 

discrepo,  -are,  to  disagree 

discrepui 

wanting 

cubo,  -are,  to  lie  down 

cubiii 

cubittiin 

inciibo,  -are,  to  lie  upon 

incubm 

inc  libitum 

acciibo,  -are,  to  lie  near 

acciibui 

accubitiim 

Some  Compounds  insert  m, 

and  are  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 

domo,  -are,  to  tame 

domui 

domitum 

sono,  -are,  to  sound 

sonui 

sonitiini,  sonaturus 

resono,  -are,  to  resound 

resonavi 

wanting 

tono,  -are,  to  thunder 

tonili 

tonitum 

v6to,  -are,  to  forbid 

vetiii 

vetitum 

frico,  -are,  to  rub 

fricQi 

fricatiim,  frictiim 

mico,  -are,  to  shine 

micfti 

wanting 

Smico,  -are,  to  shine  forth 

Smicui 

emicatum 

dimico,  -ar6,  to  fight 

dimicavi 

dimicatum              i 

—     101     — 


[plico,  I  fold]  * 
applico,  -are,  to  apply 

explico,  -are,  to  unfold 

implico,  -ar6,  to  involve 


{  applicavi 
(  applicui 
)  explicavi 
(  explicui 
( implicavi 
( implicui 


Compounds  in  -plico  from   nouns   in  -pi  ex 
multiplico,  -are,  to  multiply j  from  multiplex. 


applTcatttm 
applicittiin 
explicatum 

explicitiini 
implicattiin 
implicittiin 

are  regular, 


as: 


poto,  -are,  to  drink 
seco,  -are,  to  cut 

deseco,  -arg,  to  cut  down 

6neco,  -are,  to  slay 


potavi 
seem 
desecui 
( engcavi 
1  eneciii 


potum  . 

sectum,  secatariis 
dgseetiiin 
enecatum 
enectlini 


348. 


Perfect  in  i.    Supine  in  turn 
with  lengthened  stem-vowel. 

juvi  jutum 


to  assist 


jiivo,  -arS 

adjiivo,  -aref  """^  ^'^'^'^^'^  adjCivi  adjutiim 

Fut.  Participles:  jiivaturus,  hut  adjuturus  or  adjuvaturus 
lav5,  -are,  to  wash  lavi  lavatttm  (lautum, 

lotum) 

349.  With  Reduplicated  Perfect. 

Some  Verbs  of  the  First,  Second  and  Third  Conjugations  repeat 
in  the  Perfect  the  initial  consonant  of  the  stem  with  the  vowel  fol- 
lowing it,  or  with  e.  Compound  Verbs  omit  the  reduplication,  but 
Compounds  of  do,  /  give;  sto,  /  stand;  disco,  /  learn;  posco,  / 
demand,  and  some  of  those  of  currO,  I  run,  retain  it. 

do,  -are,  to  give  dMT  datum 

circumdo,  -^re,  to  surround   circumdedi        circumdatHm 
pessumdo,  -are,  to  ruin  pessumdedi       pessumdatum 

satisdo,  -are,  to  give  hail         satisdedi  satisdatum 

venumdo,  -are,  to  sell  venumdedi        venumdatiim 

a  is  everywhere  short,  except  in  das,  thou  givest;  da,  give  thou. 

Like  do,  are  conjugated  the  Compounds  with  words  of  two  syl- 
lables, as:  circumdo,  I  surround.  The  Compounds  with  words  of 
one  syllable  pass  over  into  the  3d  Conjugation. 


*  Obsolete  forms  are  inclosed  within  brackets    [  ]. 


—     108    — 

Bto,  starS,  to  stand  steti  BtatiSm 

antisto,  -are,  to  excel  antistgti  wanting 

circumsto,  -are,  to  stand  around  circumsteti         wanting 
consto,  -are,  to  consist  constiti  wanting 

praesto,  -are,  to  afford  praestiti  wanting 

diBto,  -are,  to  he  distant  wanting  wanting 

exsto,  -are,  to  exist  wanting  v^anting 

Like  antisto,  all  Compounds  of  stare  with  ];)reposition8  of 
two  syllables  have  steti  in  the  Perfect,  but  no  Supine.  Those  com- 
pounded with  prepositions  of  one  syllable  have  stitl  in  the  Perfect, 
and  likewise  no  Supine,  disto  and  exsto  have  neither  Perfect  nor 
Supme.  t^^^-  ^^^-l 

350,  More  than  half  of  all  Deponents  in  the  language  are  of 
the  First  Conjugation,  and  all  of  these  are  regular  (see  327). 

VEBBS  OF  THE  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

351,  The  Second  Conjugation,  as  we  have  seen,  includes  all 
verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  e.  In  these  the  Perfect  and  Supine 
regularly  add  vi,  turn  to  the  stem,  thus: 

Stem.  Perfect.  Supine. 

dele  -r6,  to  destroy    del^-vi  del6-tiim 

352,  However,  most  verbs  of  the  2d  Conjugation  drop  the 
stem-vowel  e  in  the  Perfect,  vi  becomes  ui,  and  in  the  Supine  I 
is  inserted  before  turn;  thus: 

Pres.  Ind.  &  Pros.  Inf.  Perfect.  Supine. 

-eo  -ere  -iii  ^itiini 

moneo       monere,  to  advise      monui  monitum 

This  is  considered  the  Regular  formation,  as  it  is  the  one  which 
most  commonly  occurs. 

353,  Many  verbs  with  a  regular  Perfect  in  iii  want  the  Supine. 
Such  are: 

arceo,  -ere,  to  keep  off  horreo,  -ere,  to  shudder 

areo,  -erg,  to  be  dry  langueo,  -ere,  to  he  weary 

calleo,  -ere,  to  he  versed  lateo,  -ere,  to  he  hid 

candeo,  -ere,  to  shine  liqueo,  -erS,  to  he  fluid 

egeo,  -ere       1  ^^  x    •  ,  madeo,  -erS,  to  he  wet 

.°,. 'v.-     -  ^}  to  hem  want  .^w-  '-  «   '       ..^^ 

mdigeo,  -ere  (  nitgo,  -erg,  to  glitter 

6min65,  -6re,  to  he  prominent        oleo,  -erg,  to  smell 

floreo,  -ere,  to  blossom  palleo,  -ere,  to  look  pale 


109     — 


pat65,  -er6,  to  stand  open 
rigeo,  -erg,  to  be  stiff 
riibeo,  -ere,  to  be  red 
silSo,  -ere,  to  be  silent 
sorbeo,  -ere,  to  sip 
sordeo,  -ere,  to  be  dirty 
splendeo,  -ere,  to  gleam 

virSo,  -ere, 


studeo,  -er6,  to  busy  one's  self 
stupeo,  -ere,  to  be  amazed 
succens6o,  -ere,  to  be  angry 
timeo,  -ere,  to  fear 
torpeo,  -ere,  to  be  numb 
tumeo,  -ere,  to  swell 
vigeo,  -ere,  to  be  vigorous 
to  be  green 


354.  Some  verbs,  .derived 
Perfect  and  Supine: 
albeo,  -ere,  to  be  white 
aveo,  -ere,  to  long  for 
calveo,  -  ere,  to  be  bald 
htimeo,  -ere,  to  be  moist 
immineo,  -ere,  to  threaten 
liveo,  -ere,  to  be  xiale 
caneo,  -ere,  to  be  gray 


mostly  from  Adjectives,  want  both 

flavSo,  -ere,  to  be  golden  yelloiv 
h6beo,  -ere,  to  be  blunt 
polleo,  -ere,  to  be  powerful 
maereo,  -ere,  to  grieve 
rgnideo,  -ere,  to  shine 
scateo,  -ere,  to  gush 
squalSo,  -ere,  to  be  filthy 

[125.  126.] 

355,  A  great  many  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  deviate 
from  the  regular  formation  mentioned  in  352. 

356,  Perfect  in  evi,  Supine 
delSo,  -ere,  to  destroy 
fleo,  -ere,  to  weep 
neo,  -ere,  to  spin 
[pl6o,/^//] 

complgo,  -ere ) 
impleo,  -erS    >-  to  fill  (up) 
rSpleo,  -ere    ) 
[616o,  /  grovj] 
obsoleo,  -ere,  to  go  out  of  use 
aboleo,  -ere,  to  abolish 
adoleo,  -ere,  to  grow  up 

357,  Perfect  in  i,  Su 

caveo,  -ere,  to  be  on  one's  guard 
favfio,  -ere,  to  favor 
foveo,  -ere,  to  cherish 
moveo,  -ere,  to  move,  trouble 
voveo,  -ere  )  .  ^      ^ 


in  etum  (itur 

n,  tiim): 

delevT 

deletfim 

flevi 

flettim 

nevi 

netiim 

complevi 

eompletmii 

implevi 

impletiini 

rgplevi 

repletum 

obsolevi 

obsoletum 

abolevi 

abolitum 

adolevi 

adultum 

pine  in  turn: 

cavi 

cautQm 

favi 

fautiiiu 

fovi 

fotiiin 

mOvi 

motmu 

vovi 

votiim 

devOvi 

devOtQia 

—     110     — 


paveo,  -ere,  to  quake  for  fear 
ferveo,  -ere,  to  glow 


pavi 
J  fervi    I 
\  ferbuT  ( 


wanting 
ic  anting 


cOniveo,  -ere,  to  shut  the  eyes        ■!    _  .   .  j-  wanting 


358.  Dropping  the  i 

doceo,  -ere,  to  teach 

teneo,  -ere,  to  hold 
obtineo,  -ere,  to  occupy 
attineo,  -ere,  to  belong 
pertlneo,  -ere,  to  pertain 
abstliieo,  -ere,  to  abstain 
contiiieo,  -ere,  to  hold  together 

misceo,  -ere,  to  miXj  mingle 

torreo,  -ere,  to  roast 
censeo,  -ere,  to  value,  think 

recenseo,  -ere,  to  review 

perceuseo,  -ere,  to  survey 


of  the  Supine: 

dociii 

teniii 

obtiiiui 

attiniii 

pertinui 

abstinui 

continui 

miscui 

torrui 
censui 

recensui 

percensui 


359,  Perfect  in  si.   Supine  in  turn: 

augeo,  -ere,  to  increase 


indulgeo,  -ere,  to  indulge 
torqueo,  -ei*e,  to  torture 
ICiceo,  -ere,  to  shine 
lageo,  -ere,  to  mourn 
frigeo,  -ere,  to  be  cold 


auxi 

indulsi 

torsi 

luxi 

luxi 

frixi 


360. 


Perfect  in  sT,  Supine  in  siini: 


ardeo,  -ere,  to  burn 

arsi 

haereo,  -ere,  to  hang 

haesT 

adbaereo,  -erfi  ) 
cohaereo,  -ere  f  ^"^  ""^'"'^ 

adhaesi 

cohaesT 

jubeo,  -ere,  to  order 

jussi 

maneo,  -ere,  to  stay,  remain 

man  SI 

remaneo,  -ere,  to  remain 

remansi 

mulceo,  -ere,  to  soothe 

mulsi 

permulceo,  -ere,  to  aj)pease 

permulsi 

mulgSo,  -ere,  to  milk 

mulsi 

doctum 

(tentuin) 

obtentuni 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 
\  mixtum 
I  mistum 

tostum 

censum 

Irecensuin 
receiisitiiin 
wanting 


auctiiin 

iridultum 
tortum 

wanting 
wanting 
wanting 

[120.  130.\ 


arsum 

haesuni 

ridhaesiiin 

ccibaesuiii 

jussiiin 

mansuin 

rem  an  Slim 

mulsiim 

permulsum 

mulstitti 


—   Ill    — 


rIdSo,  -ere,  to  laugh 

arrideo,  -ere,  to  smile  upon 

derideo,  -ere,  to  laugh  at 
suadeo,  -ere,  to  advise 

dissuadeo,  -ere,  to  dissuade 

persuadeo,  -ere,  to  persuade 

terffeo,  -ere  )  . 

.    ^-.  '  w  w     \  to  wipe 
tergo,  -ere    ) 

abstergeo,  -ere,  to  wipe  off  abstersi 

Compounds  only  take  the  Second  Conjugation, 

algeo,  -ere,  to  he  cold  alsi 

fulgeo,  -ere,  to  shine  fulsT 

tiirgeo,  -ere,  to  swell  tursi 

urgeo,  -ere,  to  urge  ursi 


risi 

arrlsi 

derisi 

suasi 

dissiiasi 

persuasi 

tersi 


rlsum 
arrlsum 

derisum 
suasiim 

dissuasum 
persuasiim 

tersiim 

abstersum 

wanting 
wanting 
wanting 
wanting 


361,  Perfect  in  i,  Supine  in  sum: 

prandeo,  -ere,  to  breakfast  prandi  pransum 

Participle  praiisils,  in  an  active  sense,  having  breakfasted 

sedeo,  -ere,  to  sit 

circumsedeo,  -ere,  to  sit  around 

supersedeo,  -ere,  to  forbear 

assideo,  -ere,  to  sit  by 

insideo,  -ere,  to  sit  upon 

obsideo,  -ere,  to  besiege 

possideo,  -ere,  to  possess 

dissideo,  -ere,  to  disagree 

praesideo^  -ere,  to  preside 

resideo,  -ere,  to  remain  behind 
video,  -ere,  to  see 

invideo,  -ere,  to  envy 

provideo,  -ere,  to  provide 
strideo,  -ere,  to  whiz,  creak 

With  Redup 
niordeo,  -ere,  to  bite 
pendeo,  -ere,  to  hang 

dependeo,  -ere,  to  hang  down 

impendeo,  -ere,  to  hang  over 
spondeo,  -ere,  to  pledge 

respondeo,  -ere,  to  answer 

despondeo,  -ere,  to  promise 
tondeo,  -ere,  to  shear 


s6di 

sessum 

circumsedT 

circumsessiim 

siipersedi 

supersessum 

assedi 

assessum 

insedi 

insesstiin 

obsSdi 

obsessum 

possedi 

possessuni 

dissedi 

loanting 

praesedi 

ivanting 

resedl 

wanting 

vidi 

visum 

invldi 

invlsum 

providi 

provisum 

stridi 

wanting 

lication: 
momordi 

morsum 

pependi 

pensum 

ivanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

spopondi 

sponsumi 

respond! 

re  sp  on  sum 

despondi 

desponsum 

totondl 

tonsilm 

m 

—     112     — 

Reduplication,  or  the  repetition  of  the  initial  consonant  with  the 
following  vowel,  is  generally  dropped  in  Compounds,  as:  re-spondi. 

362.  Mark  the  solitary  verb: 

eieo,  -ere  |  .  civi  cltiiin 

«_     ,  ^    yto  rouse  .^^ 

CIO,  -ire    j  civi  citum        . 

accio,  -ire,  to  call  in  accivi  accitiiiu    >■  .        .  "" 

concio,  -ire,  to  call  together        concivi        concituin  )  J^S^^^^^- 


363.  A  few  verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  form  the  tenses  of 
completed  action  like  the  Passive;  they  are  called  Semi-Deponents 
(see  277)'. 

audeo,  -ere,  to  dare  ausus  sum,  I  dared 

gaudeo,  -ere,  to  rejoice  gavisus  sum,  I  rejoiced 

soleo,  -ere,  to  he  wont  solitus  sum,  /  was  wont 

[131.  132,] 

364.  Deponent  Verbs. 

Pres.  Ind.  &  Inf.  Perfect, 

fateor,  -eri,  to  con/ess  fassus  sum 

confiteor,  -eri,  to  confess  confessus  sum 

diffiteor,  -eri,  to  disavow  diffessus  sum 

mededr,  -eri,  to  cure  wanting 

misereor,  -eri,  to  have  pity  miseritus,  misSrtus  sum 

redr,  -eri,  to  think  ratus  sum 

[163.  164.] 

VEKBS  OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

36t^»  The  Third  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  with  stems 
ending  in  u  (v),  or  one  of  the  consonants.  The  Regular  Forms  of 
the  Third  Conjugation  are  seen  in  the  following: 


Stem. 

Perfect. 

Supine. 

acu-6r6,  to  sharpen 

acii-i 

acii-tiim 

ed-erg,  to  eat 

Sd-i 

e-stim 

carp-ere,  to  pluck 

carp-si 

carp-tuni 

Stems  in  u  take  i  in  the  Perfect,  and  turn  in  the  Supine. 
Consonant-stems  take  in  the  Perfect  partly  i,  partly  si;  and  in 
the  Supine  partly  turn,  partly  sum. 

A  few  verbs  in  iio  belong  to  the  First  Conjugation,  as:  fluctu-o, 
-arg,  to  wave. 


—     113 

— 

Stems   in 

u(v). 

366,                 Perfect  in  i,  Supine  in  turn: 

aciio,  -erS,  to  sharpen 

aciii 

acfitum 

Perf.  Part,  wanting;  aciitus,  sharp j  is  adjective  only. 

arguo,  -gre,  to  accuse 

argui 

(argutiim) 

coarguo,  -ere,  to  convict 

coarguT 

wanting 

redargiio,  -ere,  to  refute 

rgdargui 

wanting 

imbuo,  -ere,  to  dip,  dye 

imbui 

imbutiim 

induo,  -erg,  to  put  on 

indiii 

iudutiun 

exuo,  -ere,  to  put  off 

exui 

exutum 

iuo,  -erg,   to  atone  for 

liii 

(luitum) 

luo,  -gre,  to  wash 

lui 

latum 

abluo,  -grg,  to  wash  (off) 

ablui 

ablutiim 

mmuo,  -grg         )  to  lessen, 
imminuo,  -grg)    weaken 

minui 

minutum 

imminui 

imminutiim 

[niio,  /  nod] 

abniio,  -grg,  to  dissent 

abniii 

wanting 

adnuo,  -grg,  to  nod  assent 

adnui 

wanting 

ruo,  -grg,  to  rush  forth 

rui 

rutum 

corruo,  -grg,  to  fall  to  the  ground 

corriii 

wanting 

diruo,  -grg,  to  destroy 

dlrui 

dirutum 

eriio,  -grg,  to  dig  out 

grill 

erutiini 

obruo,  -grg,  to  cover 

obriii 

obrutum 

spiio,  -grg,  to  spit 

spui 

sputum 

statiio,  -grg,  to  set,  place 

statu! 

statutiim 

restituS,  -grg,  to  resior^e 

restitui 

restitutiim 

siio,  -grg,  to  sew 

sui 

sutiim 

tribiio,  -grg,  to  give,  confer  on 

tribiii 

tributiim 

contribuo,  -grg,  to  contribute 

contribui 

contributiim 

distribuo,  -gre,  to  distribute 

distribui 

distributum 

solvo,  -grg,  to  loose 

solvi 

solutum 

absolve,  -grg,  to  acquit 

absolvi 

absolutiim 

volvo,  -grg,  to  roll,  turn 

volvi 

volutiim 

[gruO  or  ruo  ?] 

ingruo,  -grg,  to  rush 

ingrui 

wanting 

congriio,  -grg,  to  agree 

congrui 

wanting 

metiio,  -grg,  to  fear 

metui 

wanting 

pluo,  -grg,  to  rain 

plui 

wanting 

sternuo,  -grg,  to  sneeze 

sternui 

wanting 

1133,  134,] 

—     114 


VlXl 

victum 

struxi 

structum 

construxi 

constructiini 

instruxi 

instructum 

fluxi 

fluxum 

refluxi 

refluxuni 

[135.  136. 

367,  The  following  stems  in  u,  v  form  their  Perfect  and  Supint 
differently: 
vivo,  -ere,  to  live 
struo,  -ere,  to  build 

constriio,  -ere,  to  construct 

instruo,  -ere,  to  instruct 
fluo,  -ere,  to  flow 

refluo,  -ere,  to  flow  hack 

Verbs  in  io. 

368,  Some  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation  insert  i  before  the 
ending  of  the  Present,  as:  capere,  to  take;  capio,  /  take.  This  ] 
appears  likewise  in  all  the  other  forms  derived  from  the  Present 
and  Infinitive,  but  not  before  another  I  or  e,  except  in  the  third 
person  of  the  future  active:  capiet,  he  will  take  (see  331). 

capio,  -ere,  to  take 

accipio,  -ere,  to  receive 

decTpio,  -ere,  to  deceive 

incipio,  -ere,  io  begin 
facTo,  -ere,  to  do,  make 

patefacio,  -erS,  to  open 

conficio,  -ere,  to  make 

interficio,  -ere,  to  kill 

perficio,  -gre,  to  finish 

The  verb  ^cere,  to  do,  make,  deserves  special  notice: 
It  has  for  its  Passive  flo,  factiis  sum,  fieri,  to  be  made,  become 
(see  411).     Its  Imperative  is  fac,  do. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  those  Compounds  of  facio,  which  retain] 
a,  as:  patefacio,  I  open;  Pass,  patefio,  lam  opened;  Imperat.  patefac,  | 
open.    The  Compounds  of  facio  with  Prepositions  change  a  to  i,  and^ 
are    inflected    regularly,   as:    interficio,    /  kill;   Pass,  interflcior; 
Imperat.  interfic6. 


cepi 

captiim 

accepi 

acceptum 

d6cepi 

deceptuni 

incgpi 

inceptum 

fSci 

factum 

patef6cT 

patefactum 

confeci 

confectiim 

interfeci 

interfectum 

perfeci 

perfectiim 

jacio,  -ere,  to  throw,  cast 
objicio,  -ere,  to  throw  to 
subjicio,  -ere,  to  subject 

[lacio,  /  entice^ 
allicio,  -ere    )  to  allure, 
pellicio,  -ere  )      entice 
elieio,  -erS,  to  entice  out 


jeci 

objecT 

subjeci 

allexi 

pellexi 

eliciii 


j  actum 

objectum 
subjectum 

(allectiim) 
pellectQm 
elicitiim 


115    — 


[specio,  I  see] 

-   aspicio,  -ere,  to  look 
despicio,  -€re,  to  despise 
respicio,  -ere,  to  consider 

cupio,  -ere,  to  wishj  desire 

fodio,  -ere,  to  dig 
confodio,  -ere,  to  pick  out 
effodio,  -ere,  to  dig  out 

fugio,  -ere,  to  flee  or  fly 

pario,  -ere,  to  bring  forth 

quatio,  -ere,  to  shake 
concutio,  -ere,  to  shake 

rS-pio,  -ere,  to  snatch  away 
arrlpio,  -ere,  to  seize 

sapio,  -ere,  to  he  wise 
deslpio,  -ere,  to  he  foolish 


Stems  in  d,  t. 

369,  As  a  rule,  stems  in  d,  t  have  si  in  the  Perfect,  sfim  in 
the  Supine.  Before  the  s  of  the  Perfect  and  Supine,  d  and  t  are 
dropped  or  become  by  assimilation  ss. 

370,  The  repetition  of  the  initial  consonant  with  the  vowel 
following  it  or  with  e  (Reduplication)  is  especially  common  in  the 
formation  of  the  Perfect  of  the  3d  Conjugation;  as^ 

pendo,  /  K;ei^/i,  pependi;   cado,  I  fall^  cecidi. 

These  reduplicated  Perfects  are  always  formed  in  i. 

Compound  verbs  omit  the  reduplication,  but  the  Compounds  of 
do,  /  give;  sto,  /  stand;  disco,  /  learn;  posco,  /  demand,  and 
some  of  those  of  curro,  /  run.  retain  it. 


aspexi 

aspectam 

despexi, 

despectiiin 

respexi 

respectum 

cupivi 

ciipitiiin 

fodi 

fossiliii 

confodi 

confossuiii 

effodi 

effossuni 

fugi 

fugitum 

pepgri 

partum 

Fut.  Part. 

,  pariturus 

wanting 

quassum 

concussi 

concussGm  . 

rapui 

raptuin 

arripui 

arreptum 

sapivi,  sapiii 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

\137,  138.] 

371. 


Perfect  in  sT,  Supine  in  sum. 


claudo,  -ere,  to  shut^  close 

concludo,  -ere,  to  shut  up 
divido,  -ere,  to  divide^  separate 
laedo,  -ere,  to  violate^  hurt 
allido,  -ere,  to  dash  against 
collldo,  -ere,  to  dash  together 
elido,  -ere,  to  strike  out 


clausi 

clausum 

conclusi 

conclusum 

divisi 

divlsuni 

laesi 

laesiim 

allisi 

allisum 

collisi 

collisum 

ellsi 

elistim 

—     116     — 

lado,  -gr§,  to  play  lusi  iGsiim 

illudo,  -ere,  to  mock  illusi  ill  u sum 

plaudo,  -ere,  to  applaud  plausi  plausQm 

applaudo,  -erS,  to  applaud  applausi  applausiiiii 

explode,  -ere,  to  hiss  off  explOsi  explosum 

rado,  -ere,  to  scrape  rasi  rasum 

rodo,  -ere,  to  gnaw  rosi  rOsum 

trudo,  -^re,  to  thrust  trusi  trusum 

vado,  -ere,  to  go  ^v anting  wanting 

evado,  -€rS,  to  turn  out  Svasi  gvasum 


cado,  -gre,  to  fall 


With  Reduplication: 

cecidi 


occTdo,  -ere,  to  set  occidi 

incido,  -ere,  to  fall  into  incidi 

Other  Compounds  of  cado  want  the  Supine. 

caedo,  -ere,  to  fell  cecidT 

decide,  -ere,  to  cut  down  decldi 

excide,  -ere,  to  hew  out  excidT 

incide,  -ere,  to  engrave  incTdi 

occide,  -ere,  to  kill  occidi 

pende,  -ere,  to  weigh  pependi 

suspende,  -ere,  to  hang  suspend! 

tende,  -gre,  to  spread  tetendi 

attends,  -€rS,  to  attend  to  attend! 

contends,  -ere,  to  exert  contend! 

extends,  -ere,  to  stretch  out  extendi 

ostende,  -Sre,  to  show  ostendi 

tunde,  -er^,  to  thump  tutud! 

contunde,  -ere,  to  break  down       contiid! 

obtundo,  -ere,  to  stun  obtud! 


castim 

occasfim 
loanting 


caesuin 
decisum 
excisiiin 

incisum 

occisum 

l)ensiin'\ 

suspensum 

tensuni  & 

lentum 

attentttin 

contenttiin 

extenstini  & 

extentfim 

ostenstiin 

tusum  & 

tun  sum 

contusum 

obtusum 


37^,  Compounds  of  clftre  with  monosyllabic  words  pass  over 
into  the  Third  Conjugation: 

credo,  -ere,  to  believe  cr^didi  crSditum 

vendo,  -erg,  to  sell  vendidi  venditGm 

condS,  -gr6,  to  build  condidi  conditiim 


—  in 


abscondo,  -erg,  to  hide 

abscond! 

abscondittim 

6do,  -ere,  to  give  out 

edidi 

gditiim 

perdo,  -gre,  to  ruin 

perdidi 

perditiiin 

reddo,  -ere,  to  give  hacJc 

reddidi 

reddittiin 

trado,  -ere,  to  deliver 

tradidi 

traditum 

[139.  140.] 

373. 


Perfect  in  i,  Supine  in  sum. 


The  Stem  of  many  verbs  of  this  class  appears  in  the  Present 
strengthened  by  n,  as:  fundo,  Stem  fiid.  Stems  in  nd  take  i  in 
the  Perfect. 

[candO,  I  hum'] 

accendo,  -ere,  to  kindle 
ctido,  -ere,  to  forge 
edo,  -Sre,  to  eat 
[fendo,  I  fend] 

defendo,  -ere,  to  defend 

offendo,  -ere,  to  offend 
mando,  -ere,  to  chew 
pr^hendo,  -gr6,  to  seize 
scando,  -ere,  to  climb 

ascendo,  -€r6,  to  ascend 
fundo,  -ere,  to  pour 

circumfundo,  -erg,  to  surround 

diffundo,  -ere,  to  pour  forth 

effundo,  -ere,  to  pour  out 
verto,  -ere,  to  turn 

everto,  -erg,  to  overthrow 
sterto,  -gre,  to  snore 

The  only  Semi-Deponent  Verb  of  the  Third  Conjugation  belongs 
to  this  class: 


accendi 

accenstim 

cudi 

casiim 

6di 

esum 

defend! 

defensum 

offend! 

offensum 

mand! 

man  sum 

pr^hend! 

prehensum 

scandi 

scansum . 

ascend! 

ascensuni 

fudi 

fusQm 

circumfudi 

circumfusiim 

diffudi 

diffusum 

effud! 

effusum 

vert! 

versum 

evert! 

eversum 

sterttl! 

wanting 

fido,  -grg 
confido,  -gre 


to  trust,  conllde 


fisiis  sum 
confisiis  sum 


374:.  Various  Irregularities: 

c6do,  -grg,  to  yield  cess!  cessHm 

accedo,  -erg,  to  approach  access!  accessum 

finds,  -erg,  to  split,  cleave  fid!  fisstim 


118    — 


scindo,  -ere,  to  cut 

scidi 

scissflin 

discindo,  -ere,  to  split 

discidi 

discissuin 

excindo,  -gre,  to  destroy 

excidi 

excisum 

absclndo,  -ere,  to  tear  off 

abscidi 

abscisum 

excindo  takes  Perfect  and  Supine 

from  caedo,  abscindo  the  Supine. 

meto,  -ere,  to  reap 

messui 

messtlm 

mitto,  -ere,  to  send 

mlsi 

missum 

amitto,  -ere,  to  lose 

amlsi 

amissum 

admitto,  -ere,  to  admit 

admlsT 

admissum 

committo,  -ere,  to  commit 

commisi 

commissum 

permitto,  -ere,  to  permit 

permisl 

permissum 

promitto,  -ere,  to  promise 

promTsi 

promissum 

pando,  -ere,  to  spread 

pandi 

passiim 

peto,  -ere,  to  seek 

petivi,  petii 

petitum 

repeto,  -ere,  to  repeat 

repetivi 

repStitum 

sido,  -ere,  to  sit  down 

sedi 

wanting 

assldo,  -ere,  to  sit  down 

assedi 

assessum 

consldo,  -ere,  to  settle 

consedi 

consesstim 

eisto,  -ere,  to  stop 

stiti 

statiim 

obsisto,  -ere,  to  oppose 

obstiti 

obstitum 

Other  Compounds  want  Supine: 

absisto,  -ere,  to  cease 

abstiti 

wanting 

adsisto,  -ere,  to  stand  by 

adstiti 

loanting 

exsisto,  -ere,  to  come  forth 

exstiti 

wanting 

[141,  142,] 

Stems  in  b,  p. 

375,  Stems  in  b,  p  take   si  in  the  Perfect,  and  turn  in  the 

Supine\  at  the  same  time  b  before  s  and  t  becomes  p,  as:  nubo, 
nupsi,  nuptum.  The  stem  of  many  verbs  appears  in  the  Present 
strenghtened  by  m,  as:  rumpo,  rupi. 

glubo,  -ere,  to  peel 

deglubo,  -ere,  to  skin 
nubo,  -erS,  to  marry 
scribo,  -ere,  to  write 

conscribo,  -ere,  to  frame 

describo,  -ere,  to  describe 

praescribo,  -ere,  to  prescribe 
earpo,  -6re,  to  pluck 

decerpo,  -ere,  to  pluck 

discerpo,  -erg,  to  tear  asunder 


(glupsT) 

gluptQin 

(dgglupsT) 

degluptum 

nupsi 

nuptum 

scrips! 

scrip  til  m 

conscripsi 

conscriptum 

descripsi 

descripttlm 

praescripsi 

praescripttim 

carpsi 

carptrtm 

decerpsi 

decerptiim 

discerpsi 

discerpttim 

—     119    — 


repo,  -ere,  to  creepj  crawl 

irrepo,  -ere,  to  creep  into 
scalp  o,  -ere,  to  carve 
sculp o,  -ere,  to  chisel 
serpo,  -ere,  to  creep 

376,  Irregular: 

accumbo,  -ere,  to  recline  at  table 
bibo,  -ere,  to  drink 
rumpo,  -ere,  to  break 

corrumpo,  -ere,  to  corrupt 

erumpo,  -ere,  to  break  out 

perrumpo,  -ere,  to  break  throui 
strepo,  -ere,  to  make  a  noise 
lambo,  -ere,  to  lick 
scabo,  -ere,  to  scratch 

Stems  in  c,  g",  q,  h,  ct. 

377,  c,  g",  q,  and  h  with  s  become  x 
g,  h,  and  q  before  t  become  c. 

duc-o  —  duxi  =  ducsi 
reg-o  —  rexi  =  regsi 
coqu-O  —  coxi  =  coqsi 
trali-O  —  traxi  =  trahsi 

378,  Perfect  in  si,  Supine  in  turn: 
cingo,  -ere,  to  gird 
[fligo,  -ere,  to  strike 

affligo,  -ere,  to  dash 

confllgo,  -ere,  to  Jight 

profligo,  -are,  to  strike  down 
jungo,  -ere,  to  join 

adjungo,  -ere,  to  join  (to) 
plango,  -ere,  to  beat,  lament 
rego,  -ere,  to  rule,  govern 

corrigo,  -ere,  to  correct 

dirigo,  -ere,  to  direct 

(surrlgo)  surgo,  -ere,  to  rise 

(perrigo)  pergo,  -ere,  to  go  on 
sugo,  -ere,  to  suck 
tego,  -  ere,  to  cover 

detego,  -ere,  to  discover 

protego,  -ere,  to  protect 


repsi 

reptiiin 

irrepsi 

irreptum 

scalpsi 

scalptum 

sculps! 

sculptuni 

serpsi 

(serptum) 

ir: 

accubiii 

accubitum 

bibi 

bibitiim 

rupi 

ruptum 

corrupi 

corruptum 

erupi 

eruptum 

perrfipi 

perruptum 

strSpiii 

strepitum 

Iambi 

(lambitum) 

scabi 

wanting 

{143.  144.] 

rego  —  rectum  =  regtiim 
traho  ' —  tractiim  =  trahtum 
coquo  —  coctum  =  coqtum 


cinxi 

cinctfim 

flixi 

flictiim] 

afflixi 

afflictiiin 

conflixi 

conflictum 

profligavi 

profligatum 

junxi 

junctuni 

adjunxi 

adjuncttiin 

planxi 

planctuni 

rexi 

rectum 

correxi 

correctum 

direxi 

directum 

surrexi 

surrectum 

perrexi 

perrectum 

SUXl 

suctum 

texi 

tectum 

dgtexi 

detecttim 

protexi 

protectum 

120    — 


tingo  (tingii5),  -5r5,  to  stain  tinxi 

ungo  (ungiiO),  -ere,  to  anoint  unxi 

[stingiio,  I  put  out] 

exstinguo,  -er6,  to  put  out  exstinxi 

distinguo,  -ere,  to  distinguish  distinxi 

traho,  -ere,  to  draw  traxi 

contrail  o,  -er6,  to  contract  contraxi 

veho,  -ere,  to  carry  vexi 

dico,  -erg,  to  say^  tell  dixi 

praedico,  -ere,  to  predict  praedixi 

indico,  -er6,  to  declare  indixi 

diico,  -ere,  to  lead  duxi 

educo,  -ere,  to  lead  forth  eduxi 
The  Imperatives  of  dicerg,  to  say,  duc6r6,  to  lead, 

compounds  follow  the  simple  verbs:  6duc,  praedic. 

coquo,  -€re,  to  cookj  hake  coxi 


tinctiiin 
nnctiiin 

exstinctQm 

distinctuiu 

tractum 

contraetum 

vectum 

dicttiin 

praedictiiin 

indictiim 

ductiini 

educttiin 

are:  die,  due; 

coctQm 


379.  The  Supine  is  irregular: 

fingo,  -ere,  to  fashion  finxi 

pingo,  -ere,  to  paint  pinxi 

stringo,  -ere,  to  bind  strinxi 

figo,  -ere,  to  fix  fixi 

380.  Present  strengthened  by  t: 

fleet o,  -ere,  to  bend  flexi 

necto,  -ere,  to  tie  nexi-nexfii 

pecto,  -erg,  to  comb  pexi 

plecto,  -ere,  to  beat  (only  Passive)  wanting 

381.  The  Supine  is  wanting: 
ango,  -ere,  to  torment,  vex 


ficttiin 
pictflm 
strictiiin 
fixum 


flexftm 
nexum 
pexum 

wanting 


ningo,  -ere,  to  snow 
clango,  -ere,  to  clang 

382. 


anxi 
ninxi 
wanting 

With  Reduplication: 


parco,  -gre,  to  spare  peperci 

pungo,  -ere,  to  pierce,  sting  ptipugi 

tango,  -grg,  to  touch  tetigi 

attingo,  -SrS,  to  touch  attigi 

pango,  -ere,  to  strike,  drive  panxi 

pango,  -gre,  to  bargain  pgpigi 

compingS,  -grg,  to  drive  tight        comp6gi 


parsGm 

punctOm 
tactfim 

attactiim 
panctttm 
pactQm 

eompaetiim 


—     121     — 


S83.  With  lengthened  Stem-vowel. 

Many  Consonant-stems  with  short  stem-syllable  take  i  in  the  Per- 
fect, before  which  the  stem-vowel  is  lengthened,  and  S.  becomes  e. 


ag5,  -gr6,  to  drive^  do 

6gi 

actiim 

pgrago,  -ere,  to  accomplish 

perggi 

peractQm 

abigo,  -€r6,  to  drive  away 

abegi 

abactum 

subigo,  -grg,  to  subdue 

subegi 

subactum 

cOgo,  -6re,  to  force  (c6-ago) 

coggi 

c6actiim 

dego,  -ere,  to  spend  (d6-ag5) 

d6gi 

wanting 

ambigo,  -ere,  to  contend 

wanting 

wanting 

frango,  -erg,  to  break 

fregi 

fractum 

confringo,  -ere,  to  break  in  two 

confregi 

confractGm 

eflringo,  -ere,  to  break  open 

effrggi 

eflfractiim 

lego,  -erg,  to  read 

legi 

lectum 

allege,  -ere,  to  choose 

allegi 

allectiim 

perlego,  -ere,  to  read  through 

perlggi 

perlectnin 

r616go,  -ere,  to  read  over 

relggi 

rSlectum 

colllgo,  -6re,  to  collect 

collggi 

collectum 

dgligo,  -6r6,  to  choose 

delegi 

delectum 

eligo,  -ere,  to  elect 

eiegi 

electtiin 

diligo,  -erg,  to  love 

dllexi 

dllectQin 

intell^go,  -erg,  to  understand 

intellexi 

intellectum 

neglggo,  -grg,  to  neglect 

neglexi 

neglectiiin 

ico,  -grg,  to  strike 

ici 

ictum 

vinco,  -grg,  to  conquer 

vici 

victnm 

linquo,  -grg,  to  leave 

liqui 

wanting 

relinquo,  -grg,  to  leave  {behind) 

r^llqui 

rglictum 

384.                  Perfect  in  si,  1 

Supine  in  sfim: 

mergo,  -grg,  to  dip  iUy  plunge 

mersi 

mersiSin 

spargo,  -grg,  to  scatter 

sparsi 

sparsum 

conspergo,  -grg,  to  sprinkle 

consp'ersi 

conspersum 

tergo,  -grg,  to  wipe 

tersi 

terstim 

vergo,  -grg,  to  verge 

wanting 

wanting 

{145,  146.] 

S  T  E  M  s  in  1,  m,  n,  r. 
385,  Perfect  in  si,  Supine  in  turn, 

m  is  sometimes  strengthened  with  p,  as :  sumo, 
cOmo,  -grg,  to  adorn  compsi 


demo,  -grg,  to  take  away 


dempsi 


sumpsi. 

comptttm 
demptum 


—     122    — 


promo,  -SrS,  to  take  out  prompsi 

eumo,  -ere,  to  take  sumpsi 

absumo,  -6re,  to  use  up  absumpsi 

consume,  -6rS,  to  consume  consumpsi 
[temno,  I  despise] 

contemno,  -er€,  to  despise  contempsi 


prompt^m     ft 
sumptum 

absumptum 
consumptflm 

contemptum 


386.  According  to  the  Analogy  of  the  2d  Conjugation: 

alo,  -6re,  to  nourish  aWii  \  ^^ 

c61o,  -ere,  to  cultivate  c61tli  cultiim 

incSlo,  -ere,  to  inhabit  incoliii  incultum 

consiilo,  -erS,  to  counsel  consuliii  consultum 

molo,  -erg,  to  grind  molQi  molituiu 

occulo,  -ere,  to  conceal  occiiltii  occultum 

lr6mo,  -ere,  to  growl  tremui  fremitum 

ggmo,  -ere,  to  groan  gemiii  gemitiim 

tremo,  -ere,  to  tremble  tremui .  wanting 

vomo,  -erS,  to  vomit  vomui  vomituin 

6v6ma,  -ere,  to  vomit  up  gvomtii  evomitum 

gigno,  -ere,  to  beget  ggntii  genitiim 

pOno,  -ere,  to  place  p5sm  positfim 

antepoao,  -erg,  to  prefer  antgposiil  antep5situni 

oppono,  -ere,  to  oppose  opposiii  oppositiim 
[cello,  Iim2)el] 

percello,  -ere,  to  beat  down  perculi  perculsiim 

antecello,  -ere,  )  wanting  wanting 

praecello,  -SrS,  >-  to  excel  wanting  wanting 

excello,  -gre,     )  wanting  wanting 


387.  With  Reduplication: 

cano,  -erg,  to  sing  cecini 

concino,  -gre,  to  sound  together  conciniii 

praeciiio,  -ere,  to  sing  to  one  praeciniii 

curro,  -grg,  to  run  cticurri 

accurrS,  -erg,  to  run  to  \  accucurri  ) 

^  ( accurri      ) 

concurro,  -grg,  to  run  together    \  concQcurn  ) 
'  Iconciirri      ) 

occurro,  -grg,  to  meet  occurri 


cantiiiii 

wanting 
wanting 
cursiini 

accurstiin 

concursiini 
occursi5m 


123     — 


rgcurrS,  -Sr§,  to  run  hack 

recurri 

rgcurstim 

succurro,  -ere,  to  succor 

succurri 

succursum 

fallo,  -ere,  to  cheat 

felelli 

falsum 

refello,  -ere,  to  refute 

refellT 

wanting 

pello,  -ere,  to  drive  (away) 

pepuli 

pulsum 

depello,  -ere,  to  dispel 

depuli 

depulsum 

r^pello,  -ere,  to  repel 

repiili 

repulsiiin 

{147.  148.] 

388.                               Perfect  in  vi: 

cerno,  -ere,  to  see,  discern 

(crevi) 

(crettim) 

decerno,  -ere,  to  determine 

decrevi 

decretuin 

discerno,  -ere,  to  distinguish 

discrgvi 

discretGm 

lino,  -ere,  to  smear 

levi  (llvi) 

littim 

allino,  -ere,  to  besmear 

all6vi 

allitfim 

illino,  -Srg,  to  bedaub 

illevi 

illitum 

sino,  -ere,  to  let 

sivi 

sTtum 

desino,  -ere,  to  leave  off 

desTvT,  desn 

desltfim 

sperno,  -€re,  to  despise 

sprgvi 

spretum 

sterno,  -ere,  to  strew 

stravT 

stratum 

prosterno,  -ere,  to  overthrow 

prostravi 

prostratiim 

sfiro,  -ere,  to  sow 

s6vi 

sattim 

consero,  -ere,  to  plant 

consevi 

consltuni 

iiisero,  -ere,  to  plant  in 

insevi 

insituni 

sero,  -ere,  to  join 

seriiT 

sertiim 

dgsero,  -ere,  to  forsake 

deseruT 

desertum 

dissero,  -ere,  to  discourse 

dissgrtii 

dissertiim 

insSro,  -ere,  to  insert 

inseriii 

insertuni 

t6ro,  -ere,  to  ruby  wear  out 

trivi 

tritum 

cont^ro,  -ere,  to  rub  off' 

contrlvT 

contritum 

detSro,  -ere,  to  loeai^  away 

d^trlvi 

detrltfim 

389,                        Various  Irregularities: 

vello,  -er6,  to  pluck,  pull 

velli  (vulsi) 

vulsum 

avello,  -ere,  to  pull  down 

avelli 

avulsiim 

premo,  -ere,  to  press 

pressi 

pressum 

comprimo,  -ere,  to  press  together 

'  compressi 

compressiim 

exprimo,  -ere,  to  press  out 

express! 

expressiim 

siipprimo,  -ere,  to  keep  back 

suppress! 

suppressQin 

psallS,  -gre..  to  play  on  the  cithern 

psalli 

wanting 

6mo,  -ere,  to  buy 

gmi 

emptGni 

co6mo,  -ere,  to  buy  together 

c66mi 

coemptiim 

—    124     — 


rgdimS,  -6r6,  to  buy  hack 

rgdemi 

rSdemptiim 

adimo,  -Sr5,  to  take  away 

ad6mi 

ademptilm 

pgrimo,  -€rg,  to  slay 

pgremi 

peremptiiin 

ggro,  -Sr6,  ^o  carry  on 

gessi 

gestGin 

conggro,  -Srg,  ^o  bring  together 

congessi 

congesttliii 

(Iro,  -5r5,  ^o  burn 

ussi 

usttiin 

combaro,  -6rg,  fo  &wrn  {wholly) 

combussi 

combustiiln 

verro,  -6r§,  ^o  sw;eep 

verri 

verstim 

quaero,  -6r6,  ^o  ^eeA:,  desire 

quaesivi 

quaesitiim 

acquiro,  -6rg,  ^o  acquire 

acquisivi 

acquisitiim 

anquiro,  -6rg,  ^o  search  after 

anqulsivi 

anquisitttm 

inquire,  -5r6,  <o  inquire 

inquTsivi 

inquisitiim 

fgro,  ferrg,  fo  6ear  (405) 

tuli 

latum 

ttiro,  -6r5,  to  rage 

wanting 

wanting 

tollO,  -€rg,  ^0  lift^  take  away 

sustiili 

siiblatiiin 

[149.  150,] 

Stems  in 

S,  X  (cs). 

390.    There  is  only  one  stem  in  s  preceded  by  a 

Vowelj  viz.  vIsO; 

all  the  rest  are  in  s  preceded  by  a  ( 

Consonant 

viso,  -SrS,  to  visit 

visi 

wanting 

depsS,  -grg,  to  knead 

depstlT 

depsttiiii 

pinsS,  -6rg,  to  pound 

\  pinsiii 
(  pinsi 

pinsltiiiu 
pistilm 

texo,  -6re,  to  weave 

texuT 

textiim 

According  to  the  Analogy 

of  the  4th  Conjugation: 

arcesso,  -6rg,  to  summon 

arcessivi 

arcessitiim 

capessS,  -6r5,  to  lay  hold  of 

eapessivi 

capessitum 

facessS,  -gr6,  to  accomplish 

faeessivi 

facessitiim 

lacessS,  -erg,  to  excite 

lacessivi 

lacessittim 

incesso,  -6r6,  to  fall  upon 

incessivi  (-i) 

ivanting 

Stems  in  sc. 

391.  Stems  strengthened  by  sc  have  generally  an  inchoative 
meaning,  i.  e ,  they  denote  the  beginning  of  an  action  —  Inchoative 
or  Inceptive  Verbs.  When  formed  from  verbs  (by  adding  sc  to  Vowel- 
stems,  and  isc  to  Consonant-stems)  they  are  called  Ver^hal  In- 
ceptives-y  when  from  substantives  and  Jidjectives,  Denominative 
fnceptives. 

Verbal  Inceptives. 

392,  Verbal  Inceptives  take  the  Perfect  and  Supine  of  their 
Primitives,  if  such  Perfect  and  Supine  actually  exist. 


— .     125 


393,    Many  Verbs  in  sc5  are  no  longer  used  as  Inchoatives^ 
but  m  the  sense  of  their  Primitives  which  have  been  disused: 


cresco,  -grg,  to  grow 

nosco,  -gre,  to  (learn  to)  know 

agnosco,  -ere,  to  acknowledge 

cognosce,  -ere,  to  know 

pasco,  -ere,  to  graze 

quiesco,  -ere  )  ,         . 

^    X    J    -     ^  ^  >  to  rest 
rgquiesco,  -ere  ) 

suesco,  -ere,  to  become  used 

assuesco,  -gre     )    to  be  accus- 

consuesco,  -ere  )        tomed 
compesco,  -ere,  to  restrain 
disco,  -ere,  to  learn 

dedisco,  -erg,  to  unlearn 

edisco,  -Sre,  to  learn  by  heart 
posco,  -ere,  to  demand 

dSposco,  -erg,  to  request 

exposco,  -ere,  to  request  earnestly  expdposci 

reposco,  -gre,  to  demand  back       wanting 
glisco,  -grg,  to  grow  up  wanting 


crevi 

novi 

agnOvi 

cognovi 

pavi 

qui6vi 

r6qui6vi 

su6vi 

assugvi 

cons  ue  VI 

compesciSi 

didici 

dedidici 

gdidici 

pdposci 

d5p5posci 


crettim 
nottiin 

agnitfim 

cognitiiin 

pastum 

quletGin 

rgquietiim 

suSttiin 

assuStiiin 

consuettim 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 

wanting 


{151, 

394,    But  the  great  majority  of  Verbal  Inceptives   are 
Primitives  which  actually  exist 

With  the  Perfect  and  Supine  of  their  Primitives: 


1S2] 

from 


abolesco,  -grg,  to  disappear  abSlevi 

abolgo 

adolesco,  -grg,  to  grow  up  adolevi 

addlgo 

obsSlescO,  -grg,  to  become  obsolete  obs61evi 

obsSlgo 

coalesce,  -grg,  to  grow  together     c5alQl 

al5 

concupisc5,  -grg,  to  covet  concupivi 

cupio 

convalesco,  -grg,  to  recover  convaltli 

valgo 

exardesco,  -grg,  to  take  fire  exarsi 

ardgO 

obdormiscO,  -grg,  to  fall  asleep      obdormivl 

dormW 


abolltfim 


S.dulttliu 


obsdlgttUn 

cdaHtdm 

conctipittlm 


convalitfim 


exarstUn 


obdormittlm 


—    126 

— 

rSvivisc5,  -er6,  to  revive 

revixi                 rSvictQiii 

VIVO 

scisco,  -ere,  to  decree 

scivi                   scitum 

conscisco,  -ere,  to  bring  upon 

conscivi              conscitum 

scio 

condolesco  -erg,  U^y^a^^i^ 
mdolesco,  -ere,     ) 

condolm             condoKtum 

indolui               indolitiim 

doleo 

inveterasco,  -ere,  to  grow  old 

inveteravi          inveteratum 

invStero 

With  the  Perfect  of  their  Primitives: 

acesco,  -ere,  to  turn  sour 

acui 

aceo 

aresco,  -ere,  to  become  dry 

ariii 

areo 

calesco,  -ere,  to  become  warm 

caliii 

caleo 

conticesco,  -ere,  to  become  still 

contictii 

taceo 

delitesco,  -ere,  to  hide  aiuay 

delitni 

lateo 

eflfervesco,  -ere,  to  boil  up 

efferviii  &  efferbui 

ferveo 

effldresco,  -ere,  to  begin  to  bloom  effloriii 

floreo 

extimesco,  -ere,  to  fear 

extimui 

timeo 

eriibesco,  -ere,  to  turn  7'ed 

griibui 

riibeo 

horresco,  -ere,  to  stand  on  end 

hormi 

horreo 

illCicesco,  -ere,  to  grow  light 

illuxi 

luceo 

intumesco,  -ere,  to  swell 

intumui 

tiimeo 

pallesco,  -ere,  to  turn  pale 

palltQ 

palleo 

putresco,  -ere,  to  rot 

piitrGi 

putreo 

sSnesco,  -gre,  to  grow  old 

s^ntii 

sgnS5 

—     121     — 


resipisc5,  -ere,  to  come  to  one^s    resiplii 

sapio  [senses 

ingemisco,  -ere,  to  groan  ingemtii 

ggmo 

contrgmisco,  -er6,  to  tremble        contremtii  ' 

tremS 

Wanting  Perfect  and  Supine. 

hisco,  -ere,  to  yawn  flavescO,  -ere,  to  become  yellow 

hio  flaveo 

augesco,  -ere,  to  augment  hebesco,  -6rS,  to  grow  dull 

augeo  hebeo 

Denominative  Inceptives. 
395.    Most  Denominative  Inceptives  want  both  Perfect  and 
Supine;  some  have  the  Perfect  in  uL 

Wanting  Perfect  and  Supine. 

aegreseo,  -er6,  to  fall  sick  plumesco,  -ere,  to  get  feathers 

aeger,  slcJc  pluma,  a  feather 

ditesco,  -erS,  to  grow  rich  puerasco,  -ere,    to   become   a 

dives,  rich  pu6r,  a  child  [child 

diilcesco,  -ere,  to  become  sweet    javenesco,  -grS,  to  grow  young 

dulcis,  sweet  juvenis,  young 

grandesco,  -gre,  to  grow  large    gravesco,  -erS,  to  grow  heavy 

grandis,  large 

miteseo,  -ere,  to  become  mild 

mltis,  7nild 

pinguesco,  -erS,  to  grow  fat 

pinguis,  fat 


gravis,  heavy 

integrasco,  -ere,  to  begin  anew 

integer,  fresh 

teneresco,  -ere,  to  grow  tender 

tener,  tender 


With  the  Perfect  in  ui. 

ergbreseo,-ere,  to  become  frequent  (cr5ber,  frequent)  crgbrtii 

duresco,  -ere,  to  grow  hard  (durus,  hard)  durui 

evanesce,  -erS,  to  vanish  (vanus,  empty)  SvantSi 

innotesco,  -ere,  to  become  known  (notus,  known)  innottii 

macresco,  -ere,  to  grow  meager  (macer,  meager)  macrtii 

maturesco,  -ere,  to  ripen  (maturus,  ripe)  maturGi 

nigresco,  -ere,  to  become  black  (niggr,  black)  nigriii 

obmutesco,  -€re,  to  become  dumb  (miitus,  dumb)  obmtlttii 

rScrudesco,-ere,  to  break  open  afresh  (criidus,  fresh)  rgcrddiii 

vilesco,  -ere,  to  become  vile  (vilis,  vile)  viltii 

[153,  1S4.] 


128 


396. 


Deponent  Verbs. 


fruor,  -1,  to  enjoy 

perfriidr,  -i,  to  enjoy  fully 
fungor,  -i,  to  discharge 

defungor,  -i,  to  discharge 
gradior,  -i,  to  step 

aggrgdior,  -i,  to  attack 
labor,  -i,  to  glide,  roll  on 

dilabor,  ~i,  to  fall  asunder 
16qu6r,  -i,  to  speak 

alloqadr,  -i,  to  address 
morior,  -i,  to  die 
nitdr,  -i,  to  stay  one's  self  on 
patior,  -1;  to  suffer 

perpetiop,  -T,  to  endure 
[plector] 

amplector,  -i,  to  embrace 
queror,  -i,  to  complain 
sSqu6r,  -i,  to  follow 

assequor,  -T,  to  pursue 
ut5r,  -1,  to  use 

abutdr,  -i,  to  use,  abuse 
reverter,  -I,  to  turn  back 


fruitfis  &  fructiis  sum 

perfructtis  sum 

functus  sum 

defunctiis  sum 

gressus  sum 

aggressiis  sum 

lapsGs  sum 

dllai)sus  sum 

locutds  sum 

allocutQs  sum 

mortuiis  sum— P.Part.m6rit(lru8 

nisiis  &  nixtis  sum 

passus  sum 

perpesstis  sum 

amplexQs  sum 

questus  sum 

secutus  sum 

assecutus  sum 

usus  sum 

abusus  sum 

rSverti,  active  —  Part,  rgversus 


With  stems  in  sc 


[apiscSr,  -i,  to  reach  after 
adipiscSr,  -i,  to  obtain 

defetiscSr,  -i,  to  be  worn  out 

expergiscor,  -i,  to  awake 

irascor,  -T,  to  grow  angry 

[mmiscor,  /  recollecf] 
comminiscdr,  -i,  to  devise 
reminiscor,  ~i,  to  remember 

nanciscdr,  -i,  to  get 

nascor,  -i,  to  be  born 

obllviscor,  -i,  to  forget 

paciscor,  -i,  to  strike  a  bargain 

pascor,  -1,  to  feed 

proficiscdr,  -i,  to  set  out,  start 

ulciscdr,  -i,  to  avenge 

vesc6r,  -i,  tofeedupon^  eat 


aptus  sum] 

adeptus  sum 

defessus  sum 

experrecttis  sum 

(iratus  sum)  —  iratus,  angry 

commentus  sum 

wanting 

nactus  &  nanctiis  sum 

natiis  sum — Put.  Part,  nasciturus 

oblitiis  sum 

pactus  sum 

pastGs  sum 

profectiis  sum 

ultiis  sum 

wanting  [t6S,  lee.] 


—     129 


VERBS  or  the  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 

397.  The  Fourth  Conjugation  includes  all  verbs  with  vowel- 
Stems  in  i.  Their  Perfect  and  Supine  are  formed  by  adding  respec- 
tively VI,  turn,  according  to  the  rule  already  given  {344).  Or,  in 
other  words,  in  the  Fonrth  Conjugation  the  Regular  Forms  of  the 
Principal  Parts  are  these: 

Fres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf  Perfect.  Supine. 

-io  -ire  -ivi  -itGm 

audio  audire,  to  hear  audivl  auditiim 

398.  The  following  Verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  vary 
from  the  usual  mode  of  formation: 

farcio,  -ire,  to  stuff 

rgfercio,  -ire,  to  cram 
fulcio,  -ire,  to  support 
haurio,  -ire,  to  di^aw 

exhaurio,  -ire,  to  exlmust 
saepio,  -ire,  to  hedge  in 
salio,  -ire,  to  leap 

dissHio,  -ire,  to  hurst  asunder 
sancio,  -ire,  to  sanction 
sarcio,  -ire,  to  mend 
sentio,  -ire,  to  feelj  perceive 
sSpelio,  -ir§,  to  bury 
vSnio,  -irS,  to  come 

invenio,  -ire,  to  find  out 
vincio,  -ire 

devincio,  -ire 
amicio,  -ire,  to  clothe 
pario,  -ere,  io  bring  forth  (3d  Conjugation' 

aperio,  -ire,  to  open 

rSpMo,  -ire,  to  find 

Wanting  Perfect  and  Supine: 
feriS,  -irS,  to  strike,  beat  and  Desideratives 

ferocio,  -ire,  to  be  unruly  in  uriO,  as: 

superbio,  -ir^,  to  be  proud         gsiirio,  -ire,  to  want  to  eat 

[159,  160.] 

399.  Deponent  Verbs. 
assentidr,  -iri,  to  assent  assensiis  sum 
metidr,  -iri,  to  measure                 mensGs  sum 


to  bind 


farsi 

farttim 

r^fersi 

rSferttiiu 

fulsi 

fulttim 

hausi 

hausttiin 

exhausi 

exhaustQm 

saepsi 

saepttlm 

salfii 

saltQm 

dissiliSi 

wanting 

sanxi 

sanctGm,  sancitttm 

sarsi 

sartum 

sen  si 

sensum 

sgpelivi 

sepultum 

veni 

ventQm 

inveni 

inventQm 

vinxi 

vinctftm 

devinxi 

devinctum 

wanting 

amictuin 

ugation) 

apgrui 

apertiiin 

r6p§rGi 

rgpertum 

130     — 


ordi5r,  -iri,  to  begin 
experi6r,  -iri,  to  try^  exercise 
opperior,  -iri,  to  await 
orior,  -iri,  to  rise,  appear 

j  orior  oreris 

\  orimiir      orimini 
Imperf.  Subj.  orirer  or  orerer 
Put.  Part.      oriturQs,  -a,  -um 
adorior,  -iri,  to  attack 


Pres.  Ind. 


orstLs  sum 

expertus  sum 
oppertiis  sum 
ortiis  sum 

Gerundive,  oriundus,  -a,  -um 
adortus  sum 


The  Compounds  of  orior  follow  the  conjugation  of  the  simple  verb, 
except  adoriri,  to  rise  up  at,  attack,  which  follows  the  Fourth  Conju- 
gation throughout.  t^^*''-  ^^**-] 

Irregular  Conjugation. 

400.    A  few  verbs  are  irregular  in  the  Conjugation 

of  the  Present  and  the  forms  derived  from  it.    These 

are: 

sum,  I  am,  and  its  Compounds. 
The  conjugation  of  sum  has  already  been  given  {303) ;  its  Com- 
pounds are  conjugated  in  the  same  way  except  posse,  to  he  able. 

4:01.      Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf.                   Perfect.               Supine, 
possum        poss6,  to  be  able       potiii  


Indicative. 

pos'  sum,  I  can 
po'  tes,  thou  canst 
p6'  test,  he  can 
pos'  su  mus,  we  can 
po  te'  stis,  you  can 
pos'  sunt,  they  can 


Subjunctive. 
Present. 

pos'  Sim,  I  may  be  able 
pos'  SIS,  thou  may  est  be  able 
pos'  sit,  he  may  be  able 
pos  si'  mus,  we  may  be  able 
pos  sT'  tis,  you  may  be  able 
pos'  sint,  they  may  be  able 


Imperfect. 
p6'  te  ram,  I  could,  was  able        pos'  sem,  I  might  be  able 


p6'  te  ras,  thou  couldst 
p6'  te  rat,  he  could 
p6  te  ra'  mils,  we  could 
p6  tg  ra'  tis,  you  could 
po'  te  rant,  they  could 


pos'  ses,  thou  mightest  be  able 
pos'  set,  he  might  be  able 
pos  s6'  mus,  we  might  be  able 
pos  s6'  tis,  you  might  be  able 
pos'  sent,  they  might  be  able 


—     131     — 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Future. 
p6'  tS  ro,  /  shall  he  able  (wanting) 

p6'  te  ris,  tliou  wilt  he  ahle 
po'  te  rit,  he  will  he  ahle 
p6  te'  ri  miis,  we  shall  he  able 
p6  te'  ri  tis,  you  will  he  ahle 
p6'  tS  runt,  they  will  he  ahle 

Perfect. 

p5'  tu  1,  I  have  been  able  po  tu'  g  rim,  I  may  have  been  ahle 

p6  tu  i'  sti  p6  tu'  S  ris 

p6'  tu  it  p6  tu'  e  rit 

po  tu'  finus  *  p6  tu  6  ri  miis 

p6  tu  i'  sti8  po  tu  e  ri  tis 

po  tu  S'  runt  p6  tu'  g  rint 

Pluperfect 

po  fii'  §  ram,  I  had  been  ahle  po  tu  is'  s6m,  I  might  have  been  able 

po  tu'  6  ras  po  tu  is'  s6s 

po  tu'  6  rat  po  tu  is'  s6t 

p6  tu  6  ra'  mus  p6  tu  is  se'  mus 

po  tu  e  ra'  tis  po  tu  is  se'  tis 

po  tu'  e  rant  po  tu  is'  sent 

Future  Perfect, 
po  tu'  e  ro,  /  shall  have  been  ahle  (wanting) 

po  tu'  e  ris 
po  tu'  e  rit 
po  tti  ^  ri  mus 
po  tu  e  ri  tis 
po  tu'  e  rint 

Infinitive. 
Present,    pos'  se,  to  he  ahle       Perfect,    po  tu  is'  sS,  to  have  been  ahle 

402.  The  verb  sum  is  joined  with  the  adjective  potis,  ahlej 
making  the  compound  (pot-sum)  possum,  /  can^  am  ahle.  This  is 
conjugated  like  sum,  but  observe: 

that  the  t  of  pot  is  assimilated  before  s,  thus:  possum  instead  of 
potsum; 

that  the  f  is  dropped  in  ful,  fuSram,  etc.,  thus:  potui  for  potfui; 

that  potesse  and  potessem  are  contracted  into  posse,  possem. 

Participle,  Imperative,  and  Gerund  are  wanting;  potens,  mighty ^  is 
simply  an  adjective.  C^^^.  ^^^A 


—     132     — 

403.  Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect.  Supine. 

f6ro  ferrS,  to  hear         ttili  lattbn 

Active. 

Indioatiyb.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

fS'rO,  I  hear  W  ram,  I  may  hear 

fers  f^'  ras 

fert  fe'  rat 

fe'  rl  mils  f6  ra'  mtis 

fer'  tis  f6  ra'  tis 

f^'  runt  fS'  rant 

Imperfect. 

fgre'bam,  I  was  hearing  fer' rgm,  I  should  hear 

f6  re'  bas  fer'  res 

fg  re'  bat  fer'  ret 

fe  re  ba'  mGs  fer  re'  nitls 

fe  re  ba'  tis  fer  re'  tis 

fg  re'  bant  fer'  rent 

Future. 
fe'ram,  I  shall  hear  ,-  .-.  ^^        (  si^i        \ 

f^'res  l^Ms,    \  gjg 

fg'ret  -^'-"^^     (sit  r^^f  ^; 

fe  re'  mfis  ,-..,-       (  si'  miis   (  /^^^^ 

fgre'tis  Ifiix^'v^,      S  gj,,.3      Uo5.ar 

f6'  rent  "^^'  "^     (  sint        / 

Perfect, 

tu'  li,  Ihore  or  have  home  tu'  le  rim,  I  may  have  home 

tu  li'  sti  tu'  le  ris 

tu'  lit  tu'  16  rit 

tu'  li  mtis  tu  16  ri  mils 

tu  11'  stis  tu  16  ri  tis 

tu  le'  runt  tu'  16  rint 

Pluperfect, 

tu'  16  ram,  /  had  home  tu  lis'  s6m,  I  should  have  home 

tu'  16  ras  tu  lis'  ses 

tu'  16  rat  tu  lis'  s6t 

tu  16  ra'  mtis  tu  lis  se'  mtis 

tu  16  ra'  tis  tu  lis  se'  tis 

til'  16  rant  tu  lis'  sent 


133    — 


Subjunctive. 
(wanting) 


Pres.  Sing, 
Fut.     '' 


Pres. 
Perf. 
Put. 


Indicative. 

Future  Perfect, 
tu'  IS  r5,  I  shall  have  borne 
W  le  ris 
tu'  le  rit 
tu  IS  ri  mils 
tu  le  ri  tis 
tu'  IS  rint 

Imperative. 

fgr,  bear  thou  Plur. 

fer'  to,  thou  shalt  bear 

fer'  to,  he  shall  bear 

Inpinitivb. 
fer'  rS,  to  bear 
tu  lis'  sS,  to  have  borne 
la  tti'  rfis,  -a,  -um  es'  s6,  &c.,  to  be  about  to  bear 

pARTICIPIiES. 

Pres.    f6'  rens,  fS  ren'  tis,  bearing 

Put.     la  tu'  riSs,  la  tti'  r^,  la  tu'  rtiin,  about  to  bear 

Gerund.  Supine. 


fer'  tS,  hear  ye 

fer  to'  te,  ye  shall  bear 

fB  run'  to,  they  shall  bear 


Gen.    f6  ren'  di,  of  bearing 

Dat.     fg  ren'  do,  for  bearing 

Ace.     f(g  ren'  dum,  bearing 

s:r}'»»- 

Abl.      fg  ren'  do,  by  bearing 

Passive. 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Present. 

fS'rto,  /am  6orne 

fe'  rftr,  /ma?/  6e  6orne 

fer'  ris 

fe  ra'  ris 

fer'  tQr                             ^ 

fe  ra'  tQr 

fg'  ri  miir 

fe  ra'  mtir 

f^  ri'  mi  ni 

m  ra'  mini 

fe  run'  tur 

fg  ran'  ttir 

Imperfect. 

f5  re'  bar,  I  was  borne 

fer'  rer,  I  might  be  borne 

f6  re  ba'  ris 

fer  re'  ris 

fe  re  ba'  tQr 

fer  re'  ttir 

fS  re  ba'  mtir 

fer  re'  mtir 

fS  re  ba'  mi  ni 

fer  re'  mi  ni 

fS  re  ban'  tQr 

fer  ren'  ttir 

—     134    — 


Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Ftttore. 
fg'  r5,r,  I  shall  he  borne  (wanting) 

fe  re'  ris 
fe  re'  tiir 
fg  re'  miir 
fe  re'  mi  ni 
fe  ren'  tur 

Perfect, 
la'  tus,  -§r,  -tlm  sum,  /  was  or  have  been  borne 
la'  tus,  -a,  -um  Sim,  I  may  have  been  borne 

Pluperfect, 
la'  ttis,  -a,  -flm  gram,  I  had  been  borne 
la'  tfis,  -3.,  -iiin  essem,  /  might  have  been  borne 

Future  Perfect, 
la'  tils,  -a,  -iim  erO,  /  shall  have  been  borne 

Impebative. 
Singular.  Plural, 

fer'  re,  be  thou  borne  fe  ri'  mi  m,  be  ye  borne 

fer'  tSr,  thou  shall  be  borne 
fer'  tor,  he  shall  be  borne       fe  run'  tor,  they  shall  be  borne 

Infinitive. 
fer'  ri,  to  be  borne 

la'  ttis,  -a,  -iim  es'  s§,  &c.,  to  have  been  borne 
la'  turn  i'  ri,  to  be  about  to  be  borne 

Pabticiples. 
Perfect.  la'  tus,  la'  tS,  la'  tum,  borne 
Gerundive.    f6  ren'  dQs,  f^  ren'  da,  fS  ren'  dtlm,  to  be  borne 

Care  should  be  taken  not  to  confound  the  two  verbs: 
ferre,  to  bear,  and  ferire,  to  beat 


Indio. 

SUBJ. 

Indio. 

SuBJ. 

Ikdic. 


Pres. 
Put 


Pros 
Perf. 
Put. 


404,    Compounds  of  fero  are  conjugated  like  the  simple  verb: 

adfero  adferre,  to  afford  atttili  adlafciim 

aufero  auferre,  to  carry  away  abstuli  ablatum 

confero  conferre,  to  bring  together  contiili  coUatiim 

differo  difFerrS,  to  defer  distiili  dilatum 

eflEero  efferre,  to  carry  out  extuli  eiatiim 

infSrS  inferre,  to  carry  into  intuli  illatum 

praefero  praeferre,  to  prefer  praetiili  praelatum 

rgf^ro  rgferrg,  to  bring  back  r^ttili,  rettuii  relatiim 

[173.  174.] 


135     — 


405.    Pres.  Ind.  &  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect 

volo         velle,  to  he  willing  volui 

nolo        nolle,  to  be  unwilling  nolui 

malo       malle,  to  be  more  willing  malui 

Indicative. 

Present. 

lam  willing  J  unwilling ,  more  willing 

v6'  lo                           no'  lo  malo 

VIS                                nOn  vTs  ma'  vis 

vult                               non  vult  ma'  vult 

v6'  lu  mus                   no'  lii  mus  ma'  lii  miis 

vul'  tis                         non  vui'  tis  ma  vul'  tis 

vo'  lunt              *         no'  lunt  ma'  lunt 

Imperfect. 
Twas  loilling^  unwilling^  more  willing 


v6  le'  bSm 
v6  le'  bas 
v6  le'  bat 
vo  le  ba'  mils 
vo  le  ba'  tis 
vo  le'  bant 


no  le'  bam 
no  le'  bas 
no  le'  bat 
no  le  ba'  mtis 
no  le  ba'  tis 
no  le'  bant 


ma  le'  bam 
ma  le'  bas 
ma  le'  bat 
ma  leba'  mus 
ma  le  ba'  tis 
ma  le'  bant 


Future. 
I  shall  be  willing^  univiUing,  more  willing 

vo'  lam  no'  ISm  ma'  \&m 

vo'  les  no'  les  ma'  les 

vo'  let  no'  let  ma'  let 

vo  le'  mtis  no  le'  miis  ma  le'  mus 

vo  le'  tis  no  le'  tis  ma  le'  tis 

vo'  lent  no'  lent  ma'  lent 

Perfect. 
Iivas  or  have  been  willing^  unwilling^  more  willing 

vo'liii  no'ltii  ma' lii  i 

vo  lii  i'  sti  no  lii  1'  sti  ma  lii  i'  sti 

vo'luit  no' lii  it  ma' lii  it 

vo  lii'  i  miis  no  lii'  i  miis  ma  lii'  i  miis 

vo  lii  i'  stis  no  lu  i'  stis  ma  lii  i'  stis 

vo  lii  e'  runt  no  lii  e'  runt  ma  lii  e'  runt 


—    136    — 

Indicativb. 
Pluperfect. 
/  had  been  willing,  unwilling ,  more  willing 

v6  lii'  e  ram               no  IQ'  e  rS-m  ma  Itt'  e  ram 

v6  lu'  e  ras                 no  Iti'  e  ras  ma  lu'  S  ras 

v6  lu'  €  rat                 no  Iti'  g  rat  ma  lu'  S  rat 

v6  Iti  e  ra'  mus           no  lu  e  ra'  mus  ma  Iti  6  ra'  mtis 

v6  Itl  e  ra'  tis              no  lii  §  ra'  tis  ma  Iti  e  ra'  tis 

v6  lu'  e  rant               no  lu'  e  rant  ma  lu'  e  rant 
Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  been  willing j  unwilling^  more  willing 

v6  Iti'  e  r3                   no  IQ'  e  rO  ma  Iti'  §  r6 

v6  lii'  S  ris                   no  lu'  e  ris  ma  IQ'  e  ris 

v6  lu'  e  rXt                   no  IG'  5  rit  ma  Iti'  S  rit 

v6  Ifi  e  ri  mils            nO  lu  e  ri  mtis  ma  Iti  6  ri  mtis 

v6  lu  e  ri  tis               no  lu  g  ri  tis  ma  Ifi  e  ri  tis 

v6  lu'  e  rint                no  lu'  e  rint  ma  lu'  e  rint 
Subjunctive. 
Present. 
/  may  be  willing ,  unwilling,  more  willing 

v6'  lim                         no'  lim  ma'  lim 

vg'  lis                           no'  lis  ma'  lis 

v6'  lit                           no'  lit  ma'  lit 

ve  li'  mtis                    no  li'  mtis  ma  li'  mtis 

v6  li'  tis                       no  li'  tis  ma  li'  tis 

v6'  lint                         n6'  lint  ma'  lint 
Imperfect. 
/  should  be  willing,  unwilling ^  more  willing 

vel'  iSm                       nol'  lem  mal'  lem 

vel'  les                         nol'  les  mal'  les 

vel'  Igt                          nol'  let  mal'  let 

vel  le'  mtis                  nol  le'mQs  mal  le'  mtis 

vel  le'  tis                     nol  le'  tis  mal  le'  tis 

vel'  lent                      nol'  lent  mal'  lent 

Perfect. 
I  may  have  been  willing,  unwilling,  more  willing 

v6  Iti'  6  rim                 no  Iti'  e  rim  ma  lu'  e  rim 

v6  Iti'  e  ris                   no  Iti'  6  ris  ma  lii'  €  ris 

v6  Iti'  g  rit                   no  Iti'  e  rit  ma  Iti'  6  rit 

v6  Iti  5  ri  mtis            no  Iti  6  ri  mtis  ma  Iti  S  ri  mtis 

v6  Iti  S  ri  tis                no  Iti  6  ri  tis  ma  Iti  6  ri  tis 

v5  Iti'  S  rint                no  Iti'  6  rint  ma  Iti'  €  rint 


—     137    — 


Subjunctive. 

Pluperfect. 

/  should  have  been  willing ^  unwilling ^  more  willing 


v6  m  is'  sSm 

no  lu  is'  sem 

ma  IQis'  sem 

v6  lu  is'  ses 

no  Iti  is'  ses 

ma  lii  is'  ses 

v5  111  is'  set 

no  IQ  is'  set 

ma  lu  is'  set 

vo  lu  is  se'  mils 

no  lii  is  se'  mils 

ma  lii  is  sS'  mQs 

v6  m  is  se'  tis 

no  lii  is  se'  tis 

ma  Iti  is  se'  tis 

v5  IQ  is'  sent 

no  m  is'  sent 

Imperative. 

ma  lu  is'  sent 

wanting       Pres.  S. 
Put.   '^ 

be  unwilling^  &c. 

no'  ll           PI.  no  ll'  te             wanting 
noli' to       ''   nolitO'tg 

no  ll'  to           no  liin' 

to 

iNFiNrrivE. 
Preg.    vel' le,  nol' Ig,  mal'16,  to  be  toilling^  &c. 
Perf.    vo  Iti  is'  sS,  no  lii  is'  se,  ma  Iti  is'  s6,  to  have  been  willing^  &c. 


Participles. 
PreB.     vo'  lens,  willing        no'  lens,  unwilling 

Geruwd. 
Gen.     v6  len'  di  no  len'  di 

Dat.     vo  len'  dO 


406.     Prei.  Ind.  &  Pres.  lUf. 
€0,  irg,  to  go 

Indicative. 


Perfect, 
ivi 


wanting 
wanting 

[175,  176,] 

Supine, 
itiim 


6'  o,  I  go 

is 
it 

rmus 
V  tis 
g'  unt 

i'  bam,  /  was  going 

i'bas 

i'bat 

i  ba'  mus 

1  ba'  tis 

I'  bant 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


SUBJUNCTTVB. 

€'  am,  I  may  go 

€'  as 

€'at 

5  a'  mus 

6  a'  tis 
e'  ant 

r  rgm,  I  should  go 

V  res 

I'rgt 

i'  r6'  mus 

I  re'  tis 

r  rent 


—     138     — 


Indicative. 

I  shall  go 
i'bo 

V  bis 
i'bit 

V  bi  muB 

V  bi  tis 
i'  bunt 


Future. 


Subjunctive. 
I  may  be  about  to  go 


ItQ 
-ae, 


rtis, 
-iiin 


-a 


Sim 

sis 
sit 

sl'mus 
si'  tis 
sint 


—     Perfect. 


I  went  or  have  gone 

V  vi  (i'  i) 
1  vi'  stl  (i  i'  sti) 
1'  vit  (i'  it) 
i'  VI  mils  (i'  i  miis) 
i  vi'  stis  (i  i'  stis) 
i  v6'  runt  (i  e'  runt) 

/  had  gone 

V  v6  ram  (i'  6  ram) 
i'  ve  ras,  (i'  ^  ras) 
1'  ve  rat,    (i'  e  rat) 
i  v6  ra'  mfis  (i  6  ra'  mus) 
i  v6  ra'  tis  (i  e  ra'  tis) 
i'  v6  rant  (i  e  rant) 

/  shad  have  gone 

V  v6  ro  (i'  6  ro) 
i'  v6  ris  (i'  6  ris) 
r  v6  rit,  (i'  6  rit) 
i  v6  ri  mus  (i  g  ri 
1  ve  ri  tis  (i  6  ri  tis) 
i'  v6  rint  (I'  6  rint) 

Singular. 
Pres.    I,  go 

Put.     i'  to,  thou  shall  go 
V  to,  he  shall  go 


I  may  have  gone 
V  v6  rim  (i'  e  rim) 
i'  ve  ris  (i'  6  ris) 
i'  ve  rit  (i'  6  rit) 
i  v6  ri  mus  {i  6  ri  mus) 
i  v6  ri  tis  (i  g  ri  tis) 
i'  ve  rint  (i'  erint) 

Pluperfect. 

/  should  have  gone 
1  vis'  sem  (Is'  sto) 
1  vis'  s6s  (Is'  ses) 
1  vis'  set  (Is'  set) 
1  vis  86'  mus  (is  s6'  mtis) 
I  vis  se'  tis  (Is  s6'  tis) 
I  vis'  sent  (Is'  sent) 

Future  Perfect. 


(wanting) 


Impeeative. 

Plural. 
V  t6,  go  ye 
I  to'  t6,  ye  shall  go 
e  un'  to,  they  shall  go 

Infinitive. 


PrcB.    i'  r6,  to  go 

Perf.     1  vis'  s6  (Is'  sS) ,  to  have  gone 

Put.     i  tti'  rCis,  ~a,  -tim  es'  sg,  &c-, 


to  be  about  to  go 


—     139     — 

Participles. 
Pres.    i'  ens,  Gen.  e  un'  tis,  going 
Put.     i  tu'  riis,  -a,  -um,  being  about  to  go 
Gkeund.  Supine. 

Gen.    5  un'  di,  of  going 

Dat.     e  un'  do,  for  going 

Ace.     g  un'  dum,  going  V  turn  )  . 

Abl.      e  un'  do,  by  going  V  tu     )  ^^^^   ^^^^ 

407.  The  Compounds  of  eo  are  conjugated  in  the  same  way. 
But  usually  they  drop  the  v  of  the  Perfect  as:  r6dii  for  redlvT,  &c., 
and  contract  the  i  i  of  the  Perfect  Infinitive  and  of  the  Pluperfect 
Subjunctive  into  i,  as:  redisse  for  redl(v)iss6,  &c.,  e.  g.: 

abeo,  -Tre,  to  go  away  praetereo,  -Ire,  to  pass  by 

ineo,  -ire,  to  go  into,  begin  redeS,  -ire,  to  return 

intereo,  -irS,  to  perish  subeo,  -ire,  to  come  or  go  under 

obeo,  -ire,  to  meet  transeo,  -ire,  to  pass  over 

408.  Tlie  Compounds  veneo,  /  am  for  sale^  and  pereo,  I  perish^ 
serve  as  Passives  to  vendo,  /  sell^  and  perdo,  /  ruin.  The  Compound 
ambio,  I  go  about j  seek,  is  regular  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation. 

409.  queo        quire,  to  be  able  quivi         quitum 
nequeo    nequire,  not  to  be  able     nequivi     nequitum 

are  conjugated  like  Ire,  to  go  (406);  they  are,  however,  usual  only 
in  the  Present  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 

410.  Pres.  Ind.&  Pres.  Inf.  Perfect.  Supine, 
edo,  -ere,  to  eat                  edi                     esum 

(regular  of  the  3d  conjugation,  373)  has  also  some  contracted 
forms,  similar  to  those  of  the  corresponding  tenses  of  esse,  to  be, 
but  always  with  e  long  before  s,  viz.: 

Present  Indicative.  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 


ederem 

essem,  /  should  eat 

edis 

es,  thou  eatest 

ederes 

esses,  thou  wouldst  eat 

edit 

est,  he  eats 

ederet 

esset,  he  would  eat 

6der6mus 

essemiis,  we  should  eat 

gditis 

estis,  you  eat 

edgretis 

essetis,  you  would  eat 

ederent 

essent,  they  would  eat 

Imperative. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Prei.    ede 

es,  eat  thou 

6dite 

este,  eat  ye 

Fut.     gdito      esto,  thou  shalt  eat      gdltote      estote,  ye  sliall  eat 

edito      esto,  he  shall  eat 

—     140     — 

Infinitive. 

gdgrS       ess€,  to  eat 

Pasbivb.   gditur  esttlr,  is  eaten — ^deretur  essetGr,  should  he  eaten 


ill.       Pres.  Ind  &  Pres.  Inf. 

Perfect. 

fio,  figri,  to  become 

factiis  sum 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Present. 

fi'  o,  /  become 

fi'  am,  I  may  become 

fis 

fi'as 

fit 

fiat 

ti'  mils 

fi  a'  mus 

fi'tis 

n  a'  tis 

fi'unt 

fi'  ant 

Imperfect. 

fie'  bam,  I  became 

fi'  e  r6m,  I  should  become 

n  e'  bas 

n'  g  res 

fi  e'  bat 

fl'  6  r6t 

f  1  e  ba'  mils 

fi  6  re'  mus 

fi  e  ba'  tis 

fi  e  rS'  tis 

fi  e'  bant 

fi'  6  rent 

Future. 

fi'  am,  I  shall  become 

(wanting) 

fi'es 

fi'St 

fi  e'  mtis 

fi  e'  tis 

fi'ent 

Perfect. 
/  became  or  have  become  I  may  have  become 

factiis,  -a,  -Qm  sum,  &c.  factiis,  -a,  -lim  sim,  &c. 

Pluperfect. 
/  had  become  I  should  have  become 

factiis,  -a,  -Qm  eram,  &c.  factiis,  -a,  -tim  ess^m,  &c. 

Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  become 
factiis,  -a,  -tim  6ro,  &c.  (wanting) 

Imperative. 
PreB.  Sing,    fi,  become  thou  Plur.     fi'  t§,  become  ye 


Port  Sing. 

Nom. 

li 

Ace. 

Plur. 

Nom. 

ii 

Ace. 

—    141    — 

Intinitivb. 
fi'  5  ri,  to  become 
factHs,  -a,  -una  ess6 

fac'  tGm,  -am,  -dm  es'  s6      v    ^    r       x. 

^    , . -     ^       X      f  «x  r  ^o  Tia'y^  become 

fac'  ti,  -ae,  -a  es'  sg 

fac'  tos,  -as,  -a  es'  s6 

Put.  factum  irl,  ^o  be  about  to  become 

Pabticiples. 

PreB.  factQs,-a,-tiin,  become;  Gerundive.  taciendus,-a,-iiin,  to  be  made 

412.  The  verb  fio  is  conjugated  in  the  Present,  Imperfect,  and 
Future  according  to  the  Fourth  Conjugation,  but  takes  an  S  in  the 
Infinitive  and  Subjunctive  Imperfect,  viz.:  fieri,  fiergm.  In  these 
forms  the  1  is  short,  but  elsewhere  it  is  long,  even  before  another 
vowel.  It  is  originally  an  intransitive  verb  meaning  to  become^  to 
happen^  but  is  also  treated  as  Passive  to  faciO,  /  make.  Examples 
are : 

nihil  fit,  nothing  happens 
consul  fit,  he  is  made  consul 
dlv6s  factiis  est,  he  has  become  rich 
nihil  factiim  est,  nothing  has  happened 

413,  The  Compounds  of  facio  with  Prepositions  change  &  into 
I,  and  form  the  Passive  regularly,  as: 

interficio,  /  kill  interficior,  /  am  killed 

But  when  compounded  with  words  other  than  prepositions,  faciO 
retains  its  a,  and  uses  fiO  as  its  Passive,  as: 

mansu6facio,  /  tame  mansuSf io,  /  become  tame 

liqugfaciO,  I  make  liquid  liqugfio,  I  melt 

The  accent  remains  the  same  as  in  the  simple  verbs,  thus: 
mansuefa'cis,  thou  tamest.  [^79.  iso] 

Defective  Verbs. 

414.  Defective  Verbs  want  certain  parts. 

415,  coei)%  I  have  begun  memmi,  I  remember  odi,  I  hate 
are  in  use  only  in  the  Perfect  and  the  tenses  derived  from  it.  To 
coepi,  /  have  begim,  incTpiO,  /  begin,  serves  as  a  Present.  m6mini, 
I  remember,  and  OdT,  I  hate,  are  present  in  sense;  hence  in  the  Plu- 
perfect and  Future  Perfect  they  have  the  sense  of  the  Imperfect  and 
Future,  novi,  /  know  (Perf.  of  nosco,  /  learn  to  know),  and  con- 
sue  vl,  /  am  wont  (Perf  of  consuescO,  /  accustom  myself),  are  also 
present  in  sense. 


—    142 


Ferf: 


Pluperf. 


Perf. 
Pluperf. 


Indicattv^e. 

I  have  begun 

/  remember 

I  hate 

coe'  pi 

m6'  ml  rii 

o'di 

coe  pi'  sti 

me  mi  iii'  sti 

0  cli'  sti 

coe'  pit 

me'  mi  nit 

O'dit 

coe'  pi  mils 

me  mi'  ni  mGs 

0'  di  mtis 

coe  pi'  stis 

me  mi  ni'  stis 

0  di'  stis 

coe  pe'  runt 

me  mi  ne'  runt 

o  de'  runt 

coe'  pe  ram,  &c. 

me  mi'  ne  ram, 

&c. 

o'deram,  &c. 

coe'  p6  ro,  &c. 

me  mi'  ne  ro,  &c. 

o'  de  ro,  &c. 

Subjunctive. 

coe'  pe  rim,  &c. 

me  mi'  ne  rim. 

&c. 

o'dSrim,  &c. 

coe  pis'  sem,  &e. 

me  mi  nis'  sem, 

&c. 

Odis'sem,&c. 

(wanting) 


Impeeattve. 
me  men 'to 
m6  men  tO'  te 


Perf. 
Put. 

Perf. 
Fut. 


Infinitive, 
coe  pis'  sS  me  mi  nis'  se 

coep  til'  rus  es'  se     (wanting) 

Paeticiples. 
coep'  tiis,  -S,  -iim         (wanting) 
coep  til'  rus,  -a,  -iim    (wanting) 


(wanting) 


o  dis'  se 
o  su'  rtis  es' 


(o'siis,   -a,    -iim) 
o  su'  riis,  -a,  -iim 


Passive,   coep'  tiis,  -a,  -Qm  sum,   /  have   begun    (used   with    the 
Pass.  Infinit.) 
0'  siis,  -a,  -iim  sum,  I  hate 


416,    aj5,  /  say^  say  yes, 
farl,  to  speak 


Urm  —  inquam,  /  say,  quoth  I  — 


a' jo 

Pees.  Subj.    

Imp. 

Ind. 

aje'bam 

a' is 

a'jas 

a  j6'  bas 

a' It 

a'  jat 

aje'bat 

aje  ba'  mus 
ajeba'tis 

a'  junt 

a'  jant 

a  j6'  bant 

Peep.  Ind. 

a'  it        

Pabticiple.  a'jens^  affirmative 


—    143 


Pres.  Ind. 

in'  quam 

Pees.  Subj. 

in'  quis 

in'  qui  as 

in'  quit 

in'  qui  at 

in'  qui  mus 

in'  qui  tis 

in  qui  a'  tis 

in'  qui  unt 

in'  qui  ant 

Imp.  Ind. 

in  qui  e'  bam 

Fur.  Ind. 

in  qui  6'  bas 

m'  qui  6s 

in  qui  S'  bat 

in'  qui  fit 

in  qui  6  ba'  mus 

in  qui  S  ba'  tis 

in  qui  6'  bant 

Pebp.  Ind. 

Impebat. 

in'  qu6 

in  qui'  sti 

in'  qui  t§ 

in'  quit 

in'  qui  to 

in  qui'  stis 
inquam,  say^  is  used  only  in  direct  quotations,  as  the  English  quoth. 

Besides  the  Infinitive  far!,  to  speak^  mark: 

Pres.  fatur,  he  speaks  Imperat.  far 6,  speak  thou 

Put.   fabor,  /  shall  speak  Gerund,    fandi,  of  speaking 

fabitur,  he  will  speak  fando,  for  speaking 

Perf.  ^tvi^  ^\m\  I  have  spoken^  Slq,.   Supine.     idXxi^  to  speak 
Participle,     (fantis,  fanti)  infans,  speechless 
Gerundive,    fandus,  -3-,  -um,  to  he  spoken  of 


417.    a'  v6  sal'  v5      sal  v6'  bis,  hail  thou  !  va'  16     )  fare- 

a  v6'  te  sal  v6'  t§  hail  ye!      va  le'  t6  J  well 

a'gg  a'gitg  come  a' pa  g6, 6eflf one 

c6'  do  cet'  te  give 


418.    To  these  may  be  added: 

quae'  so,  I  beseech  fo'  r^m,  I  should  he 

quae'  su  mus,  we  beseech  fo'  res,  thou  shouldst  he 

fo'  rSt,  he  should  he 
fo'  rent,  they  should  he 
fo'  r6,  to  he  about  to  be 

[181,  18Z] 


—    144    — 


Impersonal  Verbs. 

419.  Many  Verbs  appear  only  in  the  third  per- 
son singular  and  in  the  Infinitive  to  express  an  action 
or  condition  without  reference  to  any  actor.  These 
are  called  Impersonal  Verbs. 

420.  The  following  Verbs  signifying  personal  conditions  are 
absolutely  impersonal: 

Perfect. 
dgcQit 
dSdgcuit 

libiilt  or  libitttm  est 
ITcGit  or  licitiiin  est 
lieQit 

mis6ritiim  )      . 
misertum    i 
oportGit 

pigGit  or  pigittini  est 
paenitiiit 

pudilit  or  puditiiin  est 
pertaesiiin  est 

421.  The  Impersonais  dScSt,  d6dgc6t,  libgt,  licSt  can  have  a 
subject,  but  only  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective. 

libgt,  lic6t  and  liquet  govern  the  Dative,  as  mihi  lic6t,  it  is  lawful 
for  me;  mihi  lib6t,  it  pleases  me.  All  the  other  verbs  mentioned  in 
420  govern  the  Accusative,  the  persons  being  expressed  as  follows: 


Present. 

Infinitive. 

d6cet,  it  becomes 

dgcere 

dedgcet,  it  is  unbecoming 

dedecerS 

libet,  it  pleases 

libere 

lic6t,  it  is  lawful,  allowed 

licerg 

liqufit,  it  is  clear 

llquerg 

misSrSt,  it  excites  pity 

mis^rerg  ^ 

6port€t,  it  is  needful 

Sportere 

pig6t,  it  grieves 

pigerg 

paenitgt,  it  causes  sorrow 

paenitere 

pudgt,  it  shames 

puderg 

taedet,  it  wearies 

taedere 

Indicative. 

paenitgt  me,  I  repent 
paenitgt  te 
paenitgt  gum 
paenitgt  nos 
paenitgt  vos 
paenitgt  Sos 

/  was  repenting 
paenitebat  mS,  &c. 

/  shall  repent 
paenitebit  mS,  &c. 


Subjunctive. 
Present. 

paenitgat  me,  /  may  repent 

paenitSat  te 

paenitgat  eiim 

paenit^at  nos 

paenitgat  vos 

paenitSat  eos 

Imperfect. 

/  should  i^epent 
paeniterfit  me,  &c. 
Future. 

(wanting) 


->     145     — 

Indicativb.  Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 
/  (have)  repented  I  may  have  repented 

paenituit  me,  &c.  paenituerit  me,  &c. 

Pluperfect. 
/  had  repented         ,  I  should  have  repented 

paenituerat  me,  &c.  paenituisset  me,  &c. 

Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  repented 
paenituerit  me,  &c.  (wanting) 

422.    Verbs  describing  phenomena  of  nature  are  almost  in- 
variably impersonal  in  virtue  of  their  meaning: 
pluit,  it  rains  fulgurat  I  .^  j.^j^^^^^ 


ningit,  it  tnows  fulmlnat 

grandinat,  it  hails  Iticescit,  it  becomes  light 

tonat,  it  thunders  vesperascit,  evening  comes  on 

423.  Verbs  impersonally  used:  * 

accidit     \  interest,  it  concerns,  it  matters 

"*    .,       i  it  happens  ^Z^l'  "  *'^^/*'« 

ev6nit       r  patet,  it  is  plain 

contingit  )  placet,  it  pleases 

constat,  it  is  evident,  agreed  praestat,  it  is  better 

expedit,  it  is  useful  rgfert,  it  concerns,  it  matters 

convenit,  it  is  fit  restat,  it  remains 

delectat,  it  delights  vacat,  there  is  leisure 

The  Passive  of  intransitive  Verbs  is  often  used  impersonally,  thus: 

vivitur,  people  live  pugnatur,  there  is  fighting 

SIC  vivitur,  such  is  life    *  itur,  some  one  goes 

[183.  184.] 

Adverbs. 

424.  Adverbs  are  words  qualifying  verbs  and  ad- 
jectives, as  also  other  adverbs.  In  respect  to  form, 
they  are  Primitive,  i.  e.  such  as  cannot  be  traced  to. 
simpler  forms,  or  Derivative. 

425.  The  majority  of  Derivative  Adverbs  are  formed  from 
adjectives  in  the  following  manner:  Adjectives  of  the  First  and 
Second  Declensions  (ending  in  (is,  and  er)  form  the  adverb  by 
changing  the  genitive  ending  i  into  e.     Examples  are: 


146 


Nominative. 

Genitive. 

Adverb. 

lentils,  sloiv 

lent! 

lente,  slowly,  leisurely 

rectus,  right 

recti 

recte,  rightly,  correctly 

llbgr,  free 

lib^ri 

llbere,  freely 

pulchSr,  fine 

pulchri 

pulchre,  finely 

Nominative. 

Genitive. 

c616r,  fast 

"  celeris 

ISlix,  happy 

felicis 

fortis,  brave 

fortis 

libens,  willing 

libentis 

patiens,  patient 

patientis 

dillgens,  careful 

diligentis 

elggans,  elegant 

elegantis 

sellers,  skillful 

Bollertis 

bonus,  good,  makes  bSn6,  well;  malus,  had,  makes  male,  badly, 

426.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension  form  their  adverbs 
in  ter,  changing  the  genitive  ending  is  into  iter;  but  those  in  ns 
and  rs  change  the  genitive  ending  is  into  er: 

Adverb. 
cSleriter,  fast 
feliciter,  happily 
fortiter,  bravely 
libenter,  ivillingly 
patienter,  patiently 
diligenter,  carefully 
eleganter,  elegantly 
sollerter,  skillfully 

[97.  98.] 

427.  Some  Adverbs  from  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second 
Declensions  have  both  forms,  as: 

firmus,  strong  firme,  firmiter,  strongly 

human  us,  human  humane,  hiimaniter,  humanhf 

largus,  large  large,  largiter,  largely 

opulent  us,  rich  opulenter  only,  richly 

violentus,  violent  vi61enter     **  ,  violently 

428.  A  few  Adverbs  differ  in  meaning  from  their  adjectives,  as: 
sanS,  certainly  from  sanus,  sound 

valdg,  very  from  validus,  strong 

429.  The  Neuter  Accusative  of  some  Adjectives  of  the  3d 
declension  is  used  as  an  adverb,  as: 

facilg,  easily  impunS,  with  impunity 

difficile,  with  difficulty  r^cens,  recently 

430.  Certain  Cases  of  Adjectives,  Nouns  and  Pronouns  are 
often  used  as  Adverbs: 

rar5,  rarely  continue,  forthwith 

tuto,  safely  falsO,  falsely 

cito,  quickly,  soon  fortuito,  by  chance 

consulto,  purposely  gratuito,  gratuitously 


—     147     -. 


own  accord 


manifesto,  clearly 
mSritO,  deservedly 
immerito,  undeservedly 
nScessariO,  necessarily 
perp6tuo,  perpetually 
subito,  sudderily 
certo,  in  fact 
certe,  assuredly 
crebrO,  frequently 
quo,  whither 
fortg,  by  chance 
noctu,  by  night 

Some  Phrases  or  Clauses  have  grown  into  Adverbs,  as: 
quodammodo,  in  a  certain  man- 
quotannis,  every  year  [ner 

videlicet  =  vid6r6  lie6t )     . 
scTlicot  =  scire  lic6t       5 
nudius  tertius  =  nunc  diPs  ter- 
tiiis,  the  day  before  yesterday 


sScretO,  secretly 
s6ro,  late 
v6ro,  in  truth 
v6re,  truly 
liilc,  this  way 
spontg,  of  one' 
gratis,  gratis 
ceterum,  for  the  rest 
nimis,  nimium,  too  much 
primiim,  first 
tantiim,  only 

4SI. 

ant6a,  before 
interga,  meanwhile 
proptgrea,  therefoj-e 
liodle  (=  hoc  die),  fo-day 
raagnoperS,  particularly 
obvTam,  toivards 

432.  Adverbs  in  Tm  are  formed  from  Supines,  as: 

certatim,  emulously  sensim,  little  by  little 

nomiiiatim,  expressly  (*arptim,  by  pieces 

privatim,  in  private  cursim,  speedily 

etatim,  steadily  passim,  hei^e  and  there 

raptim,  hastily 

433,  Similar  Adverbs    (in    atim,    itim)    are    formed    from 
Nouns,  as: 

i>Tadatim,  step  by  sfpp  vicisslm,  by  turns 

trlbiitim,  by  tribes  vTritTm,  man  by  man 

434,  A  number  of  Adverbs  come   from  Nouns   by  changing 
-the  Genitive-ending  into  Itiis: 

antiquitus,  of  old  radicitus,  by  the  roots 

(iTvinitus,  divinehj  funditfis,  from  the  foundation 

eaelitus,  from  heaven  pgnitus,  thoroughly 

435.  In  respect  to  Meaning.  Adverbs  may  be  divi-' 
ded  into  several  classes: 

Adverbs  of  Place  and  Motion, 
Adverbs  of  Time  and  Succession, 
Adverbs  of  Manner  and  Quality. 


—    148 


436.    Adverbs  of  Place  are  those  which  answer  to  the  question 
where?  iibi?  whither?  quo?  whence?  unde? 


ubi  where? 
ibi,  there 
hic,  here 
illic,  there 

quo,  whither? 
eo,  thither 

unde,  whence 
inde,  thence 
hinc,  hence 


alicubi,  somewhere 
ubique,  everywhere 
qua?  hy  what  way? 
nusquam,  nowhere 

hue,  hither 
illuc,  thither 

istinc,  thence 
illinc,  ^/len 


obviam,  toward 
alTbi,  elsewhere 
l.jris,  outside 
proeiil,  /ar 

retro,  hackivard 
foras,  ou^ 


undique,  /rom  aZZ 

^  sides 
desuper,  from  above 

The  following  are  also  used  as  Prepositions: 
circk^  aroundj  about    intra,  ins i^^e  pone,  post,  &(?7iin(2 

contra,  opposite  supra,  above  prope,  near 

extra,  outside  infra,  below  coram,  personally 

437,    Adverbs  of  Time  are  those  which  answer  to  the  question 
when?  quando  ?  how  long?  quamdiu  ?  how  often?  quotiens  ? 


quando  ?  when? 

aiiquando,  once 

interdum,  sometimes 

interim,  meanwhile 

interea,  in  the  meantime 

illico,  on  the  spot 

Sim  111,  at  the  same  time 

jam,  already 

tandem,  at  last 

demum,  not  until 

alias,  at  other  times 

nunc,  noio 

hodig,  to-day 

modo,  just  now 

nCiper,  lately 

pridem,   long  since 

quondam,  once 

antea,  before 

tunc,  at  that  time 

tum,  then 

prldig,  the  day  before 

praet6r6a,  besides 


lierl,  yesterday 

nudius  tertius,  the  day  befoi^e 

yesterday 
postrldig,  the  day  after 
eras,  to-morroio 
perendie,  the  day  after  to-mor- 
unquam,  ever  [row 

nunquam,  never 
semper,  always 
plerumque,  commonly 
propediem,  one  of  these  days 
posthac,  hereafter 
postea,  afterwards 
mox,  soon 

mane,  early  in  the  morning 
Interdiu,  by  day 
vesperi,  in  the  evening 
noctu,  by  night 
delude,  afterwards 
siibindg,  presently 
deinceps,  in  turn 
abhinc,  hereafter 


ante,  before,  also  used  as  a  Preposition. 


—     149    — 


quamdm?  how  long? 
tamdiu,  so  long 
aliquamdiu,  some  time 
dudum,  a  short  time  ago 
quotiens?  how  often? 
totiens,  so  often 
aliquotiens,  some  times 
iteriim,  a  second  time 
rarsiis,  again 
denuo,  anew 


short  time 


usque,  right  on 
parumper  ) 
paulispgr  K 
tantisp^r,  so  long 
saepe,  often 
quotidiS,  every  day 
quotaniiis,  every  year 
s6mel,  once 

bis,    twice,    and  all  the   other 
Numeral  Adverbs,  241. 


438,  Adverbs  of  manner  are  those  which  answer  to  the 
question  how?  quomodo?  To  this  class  belong  all  Adverbs 
derived  from  Adjectives,  42S.  Besides  these  regular  Adverbs  of 
manner  mark  the  following: 


how 


quomodo  1 

quemadmodum  ! 
lit,  iiti,  as 

ita  ) 

adeo,  so,  to  that  degree 
quam,  how,  how  much 
tarn,  so,  so  much 

^P^5^  I  otherwise 
secus  ) 

satis,  enough 

satius,  rather 

valds         1 

admSdum  j  ^'^^^ 

'quantopere,  how  greatly 

tantopere,  so  greatly 

nirais,  nimium,  too  much 

praecipuS,  especially 

frustra,  in  vain 

t  em  ere,  at  random 

vix,  hardly 

modo,  only 

ideo  \ 

propterea  >-  thereft)re 

idcirco      ) 

it6m,  just  so,  also 

porro,  moreover^  then 


ferg,  fermg,  almost 
saltem,  at  least 
paeng,  nearly 
fortasse,  perhaps 
palam,  publicly 
repente,  suddenly 

-iw  ^,  >  to  wit 
scilicet  ( 

paulatim,  by  degrees 
penitus,  wholly 
plane,  quite 
omnino,  at  all 
nae       )    . 
iitiqug  \^i(^riyrate 

sang,  certainly 
nimirum,  to  be  sure 

f"»    Ino 
hand ) 

haudquaquam  )  . 

n€quaquam      1 

n6-quid6m,  not  even 

neutiquam,  not  at  all 

immo,  on  the  conti^ary 

^^!     \why 
quare ) 

propg,  near     )    , 

clam,  secretly  \  ^'^°  P'^^P 


no  means 


—     150     — 

439,    The  following  Adverbs  are  called  Correlatives,  because 
they  answer  to  each  other. 


Interrogatiye. 

Demonstrative. 
I.    Of  Place: 

Relative. 

ubi?  where? 

ibi,  there 

ubi,  where 

qua?  which  way? 

hac,  this  way 

qua,  which  way 

und6?  whence? 

inde,  thence 
hinc,  hence 
illinc,  thence 
istinc,  thence 

undg,  whence 

quo?  whither? 

60,  thither 
hue,  hither 
illuc,  thither 
istuc,  thither 
II.    0/  !nme; 

quo,  whither 

quando?  when? 

turn,  ^/len 

tunc,  at  that  time 

cum,  it7/ien 

quStiens?  how  often? 

t6tiens,  so  often 
III.    Of  Manner: 

quQtiens,  as  o/]5e?i  as 

quomodo?  how? 

ita,  sic,  50,  <7ius 

ut,  uti,  as 

quam?  how  much? 

tarn,  so  much 

quam,  as 

{185.  186,] 

Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

440.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  are  gener- 
ally compared  like  their  primitives.  Their  com- 
parative is  like  the  neuter  comparative  of  the  ad- 
jective; the  superlative  is  formed  from  the  super- 
lative of  the  adjective  by  changing  us  into  e. 

Positive.                        Comparative.  Superlative, 

clarg,  brightly              clarius,  more  brightly  clarissim6,  most 

brightly 

facilS,  easily                facllius,  more  easily  facillime,  most  easily 

dlligentSr,  carefvJly     diligentius,  more  care-  diligentissim^,  most 

fully  carefully 

patient^r,  patiently      patientius,  more  pa-  patientissime,  most 

tiently  patiently 


151     — - 


4:41,    The  following  are  Irregxilar: 


bene,  well 
male,  badly 
multum,  much 
non  multum,  little 
magnopere,  greatly 
did, /or  a  long  time 
saepg,  often 
props,  near 


melius,  better 
pejus,  worse 
plus,  more 
minus,  lesa 
magis,  more 
diutiLis,  longer 
saepuis,  oftener 
propius,  nearer 


optimg,  best 
pessimg,  worst 
plurlmum,  most 
minime,  least 
maximg,  most 
diutissimg,  very  long 
saepissTme,  oftenest 
proxime,  nearest 


44:2,    The  following  are  Defective: 

detSrius,  worse        d6terrim6,  worst 

ocius,  more  quickly  Ocissimg,  most  quickly 


merito,  deservedly 
nuper,  lately 
satis,  enough 
sScus,  otherwise 


potiiis,  rather 
prius,  sooner 


satius,  better 
sequius,  less 


potissimum,  most  of  all 
primum,  primo,  j^rs^ 
mSritissimo,  most  deservedly 
nuperrimg,  very  lately 

[97.  98.\ 


Prepositions. 

443,  The  Latin  Prepositions  are  regularly  used 
with  some  special  case  of  a  noun  or  pronoun,  either 
the  Accusative  or  Ablative. 

444,  The  following  are  used  with  the  Accusative: 
ad,  tOj  atj  toward  6b,  forj  on  account  of 
adversus,   adversum,   against,      p§n6s,  in  the  power  of 


toward 
ante,  before 
apud,  at,  with,  near 
circa,  circum,  around 
circitSr,  about,  near 
CIS,  citra,  on  this  side  of 
contra,  against,  opposite  to 
erga,  toward,  unto 
extra,  without,  beyond 
infra,  under,  beneath 
inter,  between,  among 
intra,  within 
juxta,  near^  beside  ^ 


pSr,  through,  by,  during 

pone,  behind 

post,  after,  behind 

praeter,  past,  beside,  except 

propg,  near 

propter,  on  account  of,  close  by 

secundum,  after,  next  to,  accord- 
ing to,  along 

supra,  above 

trans,  across,  over,  beyond 

ultra,  beyond,  on  the  further 
side  of,  past 

versus,  toward  ^^^^  ^2, 237. 23S.} 


152     — 


445.    The  following  are  used  with  the  Ablative: 


a     ) 

ab  V  from^  away  from 

abs) 

absque,  without^  hut  for 

clam,  without  the  knowledge  of 

coram,  in  presence  of 

cum,  with 


d5,  from,  downfrom,of==ahout 
6,  ex,  froniy  out  of 
prae,  for,  before,  in  compari- 
son with 
pro,  for,  instead  of 
sine,  without 
ten  us,  as  far  as,  up  to 


446.  Prepositions  with  the  Accusative  and  Ablative, 

but  strictly  with  a  difference  of  meaning: 
in,  into,  in;  sub,  under;  subter,  beneath;  super,  above. 
in  and  sflb,  whea  followed  by  the  Accusative,  indicate  motion 
to,  when  by  the  Ablative  rest  in,  a  place. 

[93.  94,  95.  96.  187.  188.  239,  240,] 

Conjunctions. 

447.  Conjunctions  connect  words  and  sentences. 
According  to  their  use,  they  are  divided  into  Co- 
ordinating and  Subordinating  Conjunctions. 

Co-ordinating  Conjunctions. 

448.  Co-ordinating  Conjunctions  are  those  that 
join  together  sentences  of  equal  order  or  rank. 


449. 


CopulatlYe. 


6t       \ 

atqnep^^ 
ac       J 

et . .  et,  both . .  and 

cum.  .turn,  both,  .and  especially 

modo . .  modo  ) 

>  now . .  now 
nunc . .  nunc     ( 

turn . .  turn,  then . .  then 

tarn . ,  quam,  both . .  and 

non  solum. . sed  etiam 
non  modo  . .  sed  etiam 
non  tantum . .  sed  6tiam 


quoque ) 

V     V  >•  and  not 
n6qu6  | 

n6qu6..n6que] 

^w        «  y  neither,  .nor 

nSc . . nee  j 

neque..-que,  on  the   one  hand 

not . .  and  on  the  other 
St..n6que,  on  the   one  hand.. 

and  on  the  other  hand  not 

>  not  only . .  but  also 


—     153     — 


450. 

Disjimctiye. 

aut   \ 

-ve    [ 

aut.. aut  )  ^.^j,^*,    x^-. 

vel . .  vel    i 

sive . .  siv6,  whether . .  or 

sive  J 

451. 

Adrersative. 

autem  . 

sed 

v6rum  V  but 

vero 

at        J 

attamen,  but  yet 

atqui,  but  for  all  that 
tamen,  v  evert heless 
ceteriim,  for  the  rest 
at  vSrO,  but  in  truth 
verura  enim  v6ro,  but  in  truth 
verumtamen,  hut  yet 

452. 

Causal. 

nam,  namqu6, /or 

6nim,  ^t6nim,  for 

453. 

niative. 

itaque  | 

igitur  V  therefore 

ergo    ) 

eo          J 

k1(m")      V  o?i  ^/^a^  account 

idcirco  ; 

proinde,  accordingly 

propterga,  therefore 

quarg 

quam  ob  rem 

quapropter      \  ^'^herefore 

quocirca          J 

[99.  100.  189.  190.  295-SOO. 

Subordinating  Conjunctions. 

454.  Subordinating  Conjunctions  are  those  which 
join  a  subordinate  sentence  to  that  on  which  it  de- 
pends. 

455.  Temporal. 

postquam,  after  that,  after  cum,  when 

^y  ,  f™    [  while,  until 

ubi,  when  donSc ) 

T?l^*=     A  as  soon  as  quoad   t/jj  to 

simulatque  )  quamdiu,  as  long  as 

lit  primum      [  the  first  moment    antequam   )  ^.^^  ^^^,  ^^^^^^ 

iS    ''  '    " 

[257,  »58,} 


cum  primura  f     that 


prmsquam ) 


—    154     — 


456,  Causal. 

'^'"'^X  because 
quod  ) 

cum,  as,  since 


qu6niam 
quando 

quandoquTd^m 
siquidSm 


smce^  in  as 
much  as 

[259.  260,  \ 


457. 

SI,  if 

nisi,  unless 

si  nOn,  if  not 

dummodo  \ 

dum  V  if  only  J  provided 

modo         ) 


Conditional. 


sT  modo,  if  only 

sin,  if  not,  but  if 

quodsi,  but  if 

dummodo  n6  \ 

dum  ne  I  provided  only  not 

modo  ne         }  [26i,  262. \ 


458. 

ets!  \ 

tametsi  [ 

etiamsi  >  althougli 

quamquam    j 

459. 

ut,  that,  in  order  that 

n6,  that  not,  lest 

nSvS  (neu),  and  (that)  not 


Concessire. 

licet 
quamv 
cum 
ut 


Is    [ 


though,  suppose, 
r     whereas 


Final. 

quo  (=  ut  eo),  t?i  07^der  that 
quominus,  that  not 


460. 

ut,  so  that 


Consecutive. 

ut  non 
quin 


b 


so  that  not 


[253-256.] 


a.v,  lihe  as 


quemadmodum . .  ita 

462. 

-ne  \ 
num  ( 
utrum   n^^^^^iher 

an        J 


a  ) 


Comparative. 

tanquam 
quasi 
ut  si 
ac  si 
proinde  ac  si 


as  if 


Interrogative. 

nonne,  whether  not 
annon  i 
necnS  ' 


^  or  not 


[109,  no.} 


—     155     — 

Interjections. 
463.    An  Interjection  is  not  in  the  proper  sense  a 
part  of  speech,  since  it  is  not  in  granunatical  con- 
struction with  a  sentence,  but  is  thrown  in  as  a  direct 
intimation  of  feeling  or  of  will. 

4:64.    The  Interjections  most  commonly  used  are: 
Of  painful  feeling  or  suffering: 

Tiei,  heii,  dh^  alas!    0,  oh  I    vae,  alas^  woe! 
Of  surprise  or  astonishment: 

6cc6,  6n,  behold!    hem,  oho!    o,  oh! 
Of  calling  attention: 

heus,  ho!    o,  lo!    ohe,  holloa!    prO,  hollo! 

WORD-FORMATION. 

465.  There  are  two  modes  of  forming  words,  viz.: 
Derivation,  or  the  formation  of  words  by  deriva- 
tive endings  (suffixes),  and  Composition,  or  the  com- 
bination of  two  words    expressing  distinct  ideas  so 
as  to  form  one  word  expressing  one  idea. 

466.  With  reference  to  derivation^  words  are  distinguished  as 
primitive  or  stem- words,  and  derivative;  with  reference  to  com- 
position^ as  simple  and  compound.  The  derived  and  compounded 
words  greatly  outnumber  the  so-called  stem-words. 

Derivation. 

467.  All  words  which  may  be  grouped  into  one 

family  so  as  to  associate  their  meaning  are  said  to 

have  a  common  ground-form  or  Root.    Thus: 

aciio,  -ere,  to  whet  acus,  -us,  a  needle 

acutus,  -a,  -um,  sharp  acer,  -ris,  -re,  sharp 

acuaaen,  -Tnis,  acuteness  acerbtis,  -S,  -um,  sharp 

acies,  -ei,  an  edge  acldus,  -&,  -um,  sour 

may  all  be  retraced  to  the  ROOT  AC. 


—    156    — 

468,  The  Stem  must  be  distinguished  from  the  Root.  The 
stem  is  that  part  of  the  word  which  remains  after  taking  away  the 
Inflections,  as:  acii-Sre,  to  whet,  stemacii..  Again,  the  root  is  that 
part  of  the  word  which  remains  after  taking  away  the  Suffix;  thus 
the  verb-stem  S»cii  belongs  to  the  root  AC. 

469,  As  a  rule,  Derivatives  are  formed  by  means  of  Sufiftxes, 
or  significant  endings  which  are  added  to  the  stem-word  to  define 
or  modify  its  meaning. 

Derivation  of  Verbs. 

470,  Primitive  Verbs.  Most  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation, 
the  Irregular  Verbs  and  a  few  vowel-stems,  namely:  dar6,  star6, 
flgre,  nare,  n6re,  rSri,  are  to  be  regarded  as  Primitives. 

Verbs  derived  from  Verbs. 

471,  Frequentatives  end  in  are  or  itare,  and  denote  a  for- 
cible or  repeated  action;  they  are  derived  either  from  Supines  in 
sum  or  turn,  as: 

dico,  /  say  dictQm  dictare,  to  dictate 

habeo,  I  have  habitum         habitare,  to  have  frequently 

curro,  /  run  cursum  cursare,  to  run  about 

or  from  the  Present  of  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d  Conjugations,  as: 
clamo,  /  cry  clamare  clamitare,  to  cry  out  aloud 

lateo,  /  am  hid       latere  latitare,  to  lie  hid 

ago,  /  do  agere  agitare,  to  drive 

472.  Inceptives  (Inchoatives)  denote  the  beginning  of  an 
action.  They  are  formed  from  vowel-stems  (1st,  2d,  and  4th  Conju- 
gations) by  adding  sc,  and  from  consonant-stems  (3d  Conjugation)  by 
adding  isc.  The  great  majority  of  Inchoatives  in  asco  and  esco 
come  from  Substantives  and  Adjectives,  as: 

puerasco,  -ere,  from  pu6r,  to  attain  the  age  of  boyhood 
silvescS,  -erg,  from-silva,  to  grow  wild 
mitesco,  -ere,  from  mitis,  to  become  mild 

473s    Desideratives    denote   desire  or  tendency.    They    are 
formed  by  changing  uriis  of  the  Future  Participle  into  iirio,  and 
are  of  the  4th  Conjugation.   Only  a  few  are  in  common  use: 
esurio,  -irg,  to  be  hungry,  from  edo,  esurus 
m6riturio,  -ire,  to  wish  to  die,  from  morior,  raoriturus. 


—     157     — 

4:74.    Diminutives  denoting  a  feeble  or  jpetty   action  end  in 
illare,  and  are  of  the  First  Conjugation,  as: 
cantillare,  to  chirp  scrlbillare,  to  scribble. 

Verbs  derived  from  Substantives  and  Adjectives. 

475.  Verbs  from  Substantives  and  Adjectives  are  commonly 
called  Denominatives.  They  belong  to  the  First,  Second,  and 
Fourth  Conjugations.  Verbs  from  Substantives  signify  either  to 
supply  with  that  which  the  Substantive  denotes,  or  to  use  or  apply 
it  Verbs  from  Adjectives  usually  signify,  either  as  intransitives, 
to  be  in  or  to  pass  into  the  condition  denoted  by  the  Adjective^ov 
else,  as  transitives,  to  reduce  something  to  that  state;  for  examples 
see  below. 

476.  Active  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjugation  (transitive) : 

signiim  -  signare,  to  mark  vulnus  -  vulnerarS,  to  wound 

curvus  -  curvarS,  to  bend  nudus  -  nCidare,  to  strip 

macula  -  maciilare,  to  spot  saniis  -  sanare,  to  heal 

nOmen  -  nominarg,  to  name  aptus  -  aptar€,  to  fit 

vox  -  vocare,  to  call  liber  -  liberare,  to  free 

477.  Active  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  (intransitive) : 

flos  -  florerS,  to  bloom  albiis  -  albere,  to  be  white 

frons  -  frondere,  to  be  in  leaf       calvus  -  calvere,  to  be  bald 
lux  -  ICicere,  to  shine  flavus  -  flavere,  to  be  yellow 

478.  Active  Verbs  of  the  Fourtb  Conjugation  (either  intransitive 

or  transitive): 

finis  -  finire,  to  finish  mollis  ~  moUire,  to  soften 

poena  -  punire,  to  punish  stabilis  -  stabilire,  to  establish 

vestis  -  vestire,  to  clothe  lenis  -  lenire,  to  assuage 

sitis  -  sitire,  to  be  thirsty  saevtls  -  saevTrS,  to  rage 

tussis  -  tussire,  to  cough  siiperbus-superbire,  to  be  proud 

servus  -  servire,   to  serve  ferox  -•  ferocire,  to  be  furious 

479.  Deponent  Verbs  of  the    First  Conjugation,    signifying  con- 

dition, employment: 

dominus  - dSmmari, to  be  master  auceps  -  auciipari,  to  catch  birds 

famulus  -  famulari,  to  serve  convlva  -  convivarT,  to  banquet 

aemulus  -  aemulari,  to  emulate  comes- com  it  ari,  to  accompany 

fur  -  furari,  to  steal  aqua  -  aquari,  to  fetch  water 


—    158     — 
Derivation  of  Substantives. 

Substantives  derived  from  Substantives. 

480,    Diminutives  generally  end  in: 

ulus,  uia.,  Glum;  culiis,  cGla,  ciiliim, 

and  regularly  take  the  gender-ending  of  their  Primitives: 
nidiis,  a  nest  nldulus,  a  little  nest 

riviis,  a  brook  rivulus,  a  streamlet 

mensa,  a  table  mensula,  a  little  table 

saxum,  a  rock  saxulum,  a  little  rock 

fratSr,  a  brother  fraterciiliis,  a  little  brother 

pass6r,  a  sparrow  passerciilus,  a  little  sparrow 

arbor,  a  tree  arbuscula,  a  small  tree 

mtlniis,  a  gift  munuseulura,  a  little  gift 

481,    After  a  vowel,  oliis,  oia,  olQm  are  used.     Some  nouns 
form  Diminutives  in  ellus,  ella,  elliiinj  rarely  illiis,  illS,  illiim. 

films,  a  son  filTolus,  a  little  son 

gladius,  a  sword  gladiolus,  a  small  sword 

filia,  a  daughter  filiola,  a  little  daughter 

atrium,  a  hall  §.tri61um,  a  small  hall 

libgr,  a  book  libellus,  a  little  book 

tabiila,  a  table  tabella,  a  tablet 

lapis,  a  stone  lapillus,  a  Utile  stone 

signum,  a  mark  sTgillum,  a  seal 

482,  The  Suffix  armm  designates  the  place  where  any  thing 
is  kept,  as: 

columbarium,  dove-cot  from  columba 
herbarium,  herbarium  *^     herba 

granarium,  a  granary  *'     granum 

pomarium,  an  orchard  ^*     pomum 

semmariiira,  a  seed-plot  *^     sSmen 

483,  The  Suffix  etum  used  with  names  of  trees  and  plants, 
designates  the  place  where  they  grow  in  abundance: 

fruticetum,  a  copse  from  frutex 
myrtetum,  a  myrtle  grove  "     myrtus 

quercetum,  a  forest  of  oaks  "     quercus 

vinetum,  a  vineyard  "     viniim 


—     159    — 

484,  The  Suffix  flS  annexed  to  names  of  animals  designates 
their  stall  or  fold: 

bovilS,  stall  for  cattle  from  bos 
gquilS,  a  stable  for  horses  *'     gquus 

5vil6,  a  sheepfold  *'     ovis 

caprllS,  a  stall  for  goats  ^'     capSr 

485,  The  Suffix  ina  indicates  especially  the  state,  condition^ 
or  occupation  of  a  person;  sometimes  also  the  place  where  an 
occupation  is  carried  on: 

mgdiclna,  the  medical  art  from  m^dTcus 

sutrina,  a  shoemaker's  shop  "     sutor 

tonstrlna,  a  barber's  shop  ^'     tonsor 

486,  The  Suffix  iiim  added  to  names  of  persons  forms  Ab- 
stracts signifying  character,  ranl%  &c.,  and  Collectives,  as: 

servitTum,  servitude  from  serviis 

sacerdotium,  priesthood  ''  sacerdOs 

ministSriLim,  ministry  '•  minister 

exsilium,  banishment  ^'  exsul 

487,  Patronymics,  denoting  parentage,  generally  end  in: 
Ides,  ides,  iMes,  ^des  (Masculine);  is,  eis,  ias  (Feminine): 

Priamides,  son  of  Priam  from  Priamus 

AtYid&s,  son  of  Atreus  **  Atreus 

ThestiM^s,  son  of  Thestius  *'  Thestius 

Aen&Mes,  son  of  Aeneas  ''  Aeneas 

Tantalis,  daughter  of  Tantalus  ^*  Tantalus 

^^Y^\%  daughter  of  Nereus  **  NSreus 

Thestias,  daughter  of  Thestius  '^  Thestius 

Substantives  derived  from  Adjectives. 

488,  From  Adjectives  are  formed  various  Abstract  Nouns 
with  the  Suffixes: 

ia,  (i)tia,  ities,  (T)tas,  (i)tud8,  nionia. 

gratia,  favor  from  gratus 
malitia,  badness  ^*     malus 

segnitia,  segnitigs,  sloth  '^     segnis 

cSleritas,  swiftness  **     celer 

libertas,  liberty  **     lib6r 

solitudo,  solitude  **     solus 

acrimOnia,  sharpness  "     ac6r 


160    — 


Substantives  derived  from  Verbs. 

489,    Derivatives  in  6r,  Qm  and  eia  from  verb-stems  signify, 
in  general,  the  act  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb: 

amor,  love  from  amarS 


timor,  fear                                       * 

'     timere 

furor,  rage                                       * 

'     fiirerg 

gaudium,  joy                                    * 

^     gauderg 

odium,  hatred                                   * 

*     6diss6 

querela,  a  complaint                        * 

*     quSri 

cautela,  a  caution                            * 

*     caverg 

tutela,  protection                              ' 

'     tiitarl 

490,  Derivatives  in  tor  and  sor  from  Supines  denote  the 
personal  agent: 

monitor,  a  monitor  from  moneo,  -Itflm 

lector,  a  reader  **  16g6,  lectttm 

audit(5r,  a  hearer  "  audio,  -itflm 

messor,  a  reaper  **  mgto,  messQm 

cursor,  a  runner  "  curro,  cursfim 

491,  A  few  Derivatives  in  t6r   are  formed   in  imitation  of 
these,  from  Substantives,  as: 

viator,  a  traveler^  from  via;  janit5r,  a  doorkeeper^  fromjanua. 

492,  The  corresponding  feminine  ending  is  trix^  but  is  less 
common  than  the  mascuhne: 

adjutor,  adjutrix,  an  assistant      from  adjilvarg 
fautor,  fautrix,  a  promoter  **     fav6r§ 

praeceptor,  praeceptrix,  a  ^eac/ier    *^     praeeipere 
victor,  victrix,  a  conqueror  ^^     vincerS 

493,  The  Suffixes  ti5,  tus  and  sGs  (gen.  us),  tura  and  sura 

form  abstract  nouns  from  Supines  and  denote  the  act  itself: 

actio,  an  action  from  ago  -  actum 


inventio,  an  invention 
motiis,  a  motion 
curs  us,  a  running 
consensus,  consensio,  agreement 
armatCira,  equipment 
conjectQra,  a  conjecture 
pictura,  a  painting 
cons  Lira,  a  judging 


invenio  -  inventtini 
movCo  -  motum 
curro  -  cursum 
consentio  -  consensGm 
armo  -  armatflm 
conjicio  -  conjectuni 
pingo  -  pictiim 
censeo  -  censfim 


~     161     — 

Of  these  only  a  few  become  Concrete  nouns: 
accusatiS,  a  hill  of  indictment       from  accCiso  -  accusatfim 
commentatio,  a  treatise  "     comraentdr,  -  atdiii 

oratio,  a  speech  "     5ro  -  oratttm 

possessiones,  an  estate  **     possidfio  -  possesstim 

venatio,  game  **     venOr  -  vSnattim 

494.  Derivatives  Jn  mSn,  mentum,  filiim,  buliim,  cultlni 

denote  an  instrument  for  performing  the  act  expressed  by  the  verb 
or  a  place  for  its  performance: 

16vam6n,  alleviation 

agmSn,  a  train 

fl(im6n,  a  river 

volQm^n,  a  roll 

alTmentura,  nourishment 

jaculum,  a  javelin 

p^biiliim,  fodder 

vSnabuliim,  a  hunting  spear 

stabulum,  a  stable 

cublculiim,  a  bedroom 

495.  Derivatives  in  crfim  and  trt&m  denote   instrument  or 

locality: 
fulcrum,  a  prop 
sgpulcrum,  a  grave 
aratriim,  a  plow 
claustriim,  a  bar 
rostrum,  a  beak 
lavacrum,  a  bath 

Derivation  of  Adjectives. 

Adjectives  derived  from  Verbs. 

496.  The  Suffixes  bundiis  and  eundiis  have  the  general 
meaning  of  the  Present  Participle;  in  many  the  meaning  is  some- 
what strengthened. 

mirabundus,  wondering  from  mirarl 


from  16var6 

u 

ag6r6 

u 

flii6r6 

u 

volver6 

a 

al6r6 

u 

jacularl 

u' 

pascere 

u 

v6narl 

u 

stare 

u 

ciibarg 

d  tri&m  denol 

from  fulclre 

u 

86p61Ir5 

u 

ararg 

u 

claudCrg 

u 

rod6r6 

i(. 

lavarS 

vgrecundus,  bashful 

"     v6reri 

v6n6rabundu8,  revering 

"     v6n6rarl 

furibundus,  raging 

**     fur^rS 

jncundus,  pleasing 

"     juvar6 

vagabundiis,  vagrant 

*^     vagarl 

—     162     — 

497.  The  Suffix  tdiis  denotes  the  quality  or  state  expressed 
by  the  verb: 

turbidus,  troubled  from  turbarg      validus,  strong         from  valerC 
calidiis,  warm         **     calerg        rapidus,  rapid  "      rapSrS 

498.  The  Suffixes  Ills  and  bills  denote  capability^  generally 
in  a  passive  sense: 

docilis,  docile       from  docerg       amabilis,  amiable     from  amarA 
facilis,  easy  to  do     ''      fac6r§        mobilis,  moveable        '^     mov^rg 

499.  The  Suffixes  ax  and  tiliis  denote  inclination,  generally 
a  faulty  one: 

audax,  daring       from  auderg       crediilus,  credulous  from  cred6r6 
fallax,  fallacious     *'     fall6re        garriilus,  chattering   '*      garrM 

Adjectives  derived  from  Substantives. 

From  Common  Nouns. 

500.  The  Suffix  eiis  expresses  the  material  of  which^ny  thing 
is  made: 

aureus,  golden       from  aurum        ferrSus,  iron  from  ferriim 

argenteiis,  silver     "     argentum  lign6us,  wooden  *'     lignum 

501.  The  Suffixes:    itls,  icus,  Iciiis,  Ms,  alls,  aris,   nus, 
Iviis,   ensis,   arliis  denote  belonging  to: 

oratorius,  of  an  orator  from  orator 

bellicus,  warlike  *'  bellum 

latgricius,  of  brick  "  later 

virTlis,  manly  *'  vir 

navalis,  naval  *^  navis 

mllitaris,  military  *'  miles 

paternus,  paternal  ^^  pater 

aestlviis,  belonging  to  summer  *'  aestas 

forensis,  belonging  to  the  forum  *^  forum 

gregarius,  belonging  to  a  flock  ^*  grex 

502.  The  Suffixes  ostis  and  entQs  denote  fulness: 
pSriculosiis,  full  of  danger  from  pgrTcalfim 
fructuosus,  abounding  in  fruit       **     fructiis 
turbulentus,  full  of  trouble  ''     turba 
somnulentus,  sleepy  ^*     somniis 

503.  The  Suffixes  atQs,  itiis,  utus  denote  provided  with: 
ftlatus,  winged  from  ala        barbatus,  bearded      from  barba 
pellltus,  clad  in  skins    "     pellis     cornQtus,  horned         **     cornii 


—     163     — 

504.  The  Suffixes  anils  and  iiiQs  denote  belonging  to  or 
coming  from: 

urbanus,  belonging  to  the  city  from  urbs 

montanus,  belonging  to  the  mountain     *'     mons 
k^mlrm^^  produced  by  the  ass  ^^     asinus 

equinus,  belonging  to  horses  **     equus 

From  Proper  Names: 

505.  Adjectives  with  the  Suffixes  ianus,  and  more  rarely 
anus  and  iniis  are  formed  from  names  of  persons: 

Caesarianiis,  belonging  to  Caesar        from  Caesar 
Siillani,  Sulla's  veterans  *'     Sulla 

Verrlnus,  belonging  to  Verres  "     Verres 

506.  The  Suffixes  eds  and  iciis  are  used  with  Greek  names: 
Pythagorgiis,  Pythagorean  from  Pythagoras 
Socraticus,  Socratic  ^*     Socrates 

507o  Patrial  or  Gentile  Adjectives  (derived  from  the  names 
of  places  or   peoples)    generally  end  in   anus,  inus,  ensis,  as 

(Gren.  atis),  and  are  also  used  substantively: 
Romanus,  a  Roman  from  Roma 

Amerlnus,  ofAmeria  *'     AmSria 

Cannensis,  of  Cannae  **     Cannae 

Arplnas  (-atis),  of  Arpinum  *'     Arplniim 

508.  Greek  names  of  places  form  Patrials  in  itis  and  aetis;  as: 

Corinthius,  of  Corinth^  from  Corinthiis;  Smyrnaeus,  of  Smyrna^ 
from  Smyrna. 

509.  From  many  names  of  peoples^  Adjectives  are  formed  in 
Iciis  and  sometimes  ius: 

Galllciis,  Gallic      from  Gallus     Thracius,  Thracian  from  Thrax 
Persicus,  Persian     '^      Persa       Syrius,  Syrian  *'      Syria 

Adjectives  derived  from  Adjectives. 

510.  From  Adjectives  are  formed  Diminutives  in  ulus,  oliis, 
ellus  and  cuius  in  the  same  manner  as  from  nouns,  cuius  is 
sometimes  added  to  Comparatives: 

parvidus,  very  small  from  parviis 
aureSlus,  gilded  *'     aureus 

pulchellus,  beautiful  little  "     pulcher 

pauperciilus,  poorly  "     pauper 
majusculus,  somewhat  larger  *'     maj6r 


164    — 


Adjectives  derived  from  Adverbs. 
511,    A  few  Adjectives  are  formed  from  Adverbs: 
crastinus,  of  to-morrow  from  eras 


diutinus,  lasting                                    ' 

'     diu 

pristinus,  former                                 ' 

^     prius 

matutlnus,  belonging  to  the  morning    ' 

'     mane 

rgpentinus,  sudden                                * 

^     repents 

hesternus,  of  yesterday                        ' 

'     heri 

hodiernus,  of  to-day                              ' 

'    hodie 

diarniis,  daily                                       ' 

'     dill 

noeturnus,  belonging  to  night             * 

*     noctQ 

Composition. 

512.  Every  Compound  may  be  regarded  as  con- 
sisting of  two  parts.  The  second  part  of  the  com- 
position expresses  the  principal  idea  (Principal  term) 
and  the  first  a  Modification  thereof.  The  principal 
term  may  be  a  Verb,  an  Adjective,  or  a  Substantive. 

Compound  Verbs. 

513,  The  second  part  of  a  compound  verb  is  always  a  Verb; 
also  the  first  part  may  be  a  Verb^  but  this  only  takes  place  when 
the  second  part  is  facio  or  fio: 


assugfacere,  to  accustom 
calefacere,  to  warm 
commonefacere,  to  remind 
patefacere,  to  open 


from  assuescere  &  facere 

*'     calere          ''  '' 

^*     commonere**  ^' 

''     paterg          ''  '' 


514,  The  first  part  of  a  compound  verb  may  be  a  Noun,  as; 
animadvertere,  to  notice  from  animus  &  vert  ere 
manumittere,  to  set  free  "     manus   '^  mittere 
nsucapere,  to  acquire  by  use          ^'     usiis       '*  cap6r6 

515,  The  first  part  of  a  compound  verb  may  be  an  Adverb: 
benefacerg,  to  do  good  from  b6n6  &  fS,cSrS 
maledlcere,  to  curse  ''     mal8  *'  dicere 
bgnedicere,  to  bless                           **     b6n6  '^      ** 
satisfacere,  to  satisfy                        ''     satis  *^  facerg 
sataggrg,  to  have  one's  hands  full     **     satis  ^'  agerS 


165 


516,    The  majority  of  Compound  Verba  are  made  with  separ- 
able or  inseparable  Prepositions  having  the  value  of  an  adverb,  as: 

avolare,  to  fly  away 
adjicere,  to  throw  to 
antepOnere,  to  set  before 
circumdare,  to  surround 
colligere,  to  bring  together 
decederg,  to  go  down 
exponere,  to  set  out 
iiiTrg,  to  go  into 
interesse,  to  be  between 
obstare,  to  stand  opposed 
perleger^,  to  read  through 
postponSrg,  to  put  below 
praevid6re,  to  foresee 
praeterirg,  to  pass  by 
propon6r6,  to  place  before 
sQblre,  to  come  under 
subterfugerS,  to  flee  secretly 
amblre,  to  go  around 
discedere,  to  depart 
reficere,  to  make  again 
secernerg,  to  separate 


a,  ab 

away 

ad 

tOj  towards 

ants 

before 

cireum 

around 

com,  c6n 

together 

de 

down 

6,  ex 

out 

in 

in,  into 

inter 

between 

6b 

toward,  against 

p6r 

through 

post 

after,  inferior 

prae 

before 

praeter 

past,  beyond 

pro 

before 

Biib 

under 

subter 

underneath,  secretly 

amb 

around 

dis 

asunder,  apart 

r6 

back,  again 

83 

apart 

517,  In  composition  with  Prepositions,  the  vowels  a  and  S  of 
the  simple  verb  are  changed  into  i,  and  the  diphthong  ae  into  i;  au 
generally  becomes  o  or  uj  before  two  consonants  a  becomes  e,  but 
e  is  retained: 


facere,  to  make 

conficere,  to  accomplish 

Smere,  to  buy 

rSdimgre,  to  redeem 

quaerere,  to  seek 

conquirere,  to  search  out 

plauder^,  to  clap 

explodere,  to  hiss  off 

claudere,  to  shut 

concludSre,  to  close  up 

f^cgrg,  to  make 

confectiis,  accomplished 

pellere,  to  drive 

compellerg,  to  force 

For  Irregularities  compare  the  Indeoo  of  Verbs  (pag.  277)  with 
reference  from  each  to  the  paragraph  where  its  conjugation  is  described. 

518,  Prepositions  in  Composition  often  undergo  a  change  of 
their  final  consonant  which  is  called  Assimilation.  The  Rules  of 
this  assimilation  may  be  seen  in  the  following: 


—     166    — 

519.  a,  ab,  abs. 

a  before  m  and  v,  and  in  afui:  amitter^,  avellerg,  afiii,  afiigram; 
ab  before  vowels  and  j,  b,  b,  d,  1,  n,  r,  s: 

abire,  abundarg,  abbreviare,  abnuSre,  abborrere,  abjurarg; 
as  before  p:  asportare,  aspernarl; 
au  before  f:  aufugere,  auferre; 
abs  before  c,  t:  abscedere,  abstinerg,  abstraher6. 

520.  ad. 

ad  before  vowels,  j,  h,  b,  d,  f,  m,  n,  q,  v: 

adamarg,  adferre,  adqulrere,  advolare,  adjuvare,  adnuntiarg; 
ac  before  c  (not  so  good  before  q):  accire,  adquirere  (acquirer^); 
ag  &  ad  before  g:   aggerere  &  adger6r6,  aggredl  &  adgrSdi; 
a  &  ad  before  gn,  sp,  sc,  st: 

agnoscere,  adgnoscere;  aspicerg,  adspic6re;  asplrar^; 
ad  &  al  before  1:  adlevare,  allevare;  adloqui,  alloqui; 
ap  before  p:  appargre,  appellare,  appon6r6,  applicare; 
ad  &  ar  before  r:  adripere  &  arripere;  adrldere  &  arridere; 
ad  &  as  before  s:  adsignare  &  assignare;  adserere  &  asserer6; 
at  before  t:  attendere,  attribiier^,  attinggre,  attrahere. 

521.  ante  becomes  anti  in:  antistare,  anticipare. 

522.  circiim  may  drop  its  final  m  before  60,  ire: 
circumeo,  circueo,  commonly  circiiitus,  circtiitio. 

523.  com  (=  ciim). 

com  before  b,  p,  m:  combiberg,  comparare,  committSre; 
con  before  c,  d,  f,  g,  j,  n,  q,  s,  t,  v: 

concludere,  condere,  congredi,  conjungerg,  continerg; 
con  &  col  before  1:  conlabi  &  coUabT;  conlocare  &  collocarS; 
cor  before  r:  corrigere,  corripgre,  eorrOdere,  corrumperS; 
CO  before  vowels  and  h  (except  comedo): 

coire,  cohaerere,  cogere  (=  c5agere),  c56m6r6; 
CO  before  gn,  and  in  a  few  words  before  n: 

cognoscO,  conecto,  coniveo,  conltor,  oonubium. 

524.  e,  ex. 

ex  before  vowels  and  h,  c,  p,  q,  s,  t: 

exTre,  exciperS,  exhtbSre,  exsist6r6;  Exception  epOt^rS; 
e  before  b,  d,  g,  j,  1,  m,  n,  r,  v: 

eligSrg,  ejicere,  evaderS,  erumperg,  ebib^rg,  edlc§r§; 
ef  before  f:  elTerrg,  efficerg,  effiiggr^,  ef!6d6r6; 


—     167     — 

525.  5n. 

in  before  vowels  and  h,  c,  d,  f,  g  (but  not  before  gn),  j,  n,  q,  s,  t,  V: 

mire,  inhlbSre,  ingerere,  inquirere,  inficSre,  invehere; 
in,  sometimes  il  before  1;  in  &  ir  before  r: 

inlidere  &  illiderg;  inrumpere  &  irrump6r6,  irru6r6; 
ini  before  m,  b,  p:  immittgre,  imbuere,  imponere,  impSrarg; 
i  before  gn:  ignorare,  ignoscerS. 

526.  6b. 

ob  before  vowels,  j,  h,  b,  d,  1,  m,  n,  r,  s,  t,  v: 

oboedire,  objicere,  oblivisci,  obreperg,  obstare,  obting6r6; 
oc  before  c;  of  before  f;  og  before  g;  op  before  p: 

occurrere,  offerrg,  oggerere,  opponerg,  opprimgre; 
b  is  dropped  in  omittere,  6p«^rir6,  ostend^rg  (=  obs-tendere). 

527.  pgp. 

per  unchanged,  except  before  1,  as: 

pellegerg  =  perlegere;  pellic6r6  =  perlic6r6. 
In  derivatives  of  jiirarS,  the  r  is  dropped,  as:  pej6rar6  =  perjurar^. 

528.  sttb. 

sub  before  vowels,  h,  j,  b,  d,  1,  n,  s,  t,  v: 

siibiggre,  subjungere,  subtraherg,  subvert6r6,  subhastare; 
sue  before  c;  suf  before  f;  sug-  before  g: 

succedSre,  succumbere,  sufFocare,  sufficere,  sugg6r6r6; 
sum  &  sub  before  m;  sup  before  p;  sur  &  sub  before  r: 

summittere  &  submitter^;  supponere;  surripgre  &  subrTperS; 
sus  (=  subs)  occurs  in: 

susciperg,  suscitare,  suspenderg,  sustmere,  sustentare, sust uli; 
su  before  sp:  suspicere,  suspIrarS,  suspectare. 

529.  trans. 

trans  before  vowels  and  b,  c,  f,  g,  p,  r,  t,  v: 

transaggre,  transfugere,  tr  anspongre,  tr  ansgredl,  transvShgrg ; 
tran  before  s,  and  always  before  sc: 

transilire,  transcribere,  transcendSre,  trans6r6re,transu6re; 
trans  and  often  tra  before  j,  d,  1,  m,  n: 

tradere,  trajicere,  transmitter^  &  tramitter^,  tradtlc§r6; 


—     168     — 

Compound  Substantives. 

530.  Compound  Substantives  are  made  up: 

1.  Of  a  substantive  and  a  following  verbal  stem;  the  vowel 
connecting  the  two  parts  is  i,  as: 

agricola,  a  farmer  from  ager    &  colere 
armiger,  an  armor-bearer  *'     arma  '^  gererS 

artifex,  an  artist  *^     ars      **  facerg 

parricida,  a  parricide  '^     pater  "  caedere 

2.  Of  two  substantives  or  a  substantive  and  an  adjective: 
solstitium,  solstice  from  sol        &  statio 
ruplcapra,  a  miZcZ  ^oa^  '*     rupSs    ''  capra 
legislator,  a  law-giver  '^     lex        *'  lator 
jusjurandum,  an  oa^/i  *'     jus        ''  jurandum 
aequinoctium,  equinox                     '^     aequus  ''  nox 

3.  Of  a  substantive  and  a  preceding  particle j  as: 
incuria,  want  of  care  from  in        &  ciira 
pro  verb!  urn,  a  j^'i^overb  ^^     pro      ^'  verbiim 
superficies,  a  surface  "     super  **  facigs 
n6mo,  no  one  **     n5       *^  homo 

Compound  Adjectives. 

531.  Compound  Adjectives  are  made  up: 

1.  Of  iivo  nouns  (including  under  this  term  adjective  and  sub- 
stantive), as: 

ignicolor,  fire-colored  from  ignis      &  color 

misericors,  tender-hearted  **     miser      '^  cor 

magnanimus,  great-hearted  **     magnus  ^'  animus 

alipes,  wing-footed  **     ala  **  pes 

2.  Of  a  preposition  with  a  substantive.    In  this  combination 
the  prepositions  a,  de,  ex,  in,  se  have  negative  power: 

concors,  harmonious  from  con  &  cor 

amens   )  gey^seless  **     a      ^^  mens 

demons)  **     d6    ^^  mens 

iners,  unskilled  ^^     in     ^^  ars 

sScurus,  free  from  care  **     sS     ^'  cura 

3.  Of  a  preposition  with  an  adjective.    The  prepositions  used 
in  this  way  are:  per,  prae,  very;  siib,  someivhat;  in,  not: 

perdifficilis,  very  difficult  from  per    &  difficilis 
praepotens,  very  powerful  *'     prae  ^^  potens 

subrusticus,  someivhat  clownish       ^'     sub    ^*  rusticiis 
indignus,  unworthy  "     in       '*  dignus 


169     — 


Part  Third. 

SYNTAX. 

The   Sentence. 

532.  Syntax  treats  of  the  Agreement,  Government, 
and  Disposition  of  words  in  sentences.  Sentences  are 
of  three  kinds: 

Assertions,  or  Statements,  as:  consuetudo  est  altera  na- 
tura;  custom  is  second  nature. 

Questions,  as:  quid  est  levius  pluma?^  what  is  lighter 
than  a  feather? 

Commands  (demands,  wishes),  as:  divide  et  irapera;  di- 
vide and  rule. 

533,  The  Assertive  Sentence,  as  it  is  called,  is  the  main 
type  of  all  sentences,  and  the  other  two  will  be  treated  as  varia- 
tions of  it. 

Subject  and  Predicate. 

-     534.    Every  simple  sentence  is  composed  of  two 

parts:  Subject  and  Predicate. 

The  Subject  signifies  that  about  which  the  assertion  is  made;  the 
Predicate  signifies  that  which  is  asserted  of  the  Subject.  In  the 
sentence: 

aurum  splendet         gold  glitters 
aurum  is  the  subject;  splendet  the  predicate. 

535.  The  Subject  of  the  sentence  is  in  the  Nominative 
Case,  or  so  considered. 


—     170    -^ 

The  Subject  must  be  either  a  Noun,  or  some  word  or  phrase  stand- 
ing for  a  noun,  but  it  may  be  contained  in  the  termination  of  the 
verb  itself: 
arbor  floret  tlie  tree  is  blossoming 

hie  laetatur,  ille  maeret  this  one  rejoices^  that  one  is  sad 

errare  humanum  est  to  err  is  human 

veni,  vidi,  vici  /  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered. 

530,  The  Predicate  must  be  either  a  Verb  (Verbal 
Predicate),  or  an  Adjective  or  what  stands  for  an  ad- 
jective with  the  verb  esse  (A(^'ective  Predicate),  or  a 
Substantive  with  the  verb  esse  (Substantive  Predicate). 

The  Verbal  Predicate  agrees  in  Person  and  Number  with  its  subject. 

The  Adjective  Predicate  (Adjective,  Adjective  Pronoun,  Participle) 
agrees  in  Gender,  Number,  and  Case  with  its  subject. 

The  Substantive  Predicate  agrees  in  Case  with  its  subject. 
ego  val6o,  si  vos  valStis  lam  well  if  you  ai^e  well 

arbor  est  procgra  the  tree  is  tall 

usus  est  tyrannus  custom  is  a  tyrant. 

537,  When  the  predicate  is  a  substantive  with  different  termi- 
nations for  the  gender,  such  as: 

patron  us  patrona  a  protector 

dominus  domina  a  master ,  mistress 

victor  victrix  a  conqueror 

magister  magistra  a  teacher 

rex  regina  a  Jcing,  queen 

it  agrees  with  its  subject  also  in  number  and  gender, 
usus  est  optimus  magister  experience  is  the  best  teacher 

vita  rustica  parsimoniae  magi-    a  country  life  is  the  teacher  of 
Btra  est  frugality. 

538,  When  referring  to  a  subject  of  the  neuter  gender,  a  pre- 
dicate substantive  with  different  terminations  for  the  gender  is 
always  in  the  masculine  gender. 

tempus  est  vitae  magister  time  is  the  teacher  of  life. 

539,  When  the  predicate  substantive  is  of  the  common  gender, 
the  adjective  qualifying  it  takes  the  gender  of  the  subject 

bona  conscientia  est  tutissima    a  good  conscience  is  the  safest 
comes  hominum  companion  of  men. 


^   in   — 

540.  Like  esse,  to  be,  several  other  verbs  take  two 

Nominatives,  one  of  the  Subject  and  the  other  of  the 

Predicate.     These  are: 

fieri,  to  become,  be  made  creari,  to  be  created 

evadere,  to  turn  out  coronari,  to  be  crowned 

exsistere,  to  become  dici,  to  be  said,  called 

manere,  to  remain  vocari      \  .    .       77-1 

.,_  _  '  11-  -  >  to  6e  called 

videri,  to  seem  appellari ) 

apparere  to  appear  putari  I  ^^  j,^  ^^^^  ^    considered 

nasci,  to  be  born  naberi ) 

mori,  to  die  cr6di,  to  be  believed 

JLidicari,  to  be  considered  existimari,  to  be  regarded 

rosa  pulcherrimus  flos  habstur       the  rose  is  considered  the  most 

beautiful  flower. 

541.  The  Predicate  of  two  or  more  Subjects  is  put 
in  the  Plural  Number. 

Romiilus  et  Remus  urbem  Ro-    Romulus  and  Remus  founded 
mam  condidSrunt  the  city  of  Rome. 

542.  Two  or  more  singular  nouns  taken  conjointly  as  a  single 
idea  may  have  a  singular  verb.  Sometimes  the  verb  agrees  with  the 
nearest  nominative,  and  is  understood  to  the  rest. 

ratio  et  oratio  societatis  huma-    reason  and  speech  are  the  bond 

nae  vinciilum  est  of  human  society 

naves  et  praesidium  excessit         the  fleet  and  garrison  departed- 

543.  A  collective  noun  may  take  a  plural  verb,  as:  pars  urbes 
petierunt  finitimas,  a  part  made  for  the  neigboring  towns. 

544.  In  regard  to  the  Gender  of  an  Adjective  Pre- 
dicate referring  to  two  or  more  Subjects  mark  the 
following: 

AVhen  the  subjects  are  of  the  same  gender,  the  adjective  predi- 
cate is  of  that  gender;  as: 
mater  et  soror  mortuae  sunt         mother  and  sister  are  dead. 
When  the  genders  are  different,  the  adjective  predicate  takes 
the  masculine  gender  if  the  subjects  are  things  with  life,  and  the 
neuter  if  they  are  things  without  life;  as: 
pater  et  mater  mortiii  sunt  father  and  mother  are  dead 

divitiae  et  honOres  incerta  sunt    riches  and  honors  are  uncertain. 


—    1T2    — 

When  things  with  life  and  things  without  life  are  combined,  the 
predicate  adjective  takes  either  the  gender  of  the  things  with  life, 
or  is  neuter,  as: 
rex   regiaque    classis   prefect!    the  king  and  the   hinges  fleet 

sunt  set  out 

natura  inimica  sunt  libera  civitas    a  free  state  and  a  king   are 
et  rex  natural  enemies. 

545.  When  the  Subjects  are  of  Different  Persons, 
the  verb  will  be  in  the  first  person  rather  than  the 
second,  and  in  the  second  rather  than  the  third. 

In  Latin  the  speaker  generally  mentions  himself  first, 
ego  et  tu  vicissitudinem  forttinae    you  and  I  have  experienced  the 
expert!  sumus  vicissitude  of  fortune. 

[201.  202.] 

Attribute  and  Apposition. 

546.  The  most  usual  Attribute  of  a  Substantive  is 
an  Adjective  (including  under  this  term  the  Adjective 
Pronouns  and  Participles);  it  agrees  with  its  Sub- 
stantive in  Number,  Gender,  and  Case. 

Gender.  Number. 

a  white  flower  ilos  albiis  flores  albi 

a  dark  cloud  nub6s  opacft  nubes  opacae 

a  golden  vessel  vas  auretim  vasS.  aureSL 

Case. 
Gen.  floris  albi  of  a  white  flower 

^*     nCibis  opacae  of  a  dark  cloud 

**    vasXs  aurgi  of  a  golden  vessel 

547.  The  Common  Attribute  of  two  or  more  Substantives  of 
different  gender  is  either  repeated  or  agrees  with  the  nearest. 

agri  omnes  et  maria  1 

omnes  agri  omniaque  maria  (     ^„  ^^^^^,  ^^^      „^  ^^^ 

agri  et  maria  omnia  I 

omnes  (et)  agri  et  maria  I 

548.  One  Substantive  placed  after  another  to  ex- 
plain it,  is  by  Apposition  put  in  the  same  Case,  and, 
when  practicable,  in  the  same  Gender  and  Number. 


—     1T3     — 

Socrates,  sapientissimus  vir  Socrates^  the  wisest  of  men 

philosophia,  vitae  magistra  philosojphy^  the  teacher  of  life 

Athenae,  omnium  doctrinarum  Athens^    the    inventor    of  all 
inventrlcea  learning. 

54:9.  Nouns  in  Apposition  are  sometimes  used  to  express  the 
iime^  condition^  etc.  of  the  action. 

Hercules  juvenis  leonem  inter-    Hercules^  when  a  young  man, 
fecit  slew  a  lion. 

550,  In  like  manner  the  Latin  Adjective  is  used  appositively  where 
the  English  idiom  employs  an  adverb.  Adjectives  thus  used  are 
those  expressive  of  joy^  knowledge  and  their  opposites,  of  order  and 
position^  oitirae  and  season^  etc.,  as: 

libens,  with  pleasure  solus,  alone  ultimus,  last 

v61en8,  willing (ly)  totus,  wholly  medius,  in  the  middle 

nolens,  unwilling  (ly)  primus  )  ^    .  frequens,  frequent  (ly) 

invltiis,  against  one's  will  prior    )  *  sciens,  knowing  (ly) 

nemo  saltat  sobrTus,  no  one  dances  when  sober; 

Socrates  primus  hoc  docuit,  Socrates  was  the  first  who  taught  this. 

[203.  204,] 

Agreement  of  Pronouns. 

551.  A  Relative  or  Demonstrative  Pronoun  agrees 
with  its  antecedent  in  Gender,  Numbw  and  Person, 
but  the  Case  depends  on  the  clause  in  which  it  stands. 

animal,  quod  sanguTnem  habet,     an  animal  which  has  blood  can- 

sine  corde  esse  non  potest  not  be  without  a  heart. 

When  the  Relative  refers  to  a  sentence,  id.  qu5d  is  commonly  used. 

gloria  invidiam  vicisti,  id  quod    you  have  overcome  envy  with 
est  difficillimum  glory ^  which  is  most  difficult. 

With   antecedents   of  different  gender  the  pronoun  conforms  in 
gender  to  the  rule  for  adjectives.    (See  544.) 
pu6H    et  mulieres,  qui    capti    the    boys    and  women  who  had 
erant. . .  been  taken  prisoners. . . 

With  antecedents  of  different  persons,  the  pronoun  prefers  the  first 
person  to  the  seconji,  and  the  second  to  the  third.     (See  545.) 
ego  et  tu,  qui  eodem  anno  nati    you  and  I  who  were  born  in 
sumus ...  the  same  year . . , 


552.  Sometimes  a  Relative  or  Demonstrative  Pronoun 

agrees  with  a  word  in  apposition  or  with  a  predicate 

rather  than  with  its  antecedent: 

ama  justam    gloriam,  qui    est    love  real  glory  which    is   the 

fructus  verae  virtutis  fruit  of  true  virtue 

rerum  caput  hoc  erat,  hie  fous       this  was  the  head  of  things^  this 

the  source. 


553.    is,  he,  and  idem,  the  same^  are  the  Antecedents  of  Re- 
latives: 

[^^^^^  _  .  ( the  same  who 

'■  same  as 


r.      .{^''f''  .^  .{the. 

(is)  qui  <  such  as  laem  qui  -<  ^j^^ 

( such  that  ( 


but  is,  when  Antecedent,  is  often  suppressed,  especially  when  it 
would  stand  in  the  same  case  as  the  Relative: 
quern    dii    diligunt    adulescens    (he)  whom  the  gods  love  dies 
moritur  ,  young. 

554.  An  Adjective  or  Apposition  belonging  in  sense  to  the  Ante- 
cedent, sometimes  appears  in  the  relative  clause  in  agreement  with 
the  relative. 

Themistocles    de     servis     suis  Themistocles     sent     the    most 

quern  habuit  fidelissimum  ad  faithful  of  the  slaves  which 

Xerxem  misit  he  had  to  Xerxes 

omnes  gentes  regibus  paruerunt,  all  nations  obeyed  kings^  a  kind 

quod  genus  imperii. . .  of  government  which. . . 

555.  qui  dicltur,  qui  vocatur,  or  quern  dicunt,  quern  vocant  are 
used  in  the  sense  of  so-called. 

vestra,  quae  dicitur  vita,  mors  est,  your  so-called  life  is  death, 

556,  The  Relative  often  stands  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence 
where  in  English  a  demonstrative  is  generally  used. 

quae  cum  ita  sint  aiid  since  these  things  are  so. 

557,  The  Relative  is  never  omitted  in  Latin,  as  it  often  is  in 
English. 

is  sum,  qui  semper  fui  lam  the  same  man  I  always  was. 


-     175    — 
The  Order  of  Words. 

558.  The  Latin  language  allows  greater  freedom 

in  the  order  of  words  than  the  English.  The  following 

practical  rules  will  be  found  of  value: 

In  general,  put  the  Subject  first,  and  the  Verb  last. 
The  Subject  is  followed  by  the  words  which  modify  it. 
The  Verb  is  preceded  by  the  words  which  depend  upon  it. 

Subject.  Dionysius, 

Adjuncts  of  the  Subject,      tyrannus,  Syracusis  expulsus 

Adjuncts  of  the  Predicate.  Corinthi  pueros 

Predicate.  docebat. 

Dionysius,  the  tyranty  after  he  had  been  driven  from  Syracusej 
taught  boys  at  Corinth. 

559.  An  Adjective  or  dependent  genitive  follows  the  word  to 
which  it  belongs; 

iiomen  bonum  instar  unguenti    a  good  name  is  like  sweeUsmel- 

fragrantis  ling  ointment 

metus  mortis  musica  depellitur    fear  of  death  is  dispelled  by 

music. 

560.  When  a  Substantive  is  modified  by  an  adjective  and  a 
genitive,  the  usual  order  is:  Adjective  —  Genitive  —  Substantive. 

magna  frumenti  vis  plenty  of  corn, 

561.  A  Numeral  adjective  or  one  Essential  to  the  meaning  of 
the  phrase,  goes  before  its  noun: 

omnes  homines  decet  it  becomes  all  men 

malum  vas  non  frangitur  a  useless  pitcher  does  not  get 

broken. 

562.  A  Demonstrative  pronoun  precedes  the  noun;  Relatives 
or  Interrogatives  stand  first  in  their  sentence  or  clause;  Adverbs 
are  commonly  put  next  to  the  word  they  qualify. 

haec  te  victoria  perdet  this  victory  will  ruiyi  you 

qui  sitiunt,  silentio  bibunt  they  who  are  thirsty  drink  in 

silence 
quis  custodiet  ipsos  custodes?        who  is  to  look  after  the  keepers? 
male  parta  male  dilabuntur  evil  gotten,  evil  spent 


—     116     — 

563.  Prepositions  regularly  precede  their  nouns  except  tgnus 
and  versiis;  but  monosyllabic  prepositions  are  often  placed  between 
the  adjective  and  substantive;  as:  magna  cum  cura,  with  great  care. 

564:.  Conjunctions  generally  stand  at  the  beginning  of  their 
sentence  or  clause. 

The  Conjunctions  autem,  hut;  enim,  for;  v6ro,  hut;  igitur,  then^ 
follow  one  or  more  words  in  their  clause,  quidem,  indeed;  quoque, 
also^  come  after  the  emphatic  word,  ne . .  quidem  include  the  em- 
phatic word  or  words. 

565.    Words  of  kindred  or  opposite  meaning  are  generally 
placed  near  each  other  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  contrast: 
manus  manum  lavat  one  hand  washes  the  other. 

[202.] 

Construction  of  Cases. 

GENITIVE  CASE. 
With  Substantives. 
566.    The  Genitive  is  especially  the  Case  of  a  Sub- 
stantive that  is  added  to  another  Substantive  in  order 
to  limit  or  define  the  meaning. 

1.  If  the  qualified  noun  signifies  some  action  or  condition  of 
which,  if  it  were  expressed  by  a  verb,  the  noun  in  the  Genitive  would 
be  the  Subject,  the  case  is  called  the  Subjective  (jenitive,  as: 

amor  Dei,  the  love  of  God  (—  God  loves). 

2.  If  the  Grenitive  would  be  the  Object  of  the  action  expressed  by 
the  other  noun  in  verb-form,  we  call  it  an  Objective  Genitive,  as: 

amor  Dei,  love  of  (toward)  God  (=  we  love  God). 

3.  The  Genitive  of  the  Personal  Pronouns  is  commonly  Objective; 
exceptions  are  nostrum  and  vestrum  which  are  used  as  partitive 
Genitives  (see  below  6).    Mark  the  following  examples: 

studium  nostri  sympathy  for  us 

multi  nostrum  many  of  us 

meiior  pars  nostri  the  better  part  of  us 

major  pars  nostrum  the  greater  part  of  us. 

4.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  is  generally  used  as  the  Subjective  Geni- 
tive, as:  amicus  mens,  a  friend  of  mine.  Additional  Attributes  are 
put  in  the  Genitive:  tua  ipsius  soror,  your  own  sister. 


—   Ill  — 

5.  The  Grenitive  is  used  to  denote  Quality,  but  only  when  the 
quality  is  modified  by  an  Adjective;  it  is  joined  to  a  Substantive 
either  attributively  or  jpredicatively^  as: 

vir  maxlmi  consilii  a  man  of  very  great  prudence 

TerentTus  magni  ingenii  est  Terence  is  a  man  of  great  talent. 

The  Genitive  of  Quality,  though  less  common  than  the  Ablative,  is 
always  usod  when  Number,  Measure,  Time  or  Space  are  denoted.  Paits 
of  the  body  are  in  the  Ablative  only  (see  616). 

exsilium  decem  annorum  an  exile  often  years 

Caesar  fuit  excelsa  statura  Caesar  was  of  tall  stature. 

6.  The  Partitive  Genitive  expressing  the  relation  of  a  Whole  to 
its  Parts  is  used: 

With  Substantives  of  Quantity ^  Number^  Weighty  as: 
medimnum  tritici  a  bushel  of  wheat; 

With  Pronouns^  Numerals^  Comparatives  and  Superlatives,  as: 
quis  vestrum?  wliichofyou?  regum  ultimus,  the  last  of  the 
prior  horum,  the  former  of  these        kings 

Witfi  Neuter  Adjectives  and  Pronouns  used  as  Nouns,  but  only 
in  the  Nominative  or  Accusative.     Such  are: 

tantum,  so  much  qaantiim,  as  much  aliquantum,  somewhat 

multilm,  much  plus,  more  plurimiim,  most 

pauliim,  little  minus,  less  minimum,  least 

hoc,  this  id,  illiid,  istud,  that  nihil,  nothing 

quod,  which  quid,  what  Idem,  the  same 

nihil  novi,  nothing  new  idem  consilii,  the  same  (of)  advice 

quid  novi?  ivhat  news?  quid  causae?  what  reason? 

The  Genitive  after  these   Adjectives  and   Pronouns  may  be  a 
neuter  adjective  of  the  Second  Declension,  but  not  of  the  Third: 
aliquid  boni,  something  good         nihil  melius,  nothing  better. 

With  the  Adverbs  of  Quantity^  Place ^  Extent: 

^ilB,  enough  mA,  where  ^l^''' \  to  this  degree 

parum,  too  little        nusquam,  nowhere       eo    i 
nimis,  too  Tuuch        affatim,  plenty 

niinis  lucis,  too  much  light;  hue  arrogantiae,  to  this  degree  of 
insolence;   ubi  terrarum  or  gentium?  where  in  the  world? 


-     178     — 

7.  The  Grenitive  of  Specification  has  the  force  of  an  Apposition, 
especially  with  vox,  luord;  nOinen,  name;  verbiim,  word,  as: 

vox  voluptatis,  the  word  ^ ^pleasure'' 

arbor  abietis,  a  fir-tree;   nomen  regis,  the  title  of  king. 

8.  The  Genitive  is  used  with  the  Ablatives  causa  and  gratia, 
for  the  sake  of;  also  with  ergo,  on  account  of;  insiar,  like,  causa, 
gratia,  ergo  commonly  follow  the  Genitive.   Mark  the  expressions: 

mea,  tua,  sua  causa  (not  gratia)  for  my^  thy,  his  sake, 

honoris  gratia,  for  honor's  sake, 

instar  montis  equus,  a  horse  like  a  mountain. 

9.  Frequently  aedgs  and  templum,  temple^  and  sometimes 
other  nouns  are  omitted,  when  no  mistake  can  arise: 

ad  Yestae  ventum  erat,  they  had  arrived  at  the  temple  of  Vesta. 

[221,  222,] 

With  Adjectives. 
567.   Many  Adjectives  are  followed  by  a  Genitive  to 
complete  their  meaning.     The  most  common  are: 

1.  Adjectives  denoting  Desire^  Kiioivledge,  Recollection^  Parti- 
cipation^ Mastery.,  Fullness  and  their  Opposites: 

ciipidus,  eager.,  desii^ous  expers,  without  share  in 

stiidiosiis,,  devoted  to  compos,  capable,  master  of 

perltus,  skillful  in  impos,  not  in  possession  of 

inscius   J  impotens,  unable  or  powerless 

nesclus  y  ignorant  to  control 

ignarus  )  pleniis, /iiZZ 

memor,  mindful  particeps,  sharing.,  partaker  of 

immeiir^r,  unmindful  endowed  with 

2.  Participial  Adjectives  denoting  permanent  qualities  (mostly 
ending  in  ns),  as: 

dlligens,  careful,  lover  of  patiens,  capable  of  enduring 

amans,  fynd  of  impatiens,  that  cannot  hear 

particeps  consilii  a  sharer  in  the  plan 

compos  mentis  in  possession  of  one's  mind 

cu[)idus  gloriae  eager  for  glory 

amans  sui  virtus  virtue  fond  of  itself 

3.  propriiis,  own,  and  comniQnis,  common,  take  the  Genitive 
when  the  idea  of  property  or  peculiarity  prevails. 

populi  Romani  est  propria  libertas,  liberty  is  characteristic  of 
the  Roman  people.  t^^^-  '^^^•l 


—     179     — 

With  Verbs. 

568,  Verbs  of  Reminding,  Remembering^  Forgetting 
take  the  Genitive. 

admQnere  j  meminissg) 

commonerS        >  to  remind  reminisci  >•  to  rememher 

commonefacere  )  rScordari  ) 

oblivisci,  to  forget 
Verbs  of  Reminding,  with  the  Accusative  of  the  Persorty  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  Genitive  of  the  Person  or  Thing  to  which  the  attention 
is  called, 
te  veteris  amicitiae  admoneo,  I  remind  you  of  our  old  friendship. 
Verbs  of  Remembering  and  Forgettujg  take  the  Genitive  if  a  Person^ 
and  either  the  Genitive  or  Accusative,  if  a  Thing  is  remembered  or 
forgotten, 
memini  vivorum  lam  mindful  of  the  living 

animus  meminit  praeteritOrum       the  mind  remembers  the  past 
oblivisci  nihil  soles  nisi  injurias      you  are  wont  to  forget  nothing 

except  injuries. 
When  the  Object  is  expressed  by  a  Neuter  Pronoun  or  Adjective,  it 
is  with  all  these  verbs  in  the  Accusative,  as: 
hoc  te  admongo  I  warn  you  of  this. 

mgmini,  /  remember,  when  referring  to  a  contemporary,  always 
takes  the  Accusative, 
memineram  Catonem  I  remembered  Cato. 

569,  Verbs  of  Valuing  are  joined  with  the  Genitive, 
when  the  Value  is  expressed  in  a  General  or  Indefinite 
Manner. 

Such  Verbs  are: 

aestimare,  to  value  habSrg,  to  hold 

piitare,  to  reckon  penderS,  to  weigh 

ducgrg,  to  take  facere,  to  make,  put 

ess6,  to  be  (worth) 

The  following  are  Genitives  of  general  value: 
magni,  much  quanti,  how  much 

parvi,  little  pltirimi,  maximi,  most 

tanti,  so  much  minimi,  least 

pluris,  more  nihili,  naught 

minorls,  less  flocci,  a  lock  of  wool,  a  straw 


—     180     — 

The  Complete  Phrases  are,  then,  as  follows: 

parvi  pendere  or  aestimare,  to  esteem  lightly 

magni  ess6,  to  be  of  great  account 

pluris  ess6,  to  he  of  more  account.,  to  he  worth  more 

nihili  dtlcSrS,  to  think  nothing  of 

magni  aestimare  or  habere,  to  value  highly 

pluris  aestimare,  to  esteem  of  more  value 

pliirimi  aestimare,  to  value  very  highly 

minimi  facere,  to  make  of  very  little  account 

flocci  f  acgre,  to  care  not  a  straw  for 
divitiae  a  me  minimi  putantur,  riches  are  very  little  prized  by  me; 
operam  tuam  magni  aestimo,  your  help  I  value  highly. 

570.  Verbs  of  Accusing^  Convicting^  Condemning 
and  Acquitting,  with  the  Accusative  of  the  Person, 
take  the  Genitive  of  the  Charge. 

mcusarg       (  ,  convmcere ) 

insimularg   j  '  ^       damnarS       )  to  condemn,  find 

arguSrS       j  condemnare )  guilty 

arcess^rS      )  ^^  summon  absolverg,  to  acquit 

r6um  fac6re ) 

honestam    familiam    sceleris  ar-    you  accuse  an  honorable  family 
giiis  of  crime 

aliquem  levitatis  convinc6re  to  convict  one  of  levity. 

The  Crime  may  be  expressed  by  the  Ablative  with  d6: 
accusare  aliquem  de  vi,  de  re-    to  accuse  one  of  assault,  of  ex- 
petundis,  de  veneficio  tortion,  of  poisoning 

or  by  the  Genitive  with  nomine  or  erimine,  as: 
nomine    conjurationis    eondem-    they   were  condemned  on   the 
nati  sunt  charge  of  conspiracy. 

Verbs    of   Condemning   and   Acquitting   may   also  take   the 
Ablative    of  the    charge   and  the  punishment,   and   always   take 
the  Ablative  of  fine;  multare,  to  mulct,  punish,  is  always  construed 
with  the  Ablative, 
damnare  capitis  or  capite  to  condemn  to  death 

Camillus  decem  milibus  damna-    Camillus  was  fined  10,000 

tus  est 
Manlius    virtutem    filii    morte    Manlius  punished  the  valor  of 
multavit  his  son  with  death. 

[22o,  226,) 


—     181     — . 

571.  The  Subjective  Genitive  may  be  used  as  a  Pre- 
dicate with  the  verbs  esse  and  fieri  to  denote  that  to 
which  something  belongs  or  to  which  something  is 
peculiar. 

In  English  the  words  part^  property^  duty,  office,  business, 
characteristic,  are  commonly  supplied.  Instead  of  the  Grenitive  of 
Personal  Pronouns  the  Neuters  of  the  Possessives:  meurn,  tuum, 
etc.,  are  used. 

haec  domus  est  Caesaris  this  house  is  Caesar^s 

temeritas  est  florentis  aetatis,  rashness  is  the  characteristic 
prudentia  senectiitis  of  youth,  prudence  of  old  age 

mentiri  nou  est  meum  to  lie  is  not  my  way. 

572.  With  the  Impersonal  interest  (and  sometimes 
also  with  refert),  it  concerns,  interests,  it  is  the  interest 
of,  it  is  of  importance  for,  the  Genitive  is  used  to 
denote  the  Person  or  Thing  concerned. 

The  Genitive  seems  to  be  governed  by  causa  understood;  hence 
instead  of  the  Genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun  the  Ablative  singular 
feminine  of  the  Possessives  mea,  tiia,  sua,  nostra,  vestra  is  used 
with  these  verbs,  as:  mea  interest,  /  am  concerned;  with  omnium, 
however,  nostrum  and  vestrCim  must  be  used:  omnium  nostrum 
interest,  it  concerns  all  of  us. 

refert  seldom  occurs  with  the  Genitive,  occasionally  with  mea, 
tua,  etc.,  and  most  frequently  without  either  such  pronoun  or  a 
Genitive,  as:  nihil  refert,  no  matter;  quid  refert,  what  matter? 

The  thing  which  is  of  interest  or  importance  is  expressed: 

By  a  Neuter  Pronoun,  as:  hoc  vehementer  interest  reipublicae, 
this  is  of  very  much  importance  to  the  state; 

By  an  Infinitive,  as:  interest  omnium  recte  facere,  to  do  right  is 
the  interest  of  all; 

By  an  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive,  as:  multum  mea  interest  te 
diligentem  esse,  it  is  of  great  importance  to  me  that  you  be  diligent; 

By  an  Interrogative  Sentence,  as:  multum  mea  interest  utrum  dili- 
gens  sis  necne,  it  is  of  great  importance  to  me  whether  you  are 
diligent  or  not 


~     182     — 

573.  The  Degree  of  importance  is  expressed  by: 

Adverbs:  magnop6re,  magis,  maximg,  pariira,  etc. 
Neuter  Adjectives:  multiim,  plus,  plurimum,  minus,  etc. 
Genitives  of  Value:  magni,  pluris,  parvl,  tantl,  etc. 

The  Thing  with  reference  to  which  one  is  interested  is  expressed 
by  the  Accusative  with  ad:  magni  ad  honOrem  nostrum  interest,  it 
is  of  great  consequence  to  our  honor.  l^^'^-  ^^^'l 

ACCUSATIVE  CASE. 
Direct  Object. 

574.  Active  Transitive  Verbs  take  the  Accusative 

Case. 

The  Object  of  a  transitive  verb  in  the  active  voice  becomes  Subject 
in  the  passive. 

boni  cives  amant  patriam  good  citizens  love  their  country 

patria  a  bonis  civibus  amatur         their  country  is  loved  by  good 

citizens. 

575.  Many  verbs  are  intransitive  in  English  which  are  both 
transitive  and  intransitive  in  Latin.     Such  are: 

dolerS,  to  grieve  (for)  rider e,  to  laugh  (at) 

horrSrS,  to  shudder  (at)  sitlrS,  to  thirst  (for). 

576.  Some  intransitive  verbs  may  take  an  accusative  of  kindred 
meaning,  as: 

vitam  jucundam  vivere  to  live  a  pleasant  life 

longam  viam  ire  to  go  a  long  way. 

577.  Many  Intransitive  Verbs,  especially  verbs  of 
motion,  when  compounded  with  prepositions,  become 
transitive,  and  accordingly  take  an  Accusativec  The 
commonest  of  them  are  Compounds  of: 

circum,  per,  praeter,  trans. 

circumstare,  to  stand  around        praetSrire,  to  pass  by 
permeare,  to  flow  through  transire,  to  cross 

triginta  tyranni  circumstet5runt       the  30  tyrants  stood  around  So- 
Socratem  crates.  i»07.  aos.] 


183     — 


Two  Accusatives.    Same  Person. 

578.    Verbs  of  Naming,  Making,  Taking,  Choosing, 

Showing  admit  two  Accusatives  of  the  same  person  or 

thing. 

facerS    J 

efficere  >-  to  make 
reddere  ) 

,,w  ^  ^\  to  elect 
eligerS  ) 

designare,  to  appoint 

se  praebgre    )    to  show,   offer 

se  praestare  f       one's  self 


appellare  ^ 

nommare  ( 

vocare       ( 

dicere       > 

arbitrari 

existimare 

habere 

piitare 

judicare,  to  judge 


to  name  or  call 


to    regard,    con- 
sider, thinky 
pronounce 


Neronem  senatus  hostem  judi- 
cavit 


the   senate  declared   Nero  an 
enemy. 


Many  other   verbs,    besides   their   proper  Accusative,   take  a 
second,  denoting  purpose,  time,  character.    Such  are: 


dare,  to  give 
habere,  to  have 

Atlienienses  Miltiadem  sibi  im- 
peratorem  sumpserunt 


relinquere,  to  leave 
sumerS,  to  take 

the  Athenians    took  Miltiades 
as  their  commander, 

[209.  210.] 


Two  Accusatives.    Person  and  Thing. 

579.    docere,   edocere,   to  teach;    celare,   to  conceal 
from,  take  two  Accusatives,  one  of  the  person,  and  the 
other  of  the  thing. 
Dionysius  Epaminondam  musi- 


cam  docuit 
non  te  celavi  sermonem 


Bionysius    taught  Epaminon- 

das  music 
I  did  not  conceal  from  you  the 

conversation. 

The  Passive  of  docere  or  edocere  with  the  Nominative  of  the 
person  and  the  Accusative  of  the  thing  is  almost  never  used,  but  is 
replaced  by  discerg  aliquid  ab  aliquo.  Special  uses  worthy  of  note 
are  as  follows: 

edocere  aliquem  de  aliqua  re,  to  inform  some  one  of  something; 
celare  aliquem  de  aliqua  re,  to  keep  some  one  ignorant  of  something. 


—     184     — 

580.  Verbs  signifying  to  ask,  to  demand,  to  request^ 
to  inquire  take  two  Accusatives,  one  of  the  person, 
and  the  other  of  the  thing. 

The  commonest  of  them  are: 

poscere     )    ^        _       orare    )  to  ask,         roi?ar6  \     , 

i,-  ...  .    I   to  ask,        .  -  .  f      ^     \        .  f     ^  -  ^  I    to  ask, 

flagitare    ^  ^^^^^'^     rogare  \-  entreat,       mterrogare  V  -^  ^^^^^ 

postulare  )  petere  )  beseech        quaerere      )      ^ 

posce  deos  veniam  ask  favor  of  the  gods 

me  sententiam  rogavit  he  asked  me  my  opinion. 

But  to  this  there  are  many  Exceptions.    We  may  also  say: 
poscere  or  flagitare  aliquid  ab  aliquo. 

We  always  say:  postulare  or  petere  aliquid  ab  aliquo; 
quaerere  aliquid  ab,  ex,  or  de  aliquo. 

581.  The  verbs  orare,  rogare,  to  ask,  request,  and  rogarS, 
interrogare,  to  ask,  inquire,  admit  a  double  accusative  only  when 
the  thing  is  expressed  by  the  neuter  of  a  pronoun  or  adjective,  as: 
hoc  te  rogo,  this  I  inquire  of  you.  Otherwise  we  say:  interrogare 
aliquem  de  aliqua  re,  to  ask  some  one  about  something. 

582.  A  noun  as  second  accusative  appears  with  the  verb  rogare 
only  in  the  official  phrase: 

sententiam  rogare  aliquem,  to  ask  one  for  his  opinion  or  vote, 

[211.  212.] 

Accusative  vrith  Impersonal  Verbs. 

583.  The  Accusative  is  used  after  the  Impersonals: 

fallitme  ^    it   escapes  my    ^ecM,  it  becomes 

fugitme         ^  notice,    is  un^    ^^^^^^^t^  it  is  unbecoming 
praeterit  m6  ;     known  to  me 

me  fugit  ad  te  scribere  /  forgot  to  write  to  you 

oratorem  irasci  dedecet  it  is  unbecoming  in  an  orator 

to  be  angry. 

An  Infinitive  or  a  Neuter  Prononn  or  Adjective,  rarely  a  Substantive, 
may  be  used  as  the  Subject  of  d^cet  and  dedecet: 
mulierem  decet  flere  it  becomes  a  woman  to  weep 

parvum  parva  decent  small  things  become  the  small 

neglegentia  neminem  decet  carelessness  becomes  no  one. 


—     185    — 

584:.    Certain   Impersonal   Verbs   take  the    Person 
who  feels  in  the  Accusative,  and  the  Exciting  Cause 
in  the  Genitive,  or  if  a  verb,  in  the  Infinitive;  viz.: 
miseret,  it  excites  pity  piidet,  it  shames 

paenitet,  it  causes  sorrow  taedet  )  .^ 

'.«..',..         .  ^      -         .[it  wearies,  tires. 

piget,  it  disgusts  J  grieves  pertaesum  eat)  ' 

The  Persons  are  expressed  as  follows: 

miseret  me,  I  pity  paenitet  me,  lam  sorry  j  repent 

miseret  te,  thou  pitiest  piget  me,  /  am  grieved  at,  dis- 

miseret  eiim,  Tie  jplties  gustedwith 

misergt  nos,  we  pity  pudet  me,  I  am  ashamed 

miseret  vos,  you  pity  taedet  me  )  lamweary, 


misSret  eos,  they  pity  me  pertaesum  est )        tired 

me  stultitiae  meae  pudet  I  am  ashamed  of  my  folly 

non  me  paenitet  vixisse  /  am  not  sorry  for  having  lived. 

Idiomatic  Uses. 

585.  The  Accusative  is  used  in  Exclamations,  either 

with  or  without  an  Interjection. 
Oj  miseras  hominum  mentes !      Oh,  the  wretched  minds  of  men! 

586.  A  Neuter  Adjective  or  Pronoun  is  used  adverbially  in  the 
Accusative,  as:  aliquid,  somewhat;  niliil,  not  at  all;  multum,  niuchj 
etc.  The  Accusative  is  also  found  in  a  tew  adverbial  phrases^  as: 
maximam  partem,  mostly;  id  genus,  of  this  kind;  id  temporis,  at 
this  time: 

nihil  moveor  /  am  not  at  all  moved 

forum  id  temporis  omni  turha    the  forum  was  at  this  time  free 
vacuum  erat  from  all  tumult 

{213,  214.} 

DATIVE   CASE. 
With  Verbs. 

587.  The  Dative  is  the  Case  of  the  Indirect  Object, 
denoting  that  for  which^  to  the  benefit  or  loss  of  luhich 
any  thing  is  or  is  done.  It  may  be  used  with  transi- 
tive and  intransitive  Verbs;  dativus  commodi  et  in- 
comrnodi:   Dative  of  Advantage  and  Disadvantage. 

scribo  vobis  hunc  librum,  I  write  this  hooTc  for  you; 

tibi  seris,  tibi  metis,  you  sow  for  yourself  you  reap  for  yourself 


186     — 


58S.  A  large  number  of  Transitive  Verbs  take 
along  with  the  Accusative  a  Dative  as  an  Indirect 
Object. 

The  English  expresses  the  Dative  Relation  by  to  or  for;  but  where 
the  verb  implies  removal,  the  Latin  Dative  frequently  answers  to 
the  English  Objective  with  from;  for  =in  defence  of  is  pr5. 

errantibus  viam  monstremus  let  us  show  the  way  to  the  erring 

dolor  Bomnum  mihi  adimit  grief  takes  away  my  sleep  from 

pro  patria  mori  to  die  for  one's  country.       [me 

589.  Many  Intransitive  Verbs  signifying  to  benefit  or 
injure,  please  or  displease,  command  or  obey,  favor  or 
resist,  trust  or  distrust,  also  indulge,  believe,  persuade, 
envy,  threaten,  spare,  and  the  like,  take  the  Dative. 

Examples  are; 
prodessg,  to  do  good 
n6c6r6,  to  do  harm 
blandirl,  to  soothe 
fav5rg,  to  favor 
resisterS,  to  offer  resistance 
plac6r6,  to  please 
displicgrg,  to  displease 
imperarg,  to  command 
oboedire,  parSrg,  to  obey 
fid6r6,  to  trust 
diffiderg,  to  distrust 
irascl,  to  be  angry  with 
indulggre,  to  give  upy  to  favor 

arbor  resistit  ventis 


cr6d$r6,  to  believe 

suadgre,  to  advise,  recommend 

minari,  imminerg,  to  threaten 

bSnedicerS,  to  bless 

nubgrS,  to  marry 

persuadere,   to  persuade^   con- 

mederi,  to  heal  [vince 

supplicarg,  to  beg 

maledlcerg,  to  curse 

parcSrg,  to  spare 

stiidere,  to  devote  one's  self 

obtrectarS,  to  decry 

in  vide  r  6,  to  envy 


the  tree  offers  resistance  to  the 

winds 
the  upright  man  envies  no  one 
I  will  spare  no  pains. 


probus  invidet  nemini 
non  parcam  operae 

Among  the  most  notable  Exceptions  are: 

J^Tf !     I  to  help,  assist  ^^^^^^^^^  ^^  ^'  ^^^^^^^ 


adjuvarS  j 
aequar6,  to  be  equal 


jub6rg,  to  order 
vetare,  to  forbid 


which  govern  the  AoonsatiTe. 


—     187     — 

590.  Passives  are  properly  made  only  from  transitive  verbs. 
Intransitive  Verbs  w^hich  govern  a  Dative  have  an  Impersonal  Passive 
with  the  same  Case,  in  the  following  manner: 

Active.    b5nus  invidet  ngmini,  a  good  man  envies  no  one 
Passive.  miM  Invidetur,  /  am  envied 

tibi  invidetur,  thou  art  envied 

ei  invidetur,  he  is  envied 

nobis  invidetur,  we  are  envied 

vobis  invidetur,  you  are  envied 

lis  invidetur,  they  are  envied 
a  bono  invidetur  neminl,  no  one  is  envied  by  a  good  man, 

591.  Some  Verbs  take  the  Dative  or  Accusative  according  to 
their  signification: 

cavere  alicui,  to  care  for  some  one 

cavSre  aliquem,  to  beware  of  some  one 

cavSrg  ab  aliquo,  to  be  on  one^s  guard 

consiilere  alicui,  to  consult  the  interest  of  some  one 

consulere  aliquSm,  to  consult  some  one 

metuere  aliquem,  to  fear  some  one 

metiiere  alicuT,  to  fear  for  some  one 

prOvidere  aliquid,  to  foresee  something 

providere  alicui  rei,  to  provide  for  something 

moderarl  aliquTd,  to  manage  something 

moderari  alicui  rei,  to  set  bounds  to  a  matter 

temperare  aliquid,  to  rule  something 

temperare  aliciiT,  to  spare  some  one 

temperare  ab  aliqua  re,  to  abstain  from  something. 

592.  The  Dative  is  used  with  many  Verbs  com- 
poimded  with  the  Prepositions: 

ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter, 
6b,  post,  prae,  siib,  super. 

Examples  are: 

afferre,  to  bring  tOj  to  render        adimere,  to  take  aivay 
interjicere,  to  throw  in  interessg,  to  be  present 

praecurrere,  to  precede  injicerS,  to  strike  into 

imponere,  to  place  on  opponere,  to  oppose 

suppongre,  to  put  under 
virtus  omnibus  rebus  anteit  virtue  goes  before  all  things 

onera  quibusdam  animalibus  im-       we  put  burdens  on  some  anl. 
ponimus  .  mals.  [2i5, 210,] 


—     188     — 

593.  Certain  Verbs  of  giving  and  putting  may  take 
either  a  Dative  with  an  Accusative,  or  an  Accusative 

with  an  Ablative,  as: 

dono  tibi  librum,  I  present  you  a  book; 

dono  te  libro,  I pi^esent  you  with  a  book; 

circumdat  urbi  murum,  he  puts  a  wall  around  the  city; 

circumdat  urbem  muro,  he  surrounds  the  city  with  a  ivall 

So  with  adspergere,  to  sprinkle^  and  iriduere,  to  put  on. 

594.  The  Dative   is  used  with  esse  to  denote  the 

Possessor,  the  thing  possessed  being  the  subject. 

When  so  used  it  is  commonly  translated  by  to  have;  mihi  nomSn 
est,  means  my  name  is  or  /  am  called;  the  proper  name  is  put 
either  in  the  Nominative  or  the  Dative,  as: 
est  mihi  domi  pater  /  have  a  father  at  home 

puero  nomen  est  Carolus  (Carolo)    the  boy's  name  is  Charles. 

595.  Certain  Verbs  take  the  Dative  to  denote  the 

purpose  or  end,  and  often  at  the  same  time  another 

Dative  of  the  person  for  whom  or  to  whom.    Such  are: 

esse,  to  be  mittere,  to  send  habere,  to  hold 

nw^  .  i  to  become,       accipere,  to  receive       vertere,   to  interpret, 

\  turn  out        venire,  to  come  turn  (against) 

dare,  to  put  relinquere,  to  leave        diicere,  to  count 

exemplo  est  formica  the  ant  is  an  example 

malo  est  hominibus  avaritia  avarice  is  an  evil  to  men 

dono  dare  to  give  as  a  present. 

596.  The  Dative  is  used  with  the  Gerundive  to  de- 
note the  person  on  whom  a  necessity  rests,  as: 

adhibenda  est  nobis  diligentia        we  must  use  diligence 
nobis  omnibus  moriendum  est        we  all  must  die. 

597.  Yerbs  in  the  Passive  Voice  are  sometimes  followed  by  a 
Dative  of  the  Agent  —  instead  of  a,  ab  with  the  Ablative. 

res  mihi  tota  provisa  est  /  have  had   the  whole  matter 

provided  for 
carmxna  mihi  scripta  sunt  nulla     /  have  no  poems  written, 

[217.  ;9jf«.3  Ji 


—     189    — 

With  Adjectives, 

598.  Many  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  are  followed 
by  the  Dative  denoting  that  to  which  the  quality  is 
directed. 

The  most  common  are  those  signifying: 

useful,  fltj  pleasant,  like, 

near,  easy,  inclined,  necessary,  and  their  Opposites. 
acceptus,  acceptable  jucundus,  agreeable 

amicus,  friendly  injCicundus,  disagreeable 

inimicus,  unfriendly,  opposed       molestus,  troublesome 
aptus,  apt,  suitable  necessarlus,  necessary 

car  us,  dear  odiosus,  hateful 

communis,  common  par,  equal,  a  match  for 

dulcis,  agreeable  dispar,  unlilce 

faeilis,  easy  salutaris,  beneficial 

difficilis,  difficult  similis,  like 

gratus,  pleasing  dissTmilis,  unlike 

ingratus,  unpleasant  turpis,  disgraceful 

gravis,  burdensome  utilis,  useful 

canis  similis  lupo  est  a  dog  is  similar  to  a  wolf 

flamma  fumo  est  proxima  fire  is  next  akin  to  smoke. 

Many  Adjectives  whicli  belong  to  this  class  become  Substantives 
and  as  such  take  the  Genitive;  e.  g. : 
amicus,  a  friend  aequalis,  a  contemporary 

inimicus,  an  enemy  vicinus,  a  neighbor 

familiaris,  an  (intimate)  friend    necessarlus,  a  relation 

599,  Adjectives  of  Inclination  may  take  the  Accusative  with  erga 
(when  friendly  feelings  are  spoken  of)  or  with  in,  adversus  (for 
friendly  and  unfriendly  feelings) ;  those  signifying  useful,  suitable 
take  oftener  the  Accusative  with  ad  to  denote  the  i\img  for  whicli,  but 
regularly  the  Dative  of  Persons;  as:  severus  in  filiiim,  severe  towards 
his  son;  homo  ad  nuUam  rem  utilis,  a  good-for-nothing  fellow, 

000,  The  Adjectives  propior,  proximiis  (sometimes),  and  the 
Adverbs  propius,  proxime  (commonly)  take  the  Accusative.  After 
similis,  like,  the  Genitive  is  used  to  denote  exact  resemblance;  as: 
mei,  tui,  nostri  similis,  my,  your,  our  like,  and  vSri  similis,  likely. 

601,  A  few  derivative  Substantives  take  the  Dative  after  the  ana- 
logy of  their  Primitives,  as:  justitia  est  obtemperantia  legibus, 
justice  is  obedience  to  the  laws. 


—    190    — 

Ethical  Datiye. 

602.  The  Dative  of  a  Personal  Pronoun  is  sometimes 

introduced  for  liveliness  of  expression:  Ethical  Dative. 

fur  mihi  est,  he  is  a  thief  in  my  opinion; 

quid  tibi  vis?  what  do  you  want?  1219,  220,] 

ABLATIVE   CASE. 
Ablative  of  Cause. 

603.  The  Ablative  is  used  to  express  the  Cause. 

The  Ablative  of  Cause  designates  that  by  which,  by  reason  of 
which,  because  of  which,  in  accordance  with  which  sometiiirig  is 
or  is  done.  Accordingly  it  is  used  with  passive  verbs  and  such 
active  verbs  and  adjectives  as  imply  a  passive  meaning.  In  the 
passive  construction,  however,  the  Person  or  Living  Agent  by 
whom  any  thing  is  done  is  put  in  the  Ablative  with  a,  ab. 

Dei  providentia  mundus  admini-    the  world  is  governed  by  God^s 

stratur  providence 

a  Deo  mundus  administratur  the  tvorld  is  governed  by  God 

Concordia  res  parvae  crescunt        by  concor^d  small  affairs  groio 
milites  praelio  fessi  erant  the  soldiers  were  weary  with 

the  battle. 

604.  The  Ablative  of  Cause  is  of  very  frequent  occurrence,  and 
is  used  both  with  Verbs  and  Adjectives  like  the  following: 

dolere,  to  grieve  gloriari,  to  boast 

maererg,  to  mourn  laborare,  to  suffer 

f^^^^reUo  rejoice,  delight  fperbns  proud 

laetarl    )  laetus,  pleased  —  aeger,  ill 

delectari,  to  be  delighted  anxius,  anxious 

agricola  gaudet  equis,  the  husbandman  delights  in  hoi^ses; 
Miltiades  aeger  erat  vulneribus,  Miltiades  was  ill  from  his  wounds; 
aliis  malis  laboras,  you  suffer  with  other  ills. 

This  includes  such  Ablatives  as:  jussu,  by  order;  rogatii,  at  the 
request,  etc.    On  causa  and  gratia,  for  the  sake  of,  see  S66.  8. 

Akin  to  the  Causal  Ablative  is  the  Ablative  with  verbs  expressing 
origin,  as: 
humilibus  parentibus  ortus  sprung  from  low  parents. 


—    191     — 

Ablative  of  Means  or  Instrument. 

605.  The  Ablative  is  used  to  denote  the  Means  or 

Instrument  by  which  anything  is  effected. 

Pyrrhus  lapide  interfectus  est       Pyrrhus  was  killed  by  a  stone 
benevolentiam  civium  blanditia    to  win  the  good  will  of  one's 
colligere  turpe  est  fellow-citizens  by  flattery  is 

disgraceful 

606.  The  Person,  considered  as  Means  or  Instrument^  is  ex- 
pressed by  per  with  the  accusative,  or  by  opera  with  a  genitive  or 
possessive : 

Caesar  certior  factus  est  per    Caesar  was  informed  by  (means 
legatos  of)  ambassadors. 

607.  griidlre,  institilere,  to  instruct;  as:  aliquem  artibus  eru- 
dire,  to  instruct  some  one  in  the  arts;  and  afficere,  to  treat,  in  such 
expressions  as:  aliquem  honorlbus  afficere,  to  honor  some  one;  ali- 
quem molestia  afficere,  to  trouble  some  one  —  are  worthy  of  note. 

Ablative  of  Limitation. 

608.  That  in  respect  to  which  or  in  accordance  with 
which  anything  is  or  is  done  is  denoted  by  the  Abla- 
tive of  Limitation. 

Out  of  this  usage  grow  a  number  of  Particular  Phrases: 

grandis  natu,  old  m6a   sententia,   mea   opinione, 

major  natu,  older  according  to  my  opinion 

maximus  natu,  o?(^es^  jUdicio,     testimoniO     alicujus, 

minor  natu,  younger  according  to  the  judgment, 

minimus  natu,  youngest  testimony,  of  some  one 

reges  nomine  magis  quam  im-       kings  in  name  rather  than  in 

perio  authority.                [229, 230.] 

Ablative  of  Comparison. 

609.  The  Ablative  of  Comparison  may  be  used  with 

the   Comparative,   instead  of  quam,    than,  with  the 

Nominative  or  Accusative. 

films  melior  est  quam  pater     »    ^^^  ^^^  .^  ^^^^^^  ^^^^^  ^  .^  ^^^^^^ 
ffiius  melior  est  patre  ) 

scio  filTum  meliorem  esse  patre     I  know  that  the  son  is  better 

than  his  father. 


—     192    — 

610,  The  Ablative,  instead  of  quam  with  the  same  case  as 
the  thing  compared,  must  be  regularly  used  in  Relative  Sentences: 

amicitia,  qua  nihil  melius  hab5-   friendship  than  which  we  have 
mus . .  nothing  better . . 

qu^m  is  often  omitted  after  plus,  ampllus,  more;  minus,  less; 
longuis,  farther^  and  the  like,  without  influence  upon  the  construc- 
tion. But  the  Ablative  may  also  be  used  when  the  word  with  quam 
would  be  in  the  Nominative  or  Accusative. 

ex  Romanis  minus  trecenti  per-    of  the  Romans    less  than  300 

iSrunt  perished 

tecum  plus  annum  vixit  he  lived  with  you  more  than  a 

year 
plus  quam  ducenti  interfecti  sunt  % 

plus  ducenti  interfecti  sunt  >■  more  than  200  were  hilled. 

plus  ducentis  interfecti  sunt         ^ 

611.  Certain  Ablatives,  as  opmione,  exspectationg,  sp6,  solito, 
preceding  a  comparative  are  used  instead  of  a  Clause,  as: 

opinione  celerms,  sooner  than  is  expected; 

dicto  citius,  quicker  than  the  word  was  spoken; 

serius  spe,  later  than  was  hoped; 

amnis  solito  citatior,  the  river  running  faster  than  usual. 

612,  The  Ablative  is  used  with  comparatives  and  words  im- 
plying comparison  to  denote  the  Degree  of  Difference.  This  use  is 
especially  frequent  with  the  Ablatives: 

multo,  m.uch  altero  tanto,  twice  as  much 

paulo,  a  little  nihilo,  by  nothing j  no 

aliquanto,  some  more  quo..eo  i  the    the 

tanto,  so  much  quant o.  .tanto ) 
quanto,  how  much 

minor  uno  mense  younger  by  one  month 

multo  praestat  virtus  divitiis  virtue  is  much  better  than  riches. 

Ablative  of  Manner. 

613.  The  Ablative  of  Manner  answers  the  question 
How? 

It  is  used  with  the  preposition  cum  when  it  has  no  Adjective; 
with  or  without  cum  when  it  has  an  Adjective.  Words  signifying 
manner  themselves,  such  as:  modus,  ratio,  mos,  ritiis,  and  likewise 
animus,  mens,  consilium,  never  take  cum. 


I 


193     — 


cum  voluptate  aliquem  audire 
aliquid  facere  magno  studio, 

or  magno  cum  studio 
aliquid    aequo    animo    ferre 

(never  aequo  cum  ammo) 


to  "hear  some  one  with  pleasure 
to  do  something  with  great  zeal 

to  bear  something  with  an  even 
mind. 


614,    The  following  Ablatives  are  used  without  an  Adjective  or 


Preposition: 
silentio,  in  silence 
ordine,  in  an  orderly  manner 
casu,  by  chance 
via  et  ratione,  methodically 
voluntate,  voluntarily 
dolo,  frauds,  fraudulently 


jtirg,  rightfully 

injuria,  unjustly 

VI,  violently 

vl  et  armis,  by  force  of  arms 

pedibus,  a-foot 

navibus,   by  ship 


Ablative  of  Qualitjo 

615.  The  Ablative  with  an  Adjective  or  an  equiva- 
lent is  used  to  denote  Quality, 

616.  External  qualities  are  put  by  preference  in  the  Ablative; 
measure,  number,  time  and  space  are  put  in  the  Genitive  only. 
serpens  ingenti  magnitudine,  a  serpent  of  huge  size; 

Britanni  sunt  capillo  promisso,  the  Britons  have  long  hanging  lock8> 

Ablative  of  Price. 

617.  As  a  rule,  Price  is  put  in  the  Ablative. 
The  Ablative  of  Price  is  used  with: 


6mer6       ) 

redimere  >-  to  buy 

mereari    ) 

vendere,  to  sell  (pass.  vSnirg) 

licere,  to  be  for  sale 
patrlam  auro  vendidit 
equus  mihi  talento  stetit 


•  to  let 


aestimare,  to  value 

locarg      i 

coUocare  J 

conducere,  to  hire 

essS,  stare,  constarS,  to  cost 

he  sold  his  country  for  gold 

the  horse  cost  me  a  talent. 


618.    General  Value  or  Cost  is  expressed  by  the  following  Ablatives: 


magno,  at  a  high  price 
parvo,  at  a  low  price 
nihilo,  for  nothing 
hortos  istos  emamus  magno,  si 
parvo  non  possumus 


plurimo,  at  a  very  high  price 
minimo,  at  a  very  low  price 

let  us  buy  those  gardens  at  a 
high  price,  if  we  cannot  have 
them  cheap. 


—    194    — 

619.  Comparative  Value  or  Cost  (see  569)  is  expressed  by  these 
GenitiyeB: 

tanti,  so  much  quanti,  how  much 

tantldSm,  at  the  same  price  plurls,  dearer;  minoris,  cheaper^^i 

mercatores  non  tantidem  ven-       merchants  do   not  sell  at  the" 
dunt  quanti  emerunt  same  price   at   which    theyi 

.     bought 
quanti  cenas?  what   do   you  pay  for   yourr 

dinner? 

Mark  the  following  Particular  Phrases: 
bSn6  fimSre,  to  buy  cheap  bene  vendere,  to  sdl  dear 

malS  6m6r6,  to  buy  dear  mal6  vendere,  to  sell  at  a  loss. 

[231.  232,1] 

Ablative  of  Separation,  Plenty,  Want. 

620.  Verbs  signifying  to  remove,  abstain,  set  free 
take  the  Ablative  with  or  without  the  Prepositions 
ex,  de,  ab;  but  with  Persons  a  Preposition,  usually 
ab,  must  be  used. 

Examples  are: 

depellerS  16co,  to  drive  from  a  place 

abstinerg  injuria,  to  abstain  from  wrong-doing 

abstmerg  manus  ab  alienis,  to  keep  one's  hands  from  other 

people's  property 
Cjie^rg  6  civitate,  to  drive  from  the  state 
Crumpere  e  saxis,  to  burst  from  the  rocks 
abhorrSrS  ab  aliqua  re,  to  differ  from  something 
deterrerg  ab  injuria,  to  deter  from  wrong-doing 
liberare  a  curls,  to  release  from  cares 
decederg  (de)  vita,  to  depart  from  life 

Hannibal    ex   Italia    deced^re  Hannibal  was  forced  to  with- 

coactus  est  draw  from  Italy 

Alexander  vix  a  se  manus  ab-  Alexander     hardly     kept    hi& 

stinuit  hands  from  himself 

multos   fortQna   liberat  paena,  fortune  rids  many  of  punish* 

metu  neminem  menty  none  of  fear 

Themist6clem    Athenienses    e  the   Athenians   banished  The- 

civitate  expulerunt  mistocles  from  the  state. 


—     195     — 


021,    Verbs  compounded  with  se  and  dis  take  nearly  always 
a  or  ab;  such  are: 
discemere  )  ^^  ^^g^,j, 
distmguere ) 
differre 
discrgpare 
dissentire 
distarg 


■to  differ,  disagree 


crede  mihi,  mores  distant  a  car- 
mine nostro 


s6cerner61 

sejungere  >  to  separate 

sgparare  ) 

likewise: 
allenare,  to  alienate 
abhorrere,  to  he  averse 

believe   me,    my    conduct  far 
differs  from  my  song. 


Mark  the  Particular  Phrase: 

interdicere  alicui  aqua  €t  igni,  to  forbid  one  the  use  of  fire 
and  water,  to  banish  one. 


622.   Verbs  of  Plenty  and  Want,  of  Filling  and  De- 
priving take  the  Ablative. 

»abundare,  to  abound,  have  abun- 
dance 

cargre,  to  be  or  do  without,  to 
lack 

eggre,  indigSre,  to  need 

vacare,  to  be  void  of,  to  be  free 
from 


explerg 

implerS 

complere 

replere 

orbare 


to  Jill 


satiarS,  to  glut 

non  egeo  medicina 
admonitio  acerbitate  car6re  de- 
^    bet 

America  abundat  lacubus  et  flu- 
minibus 


privare 
spoliare 
nadare 


[  to  deprive 

1 


to  plunder,  to  strip 


I  do  not  need  medicine 

an  admonition  should  be  with- 
out bitterness 

America  abounds  in  lakes  and 
rivers. 


egeo  and  indlgeo  are  often  followed  by  the  Genitive. 

623,  Adjectives  of  Plenty  and  Waiit  regularly  take  the  Genitive 
(see  567,  1. ),  but  some  of  them  follow  the  analogy  of  the  cor- 
responding verbs  and  take  the  Ablative,     Among  the  latter  are: 

nudus,  naked  onustus,  laden 

orbus,  deprived  of       inanis  [ 

liber,  free  vacuus  ! 

asellus  onustus  auro 
urbs  nuda  praesidio 


-void 


refertus,  stuffed 
praeditus,  endoived 


a  donkey  laden  with  gold 
a  city  naked  of  defense. 

[238,  234.] 


-—     196    — 

624.  opus  est,  there  is  need^  it  is  needful,  neces- 
sary,  takes  the  Dative  of  the  Person  who  is  in  want, 
and  the  Ablative  of  the  Thing  wanted  (Impersonal 
Construction);  but  the  Thing  wanted  may  be  the 
Subject  and  opus  est  (sunt)  the  Predicate  (Personal 
Construction). 

The  Impersonal  Construction  must  regularly  be  used  in  Negative 
Sentences,  and  the  Personal  with  Neuter  Adjectives  and  Pronouns; 
6pu8  is  always  indeclinable. 

opus  mihi  est  libro  I  want  a  hoolc 

liber  raihi  opus  est  a  hook  is  what  I  want 

opus  mihi  est  libris  /  want  books 

libri  mihi  opus  sunt  books  are  what  I  want 

nihil  opus  est  duce  there  is  no  need  of  a  leader 

multa  opus  sunt  there  is  need  of  many  things. 

Ablatiye  in  Special  Constructions. 

625.  The  Ablative  is  used  with  the  Adjectives: 

dignus,  worthy  frfitiis,  trusting,  relying 

indignus,  unworthy  contentus,  satisfied 

also  with  dignSr,  /  deem  worthy. 

alienus,  strange,  foreign,  takes  the  Ablative  with  or  without 
a,  d.b. 

vir  patre  dignissimus  a  man  most  worthy  of  his  father 

me  dignor  honore  /  deem  myself  worthy  of  honor 

homo  sum,  humani  nihil  a  me    lam  a  man,  and  nothing  relat- 

alienum  puto  ing  to  man  I  deem  foreign 

to  me* 

626.  The  Ablative  is  used  with  the  Deponent  Verbs: 

ut6r,  -i,  to  use  potior,  -iri,  to  make  one's  selj ' 

fruor,  ^i,  to  enjoy  master  of 

fungdr,  -1,  to  discharge  vescOr,  -i,  to  feed 

and  their  Compounds: 
abut6r,  -i,  to  abuse  defungSr,  -i,  to  discharge 

perfrudr,  -i,  to  enjoy  fully  perfungor,  -i,  to  fulfil 

utar  vestra  benignitate,  I  will  avail  myself  of  your  kindness; 

vescimur  bestlis,  we  live  upon  animals. 


—     19T     — 

p6ti5r  sometimes  takes  the  Grenitive;  always  in  the  phrase:  potlri 
reriim,  to  get  control  of  affairs. 

627.  nitor,  I  stay  myself  rest  upon,  takes  the  AWative  with  or 
without  in. 

in  Pompeji  vita  nititur  salus  ci-    the  welfare  of  the  state  depends 
vitatis  on  Pompey's  life. 

628.  fido  and  confido,  I  trusty  take  the  Ablative  when  the  object 
is  a  Thing  J  and  the  Dative  when  the  object  is  a  Person,  diffido,  / 
distrust^  commonly  takes  the  Dative.    See  589. 

nemo  potest  fortunae  stabilitate  no  one  can  trust  to  the  stability 

confidere  of  fortune 

huic  legioni  Caesar  maxime  con-  this   legion    Caesar   especially 

fidebat  trusted.                    [235.  236.] 

Time,  Space,  Place. 

USE  OF  PKEPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions  construed  with  the  Accusative: 
ante,  apiid,  ad,  adversiis, 
circiim,  circa,  citra,  cis, 
erga,  contra,  inter,  extra, 
infra,  intra,  juxta,  5b, 
penes,  (pone),  post  &  praeter, 
prdpe,  propter,  per,  secundtim, 
supra,  versus,  ultra,  trans. 

629.  ad,  with  many  varieties  of  application,  generally  means 
to.    It  denotes: 

direction  toward  a  jjlace  or  person,  as:  ad  urbem,  to  town; 
venio  ad  te,  /  come  to  you; 

nearness  with  reference  to  place,  time  or  quantity,  as:  urbs  sita 
ad  mare,  a  town  situated  near  the  sea;  ad  vesperam,  towards 
evening;  ad  ducentos,  nearly  200; 

time,  answering  the  question  till  when?  as:  ad  summam  senec- 
tutem,  until  extreme  old  age.  It  also  denotes  a  fixed  time,  as:  ad 
horam,  at  the  hour; 

aim  or  pm^pose  =  in  respect  of,  as:  res  ad  bellum  utfles, 
things  useful  for  war; 

accord  or  agreement  =  according  to,  as:  ad  voluntatem  ali- 
cnjus  loqui,  to  speak  according  to  some  one's  will 


—    198    — 

Particular  Phrases  are: 
ad  verbum,  word  for  word 

nihil  ad  banc  rem,  nothing  in  comparison  with  this  thing 
ad  unum  omnes,  all  to  the  last  man. 

630,  apud,  at^  chiefly  used  of  persons,  denotes: 
nearness  or  presence^  as:  apud  Caesarem,  at  Caesar^ s  house; 

apud  judices,  before,  in  presence  of,  the  judges;  apud  Can- 
nas,  near  Cannae; 

situation  or  estimation  among^  regard  by,  as:  apud  veteres, 
among  the  ancients;  apud  me  nihil  valet  hominum  opinio,  tvith 
me  the  opinion  of  the  multitude  has  no  weight, 

apud  is  also  used  with  the  Names  o^  Authors  instead  of  in 
with  the  name  of  their  works,  as:  apud  Plinium  legimus,  we  read 
in  Pliny  (in  his  works), 

631,  ante,  before^  means  preceding  in  space  or  time,  as:  ante 
portas,  before  the  gates;  ante  noctem,  before  night 

632,  adversGs,  more  rarely  adversum,  indicates: 
direction  toward  ^  place  or  person,  and  combines  the  meanings 

of  both  against  and  toward,  as:  castra  ad  versus  urbem  ponere, 
to  pitch  the  camp  over  against  the  city;  adversus  aliquem 
pugnare,  to  fight  with  (against)  some  one;  pietas  adversus  pa- 
rentes,  duty  to(ward)  parents, 

633,  CIS  and  citra,  on  this  side,  are  used  in  reference  to 
place  opposed  to  trans,  as:  citra  Rubiconem,  on  this  side  of 

the  Rubicon. 

634,  circa  and  circtim  are  equivalent  to  both  around  and 
about  with  reference  to  place,  as:  circum  haec  loca,  hereabout; 
homines  circum  se  habent,  they  have  people  with  them,  circa  is 
also  used  of  time,  as:  circa  eandem  horam,  about  the  same  hour. 

Particular  Phrase : 
circum  amicos  mittere,  to  send  around  to  one's  friends, 

635,  circiter,  near,  about,  is  used  of  time  only,  as:  circiter 

meridiem,  about  noon,  but  is  more  commonly  an  Adverb. 

636,  contra  is  equivalent  to  against  in  both  its  meanings: 
opposite  to,  as:  contra  Italiam,  over  against  Italy; 

in  opposition  to,  as:  contra  naturam  viv6re,   to  live  against 
nature. 


F 


199 


6*57.  erg-a,  toward^  always  implies  friendl}^  feelings,  as:  divina 
bouitas  erga  homines,  God's  goodness  toward  men, 

638.  extra  means  without  —  out  of^  sometimes  beyond  or  ex- 
cept^ as:  extra  urbem,  without  the  city;  extra  modum,  beyond 
measure;  extra  ducem  reliqui  rapaces  sunt,  except  the  leader  the 
rest  are  robbers, 

639.  intra  denotes  within  in  regard  to  both  jplace  and  time^ 
as:  intra  urbem,  within  the  city;  intra  decem  annos,  within  or 
during  to  years,  intra  with  an  Ordinal  Number  means  before  the 
expiration  of,  as:  intra  deeimum  diem  urbem  cepit,  before  the 
expiration  of  the  10th  day  he  took  the  city. 

640.  inter  is  equivalent  to  both  between  and  among,  as:  inter 
Padum  et  Alpes,  between  the  Po  and  the  Alps;  Croesus  inter  re- 
ges  opulentissimus,  Croesus,  the  wealthiest  among  kings.  It  is  also 
used  to  denote  time,  as :  inter  cenam,  during  dinner;  inter  lu- 
dendum,  while  playing.  With  the  personal  pronouns,  as:  inter  nos, 
vos,  eos,  se,  it  is  employed  in  a  reciprocal  sense,  answering  to  the 
English  one  another,  each  other,  as:  Ciceronis  puSri  amant  inter 
se,  Cicero's  boys  love  one  another. 

641.  infra,  below,  means: 

lower  in  place,  as:  infra  caelum,  under  the  sky; 

lower  in  rank  or  esteem,  as:  eum  infra  omnes  puto,  /  think 
him  beneath  all  men; 

later  in  time,  as:  Homfirus  non  infra  Lycurgum  fuit,  Homer 
was  not  later  than  Lycurgus; 

smaller  than,  as:  magnitudine  infra  elephantum,  in  size 
^smaller  than  an  elephant 

642.  juxta,  hard  by,  beside,  as:  juxta  murum  castra  posiiit, 
he  pitched  the  camp  hard  by  the  wall. 

643.  ob  sometimes  means  before,  as:  ob  oculos  versari,  to  be 
before  the  eyes.  Generally  it  means  by  reason  of,  on  account  of^ 
as:  ob  eam  causam,  for  that  reason. 

644.  penes  denotes  in  the  possession  or  power  of,  as :  summum 
imperium  penes  Agamemnonem  erat,  the  chief  command  was  in 
the  hands  of  Agamemnon. 


—     200     ~ 

645*    per,  through,  is  used  in  a  great  variety  of  applications,  as: 

denoting  place,  from  end  to  end,  as:  per  urbem  ire,  to  go 
through  the  city; 

denoting  duration  as:  per  noctem,  during  the  night; 

denoting  the  agent  or  means,  as:  per  amicum  servatus  sum,  by 
(means  of)  my  friend  I  was  saved; 

denoting  the  maimer  in  which  a  thing  is  done,  as:  per  littSras, 
by  letter;  per  potestatem,  by  authority;  per  iram,  from  or  in 
anger;  per  vim,  by  violence; 

denoting  the  object  invoked  m^  forms  of  swearing,  as:  per  deos 
immor tales  jurare,  to  swear  by  the  immortal  gods. 
Particular  Phrases: 
per  me  licet,  you  may  for  all  I  care;  per  aetatem,  on  account 
of  his  age;  per  valetudinem,  on  account  of  ill  health, 

646.  post,  after,  denotes: 

behind  in  place,  as:  post  equitem  sedet  atra  cura,  behind  the 
rider  sits  black  care; 

later  in  time,  as:  post  tenebras  lux,  after  darkness  comes  light 

647.  praeter  primarily  means  along,  as:  praeter  litus, 
along  shore;  yet  it  is  more  commonly  equivalent  to  except  or  be- 
sides, as:  praeter  te  amicum  neminem  habeo,  except  you  I  have 
no  friend;  praeter  auctoritatem  etiam  vires  habet,  besides  au* 
thority  he  has  also  strength. 

Particular  Phrases: 
praeter  spem,  contrary  to  hope;  praeter  modum,  immoderate- 
ly;   praeter  cetSros,  more  than  the  rest. 

648.  pr6pe,  near,  near  by,  as:  prope  urbem,  near  the  city. 

649.  propter  is  equivalent  to  propS,  near,  as:  propter  Si- 

ciliam  insulae  Yulcaniae  sunt,  near  Sicily  are  the  Vulcanian 
islands;  but  most  frequently  it  is  on  account  of,  implying  motive  or 
reason,  as:  propter  modestiam  tuam  te  diligo,  /  love  you  on 
account  of  your  modesty, 

650.  seeundiiin  (derived  from  sSqui,  to  follow)  means: 
along,   as:  secundum  mare  iter  facere,  to  make  a  journey 

along  the  sea  shore; 

next  to,  immediately  after,  as:  secundum  cenam,  imme- 
diately after  dinner; 

according  to,  as:  secundum  nattiram  vivSre,  to  live  according 
to  nature. 


I 


201 


651.  supra,  above  (opposite  to  infra)  denotes: 
higher  in  place,  as:  supra  lunam,  above  the  moon; 

more  than,  supeinor  to,  as:  supra  duos  menses,  mofe  than 
two  months;  supra  vires,  above  one^s  strength, 

652.  traus,  beyond,  across,  on  the  other  side,  is  used  with 
verbs  expressing  motion,  as:  multae  aves  ante  liiemem  trans  mare 
migrant,  many  birds  migrate  across  the  sea  before  ivinter;  also 
\yith  verbs  expressing  rest,  as:  eo  ipso  tempore  trans  mare  fui,  at 
that  very  time  I  was  beyond  the  sea. 

653.  versus,  towards,  -ward,  follows  an  accusative  which  is 
usually  governed  by  M  or  in,  as:  ad  Oceanum  versus  proficisci, 
to  set  out  totvards  the  ocean.  With  domus  and  names  of  towns 
versus  alone  is  used,  as:  Komam  versus,  Eomeward;  domuni 
versus,  homeward. 

654.  ultra  signifies  beyond,  on  the  further  side.SiS:  ultra 
Atlantem  montem,  beyond  mount  Atlas.  It  is  also  used  to  denote 
measure,  as:  ultra  septa  transilire,  to  go  beyond  bounds. 

[91.  92.  237,  238.] 

Prepositions  construed  with  the  Ablative. 
a,  5,b,  abs,  cum,  de, 
cor  am,  pro,  ex,  e, 
tenus,  sin6,  prae. 

655.  a  (ab,  abs),  from,  is  used  in  a  variety  of  applications;  it 
denotes: 

the  point  of  time  or  space  at  which  the  action,  state,  etc.  are 
regarded  as  setting  out,  or  beginning,  as:  a  prima  aetate,  from  an 
early  age;  ab  urbe  profectus  est,  he  departed  from  the  city; 

that  from  which  anything  proceeds  or  by  which  anything  is 
-  produced,  as:  calor  est  a  sole,  t7ie  heat  is  from  the  sun;  ab  hoste 
interfectus  est,  he  was  killed  by  an  enemy; 

that  from  which  anything  is  guarded,  with  such  verbs  as  de- 
fendere,  tiieri,  etc.,  as:  urbem  defendere  ab  hostibus,  to  defeiul  the 
city  against  the  enemy; 

ihdX  with  reference  to  which  anything  is  or  is  done,  equivalent 
to  with  respect  to,  as:  imparati  sumus  a  militibus,  as  to  soldiers 
we  are  not  ready. 

Before  vowels  and  h,  it  is  3,b;  before  consonants,  a  or  3,b; 
abs  before  te,  but  we  say  also  a  te,  never  ab  t6. 

656.  absque,  without^  is  rarely  us^d, 


—     202     — 

657,  de  primarily  means  down  from  or  away  from^  as:  de 
caelo,  down  from  heaven;  de  vita  decedere,  to  depart  from  life. 
It  is  also  used  in  a  ^partitive  sense  in  such  expressions  as:  unus  de 
plebe,  one  of  the  people.  When  denoting  time,  it  is  as  early  as, 
even  at,  as:  de  nocte,  even  at  night]  de  mense  Decembri,  as 
early  as  December.  Most  commonly,  however,  it  is  concerning, 
about  or  on,  as:  de  gestis  Alexandri,  on  the  exploits  of  Alexander. 
liber  de  amicitia,  a  book  on  friendship.  Sometimes  it  is  equivalent 
to  secundum,  according  to,  as:  de  consilio  meo,  according  to  my 
advice;  and  frequently  it  denotes  the  manner  of  action,  as:  denuo 
(de  novo),  de  integro,  afresh;  de  improvlso,  unexpectedly;  de  in- 
dustrla,  purposely;  qua  de  causa,  quibus  de  causis,  for  which  reason 
or  reasons. 

658,  coram,  in  the  presence  of  before,  as:  coram  amico, 
in  the  presence  of  a  friend.  When  used  as  an  adverb,  coram 
mesius  personally,  as:  coram  adesse,  to  be  present  in  person. 

659,  cum,  with,  expresses  association  or  accompanying 
circumstances,  as:  cum  allquo  ire,  to  go  tvith  some  one;  esse  cum 
telo,  to  go  armed;  confligere  cum  hoste,  to  fight  with  the  enemy. 

cum  with  the  Ablative  of  a  Personal  Pronoun  is  always  appended 
to  it,  as:  tecum  loquitur,  he  talks  with  you;  and  commonly  also  with 
the  Relative:  quocum,  quibuscum  (likewise  cum  quo,  cum  quibus); 
quicum  is  used  for  the  Ablative  of  both  numbers  and  all  genders. 

660,  e,  ex,  out  of  from,  denotes: 

the  place,  answering  to  the  question  whence?  as:  aliquem  ex 
regno  pellere,  to  drive  some  one  out  of  the  kingdom;  e  longinquo 
videre,  to  see  from  afar;  ex  equo  pugnare,  to  fight  on  horseback; 

the  point  of  time  from  which,  as:  ex  illo  die,  from  that  day; 

the  cause  out  of  which  anything  proceeds,  as:  ex  nihilo  nihil  fit, 
of  nothing  nothing  comes;  aeger  ex  vulnere,  sick  from  a  wound; 
ex  quo,  ivhence  or  for  which  reason. 

In  a  great  many  cases  e  (ex)  has  the  signification  in  accordance 
with,  as:  ex  ejus  sententia,  according  to  his  opinion;  or  it  denotes 
the  manner  of  an  action,  as:  ex  animo  laudare,  to  praise  heartily; 
ex  improvlso,  unexpectedly.  In  such  phrases  as:  unus  e  multis,  one 
of  many,  it  is  used  in  a  partitive  sense. 

Mark  the  Particular  Phrases: 
ex  tua  re,  to  your  advantage;  e  republica,  for  the  good,  of  the  state. 

gefore  consonants  it  is  ej  before  vowels  and  consonants,  ex. 


—    203    — 

661.  pro  means: 

before  or  in  front  off  preceding  in  space,  as:  pro  castris  aciem 
instruere,  to  array  the  army  for  battle  before  the  camp; 

for  =  in  defence  of  in  behalf  of  as:  pro  patria  mori,  to  die  for 
one's  country; 

for  =  instead  of  as:  pro  consule,  in  place  of  consul; 

in  accordance  with  or  in  proportion  tOy  as:  pro  portione,  in 
proportion;  pro  virlli  parte,  to  the  best  of  one's  ability. 

662.  prae  is  before  =  in  front  of  only  in  combination  with 
agerg  and  ferre,  as:  prae  se  ferre,  to  carry  before  one's  self  I  e.  to 
show.  Most  commonly  it  means:  in  comparison  with,  in  contrast 
withy  as:  prae  me  beatus  es,  in  comparison  with  me  you  are 
happy;  it  is  also  frequently  used  in  the  sense  of  on  account  of  im- 
plying an  obstacle,  as:  prae  lacrimis  scribSre  non  possum,  I  cannot 
write  on  account  of  tears. 

663.  tenus,  as  far  as,  follows  its  noun,  as:  Tauro  tenus,  as 
far  as  Taurus;  hoc  tenus,  hitherto, 

664.  sine,  withouty  opposed  to  cum,  has  a  negative  power, 
hence  we  say:  sine  ulla  spe,  without  any  hope. 

[93.  94,  239.  240,] 

Prepositions  construed  with  the  Accusative  &  Ablative. 
stib,  stiper,  subter,  in. 

665.  stib  and  in,  when  followed  by  the  Accusative,  indicate 
motion  towards,  when  by  the  Ablative,  rest  in,  a  place* 

666.  siib  with  the  Accusative  means: 

under ^  close  to,  as:  sub  montem  succedSre,  to  come  close  to 

the  hill; 

about,  shortly  before,  of  time,  as:  sub  noctem,  towards  night; 
sub  lucem,  near  daylight; 

667.  sub  with  the  Ablative  is  always: 

under,  as:  sub  terra  habitare,  to  live  under  ground;  sub  divo, 
in  the  open  air;  sub  monte,  at  the  foot  of  a  hill. 

668.  super  has  the  Ablative  only  when  used  in  the  sense  of  de. 
concerning,  as:  hac  super  re,  concerning  this  thing.  With  the 
Accusative  it  is  over,  above,  answering  to  the  questions  whither? 
and  where?   as:  super  aliquem  sedSre,  to  sit  above  some  one. 

Particular  Phrases:  vulnus  super  vulnus,  wound  upon  wound; 
super  ceuam,  during  dinner. 


—     204     — 

669.  subtCr,  beneath^  takes  the  Aoowative  answering  to  the 
questions  whither?  and  rcherc?  as:  subter  togam,  under  the  toga. 

670.  In,  with  the  Accusative  denotes  entrance  with  regard  to 
place,  as:  in  urbem  venit,  he  came  into  town;  it  also  indicates  the 
object  toward  which  an  action  is  directed,  either  with  a  friendly  or 
hostile  intention,  as:  amor  in  patrem,  love  for  one's  father;  oratio 
in  CatilTnam,  a  speech  against  Catiline,  With  words  denoting 
time  it  is  equivalent  to  for,  expressing  a  predetermination  of  that 
time,  as:  in  diem  viv6re,  to  live  for  Vie  day;  in  perpetilum, 
forever;  in  dies,  from  day  to  day, 

Mark  the  Adverbial  Expressions:  hunc  in  modum,  in  this  way; 
mirum  in  modum,  in  a  tvonderful  manner;  in  vicem,  alternately 
or  instead  of 

671.  In  with  the  Ablative,  denotes  presence  in  place,  time  or 
circumstances,  as:  in  urbe  habito,  /  live  in  town;  est  mihi  in 
animo,  I  have  it  in  mind;  in  scribendo,  while  writing.  When  a 
Number  or  Quantity  is  indicated,  it  is  equivalent  to  among,  as: 
numerari  in  bonis  civlbus,  to  be  counted  among  the  good  citizens. 

195.  96.  1S7.  ISS,  239,  240, \ 
TIME. 

672.  Time  when  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative  of 
words  denoting  time,  such  as: 

tempos,  time  saecilliim,  a  century 

aetas,  an  age  vfir,  spring 

punctum  tempOris,  a  moment  aestas,  summer 

hora,  an  hour  auctumuus,  autumn 

dies,  a  day  hiems,  winter 

mensis,  a  month  vesp6r,  evening 

annils,  a  year  nox,  night 

Hannibalis  milites  vere  conve-  HannibaFs   soldiers  assembled 
nCre  in  spring. 

673.  Words  not  explicitly  expressing  time,  such  as:  bellum, 
p^,  piiSritia,  usually  take  in  with  the  Ablative,  but  they  are  without 
!n,  if  accompanied  by  an  Ac^ective  or  Genitive.    So  we  say: 

in  bello,  in  war  times  bello  PersTco,  at  the  time  of  the 

in  pace,  in  time  of  peace  Persian  loar 

in  pueritia,  in  boyhood  prima  pueritia,  in  earhj  boyhood 

in  adulescentia,  in  youth  bello  Anti6chi,  during  the  war 

in  senectate,  in  old  age  with  Antiochus, 


—     205     — 

Particular  Phrases. 

^.^^^.  .    I  at  the  beginning  temporibus  )  .^  ^j^^  ^  .^^^ 

principio )  aetate  J  '^ 

adventu,  at  the  arrival  ludis,  during  the  games 

iiscessu,  at  the  departure  bis  die,  twice  a  day 

[  tempore,  at  the  right  time  hora  nona,  at  9  o'clock 

674.  Time  how  long  is  put  in  the  Accusative. 

Appius  caecus  multos  annos  fiiit,  Appius  was  blind  many  years. 

The  Preposition  p6r  may  be  used  to  denote  from  beginning  to 

id,  as:  est  mecum  per  totum  diem,  he  is  with  me  the  livelong  day. 

Time  how  long  since  may  be  expressed  by  an  ordinal  number  in 
the  Accusative,  as: 

Mithridates  jam  annum  tertium    Mithridates  has  reigned  going 
et  vicesimum  regnat  on  S3  years. 

Time  how  long  before  the  present  moment  is  expressed  by  ^bhinc 
with  the  Accusative,  as:  abhinc  sex  menses,  six  months  ago, 

675.  Distance  of  time  how  long  before  or  after  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  Ablative  with  ante  or  post  following: 

paucis  diebus  ante,  a  few  days  before 
paucis  diebus  post,  a  few  days  afterward. 

The  Accusative  can  also  be  employed,  but  then  the  Preposition 
precedes,  thus:  ante,  post  paucos  dies. 

Either  Case  and  the  cardinal  as  well  as  the  ordinal  numbers  may 
be  used,  when  the  Preposition  is  placed  between  the  Numeral  and  the 
Substantive.    Hence  the  English  phrase  three  years  after  may  be 
-  expressed  as  follows: 

tribus  annis  post  post  tres  annos 

tertio  anno  post  post  teitium  annum 

tribus  post  annis  tres  post  annos 

tertio  post  anno  tertium  post  annum 

qu^m  and  a  verb  may  be  added  to  antS  and  post  in  all  the 
forms  above  specified,  as: 

tribus  annis  postquam  venSrat         ■^ 
post  tres  annos  quam  ven^rat  I  three  years  after  he 

tertio  anno  postquam  venSrat  [  had  come. 

iH^.      post  annum  tertium  quam  venSrat  ) 


—     206    — 

676.  Time  within  which  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative 

or  by  intra  with  the  Accusative : 

Agamemnon  vix   decem  annis     Agamemnon     in     ten    years 
(intra    decem    annos)    unam       hardly  took  one  city, 
cepit  urbem 

677.  Time  for  how  long  is  expressed  by  in  with  the 

Accusative,  as: 

Phaeton  currum  paternum  in    Phaeton  asTced  his  father's  char- 
diem  rogavit  riot  for  a  day. 

678.  The  Question  how  old?  is  answered  in  different  ways: 
By  natiis  (horn)  with  the  Accugative,  as:  puer  decem  annos  natns 

est,  the  hoy  is  ten  years  old; 

By  tlie  (renitive  of  Quality:  Hamilcar  secum  duxit  filium  Hanniba- 
iem  annorum  novem,  Hamilcar  took  with  him  his  son  Hannihal  9 
years  of  age; 

By  agere,  to  pass,  with  annus  and  an  ordinal  number,  as:  quar-^ 
turn  annum  ago  et  octogesimum,  lam  ss  years  old. 

Older  and  younger  are  expressed  by  m^jdr  and.  mlnSr  with 
following  Ablative,  as: 

major  quinque  et  triginta  annis,  older  than  35  years.     {243,  244.y 

SPACE. 

679.  Extent  of  Space  is  put  in  the  Accusative,  as: 

fossa  pedes  trecentos  longa  est,  the  ditch  is  300  feet  long^  6  feet 
sex  pedes  alta  deep, 

680.  Measures  of  lengthy  depth,  etc.,  are  often  expressed  by  the 
Genitive  of  Quality,  as: 

vallum  pedum  duodScim  fieri  he  ordered  a  rampart  to  he 
jussit  made  of  IS  feet  (in  height), 

681.  Distance  Aoi(; /ar  is  put  in  the  Accusative  or 
Ablative,  as: 

a  recta  conscientia  transversum  we  ought  not  to  swerve  a  naiVs 
unguem  non  oportet  discedere  breadth  from  a  right  con- 
science 

copiae  Ariovisti  a  Eomanis  mi-  the  troops  of  Ariovistus  were 
libus  quattuor  et  viginti  afue-  twenty  four  miles  from  the 
runt        •  Romans,  [24i.  242.] , 


I—     201     — 
PLACE. 
682.    To   express  relations  of  Place,    Frepositions 
are  necessary,  viz.: 

in  with  the  Ablative  to  denote  the  place  wJiere,  as:  in  urbe,  in  town; 
in  or  ad  with  the  Accusative  to  denote  the  place  to  which,  as:  in 

Europam,  to  Europe;  ad  urbem,  to  town; 
ex  with  the  Ablative  to  denote  the  place  jrom  whichj  as:  ex  Britan- 
nia, from  Great  Britain. 

683.  But  the  Prepositions  are  not  used  with  the 
names  of  Towns  and  small  Islands. 

In  answer  to  the  question  whither?  names  of  towns  and  small 
islands  are  put  in  the  Accusative  Case,  as:  Romam  venit,  he  came 
to  Rome. 

In  answer  to  the  question  whence?  the  names  of  towns  and  small 
islands  are  put  in  the  Ablative  Case,  as:  Roma  cessit,  he  retired 
from  Rome, 

In  answer  to  the  question  where?  the  names  of  towns  and  small 
islands,  if  of  the  first  or  second  declension  and  in  the  singular, 
are  put  in  the  Genitive  Case,  as:  Romae  mansit,  he  remained  at 
Rome.  But  if  the  names  are  of  the  plural  number  or  belong  to 
the  third  declension,  they  are  put  in  the  Ablative  Case,  as:  Babylone 
mortuus  est,  he  died  at  Babylon.  (For  the  place  where  there 
was  formerly  a  special  Case,  the  Locative,  ending  in  i  which  is 
preserved  in  Carthagini,  at  Carthage;  ruri,  in  the  country j  etc.) 

684.  urbs  or  oppidum  without  an  Attribute  is  placed  before 
the  proper  name,  and  the  preposition  in  or  ex  is  always  em- 
ployed, as: 

in  urbem  Cirtam  to  the  city  of  Cirta  . 

ex  oppido  Gergovia  from  the  town  of  Gergovia 

in  urbe  Roma  in  the  city  of  Rome. 

685.  urbs  or  oppidum  loith  an  Attribute  is  placed  after  the 
proper  name,  commonly  with  in  or  ex.  But  in  answer  to  the  question 
where?  the  Ablative  may  be  used  with  or  without  in,  even  though 
the  proper  name  be  in  the  Genitive. 

Aulide,  ex  oppido  Boeotlae  from  Aulis,  a  town  of  Boeotia 

Thalam,  in  oppidum  magnum         to  Thala^  a  great  town 
Albae,  (in)  urbe  munlta         .        at  Alba,  a  fortified  city. 


—     208     — 

686.  The  following  words  are  used  like  names  of 
towns,  without  a  preposition: 

rus,  into  the  country     domum,  home 

rur6,  from  the  country  domo,  from  home     hiimo,  from  the  ground 
run,  in  the  country       domi,  at  home  hiiml,  on  the  ground 

domi  militiaeque,  at  home  and  in  the  field 
belli  domiquS,  in  war  and  in  peace 
foras,  to  the  doors;  forls,  out-of-doors^  abroad, 
A  Crenitive  or  Possessive  may  be  used  with  dointis  in  this  con- 
struction, but  when  it  is  modified  in  any  other  way,  a  preposition  is 
generally  employed,  as: 

domi  meae,  at  my  house;  domum  Caesaris,  to  Gaesai^'s  house; 
in  domum  vetSrem  e  nova,  to  the  old  house  from  the  new. 

687.  The  Ablative  is  used  without  a  preposition  to 

denote  the  place  where : 

With  nouns  when  qualified  by  the  Adjective  totfis,  or  cunctus: 
Demosthenes  disertissimus  tota    Demosthenes  was  the  most  elo- 

Graecia  fuit  .  quent  man  in  all  Greece; 

With  16c o,  I6cis  when  qualified  by  Adjectives: 
hoc  loco,  multis  locis  in  this  j)lace,  in  many  places. 

688.  The  way  by  which  is  put  in  the  Ablative: 
terra  marique  by  sea  and  by  land 

Appia  via  profectus  est  he  set  out  by  the  Appian  way. 

689.  The  Ppeposition  Tn  is  generally  joined  with  the  Ablative  after 
Verbs  of  Placing,  as: 

ponere,  to  place        statiierS      |  ^^     .    demerg6r6,  to  plunge 
collocare,  iopui        constitueref  imprimerej  to  stamp 

consid^r^f  to  settle    d^figere,  to  plant     mscrlh^rej  to  write  upon 
Plato  rationem  in  capite  posuit     Plato  has  put  reason  in  the  head 
Lucretia  cultrum  in   corde   defi-    Lucretia  plants  a  knife  in  her 
git  heart 

690.  Again,   after  Verbs  of  Assembling  and  kindred  signi- 
fications the  Preposition  in  is  followed  by  the  Accusative.    Such  are: 

advenirg,  to  arrive    congregarl,  to  assemble    cogere,  to  assemble 
convenire,  to  meet     nuntiare,  to  bring  word 
conjurati  in  curiam  convenerunt    the    conspirators   met  in   the 

senate  house. 

Il9t,  192.  241,  242.] 


I 


I 


—     209     — 


Special  Uses  of  Substantives. 
S91,    In  place  of  the  Abstract  expressions:  in  pueritia,   in 
adulescentia,  in  senectute,  in  stating  the  age  at  which  a  person  per- 
formed any  action,   the  Latin  employs  the  Concretes  pu6r,   adii- 
lescens,  senex;  ab  infante,  a  parvulo,  from  childhood. 

692.  When  official  titles  are  used  to  indicate  time,  the  con- 
crete nouns  consul,  praetor,  &c.,  are  used  instead  of  consiilatiis, 
praetura,  &c.  as:  L.  Pisone,  A  Gabinio  consulibus,  in  the  consulship 
of  L.  Fiso  and  A.  Gabinius. 

693.  Again,  Abstract  nouns  are  sometimes  used  instead  of 
Concretes,  as:    nobilitas    for  nobiles,  noblemen 

posteritas   **    posted,  descendants 
vicinitas      ^^    vicini,  neighbors. 

694.  In  Latin,  Abstract  nouns  when  referring  to  several  objects 
or  denoting  repetition  at  different  times  admit  of  plural  use^  as: 

adventus  imperatorum,  the  arrival  of  the  generals; 
interitCis  exercitiium,  the  destruction  of  the  armies. 

695.  Some  Abstract  nouns  take  such  a  modified  sense  as  to 
admit  of  pZura/ use,  as:  fortitudines,  gallant  actions;  irae,  quarrels. 

696.  Symmetrical  parts  of  the  human  body  are  usually  in  the 
plural,  as:  cervices,  the  neck;  pectora,  the  breast;  also  words  denot- 
ing phenomena  of  nature,  as:  nives,  snow;  grandines,  hail;  pluviae, 
rain. 

697 .r    Other  Plural  expressions  to  be  noted  are: 
ligna,  (logs  of)  wood  carnes,  pieces  of  meat 

SLera.^  articles  of  bronze  vinsiy  kinds  of  wine. 

698.  The  Singular,  in  a  Collective  sense,  is  sometimes  used 
for  the  plural,  as: 

_     pedes,  infantry  faba,  beans 

miles,  the  soldiery  porcus,  pork 

eques,  cavalry  gallina,  fowl 

hostis,  the  enemy  vestis,  clothing. 

699.  A  Proper  name  may  ba  applied  to  two  or  more  members 
of  the  same  family,  or  to  persons  of  the  same  character,  and  so 
becomes  strictly  common  as:  Horatii,  the  Horatii;  Nerones,  Neros 
(tyrants). 

700.  The  Substantive  nemS  is  often  used  with  other  Substan- 
tives so  as  to  become  equivalent  to  the  Adjective  nulliis,  as:  nemo 
civis,  no  citizen.  It  wants  the  genitive  and  ablative.  The  oblique  casea 
of  nihil  are  supplied  by  the  respective  cases  of  niUla  res. 


—    210    — 

Special  Uses  of  Adjectives. 

701.  Adjectives  are  often  used  as  Substantives.  In  the  Plural 
masculine  adjectives  denote  persons^  neuter  adjectives  things, 

pauperes,  the  poor  humana,  human  affairs 

divites,  the  rich  omnia,  all  things 

omnes,  all  men  vSra,  truth. 

702.  The  Neuter  Singular  may  denote  either  a  single  object 
or  a  quality y  as: 

hbnestum,  an  honorable  act  bonum,  a  good 

malum,  an  evil  pulchrum,  beauty 

703.  Adjectives  are  often  used  in  Latin  where  the  English  has 
the  Possessive^  or  a  noun  with  a  preposition^  as: 

domus  regia,  a  hinges  palace 
■  pugna  Cannensis,  the  fight  at  Cannae 
iter  campestre,  a  journey  across  country 
aligna  domus,  another  man^s  house 
Miltiades  Atheniensis,  Miltiades  of  Athens. 

704.  The  first  part,  last  part,  middle  part  of  any  place  or  time 
are  generally  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  Adjectives  primus,  mediiis, 
ultimus,  infimus,  Imiis,  summus,  reliquus,  as:  media  nox,  tJie  middle 
of  the  night;  summa  arbor,  the  top  of  the  tree;  suprgmi  montes,  the 
summits  of  the  mountains. 

705.  The  Comparative  sometimes  has  the  force  of  too,  un-^ 
usually,  somewhat,  and  the  Superlative  of  very,  as:  brevior,  rather 
short;  audacior,  too  bold;  amicus  carissimus,  a  very  dear  friend] 
Cato,  homo  doctissimus,  Cato,  a  very  learned  man. 

706.  The  force  of  the  Comparative  is  increased  by  multo, 
much,  far;  Aliquant o,  some  more,  considerably;  etiam,  even, 
still,  as:  multo  melior,  much  better;  etiam  doctior,  still  more 
learned. 

707.  The  Superlative  is  strengthened  by  longe,  by  far; 
multo,  much;  vel,  even;  uniis  omnium,  one  above  all  others; 
quam,  quantus  potuit,  as.  .asj)ossible;  as:  multo  maxima  pars, 
by  far  the  largest  part;  quam  maximae  copiae ,  forces  as  large  as 
possible;  sophistes  vel  maximus,  the  very  greatest  sophist, 

708.  When  two  qualities  of  the  same  object  are  compared,  both 
adjectives  (or  adverbs)  are  in  the  Comparative,  as:  est  doctior  quam 
sapientior,  he  is  more  learned  than  wise.  Where  magis  quam  i» 
used,  both  Adjectives  are  in  the  Positive:  amicus  tuus  disertus  ma- 
gis est  quam  sapiens,  your  friend  is  eloquent  rather  than  wise. 


I 


—     211 


709.  The  Comparative  is  to  be  used  in  reference  to  only  two 
objects;  the  Superlative  when  comparing  more  than  two  objects,  as: 
uter  fratrum  natu  major  est?  Which  of  the  two  brothers  is  the  older? 
Quaerltur  ex  duobus  uter  dignior,  ex  pluribus  quis  dignissimus;  the 
question  is:  Of  two,  which  is  the  worthier;  of  more,  which  is  the 
woi^thiest 

!  Special   Uses  of  Pronouns. 

710.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns  of  the  First  and  Se- 
cond Persons  are  not  expressed  in  Latin  except  for  distinction  or 
emphasis,  as:  amamus  parentes,  we  love  our  j)arents. 

711.  As  a  rule,  the  Reflexive  Pronoun  siiT,  sibi,  se  and  its 
Possessive  suiis,  are  used  when  reference  is  made  to  the  Subject  of 
the  sentence;  as:  Caesar  se  ad  sues  recepit,  Caesar  betook hiinself  to 
his  men. 

The  Possessive  suus  may  also  be  used  with  reference  to  any  noun 
in  the  same  sentence  on  which  emphasis  is  thrown,  as: 
Socratem  cives  sui   interfecS-    Socrates  was  put  to  death  by 

runt  his  own  fellow -citizens 

puer   columbam  cepit  in   nido    the  boy  caught  the  dove  in  its 
sue  nest. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  Determinatives  ejus,  eorum,  earum  are  used 
as  Possessives  of  the  third  person,  when   7io  emphasis  appears,  or 
when  reference  is  made  to  a  noun  in  another  sentence,  as: 
Deum  agnoscis  ex  operibus  ejus    you  recognize  God  by  his  works 
multi  cives  interfecti,  eorum-    many  citizens  were  slain,  and 
que  bona  publicata  sunt  their  property  confiscated. 

To  express  reciprocal  action  inter  se  is  regularly  used,  as: 
araant  inter  se,  they  love  one  another. 

712,  hie,  this^  refers  to  that  which  is  nearer  the  speaker  (De- 
monstrative of  the  First  Person);  iste,  that  (of  yours)  to  the  person  ad- 
dressed (Demonstrative  of  the  Second  Person);  ille,  that,  to  that  which  is 
remote  (Demonstrative  of  the  Third  Person). 

liic  very  frequently  means  that  which  is  about  to  be  mentioned^ 
as:  his  condicionlbus,  on  the  following  terms; 

iste  especially  refers  to  one's  opponent  (in  court,  etc.)  and  fre- 
quently implies  contempt,  as:  Mars  alter,  ut  isti  volunt,  a  second 
Mars,  as  those  fellows  say; 

ille  is  often  used  of  that  which  is  .well  known,  notorious,  as: 
praeclarum  iilud  Solonis,  that  famous  saying  of  Solon.  It  is  also 
used  in  the  sense  of  the  following. 


—     212     — 

713,  Often  hie  and  ille  are  to  be  rendered  the  latter  and  the 
former  (hic,  the  one  last  mentioned,  the  nearer;  ille,  the  one  men- 
tioned earlier,  the  remoter)^  thus: 

*  melius  de  quibusdam  acerbi  ini-    hitter  enemies  deserve  better  of 

mici  merentur  quam  ii  amici,        some     people     than      those 

qui     suaves    videntur ;     illi       friends  who  seem  obliging; 

saepe  verum  dicunt,  hi  nun-        the  former   often   tell    the 

quam.  truth^  the  latter  never. 

But  the  order  is  often  reversed  so  that  hic  refers  to  the  object 

first  mentioned  (usually  the  more  important),  and  ille  to  the  one 

mentioned  last. 

melior  est  certa  pax  quam  spe-  better  is  certain  peace  than 
rata  victoria;  haec  in  tua,  hoped-for  victory;  the  former 
ilia  in  deorum  manu  est  is  in  your  hands,  the  latter 

in  the  hands  of  the  gods. 

714,  is,  that,  is  either  the  regular  Antecedent  of  the  Relative  or 
refers  to  an  Object  just  mentioned. 

is  sapiens  est,  qui  se  ad  casus  he  is  a  wise  man  who  accom* 
accommodet  omiies  modates  h  imself  to  all  c  ircum^ 

stances 

mihi  obviam  venit  tuns  puer;  is  I  was  met  by  your  servant;  he 
mihi  litteras  abs  te  reddidit  delivered  to  me  a  letter  front^ 

you. 

715,  When  a  quality  is  ascribed  with  emphasis  to  an  object 
already  named,  is  with  a  copulative  or  adversative  particle  is  used, 
thus; 

5t  is,  atque  is,  isque,  and  he  too,  and  that  too 
neque  is,  et  is  non,  and  he  not,  and  that  not 
unam  rem    explicabo,    eamque    one  point  I  shall  explain,  and 
maximam  that,  too,  a  very  important  one. 

716,  No  demonstrative  pronoun  is  employed  in  Latin  in  phrases 
where  that  or  those  in  English  is  used  in  place  of  a  noun  which  would 
have  to  be  repeated: 

Terentii  fabulis  plus  delector  I  find  more  delight  in  the  plays 
quam  Plauti  of  Terence  than  in  those  of 

Plautus. 

717,  idem  is  often  equivalent  to  an  adverb  or  an  adverbial 
phrase  (also,  likewise,  yet,  atihe  same  time),  as:  Quidquid  honestum 
est,  idem  est  utile.  Whatever  is  honorable  is  at  the  same  time 
useful 


—     213    — 

718,  ipse,  self^  is  used  with  any  of  tlie  other  pronouns  or  a 
noun  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  often  expressed  in  English  hjjust, 
mere  J  very,  as:  triginta  erant  dies  ipsi,  it  was  just  30  days. 

When  added  to  any  reflexive  pronoun,  ipse  agrees  either  with 
such  pronoun  or  with  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  according  as  either 
is  emphatic;  as: 

piger  ipse  sibi  obstat,  the  lazy  man  stands  in  his  own  way; 

nosce  te  ipsuni !  know  thyself! 

719,  For  the  agreement  of  Relatives  see  551,  foil. 

The  Antecedent,  and  the  Adjective  or  Apposition  of  the  ante- 
cedent are  often  incorporated  into  the  Relative  clause,  as:  in 
quem  primum  egressi  sunt  locum  Troja  vocaturj  the  first  place  they 
landed  at  was  called  Troy. 

720,  The  Interrogative  quis?  is  used  substantively  and  ad- 
jectively;  qui?  mostly  adjectively.  Thus  we  say:  quis  rex?  which 
king?  inquiring  for  the  individual;  but  qui  homo?  what  man?  in- 
quiring for  the  character. 

721,  The  Indefinite  Pronouns  are  used  to  indicate  that  some 
person  or  thing  is  meant,  without  indicating  what  one, 

722,  aiiquis  means  some  one  or  other,  as:  fecit  hoc  aliquis 
tui  similis,  some  one  or  other  like  you  did  this]  aliquid  consuetudini 
dandum  est,  something  must  be  allowed  to  custom. 

723,  quis  (fainter  than  aliquis)  is  used  chiefly  after  Relatives 
and  the  following  Conjunctions: 

si,  if;  nisi,  if  not;  ne,  lest;  niim,  whether;  ciiiu,  when. 
aliquis  after  si  and  the  rest  is  emphatic. 
ne  quid  nimis!  nothing  in  excess! 
ne  qua  significatio  fiat,  that  no  sign  may  be  made. 

724,  quisqu3/in  (subst.)  and  uUQs  (adj.)  mean  any  one  at  all, 
and  are  chiefly  used  in  negative,  interrogative,  and  conditional  sen- 
tences, also  after  sine,  without;  vix,  scarcely,  quam,  than. 

neque  ex  castris  Catilinae  quis-  nor  had  any  one  departed  from 

quam  omnium  discesserat  the  camp  of  Catiline 

legati  sine  uUa  spe  pacis  domum  the  ambassadors  returned  home 

redigrunt  without  any  hope  of  peace 

legati  non  sine  aliqua  spe  pacis  the  ambassadors  returned  home, 

domum  redierunt  not    without   som^   hope   of 

peace. 


—    214    — 

72if.  quidSm,  means  one,  a,  a  certain  one;  in  the  plural  it  is 
equivalent  to  some,  sundry,  as:  qui  dam  rhetor  antiquus,  a  certaiTi 
ancient  rhetorician;  certi  quidam  homines,  some  reliable  persons. 

726.  unusquisqiiS  means  every  single  one;  quivis  &  qui- 
libSt,  any  one  you  like;  quisque,  each  one;  omnes,  all  together. . 

727.  The  Distributive  quisque  is  used: 

After  the  reflexive  pronoun,  siii,  sibi,  se,  and  its  possessive 
suus,  as:  sua  culque  voluptas,  each  man  has  his  hobby; 

With  Superlatives  and  Ordinals,  as:  optimum  quid  que  rarissi- 
mum  est,  the  best  is  the  rarest,  or  every  good  thing  is  rare,  or  th& 
better  a  thing  ^  the  rarer  it  is;  quinto  quoque  anno,  every  fifth  year, 

728.  Sliiis  is  simply  another;  alter,  is  the  other  of  two,  or 
the  second;  cSteri,  all  the  rest  or  others. 

729.  The  expressions  alius  . .  alius,    alt€r . .  alter  may  be 

used  in  a  reciprocal  sense:  pueri  alter  alterum  amant,  the  boys  love 
each  other,  ^litis  repeated  in  difi'erent  propositions  is  translated 
one  —  another;  aliud  agitur,  aliud  simulatur,  one  thing,  is  done, 
another  pretended,  alii . .  SlliT,  is  some,  .others;  alteri.  .alteri, 
one  party ..  another  party,  aliils  with  another  case  of  the  same 
word  may  be  translated  by  two  separate  propositions  commencing 
with  one-another  respectively;  as:  aliud  alii  natura  iter  ostendit,^ 
nature  shows  one  path  to  one  man,  another  path  to  another  man. 

[243.  246.1 

Syntax  of  the  Verb. 
Use  of  Tenses. 

730.  There  are  Six  Tenses  in  Latin,  viz.: 

Of  Continued  Action. 

the  Present,  as:  scribo,  I  am  writing; 

the  Imperfect,  used  chiefly  for  description  or  repeated  action,  as: 
scrlbebam,  I  was  writing; 

the  Future,  as:  scribam,  I  shall  write. 

Of  Completed  Action: 

the  Perfect,  either  definite  or  historical,  as:  scrips!,  I  have  ivritten 
(definite),  or:  /'M;ro^e  (historical); 

the  Pluperfect,  as:  scripsgram,  I  had  written; 

the  Future  Perfect,  as:  scripsero,  I  shall  have  written. 


I 


—    215    — 


731.  The  Present  is  used  of  what  is  going  on  now, 
at  the  present  time,  and  of  what  is  true  at  all 
times,  as: 

loqueris  adhuc,  cum  omnes  ta-    you  are  still  speaJcing  while  all 

cent  are  silent 

fortes  forttina  adjiivat  fortune  helps  the  brave. 

732.  The  Present  is  often  substituted  for  the  Historical  Perfect 
in  lively  narration,  as: 

triginta  rectores  reipublicae  SO  rulers  of  the  Athenian  corrim 
Atheniensis  constituuntur,  qui  monwealth  are  appointed^  who 
fiunt  tyranni  become  tyrants. 

733.  The  Present  is  used  in  Latin  to  express  a  past  action  or 
state  which  is  continued  so  as  to  be  present  also,  especially  with  jam, 
now;  jamdiu,  now  for  along  time;  jam  pridem,  now  long  sincCj  as: 

tot  annos  bella  gero  for  so  many  years  I  have  waged 

and  am  still  waging  war, 

734.  The  Present  is  regularly  used  with  dum,  while,  though  the 
time  referred  to  is  past,  as: 

haec  dum  aguntur,  Caesari  nun-  while  this  is  going  on^  word 
tiatum  est  was  brought  to  Caesar. 

735.  The  Imperfect  denotes  an  action  continuing  in 
the  past,  but  not  then  accomplished.  It  is  employed 
to  describe  manners,  customs  and  situations. 

scribebam  epistulam,  cum  am!-  I  was  luriting  a  letter  when  my 

cus  adesset  friend  came 

ante  oppidum  planities  patebat  before  the  town  extended  a  plain 

Pausanias  epulabatur  more  Per-  Pausanias  was  wont  to  banquet 

sarum  in  the  Persian  style. 

736.  The  Future  represents  an  action  that  is  yet  to 
come.  In  subordinate  clauses  it  is  used  with  much 
greater  exactness  in  Latin  than  in  English: 

sanabimur,  si  volemus  we  shall  be  healed  if  we  wish. 

The  Future  sometimes  has  the  force  of  an  Imperative: 
in  sudOre  vultus  tui  comedes  pa-    in  the  sweat  of  thy  face  thou 
nem  tuum  '  shalt  eat  thy  bread. 


—    216 


737.  The  Perfect  has  two  distinct  uses: 

I.  As  the  Perfect  Definite  it  denotes  an  action  an 
now  completed,  and  is  rendered  by  the  English  Per- 
fect with  have. 

triste  est  nomeu  carendi,  quia  sad  is  the  phrase  ^^ do  without* 
subjicitur  haec  vis :  habuit,  because  this  meaning  is  at 
non  habet  tributed  to  it:  he  has  had^ 

he  has  no  longer. 

II.  As  the  Historical  Perfect  it  denotes  an  action  as 
completed  in  past  time,  but  leaves  it,  in  other  respects, 

wholly  indeterminate. 

Caesar  armis  rem  gerere  con-  Caesar  resolved  to  use  armec 

stituit,  exercitum  finibus  Ita-  force;  he  advanced  with  hi 

liae  admovit,Kubiconem  trans-  army  to  the  frontiers  of  Italy ^ 

lit,  Romam  et  aerarium  occu-  passed  the  Rubicon^  took  pos* 

pavit,    Pompgjum    cedentem  session    of  Borne    and    tlu 

perseciitus    est,    eumque    in  treasury y   pursued    Pompey 

campis  Pharsalicis  devicit.  and  defeated  him  in  the  plait 

of  Pharsalus 
The  following  Conjunctions: 

postquam     ).^^^  iibi                \ 

postgaquam  1  ubl  primum  f  ^^  ^^^^  ^ 

^^         .     las  soon  as  l^^?J\^    ,    ( 

ut  primum  S  simulatqu6   ) 

are  usually  followed  by  the  Historical  Perfect: 
milites     postquam      victoriam    when  the  soldiers  had  won  the 
adepti  sunt,  nihil  reliqui  vie-       victory^   they  left  nothing  to 
tis  fecSre  the  vanquished. 

738.  The  Pluperfect  is  used  of  an  action  that  was^ 
completed  before  another  was  begun;  as: 

consul  copias,  quas  pro  castris  the  consul  led  back  the  forces 
coUocaverat,  reduxit  which  he  had  stationed  before 

the  camp. 

739.  The  Future  Perfect  denotes  an  action  as  com- 
pleted in  the  future;  it  is  used  with  much   greater 

exactness  in  Latin  than  in  English,  as: 
ut  sementem  fecSris,  ita  metes;  as  you  soWy  so  shall  you  reap. 


\ 


—    21Y    — 

740.  In  the  statement  of  an  action  repeated  before  another,  with 
such  particles  as:  cum,  iibi,  whenever;  simiilac,  as  soon  as;  si,  when; 
and  Relatives,  as:  quotiens,  as  often  as,  the  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  In- 
dicative are  used  —  the  Perfect  referring  to  Present  Time,  the  Plu- 
perfect to  Fast. 

quotiens  cecidit,  surgit,  as  often  as  he  falls j  he  rises, 
quotiens  ceciderat,  surgebat,  as  often  as  he  fell,  he  rose. 
In  like  manner,  in  letters  the  Perfect,  or  Imperfect  may  be  used  for 

the  present  and  the  Pluperfect  for  past  tenses,  as  in  the  phrase:  nihil 

erat  quod  scrib6rem,  I  have  nothing  to  write. 

741.  The  Periphrastic  Conjugations  are  formed  by  combining  the 
tenses  of  ess6  with  the  Future  Participle  (Active),  and  with  the  Ge- 
rundive (Passive). 

The  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation  denotes  either  intention  or 
being  on  the  point  of  doing  something,  as: 
scriptarus  sum,  I  purpose  to  write,  or  am  about  to  write. 
The  Passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation  expresses  necessity  or  pro- 
priety, as: 
parentis  amandi  sunt,  parents  must  be  loved,  deserve  or  ought  to 
be  loved. 

The  Person  by  whom  is  put  in  the  Dative,  as: 
parentes  libgrls  amandi  sunt,  parents  ought  to  be  loved  by  their 

children. 
bellum  scripturus  sum,  quod  po-    I  purpose  to  write  the  history  of 
pulus  Romanus  cum  Jugurtha      thewarwhichtJie  Roman  people 
gessit  carried  on  with  Jugurtha. 

[247,  248.] 

Sequence  of  Tenses. 

742.  When  two  sentences  are  so  related  to  each 
other,  that  the  one  defines  and  explains  the  other, 
or  that  the  one  is  dependent  on  the  other,  they 
are  connected  in  the  way  of  Subordination,  as: 

crepant  aedificia,  priusquam  cadant,  houses  creak  before  they  fall; 
crepant  aedificia  is  the  Principal  Clause, 
priusquam  cadant  is  the  Dependent  Clause. 

The  Subjunctive  is  largely  used  in  Subordinate  Sentences,  and 
will  be  treated  at  length  in  that  connection. 


218 


743,  In  those  Dependent  Clauses  which  require  the  Subjunctive  the 
choice  of  the  tenses  of  the  Dependent  Clause  is  determined  by  the 
tense  of  the  Pi^lncipal  Clause  according  to  the  following 

GENEBAL  RULES. 

I.  Tenses,  in  regard  to  their  connection,  are  divided  into  two 
classes: 

Principal,  including  the  Present^  both  Futures  and  the  Perfect 

Definite; 
Historical,  including  the  Imperfect^  the  Historical  Perfect  and 

the  Pluperfect 

II.  Principal  Tenses  are  followed  by  the  Present  Subjunctive  for 
contemporary  action,  and  by  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  for  antecedent 
action. 

III.  Historical  Tenses  are  followed  by  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive 
for  contemporary  action,  and  by  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  for 
antecedent  action. 

Principal  Clause.  Dependent  Clause. 

Present.      cognosce,  lam  finding 


out 
Future.       cognoscam,  /  shall  find 

out 
Put.  Perf.  cognovSro,  /  shall  have 

foundout  [shallknow) 
Perf.  Defin.  cognovi,   /  have  found 

out  (I  know) 

cognoscebam,  Itvasfind-  r 
ing  out  I 


quid  facias,  what  you  are  do- 
ing 

quid  fecgris,  ivhat  you  have 
done,  what  you  have  been 
doing y  what  you  did 


Imperf. 
Pluperf. 


quid  facSres, 
doing 


what  you  loere 


cognoy  ^rsimj  I  had  Jound\    quid   fecisses,   what  you  had 
out  (I  knew) 


Hist.  Perf.  Caesar  cognovit,  Caesar 
found  out 


I        done,  had  been  doing 
quid  facgrent  hostes,  what  the 

enemy  ivas  doing 
quid  fecissent  hostes,  what  the 

enemy  had  done. 

74:4:.  The  Perfect  Definite,  though  properly  a  Prm- 
cijpal  tense,  is  more  commonly  treated  as  a  Historical 
tense,  and  admits  after  it  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect: 
oblitus  es,  quod  dix6rim-,  you  have  forgotten  what  I  said; 
interrogavi  eum,  quid  fac6ret,  I  have  asked  him  what  he  was  doing; 
feci  hoc,  ut  intellegdres,  I  have  done  this  that  you  might  see. 


i 


r  745.   In  Sentences  of  Result,  with  ut,  qui,  quin,  the 
erb  of  the  Dependent  Clause  has  the  same  tense  as 
it  would  have  if  the  clause  were  a  Principal  one. 

Yerres  Siciliam  ita  perdidit,  ut  Verves  so  ruined  Sicily^  that 
ea  restitui  in  antiquum  sta-  she  can  not  he  restored  to  her 
turn  non  possit  ancient  condition. 

746.    The  Future  Tenses  are  wanting  in  the  Subjunctive.  After  a 
Future  or  Future  Perfect,  their  place  is  supphed  by  the  Present  or 
Perfect  Subjunctive;  after  the  other  tenses  by  the  Active  Peri- 
phrastic Subjunctive,  Present  or  Imperfect;  as: 
cognoscam,  quid  facias,  I  shall  find  out  what  you  will  be  doing; 
cognovSro,  quid  fec6ris,  I  shall  have  found  out  what  you  have  done; 
cognosce,  quid  factHrus  sis,  I  am  finding  out  what  you  will  do; 
cognovgram,  quid  facturus  esses,  /  had  found  out  ivhat  you  would  do. 

[249.  250.] 

Use  of  the  Indicative. 

747 o  The  Indicative  is  the  mood  of  Direct  Assertions 
or  Questions^  as: 

necessitas  non  habet  legem  necessity  recognizes  no  law 

quare  vitia  sua  nemo  confitetur?  why  will  no  man  confess  his 
quia  etiam  nunc  in  illis  est  faults?  because  he  continues 

to  indulge  in  them. 

The  Indicative  is  sometimes  used  where  the  English  idiom  would 
suggest  the  Subjunctive,  chiefly  in  expressions  denoting  the  pro- 
priety,  advantage  or  necessity  of  an  action  not  performed,  such  as: 
,     iongxxm  est^  it  would  be  tedious    possum   l/^^^^,;^^  I  could 
utilius  fuit,  it  would  have,  been    poteram  1  ^ 

better  deb6o      )  ,-       ,,       ^  7      i-, 

.        ;    .,         , ,  T.    v-  .  11-1.       c^  ought  or  /  should 

par  est,  it  would  be  fair  debebam  ) 

perturbationes  animorum  poteram  /  might  call  the  disturbances  of 
appellare  morbos,  sed  non  con-  the  mind  ^^diseases'\  but 
veniet  ad  omnia  that  would  not  suit   all  the 

cases. 

The  Indicative  of  the  Periphrastic  Conjugations  is  often  so  used, 
as;  haec  condicio  non  accipienda  fuit;  these  terms  ought  not  to 
have  been  accepted. 


—    220     — 

748.  The  Indicative  is  used  after  General  Relatives,  such  as: 
quisquis,  no  matter  who;  quotquot,  no  matter  how  many,  and 

all  forms  in  -cunqug,  -ever,  also   after   slv6..slv6,  whether.. or j  . 
where  in  English  the  Potential  may  be  used,  as; 

quidquid  id  est,  timSo  Danaos    whatever  it  may  he,  I  fear  the 
at  dona  ferentes  Danai,  even  when  they  bring 

presents. 

Independent  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive. 

749.  The  Subjunctive  represents  the  action  of  the 
verb  as  something  merely  entertained  by  the  mind  and 
dependent  on  other  circumstances. 

750.  The  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive  are  used  to  denote  an 
action  as  possible  (Potential  Subjunctive) ;  also  the  second  person  of  the 
Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  the  same  manner,  but  only  in  the  expressions: 

credfires,  putares,  you  would,  might  have  thought 
videres,  cerngres,  you  would,  might  have  seen, 
hie  quaerat  quispiam  here  some  one  may  ask 

dixSrit  quis  some  one  may  say. 

The  regular  negative  in  such  cases  is  non. 

751.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  a  wish— the  Present  and 
Perfect  a  wish  conceived  as  possible;  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect 
an  unaccomplished  one  (Optative  Subjunctive).  When  so  used,  the  Pres- 
ent and  Perfect  are  commonly,  and  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect 
regularly  preceded  by  Qtin^m,  0  that,  I  wish  that,  would  that. 

stet  haec  urbs  may  this  city  continue  to  stand 

falsus  utinam  vates  sim  I  wish  I  may  he  a  false  prophet 

utinam  me  mortuum  vidisses         would  you  had  seen  me  dead. 
The  regular  negative  in  such  cases  is  ne. 

752.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  an  exhortation  or  a  com- 
mand (Hortatory  or  Imperative  Subjunctive). 

Pres.  First  Pers.      amSmus  patriam,  let  us  love  our  country 
**    Second  Pers.    corp5ris  robore  utare,  use  your  bodily  strength 
^^    Third  Pers.     amet,  let  him  love 

Perf.  Second  Pers.  (  ne  transieris  IbSrum,  do  not  cross  the  Ebro 
{negative  only)  (  hoc  ne  fec6ris,  thou  shalt  not  do  that 
The  regular  negative  in  such  cases  is  nS. 


^     221     — 

763o    The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  the  Present  and  Perfect  to  ex- 
press a  concession  (Concessive  Subjunctive),  as: 
vendat  aedes  vir  bonus,  suppose  an  honest  man  is  selling  a  house; 
sit  fur,  granted  that  he  be  a  thief. 

The  regular  negative  here  is  ne. 

754.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  doubtful  questions  (Dubitative 
Subjunctive),  as: 

quid  hoc  homine  facias?  what  are  you  to  do  with  this  man? 
quid  aggrem?  what  was  I  to  do? 

The  regular  negative  here  is  non. 

[251.  252,] 

Dependent  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive. 

755.  Dependent  Subjunctive  Clauses  may  be  clas- 
sified as  follows: 

Conjunctive  Clauses  introduced  by  Conjunctions, 

Relative  Clauses  "  ''    Relatives, 

Indirect  Questions  **  **   Interrogative  Words. 

Consecutive  and  Final  Conjunctions. 

756.  ut,  that,  governs  the  Subjunctive: 

I.  When  it  means  that,  in  order  that  (often  to  be  translated  by 
the  Infinitive  with  to,  in  order  to)  to  express  Purpose;  its  Negative 
is  ne,  that  not,  lest 

esse  oportet,  ut  vivas,  non  vi-    you  must  eat  to  live,  not  live 

v6re,  ut  edas  to  eat 

cura,  ne  quid  ei  desit  take  care  that  nothing  be  want^ 

ing  to  him. 

II.  When  it  means  so  that  (often  rendered  by  to,  so  as  to)  to  ex- 
press a  Result.    Its  Negative  is  lit  non,  so  that  not. 

tanta  vis  probitatis  est,  ut  earn  so  great  is  the  power  of  upright- 
in  hoste  etiam  diligamus  ness  that  we  love  it  even  in 

an  enemy 

ita  vixi,  ut  non  frustra  me  na-  /  have  so  lived  that  I  do  not 
turn  esse  ^xistimem  think  I  was  born  in  vain. 


—     222     — 

III.  When  it  means  granted  that  to  express  a  ConceBsion;  its 
Negative  is  ne. 
ut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  lau-    granted  that  strength  he  want- 
danda  voluntas  ing^  yet  the  good  will  is  to  he 

praised 
ne  sit  summum   malum  dolor,    granted  that  pain  is  not  the 
malum  certe  est  greatest  evil^  an  evil  it  cer- 

tainly is, 

757.    neve,  and  not^  nor,  is  used  as  Gontinuative  after  n6,  as: 

Thrasybtilus  legem  tulit,  ne  quis    Thrasyhulus  proposed   a   law 

ante  actarum  rerum  accusare-       that  no  one  should  he  accused 

tur  neve  multaretur  of  or  punished  for  past  of' 

fences. 

75S,  The  most  general  way  of  expressing  Purpose  is  by  fit 
(negatively  ne)  as:  esse  oportet,  ut  vivas^  non  vivere,  ut  edas;  you 
must  eat  to  live,  not  live  to  eat  This  is  the  regular  construction 
with  verbs  of  Willing  and  Wishing,  of  Warning  and  Beseeching, 
of  Urging  and  Demanding,  of  Resolving  and  Endeavoring,  of 
Forcing  and  Permitting;  such  as: 

consulo,  euro,  prospicio,  providgo,  video; 

contendo,  laboro,  nitor,  operam  do,  id  ago.  id  specto,  nihil  anti- 
quius  habeo,  quam; 

opto,  postulo,  flagito,  oro,  rogo,  peto,  precor,  obsecro; 

mando,  edico,  impero,  praecipio; 

impello,  incito,  moveo,  adduce; 

hortor,  moneo,  suadeo,  persuadeo; 

concede,  permitto; 

facio,  perficio,  adipiscor,  assequor,  consSquor,  impgtro. 

volo,  ut  mihi  respondeas,  /  wish  you  to  answer  me 

oro  et  hortor  te,  ut   in  munere  I  entreat  and  admonish  you  to 

diligentissimus  sis  he  very  careful  in  your  office 

ne  noceas,  dum  vis  prodesse  vi-  see  to  it  that  you  do  not  do  harm 

deto  while  you  wish  to  do  good. 

759,  A  clause  of  Result  introduced  by  fit,  so  that  (negatively 
fit  non)  is  used: 

After  such  words  as  tarn,  talis,  tantus,  Tta,  sic,  adSo ; 

After  verbs  denoting  it  happens,  it  remains,  it  follows^  and  the 
like;  (accidit,  contingit,  evenit,  sequitur,  restat,  &c.) 

After  quam  with  a  Comparative: 


^     223     — 

Atticus  ta  vixit,  ut  AtheniensI-  Aiiicus  so  lived  that  he  was 

bus  carissimus  esset  very  dear  to  the  Athenians 

accidit,  ut  plena  esset  luna  it  chanced  to  he  full  moon 

urbs   munitior   erat,    quam  ut  the  town  was  too  strong  to  he 

primo  impetu  capi  posset  taken  in  the  first  attack, 

760.  "Hie  phrase  tantiim  abest,  ut. .  ut;  it  is  so  far  (from  being 
the  case)  deserves  special  notice: 

tantum  abest  ab  eo,  ut  malum  so  far  is  death  from  heing  an 
sit  mors,  ut  verear,  ne  homini  evil  that  I  fear  man  has  no 
sit  nihil  bonum  aliud  other  Messing, 

761.  After  metiio,  timeo,  vgrSor,  I  fear,  metus  est,  pSri- 

ctiluin  est,  there  is  fear,  danger^,  ne  must  be  rendered  by  that  or 
lest,  and  fit  by  that  not,  as: 
Milo  metuebat,  ne  a  servis  indi-    3filo  feared  that  he  would  he 

cargtur  hetrayed  hy  his  servants 

timeo,  ut  sustineas  labores  /  fear  that  you  will  not  hold 

out  under  your  toils. 

762.  The  prefix  ail- in  aliquis  and  similar  Compounds  is  re- 
jected after  Relatives  and  the  following  Conjunctions: 

si,  if;  nisi,  if  not;  ne,  lest;  num,  whether;  ciim,  vjhen. 

Hence  we  say  in  Final  Clauses: 

nS  quis,  that  no  one  n6  quando,  that  never 

ne  quid,  that  nothing  ne  quisquam,  that  no  one  at  all 

necubi,  that  nowhere  ne  quidquam,  that  nothing  at  all 

[253.  254.] 

763.  The  Ablative  quo  (=  ut  eo,  that  thereby),  in 

order  that,  so  that,  with  the  Subjunctive  is  used  as  a 

Conjunction  in  clauses  of  Purpose,  especially  with  Com- 

paratives,  as: 

ager  aratur,  quo  meliores  fruc-  the  field  is  plowed  that  it  may 
tus  edere  possit  yield  hetter  fruit. 

764.  quommiis  (=  ut  eo  mmiis,  that  thereby  the 

less),  that  not,  with  the  Subjunctive  is  used  with  verbs 

of  Hindering,  such  as: 

impedlre,  to  hinder  obstarS,  to  he  in  the  way 

deteirSrg,  to  frighten  off  obsistere,  to  oppose 

prohibere,  to  keep  from  recusare,  to  refuse 


—     224     — 

|nors  non  deterret  sapientem,  death  does  not  deter  a  wise  man 
quominus  in  omne  tempus  rei  from  consulting  the  interest 
publicae  consulat  of  the  state  the  whole  time. 

aetas  non  imp6dit,  quominus  age  does  not  hinder  our  retain* 
agri  colendi  studia  teneamus         ing  interest  in  agriculture. 

Instead  of  quomtntis,  we  may  use  ne,  and  when  the  principal 
clause  is  negative,  quin: 

Regulus  ne  sententiam  diceret  Begulus  refused  to  pronounce 
recusavit  an  opinion 

765.  quin  (=  qui,  how^  and  ne,  not),  that  not,  with 

the  Subjunctive  is  used  only  after  negative  clauses  or 

such  questions  as  expect  a  negative  answer.    It  is 

equivalent 

to  qui  nOii)  qudd  non,  hut,  as: 
nemo  est,  qnin  hoc  videat  there  is  no  one  hut  sees  this; 

to  Gt  n5n,  hut,  as  not^  as: 

nemo  est  tam  fortis,  quin  rei    no  one  is  so  hrave  as  not  to  he 

novitate  perturbetur  confounded  hy  the  newness 

of  a  thing. 

766,  quin  is  used  in  the  sense  of  that  not  or  that  after  Negatiye 
ExpressioiiB  implying  doubt,  omission  and  the  like;  such  are: 

non  dubito,  /  do  not  doubt 

non  est  dubium,  there  is  no  doubt 

quis  dubitet?  who  can  doubt? 

non  multum  abest,  there  is  not  much  wanting 

nihil  abest,  there  is  nothing  wanting 

nihil  praetermltto  )  j^^^^  „^^^. 

nihil  mtermitto      ) 

temperare  mihi  non  possum,  I  cannot  restrain  myself 

vix  me  contineo,  I  hardly  refrain  from 

retineri  non  possum,  /  cannot  be  restrained 

facere  non  possum  quin,  /  cannot  help 

fieri  non  potest  quin,  it  cannot  happen  but  that 

quis  dubitetj  quin  in  virttlte  di-  who  can  doubt  that  wealth  con- 

vitiae  sint?  sists  in  virtue? 

non  multum  afuit,  quin  interfic§-  /   was   not  far  from    being 

rer  Tcilled,                     [255,  256,] 


—     226     — 

Concessive  and  Comparative  Conjunctions. 

767,  Concessive  Conjunctions  express  a   Concession, 

with  the  general  signification  although^  granting  that. 

These  are:  etsi,  6tiamsi,  tametsi,  quamquam,  although 

quamvis  (quantum vTs),  however  muchj  however 
lic6t,  ut,  cum,  thoughy  suppose,  whereas. 

768,  Of  these,  iTcSt  (properly  a  verb)  exclusively,  and  quam- 
vis usually,  take  the  Present  or  Perfect  Sabjunotiye,  as: 

licet  superbus  ambules  pecunia,  although  you  may  strut  about 
fortuna  non  mutat  genua  proud  of  your  purse,  fortune 

changes  not  birth 
vitia   mentis,    quamvis   exigua    defects  of  the  mind,  no  matter 
sint,  in  majus  exc6dunt  how  slight  they  be,  go  on  in- 

creasing. 

769,  cum,  whereas,  since;  tit,  granted  that;  ne,  granted  that 
not  (see  756,  III.)  take  the  Subjunctive. 

Phocion  fuit  perpetuo  pauper,  Phocion  was  constantly  poor, 
cum  divitissimus  esse  posset  though  he  could  be  very  rich. 

770,  Stiamsi  takes  the  Indicative  to  denote  real  concessions, 
and  the  Subjunctive  to  denote  such  as  are  merely  conceived  in  the 
mind,  as: 

ista  Veritas,  etiamsijacunda  non  that  truth,  although  it  is  not 
est,  mihi  tamen  grata  est  agreeable ,     is     nevertheless 

acceptable  to  me 

vita  brevis  est,  etiamsi  supra  life  is  short,  although  it  should 
centum  annos  duret  last  over  lOO  years. 

771,  etsJ,  tametsi  and  quamquam  regularly  take  the  In- 
dicative (unless  otherwise  required  by  the  connection,  as: 

viri  boni  recte  agunt,  etsi  nul-  good  men  do  right,  though  they 
lum  consecuturum  emolumen-       see  no  profit  about  to  result 
turn  vident 

quamquam  omnis  virtus  nos  ad  though  all  excellence  attracts  us 
se  allicit,  tamen  justitia  et  to  itself,  yet  justice  and  liber- 
liberalitas  id  maxime  eflTicit  ality  do  this  most. 

772,  The  Conjunctions  of  Comparison 
tamquam,  quasi  (velut  si,  ut  si,  proinde  ac  si),  as  if, 

take  the  Subjunctive. 


—     226     — 


The  Tenses  follow  the  general  rule  of  Sequence  (743)\  accord- 
ingly the  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive   are   sometimes  used 
where  the  English  idiom  would  suggest  the  Imperfect^  as: 
superbi   saepe    ita  se    gerunt,    haughty  people  often  behave  as 
quasi  ipsi  soli  sint  homines  if  they  alone  were  men. 

The  Particles  of  Comparison:    (it,    sicut,    quemadmodum,   as, 
usually  referring  to  ita,  sic,  so,  take  the  Indicative: 
ut  sementem  feceris,  ita  metesj  as  you  soWj  so  shall  you  reap. 

[255,  256.] 

Temporal  Conjunctions. 

773,  As  a  rule,  Temporal  Clauses  take  the  Indicative; 
they  are  introduced  by  the  following  Conjunctions: 

postquam,  after  that,  after  cum,  when 

^^.^^  f^.  I  while,  until 

iibi,  when  donee) 

simiilac       )  ^^  g^^^  ^^  quoad,  up  to 

simulatque  i  quamdifi,  as  long  as 

utprimum     Uhe  first  moment  antequam    I  j^^fore  that,  before 

cum  prlmum )    that  (see  737)  priusquam  ) 

774,  Temporal  cum,  meaning  when,  at  the  time  when,  takes 
the  Indicative  of  all  the  tenses,  as: 

ager  cum  multos  annos  quievit,  when  a  field  has  rested  many 
uberiOres  efferre  fructus  solet        years,  it  usually  produces  a 

more  abundant  crop 

oracula  Graeci  consulebant,  cum  the  Greeks  consulted  the  oracles 
bella  erant  inituri  when  they  were  to  begin  war. 

775,  Historical  cQm,  meaning  when,  as,  takes  the  Imperfect  and 
Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

Agesilaus  cum  ex  Aegypto  re-  Agesilaus  died  as  he  was  re- 

verteretur,  mortuus  est  turning  from  Egypt 

cum  Caesar  Anconam  occupas-  when  Caesar  had  occupied  An- 

set,  urbem  reliquimus  cona,  we  left  the  city. 

776,  diim,  quoad  and  donSc  (=quamdiri),  so  long  as,  while, 
take  the  Indicative  of  all  the  tenses;  in  narrative  dum,  while,  takes 
the  Present  Indicative.    {734) 

dum  spiro,  spero  while  there  is  life,  there  is  hope 

quoad  potuit,  restitit  as  long  as  he  could,  he  withstood 

haec  dum    aguntur,  domi    res    while  this  was  going  on,  affairs 

quietae  erant  were  quiet  at  home. 


—     227     — 

777,  dum,  quoad,  don€c,  untile  take  the  Present,  Perfect  and 
Future  Perfect  Indicative  when  a,  fact  is  to  be  expressed,  as: 

hand  desinam,  donee  perfecero      /  will  not  ceasCy  until  I  shall 

have  accomplished. 

778,  dum,  qudad,  untily  implying  purpose,  doubt  or  futurity, 
take  the  Subjunctive: 

Alexander  paulisper  exercitum  Alexander  ordered  the  army  to 
consistere  jussit,  donee  consi-  halt  a  short  time^  until  the 
deret  pulvis  dust  should  he  down. 

779,  antSquam  and  priusquam,  before^  have  in  narration 

the  same  construction  as  historical  cum  or  postquam,  viz.  either  the 
Subjunctive  of  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect,  or  the  Perfect  Indica- 
tive, as: 
Achaei  non  ante  ausi  sunt  bel-    the  Achaeans  did  not  dare  to 
ium  capessere  quam  ab  Roma       begin  the  war  before  the  am- 
revertissent  legati  bassadors  had  returned  from 

Borne 
antequam  bellum  urbia  nostrae    before  war  consumed  the  wealth 
opes  absumpsit,  potentissima       of  our  city  it  was  very  pow- 
fuit  erfuL 

780,  In  reference  to  Future  Time,  these  conjunctions  take  the 
Present  and  Future  Perfect  Indicative,  also  the  Present  Subjunctive,  as: 

tempestas   minatur,   antequam  the  storm  .threatens  before   it 

surgat  rises 

ante  revertar  quam  luna  bis  im-  /  will  return  before  the  moon 

pleverit  orbem  Jias  twice  filled  her  orb. 

[257,  258.] 

Causal   Conjunctions. 

781,  The  foUowiiig  Causal  Conjunctions   take  the 
Indicative: 

^^l^  i  because  JZ^mdem  I  't'frj!T' 

^^^^^*  siquidem           f    ^^'^^  ^" 

quoniam  jam  nox  est,   in  vestra    since  it  is  now  night,  go  to  your 

tecta  discedite     '  houses 

quia  natura  mutari  non  potest,     because  nature  cannot  change, 

idcirco  verae   amicitiae  aeter-       therefore    true    friendships 

nae  sunt  are  everlasting. 


—     228     — 

782.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  causal  clauses  when  a  statement 
is  made  not  as  a  facty  but  as  the  assertion  or  opinion  of  some  one 
else,  as: 

Socrates  accusatus  est,  quod  Socrates  was  brought  to  trial 
corrumperet  juventutem  because  (as  they  said)  he  cor- 

rupted youth. 

783.  After  those  verbs  which  express  the  feeling  of  joy^  grief, 
etc.,  as:  gaudere,  to  rejoice;  gratiam  agSre,  to  thank;  dolere,  to  grieve; 
glOriarl,  to  boast,  quod  is  used  to  give  the  ground  of  emotion,  as: 

quod  scribis,  gaudeo  /  ain  glad  that  you  write 

tibi  gratias  ago,  quod  me  omni  I  thank  you  that  you  free  me 
molestia  liberas  from  all  trouble. 

784.  qii5d,  that,  is  also  used  to  introduce  explanatory  clauses, 
chiefly  after  a  Demonstrative: 

bene  facis,  quod  me  adjuvas  you  do  well  in  assisting  me 

quod  Regulus  rediit  mihi  mira-  that  Begulus  returned  seems 
bile  videtur  wonderful  to  me. 

785.  At  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  quod  is  used  in  the  sense 
of  as  to,  especially  in  letters,  as: 

quod  de  domo  scribis. . ,  as  to  what  you  write  of  the  house. . 

non  qu5d,  non  quo,  not  as  if,  and  non  quin,  not  as  if  not, 
take  the  Subjunctive,  as: 

pugiles  ingemiscunt,  non  quod  boxers  groan  not  as  if  they 
dol6ant,  sed  quod  omne  cor-  were  in  pain,  but  because  all 
pus  Intenditur  the  body  is  put  to  the  stretch. 

786.  Causal  ciim,  as,  since,  takes  the  Suhjundive. 

cum  vita  sine  amicis  insidiarum  since  life  without  friends  is  full 
et  metus  plena  sit,  ratio  ipsa  of  treachery  and  fear,  reason 
monet  amicitlas  comparare  itself  advises  us  to  contract 

friendships.  [2S9. 2eo.] 

Conditional  Conjunctions. 

787.  In  a  Conditional  Sentence  the  clause  containing 
the  condition  is  called  the  Protasis,  and  that  con- 
taining the  conclusion  the  Apodosis. 

Protasis,    si  bovem  non  pQSsis,        if  you   cannot   drive   an  ox^ 
Apodosis.   asinum  agas  drive  a  donkey. 


—    229    — 

The  Protasis  is  regularly  introduced  by  the  conditional  particle 
SI,  i/,  or  one  of  its  compounds,  viz: 

nisi,  unless  sin,  if  not,  but  if 

si  nOn,  if  not  quodsi,  but  if 

788.  There  are  Three  Classes  of  Conditional  Sen- 
tences: 

I.  The  condition  is  represented  as  a  fact:  si  with  the  Indicative 
in  both  clauses: 

fii  Densest,  aetemus  est  if  there  is  a  God,  he  is  eternal, 

II.  The  condition  is  represented  as  possible  or  likely  to  be  real- 
ized: si  with  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive: 

si  quis  ita  agat,  imprudens  sit      if  anybody  were  to  act  ihuSy  he 

would  not  be  wise. 

III.  The  condition  is  represented  as  contrary  to  fact:  si  with 
Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive: 

facerem,  si  possem  /  should  do  it  if  I  could. 

789.  nist  and  si  non  are  used  for  negative  conditions;  with 
nisi  the  negative  belongs  to  the  whole  sentence,  with  si  non  to  a 
particular  word,  as: 

nisi  id  confestim  facis,  te  tradam  unless  you  do  this  at  once  1 
magistratui  shall  deliver  you  to  the  ma- 

gistrate 

dolorem  si  non  potero  frangere,  if  I  shall  not  be  able  to  over- 
occultabo  come  sorrow^  I  will  conceal  it, 

790.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  Conditional  Wishes 

with: 

dummodS  \  dummodS  n6 ) 

dum  V  if  only,  provided         diim  nS  I  prov  ided  only  not 

modo        )  modone        ) 

odSrint,  dum  metuant  let  them  hate  if  they  only  fear 

Athenienses  summas  laudes  me-  the  Athenians  deserve  the  high* 
rentur,  dummodo  ne  tarn  leves  est  praise  if  only  they  had 
fuissent  not  been  so  wanton. 

si  mddd,  if  only^  provided  that^  requires  the  Indicative. 


—     230     — 

Relative  Clauses  with  the  Subjunctive. 

791.  As  a  rule,  the  Relative  Clause  is  in  the  In- 

dicatite  when  a  definite  fact  is  stated: 

planta,   quae  saepius  transfer-    a  tree  often  transplanted  does 
tur,  non  coalescit  not  thrive. 

792.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  Relative  Clauses: 

I.  to  denote  pnrpose  or  motive;  qui  =  ut  egO,  ut  tu,  ut  is,  etc. 
missi  sunt  delecti  cum  Leonida,    picked   men    were    sent   with 

qui  Thermopylas  occuparent         Leonidas  to  take  possession 

of  Thermopylae, 

II.  to  denote  the  cause,  on  account  of  ivhich  or  the  hindrance  in 
spite  of  which;  qui  =  cum  5g-6,  cum  tu,  cum  is,  etc.  (often  with 
ut,  utpote,  as;  quippe,  namely). 

0  virum  simplicem,  qui  nos  nihil    0    guileless  man    who  hidest 
celet !  n  othing  from  us  I 

III.  to  denote  result  or  to  indicate  a  characteristic  of  the  antecedent, 
sometimes  in  a  restrictive  sense,  as: 

non  is  sum,  qui  hoc  faciam  lam  not  such  a  one  as  to  do  this 

orationes  Catonis,  quas  quidem      Cato's  speeches  as  far  as  I  have 
legerim  read  them. 

793.  The  construction  of  the  Consecutive  or  Characteristic  Relative 
is  especially  common: 

a.  after  is,  talis,  ^usmodi,  tantQs,  tS,m  with  an  Adjective 
or  Adverb,  solus  and  unus: 

est  innocentia  affectio  talis  animi,  quae  noceat  nemini,  innocence 
is  such  a  quality  of  mind  as  to  do  harm  to  no  one. 

h.  after  general  expressions  of  existence  and  non-existence^  as: 

est  qui    )  there  iSj  there  are  habeo  quod,  /  have  to 

sunt  qui  )          some  who  reperiuntur    qui,    persons    are 

nemo  est  qui,  there  is  none  to  found  who 

nihil  est  quod,  there  is  nothing 

sunt  qui  censeant  una  animum  cum  corpore  interlre,  there  are 
some  who  believe  that  the  soul  perishes  together  with  the  body. 

c.    after  digniis,  indigniis,  idoneus,  aptus: 

jndignus  es,  cui  fidc3  habeatur,  you  are  unworthy  of  being  believed. 


f 


231    — 


794.  A  clause  joined  to  another  by  a  Kelative,  takes  the 
Subjunctive,  when  it  contains  not  the  sentiment  of  the  writer^  but  of 
some  other  person  alluded  to,  as: 

Paetus  omnes  libros,  quos  frater    Faetus  presented  to  me  all  the 
suus  reliquisset,  mihi  donavit         books  that  his  brother  had  left. 

795.  Comparatives  may  be  followed  by  qu^m  iit,  quam  qui 
with  the  Subjunctive,  corresponding  to  the  English  too.  .to,  as: 

damna  majora  sunt  quam  quae    the  losses  ai^e  too  great  to  be 
aestimari  possint  estimated. 

[263.  264.] 

Direct  Questions. 

796.  Questions  in  Latin  are  introduced  by  Inter- 
rogative Pronouns,  Adverbs  or  Particles. 

Interrogative  Pronouns, 
quis?  quid?  who?  what?  quisnam?  quidnam?  who,  what  pray? 
qui?  quae?  quod?  which? 
uter?  utra?  iitriim?  which  of  the  two? 
qualis?  quale?  of  what  kind? 
quantus?  quanta?  quantum?  how  great? 
quotus?  quota?  quotum?  what?  (in  number  or  order) 
quotusquisqug?  quotaquaeque?  quotumquodque?  how  few? 
quot?  how  many? 

Interrogative  Adverbs. 
ub\?  where?  ubinam?  where  pray? 

xm^^t  whence?  undenam?  whence  pray? 

quo?  whither?  quonam?  whither  pray? 

qua?  where?  which  way?  quanam?  which  tvay  pray? 


quando?  when?  quamdiu? 


how  long? 


quotiens?  how  often?  quousque? 

quomodo?           I  Jwio^  quam?  (only  before  Adjectives  and 

quemadmodLim?  i         *  Adverbs)  how?  how  much? 

cur?                 )  quantopere?  (only  before  Verbs) 

quare?              >-  why?  what  for?  how  greatly?  how  much? 

quam  ob  rem? )  quidni?  cur  non?  ivhy  not? 

797.    The  Interrogative  Particles  are: 

ne,  num,  nonne,  titrum,  an. 

Of  these  ne  asks  merely  for  information;  it  cannot  stand  by 
itself,  but  is  joined  to  any  emphatic  word,  usually  the  verb,  which 
then  comes  first  in  the  sentence ;  it  is  not  translated,  as: 
omnisne  pecunia  deblta  soliita  est?  is  all  the  money  owing  paid? 


i 


—     232     — 

When  a  negative  answer  is  expected,  niim  is  used,  which  stands 
at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence  and  is  likewise  not  translated,  as: 
num  vespertilTo  avis  est?  /6*  the  bat  a  bird? 

With  non,  ne  forms  a  special  interrogative  particle  nonnS, 

not;  the  answer  expected  is  yes,  as: 

nonne  lectio  hujus  libri  te  de-    does   not   the  perusal  of  this 

lectat?  book  delight  you? 

798.   Double  or  Alternative  questions  have  the  fol- 
lowing forms: 

utrum,  whether  . .  an,  or. . 
n6,      ''      . .  an   "  . . 


utrum  domi  fuisti  an  in  schola? 
domlne  fuisti  an  in  schola? 
domi  fuisti  an  in  schola? 


an  **  .. 

have  you  been  at  home  or  in 
school? 


Sometimes  the  first  part  of  an  alternative  question  is  omitted  or 
implied,  and  Sn  alone  asks  a  question,  as: 
an  nescis  regibus  longas  esse    or  perhaps  do  you  not  know 
manus?  that  kings  have  long  arras? 

In  Direct  questions  or  not  is  annon;  in  Indirect  necne. 
utrum  domi  fuisti  annon?  have  you  been  at  home  or  not? 

QUESTION  AND  ANSWER. 

799.    In  answering  a  question  the  emphatic  word  is  generally 
repeated,  as: 
vidistine  eum?  did  you  see  him?    vidi,  yes^  I  did, 
solusne  venisti?  did  you  come  alone?    non  solus,  no^  I  did  not 
The  following  Responsives  are  also  used  in  answer  to  a  direct 
question: 

yes  no 

ita,  so  non  ita,  no^  not  so                      ? 

ita  est,  so  it  is  minime,  by  no  means 

ita  v6ro  est,  so  it  is  indeed  minim6  vfiro,  by  no  means  in- 

sane,  of  course  deed 

sane  quidSm,  yeSj  indeed  nihil  minus,  nothing  less  so 

fitiam,  even  so  neutiquam,  not  at  all. 

verO,  truly^  in  truth 


—     233     — 

800.  Immo,  as  a  negative,  substitutes  something  stronger  in 
tlie  place  of  a  previous  statement,  as: 

causa  igitur  non  bona  est?  Im-  the  cause j  theuj  is  a  had  one? 

mo  optima  J^ay,  it  is  an  excellent  one 

num  ille  tibi  familiaris  est?  Im-  is  he  a  friend  of  yours?  On  the 

mo  alienissimus  contrary,  a  perfect  stranger. 

[265,  266.] 

Indirect  Questions. 

801.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  such  questions  as 
are  dependent  upon  some  word  in  the  former  part  of 
the  sentence  (Indirect  Questions). 

The  words:  ubi  fuisti?  where  have  you  been  ? 
are  a  Direct  Question,  with  the  verb  in  the  Indicative;  in  the  sentence; 

die  mihi  ubi  fueris,  tell  me  where  you  have  been, 
the  same  words  are  an  Indirect  Question,  and  the  dependent  verb  is  in 
the  Subjunctive  Mood, 
qualis  sit  animus  ipse  animus    the  mind  itself  knows  not  what 

nescit  the  mind  is 

quis  ego  sim  me  rogitas?  do  you  ask  me  who  lam? 

802.  Indirect  Questions  have  the  same  particles  as  the  direct, 
niiiu  and  n6,  corresponding  to  whether  in  English;  si,  if  is  used 
for  whether  after  tentarg,  exp^riri,  to  try,  and  exspectarS,  to  expect 

Epaminondas  quaesivit  salvusne  Epaminondas  asked  whether 
esset  clipgus  his  shield  was  safe 

paludem  si  nostri  transirent  the  enemy  were  waiting  (to  see) 
hostes  exspectabant  whether  our  men  would  cross 

the  swamp, 

803.  INDIEECT  DISJUNCTIVE  QUESTIONS. 

quaere  utrum  verum  an  falsum  sit  \ 

quaere  verumne  an  falsum  sit         f  /  ask  whether  it  is  true  or 
quaero  verum  an  falsum  sit  C  false 

quaere  verum  falsumne  sit  J 

When  the  interrogative  particle  is  omitted  in  the  first  member, 
n€  may  stand  in  the  second,  but  only  in  Indirect  Questions. 

or  not  in  Indirect  Questions  is  necne,  as:  dii  utrum  sint,  necne 
sint,  quaeritur,  the  question  is  whether  there  are  gods  or  not, 

[267,  ^68,^ 


—     234     — 

The  Imperative. 
804.    The  Imperative  is  used  to  express  a  command^ 
wish,  advice  or  exhortation. 

The  Present  Imperative  denotes  that  an  action  is  to  be  performec 

at  once,  or  to  be  continued  if  actually  being  performed,  as: 

si  quid  in  te  peccavi,  ignosce         if  I  have  sinned  against  you^ 

forgive  me 
justitiam  cole  et  pietatem  cultivate  justice  and  piety. 

The  Future  Imperative  is  used  where  there  is  a  direct  reference  t< 

future  time;  it  corresponds  to  the  imperative  use  of  the  Englisl 

Future  with  shall  or  to  the  Imperative  let,  and  is  properly  used  ii 

general  directions,  laws,  statutes  and  wills,  as: 

regie  imperlo  duo  sunto,  consu-    there  shall  he  two  officers  wit) 

les  appellantor  royal  power]   they  shall   hi 

called  consuls. 


805.  The  regular  negative  of  the  Imperative  is  ne,  which  : 
however,  in  classical  Latin  only  found  with  the  Future  Imperative,  as: 

hominem  mortuum,  inquit  lex,     thou  shalt  not  bury  a  dead  man 
in  urbe  ne  sepelito  in  the  city,  says  the  law. 

In  prohibitions  instead  of  the  Negative  Imperative  the  following 
forms  of  the  Subjunctive  with  ne  are  usually  employed: 
the  second  person  of  the  Perfect  Subjunctive,  as: 

hoc  ng  feceris,  leave  that  undone; 
the  third  person  of  the  Present  Subjunctive : 

puer  telum  ne  habeat,  a  hoy  is  not  to  have  a  weapon. 

806.  Instead  of  the   Simple  Imperative   several   Imperatiy 
Phrases  are  common: 

ciira  lit,  take  care  that ) 

fac  ut,  cause  that         >  each  with  the  Subjunctive. 

fac,  do  ) 

cura  ut  quam  primum  venias,  come  as  soon  as  possible; 
valetudinem  tuam  fac  ut  cures,  talce  care  of  your  health. 

cave  ne,  beware  lest     )  ^^^  ^.^^  ^j^^  Subjunctive. 

cav6,  beware  ) 

noli,  be  unwilling,  with  the  Infinitive, 
cave  festines,  do  not  be  in  a  hurry;  cave  existimes,  do  not  think^ 
noli  me  tangere,  do  not  touch  me;  noli  putare,  do  not  suppose* 

{269,  270. 


—    235     — 

The  Infinitive. 

807.  The  Infinitive  is  not  limited  to  a  particular 
number  or  person,  as  the  ordinary  verbal  forms,  but 
is  really  a  Verbal  Noun, 

The  Infinitive  governs  the  case  of  its  verb,  and  is  modified  by 
adverbs  and  not  by  adjectives,  as: 

legere  librum,  the  reading  of  a  hook; 

diligenter  legere  librum,  the  careful  reading  of  a  book. 

808.  The  Infinitive  may  be  used  as  the  Subject  of 
a  verb. 

As  such  it  is  chiefly  found  with  ess6  and  impersonal  verbs: 
nunquam  est  utile  peccare  to  do  wrong  is  never  useful 

interest  omnium  recte  facSre         it  is  the  interest  of  all  to  do  right. 

When  the  verb  esse,  to  be  (or  others  of  similar  meaning,  see 
540)  with  an  Adjective  or  Noun  is  used  as  the  Subject  of  the  sentence, 
such  Adjective  or  Noun  is  put  in  the  Accusative;  as:  senem  ante 
tempus  figri  miserum  est,  it  is  miserable  to  grow  old  before  the  time. 

809.  The  Infinitive  is  used  as  the  Object  of  verbs. 
Such  are  verbs  denoting: 

to  be  able^  must,  dare,  posse,  debere,  audSre 

to  begin,  continue,  cease,  incipere,  pergere,  desinSre 

to  be  accustomed,  learn,  know  how,  assuescere,  discSre,  scire 

to  wish,  desire,  resolve^  velle,  cupere,  statuere. 

vincere  scis,  Hannibal,  victoria  uti  nescis,  hoiu  to  win  victory  you 
know,  Hannibal;  how  to  make  use  of  victory  you  know  not. 

When  the  verb  esse,  to  be  (or  others  of  similar  meaning,  see 
540)  with  an  Adjective  or  Noun  is  used  as  the  Object  of  a  verb, 
such  Adjective  or  Noun  is  put  in  the  Nominative,  as:  beatus  esse 
sine  virtute  nemo  potest,  no  one  can  be  happy  without  virtue. 

The  Infinitive  of  the  Present  i^  often  used  for  the  tenses  of  the 
Indicative  in  lively  narration,  and  takes  the  Subject  in  the  Nomina- 
tive (Historical  Infinitive.) 

pars   cedere,  alii  insequi,    neque    a  pai^t  give  way,  others  press 
signa  neque  ordines  servare  on,  they  hold  neither  to  stand- 

ards nor  ranks.       .^ii,  272,-] 


—     236     — 


Accusative  with  the  Infinitive. 

810.  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is  used  like 
the  Enghsh  Objective  with  the  Infinitive  in  such  sen- 
tences as:  hoc  verum  esse  scimus,  we  know  this  to  he  true. 

In  English  we  might  also  say:  We  know  that  this  is  true;  but 
Latin  permits  only  of  the  Infinitive  Construction. 

811.   The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  may  be  the 

Subject  of  the   sentence.    The  Predicate  is  either  a 

noun  or  an  adjective  with  est,  or  an  impersonal  verb 

The  most  common  phrases  under  this  rule  are: 


par  est,  it  is  fair 
justum  est,  it  is  just 
certum  est,  it  is  certain 
crgdibile  est,  it  is  credible 
fas  est,  it  is  right 
nefas  est,  it  is  forbidden 
fama  est,  the  story  goes 
opinio  est,  there  is  a  report 
spes  est,  there  is  hope 


oportgt,  there  is  need,  ought 
apparSt,  it  is  clear 
constat,  it  is  agreed,  evident 
cond licit,  expSdit,  it  is  useful 
convenit,  it  is  fitting 
placet,  it  pleases 
displicet,  it  displeases 
n^cesse  est,  it  must  needs 
opus  est,  there  is  need 


me  scribSre  oportet,  /  must  vjrite  or  /  ought  to  write 
certum  est  lib^ros  amari,  it  is  certain  that  children  are  loved. 

812.    The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is  used  as 
the  Object  of  verbs  of  Perceiving  and  Declaring: 


Verba  sentiendi: 
sentlrg,  to  perceive,  notice 
animadvertere,  to  see 
audirS,  to  hear 
vidSrS,  to  see 
accipSrg,  to  hear 
comp^rlre,  to  ascertain 
cognosc6r6,  to  know 
intelleggre,  to  learn 
cogitare,  to  think 
arbitrari,  credSrS,  to  believe 


Verba  dedarandi: 
declararg,  to  declare 
dicere,  to  say 
nggare,  to  deny 
aflSrmarS,  to  affirm 
respondSrg,  to  answer 
scrlbere,  to  write 
fateri,  to  confess 
demonstrare,  to  prove 
narrare,  to  tell 
nuntiarg,  to  bring  woru 


aves  vidimus  constru6re  nidos,  we  see  that  birds  build  nests; 
nemo  negabit  se  esse  mortalem,  no  one  will  deny  that  he  is  mortal 


—    23T    — 

813.  Verba  of  Perceiving  take  the  Aco.  with  the  Pres.  Participle 
to  represent  the  object  as  actually  seen^  heard,  etc.,  as:  Catonem 
vidi  in  bibliotheca  sedentem,  /  saw  Cato  sitting  in  the  library. 

814.  Verbs  of  Wishing  and  Desiring  take  a  depen- 
dent Accusative  with  the  Infinitive.     Such  are: 

'     volo,  I  wish  cupiO,  I  desire  sinO,  I  permit 

nolo,  I  do  not  wish         jiibeo,  Ibid  patior,  I  suffer 

malo,  Hike  better  vgtO,  I  forbid 

discipulum  me  habSri  volo,  non     I  wish  to  be  taken  for  a  learner^ 

doctOrem  not  for  a  teacher 

Caesar  pontem  jubet  rescind!         Caesar  orders  the  bridge  to  be 

broken  down. 
These  verbs  may  take  the  simple  Infinitive  when  the  subject 
remains  the  same.  Instead  of  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive, 
ut  with  the  Subjunctive  is  frequently  used  with  this  class  of  verbs 
(758);  but  never  with  nolo,  and  seldom  with  volo  and  malo;  jub6o 
and  veto  regularly  take  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive. 

815.  Verbs  of  Emotion,  as:  gaud5rg,  to  rejoice,  gratiam  ag6r6, 
to  thank,  d6l6r6,  to  grieve  (see  783)  may  be  considered  as  verbs  ot 
saying  and  thinking  and,  as  such,  take  an  Aconsative  with  Infinitive,  as: 

salvum  te  advenisse  gaud6o,  /  rejoice  that  you  have  arrived  safe, 

816.  To  translate  such  clauses  as  are  introduced 

in  English  by  the  conjunction  that,  and  require  in 

Latin  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive, 
take  no  notice  of  that; 

translate  the  English  Nominative  following  that  by  the  Latin  Acousative; 
translate  the  English  Verb  by  the  Latin  Infinitive. 

817.  A  Predicate  Noun  or  Adjective  and  the  Par- 
ticiples of  the  Compound  Infinitives  must  agree  with 
the  Accusative- Subject;  but,  of  course,  the  Supine 
remains  unaltered. 

sentlo  borgam  frigidum  esse  I  feel  that  the  north-wind  is  cold 

medici  causa  morbi  inventa  cu-  physicians  think  that  when  the 

ratiOnem  esse  inventam  pu-  cause  of  disease  is  discovered, 

tant  the  cure  has  been  discovered. 

[273,  274,] 


—    238     — 

Tenses  of  the  Infinitive. 

818.  After   Verbs    of  Perceiving    and    Declarim 

(verba  sentiendi  et  declarandi) 

the  Present  Infinitive  expresses  contemporaneous  action, 
the  Perfect  Infinitive  expresses  antecedent  action, 
the  Future  Infinitive  expresses  future  action. 

Present  Infinitive. 
I.  credo  eum  scrib6re  I  believe  that  he  is  writing 

II.  credebam  eum  scribgre  /  believed  that  he  was  writing. 

Perfect  Infinitive. 
I.  credo  eum  scripsisse  /  believe  that  he  has  written 

II.  credebam  eum  scripsisse  /  believed  that  he  had  written. 

Future  Infinitive. 
I.  credo  eum  scripturum  esse  /  believe  that  he  will  write 

II.  credebam  eum  scripturum  esse    /  believed  that  he  would  write. 

I.  After  a  Principal  Tense  translate: 
the  Infinitive  like  the  Indicative  of  the  same  tense. 

II.  After  a  Historical  Tense  translate: 
the  Infinitive  Present  like  the  Indicative  Imperfect 
the  Infinitive  Perfect       *^       Indicative  Pluperfect 
the  Infinitive  Future       *^       Subjunctive  Imperfect  (should  and  would). 

819.  The  Future  Infinitive  is  often  expressed  by  fore  or  fGttirii: 
esse  lit  —  necessarily  so  when  the  verb  has  no  Supine,  as: 

credo  fore  ut  pluat  /  believe  it  will  rain 

credebam  fore  ut  pluSret  /  believed  it  would  rain. 

820.  The  Personal  Pronouns,  which  are  in  general  used  only  fo 
tlie  sake  of  distinction  or  emphasis,  must  be  always  expressed  ia 
the  Accusative  with  Infinitive.  For  the  Pronouns  of  the  third  person 
the  Keflexive  se  is  used  in  reference  to  the  subject  of  the  Principal 
Clause,  and  the  Demonstratives  etim,  ^^m,  eos,  eas  when  referring 
to  another  noun. 

nemo  tam  senex  est  qui  se  an-  no  one  is  so  old  but  thinks  he^ 
num  non  putet  posse  vivere  can  live  another  year 

Ennius  deos  esse  censet,  sed  Ennius  believes  that  there  are 
eos  non  curare  opinatur,  quid  gods^  but  he  does  not  think 
agat  humanum  genus  they  care  ivhat  mankind  are 

doing. 

[275,  276, 


'i 


—     239     — 

Nominative  with  the  Infinitive. 

821.  With  Passive  Verbs  of  Perceiving  and  De- 
claring, instead  of  the  Infinitive  with  the  Accusative 
a  personal  construction  is  more  common  by  which 
the  Subject  Accusative  becomes  the  Subject  Nominative 
of  the  leading  verb:  Nominative  with  the  Infinitive. 

Accus.  with  Inf.     tradunt  Horaerum  caecum  fuisse,  they  say  that  Ho- 

mer  was  blind 
Nomin.  with  Inf.   HomSrus  caecus  fuisse  traditur,  Homer  is  said  to 

have  been  blind, 

822.  Especially  to  be  noted  is  the  construction  of  the  Nominative 
with  the  Infinitivo  after: 

jubgo,  I  order  sino,  I  permit 

veto,  I  forbid  vid^or,  I  seem 

eonsules    jubentur    exercltum  the  consuls  are  ordered  to  levy 

scribgre  an  army 

omnibus  vidSmur  recte  fecisse,  it  seems  to  all  that  we  did  right 

quod  amici  causam  defender!-  in  defending  the  cause  of  our 

mus  friend,                     [277. 278.] 

Direct  Discourse. 

823.  A  Statement  which  gives  the  exact  words  of 

the  original  speaker  or  writer  is  called  oratTo  recta, 

or  Direct  Discourse. 

mquUm,  quoth  /,  is  used  in  direct  quotations,  ajo,  /  say,  in 
indirect  quotations,  inquam  always  follows  one  or  more  of  the  words 
quoted.  When  a  nominative  is  added  to  inquit,  it  commonly  follows 
this  verb:  uva,  inquit  vulpes,  nondum  matura  est,  the  grape  is  not 
yet  ripe  J  says  the  fox  [279.  28o.] 

Indirect  Discourse. 

824.  An  Indirect  Quotation  expresses  a  thought  in= 
directly,  as  reported^  recognized  or  contemplated  by- 
some  one:  oratTo  obliqua. 


—    240     — 

Oiaiio  recta.  Oratio  ol)liqua. 

Socrates  dicere  solebat:  ''omnes  Socrates  dicSre  solebat,  omnes 

in  eo  quod  sciunt  satis  sunt  in   eo   quod   scirent,    satis 

eloquentes,"  Socrates  used  to  esse    eloquentes  ;     Socrates 

say:  '^All  men  are  eloquent  used  to  say  that  all  men  were 

enough  in  what  they  under-  eloquent  enough  in  what  they 

stand.^^  understood. 

825.  In  Indirect  Discourse  the  Verb  of  the  Principal 
Clause  is  in  the  Infinitive  and  its  Subject  in  the  Accu- 
sative; Dependent  Clauses  connected  with  it  by  Rela- 
tives and  Particles  take  the  Subjunctive. 

Interrogative  Sentences  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive  according  to  801. 

Ariovistus  ad  postulata  Caesaris    Ariovistus  gave  a  brief  answer 

pauca    respondit :    quid    sibi        to   Caesar's  demands :   what 

vellet?  cur  in  suas  posses-        did  he  mean?  why  did  he 

siones  veniret?  come  into  his  possessions? 

Imperative  Sentences  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive ;  the  negative  is,  of 

course,  ne. 

raandata  remittunt,  quorum  haec    they  sent  back  orders  of  which 

erat  summa  :  Caesar  in  Gal-        the  substance  was  as  follows: 

Ham  reverteretur,    exercitus        Caesar    should   return    into 

dimittSret  Gaul  and  disband  his  armies. 

826.  A  Clause  depending  upon  a  Subjunctive  or  In- 
finitive  takes  the  Subjunctive  if  it  is  regarded  as  an 

integral  part  of  that  clause.    This  is  called  Attraction 
of  Mood. 

mos  est  Athenis  laudari  in  con-  it  is  custom  at  Athens  for  those 
cione  eos,  qui  sint  in  proeliis  to  be  publicly  eulogized  who 
interfecti  have  been  slain  in  battle. 

827.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  subordinate  clauses  to  express 
the  thought  of  some  other  person  than  the  speaker  or  writer  • 

quos  vicSris,  amicos  tibi  esse  do  not  believe  that  those  whom 
cave  credas  you  have  conquered  are  your 

friends, 

828.  All  references  to  the  Subject  of  the  leading  clause  are  re- 
gularly expressed  by  the  Eeflexive  sGi  (stlGs) ;  as:  animus  sentit  se 
sua  vi  moveri,  the  mind  feels  that  it  moves  by  its  own  force. 

1281.  282.\ 


—    241     — 

Participles. 
S29.   There  are  two  Participles  in  the  Active  Voice: 
the  Present  Participle  denotes  continuance^  as:  scribens,  writing; 
the  Future  Participle  is  used  to  express  what  is  likely  or  about  to 
happen,  as:  scrlpturiis,  about  to  write, 

830.  There   are    two   Participles   in    the   Passive 

Voice  : 

the  Perfect  Participle  denotes  completionj  as:  seriptus,  written; 
the  Gerundive  (so-called  Future  Participle)  denotes  necessity  or  pro- 
priety,  as:  scrlbendus,  to  be  written. 

831.  Deponent  Verbs  have  four  Participles: 

the  Present  Participle,  as:  hortans,  exhorting; 
the  Perfect  Participle,  as:  hortatus,  having  exhorted; 
the  Fut.  Part.  Act.,  as:  hortaturus,  being  about  to  exhort; 
the  Fut.  Part.  Pass.,  as:  hortandiis,  to  be  exhorted. 

832.  The  Participles  are  used  attributively,  or  in 

the  manner  of  ordinary  Adjectives,  as: 

arbor  florens,  a  blossoming  tree    scripta  epistula,  a  written  letter 
puer  dormiens,  a  sleeping  boy      urbs  obsessa,  a  besieged  town. 

833.  The  Participles  are   used   with  the  utmost 
freedom  appositively,  and  may  have  the  value 

of  a  Helative,  as:  divitiae  semper  duraturae,  riches  which  will 

last  forever; 
-    of  while^  wheUf  after,  as:  Plato  scribens  mortuus  est,  Plato 

died  while  writing; 
of  if,  as:  mendaci  homini  ne  verum  quidem  dicenti  credimus, 

we  do  not  believe  a  liar,  even  if  he  speaks  the  truth; 
of  since,  because,  as:  cantus  olorlnus  recte  fabulosus  habetur 

nunquam    audltus,   the    swanks  song  is  justly  regarded    as 

fabulous,  because  it  has  never  been  heard; 
of  though,  although,   as :    oculus  se  non  videns  alia  cernit, 

the  eye,  though  not  seeing  itself  sees  other  things; 
of  to,  in  order  to  (expressing  a  purpose),  as:  Scipio  in  Africam 
•  trajgcit    Carthaginem    deleturus,    Scipio   crossed   over   into 

Africa  to  destroy  Carthage. 


—     242     — 


^ 


834.  The  Participle  with  a  negative,  as  non,  nihil  I 

is  often  best  rendered 
by  tvithout  and  a  Participial  Nouriy  as:  raulti  homines  vitupe- 
rant  libros  non  intellectos,  many  men  find  fault  with  hooks 
without  understanding  them. 

835.  Verbs  of  Perceiving  take  the  Accusative  with  the  Present 
Participle,  when  the  object  is  to  be  represented  as  actually  seen, 
heard,  etc.;  also:  facere,  induc6re,  to  represent,  introduce  (see 
813),  as: 

vidi  pu6ros  ludentes  /  saw  the  boys  playing 

Xenophon  facit  Socratem  dispu-    Xenophon  represents  Socrates 
tantem  disputing. 

[195,  196,  283^286.\ 

Ablative  Absolute. 

836.  A  Noun  or  Pronoun  with  a  Participle  is  used 
in  the  Ablative  Case  absolutely  to  express  some  accom- 
panying circumstance  or  condition  of  the  action. 

The  Ablative  Absolute  may  be  translated  by  the  English  iVom  in  a^tre 

Absolute  which  is  a  close  equivalent;  but,  as  a  rule,   the  same 

change  of  form  is  required  as  in  translating  Participles  in  general 

(see  833).    Examples  are: 

Numa  Pompillo  regnante.  Numa  Pompilius  reigning.  WJien  Nu- 

maPompilius  was  reigning.  In  the  reign  of  Numa  Pompilius. 

Tito  imperante.    In  the  reign  of  the  emperor  Titus. 

Caesare  interfecto.   Caesar  being,  having  been  murdered.   When 

Caesar  had  been  murdered.  After  the  murder  of  Caesar. 
Another  Ablative  should  not  be  placed  in  apposition  with  the  abla- 
tive absolute.  Thus  we  may  say:  puero  mortiio,  the  boy  having  died; 
but  not:  Gaio  puero  mortuo,  the  boy  Gaius  having  died;  this  should 
be  expressed  by:  cum  Gains  puer  mortuus  esset.  The  ablative  ab- 
solute with  the  Future  Participle  is  also  avoided  by  the  classic  authors. 

An  Adjective,  or  another  Noun  may  take  the  place  of  the  Parti- 
ciple, as:  . 
Xerxe  rege.    Xerxes  being  king. 

natura  duce.iVa^iire  being  the  leader.  Under  the  guidance  of  nature. 
noleutibus  nobis.    While  we  are  unwilling.    Against  our  will. 

In  spite  of  us. 
patre  invito.  While  father  is,  was  unwilling.  A  gainst  father's  ivill. 


243    — 


837.  The  want  of  a  Perfect  Active  Participle  in 
Latin  is  frequently  supplied  by  the  Ablative  Ab- 
solute with  a  Perfect  Passive  Participle,  thus: 

Caesar,  urbe  capta,  rediit  \  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^^^^  ^^^^^^  returned: 
I  Having  taken  the  city,  Caesar  returned. 

il97.  198,  287.  288.} 

Gerund. 

838.  As  the  Infinitive  is  used  as  a  Verbal  Noun  in 
the  Nominative  and  Accusative  Cases,  so  the  Gerund, 
corresponding  to  the  English  participial  noun  in  ing^ 
is  used  in  the  remaining  cases,  viz.: 


Norn. 

scribSre  est  utile 

writing  is  useful 

Gen. 

ars  scribendi 

the  art  of  writing 

Oat. 

scribendo  adfiii 

J  was  present  at  the  writing 

Ace. 

scribere  disco 

I  learn  to  wr^ite 

ad  scribendum  utilis 

useful  for  writing 

Abl. 

scribendo  discimus 

we  learn  by  writing. 

83fi 

K    The  Gerund  governs  the  same  case  as  the 

verb: 

ars  scribendi  epistulam 

the  art  of  writing  a  letter 

cupidus  te  audiendi 

desirous  of  hearing  you 

jnjurlas  ferendo 

by  bearing  wrong. ^ 

ad  beate  vivendum 

for  living  happily 

parendo  legibus 

by  obeying  the  laws. 

Gerundive. 
840.    The  Gerundive,  in  its  adjective  use,  denotes 
7iecessity  or  propriety. 

Its  most  frequent  use  is  with  esse  in  the  Passive  Periphrastic  Con- 
jugation (see  314).  The  neuter  of  the  Gerundive  witli  est,  erat, 
etc.,  is  used  impersonally  if  what  is  said  holds  good  of  people  in 
general,  as:  vivendum  est,  we  or  you  must  live. 

But  the  person  by  whom  may  also  be  added  in  the  Dative,  thus: 
mihi  scribendum  est,  I  must  or  should  write 
tibi  scribendum  est,  thou  must  or  shouldst  write 
ei  scribendum  est,  he  must  or  should  write 
nobis  scribendum  est,  tve  must  or  should  write 
vobis  scribendum  est,  you  must  or  should  write 
eis  scribendum  est,  they  must  or  should  write. 


—    244    — 

84:1.    The  Gerundive  is  used  as  an  Objective  Predi 

cate  to  denote  Purpose  after  verbs  signifying  to  give 

takCy  send  J  leave  j  as: 

curare,  to  take  care  accipgre,  to  receive 

dare,  to  give  permittSre,  to  permit 

relinqugre,  to  leave  locare,  to  let,  lease 

mittgre,  to  send  conducSre,  to  contract  for 

diviti  homini  id  aurum  servan-    Tie  gave  that  gold  to  a  rich  mar 
dum  dedit  to  keep, 

842.  The  Gerundive  of  verbs  governing  the  accu 

sative  is  frequently  used  instead  of  the  Gerund 

the  following  manner: 

The  Accusative  is  put  in  the  same  Case  as  the  Gerund; 
The  Gerund  is  then  changed  into  the  Gerundive; 
The  Gerundive  is  made  to  agree  with  the  Substantive  in  Gender, 
Number  and  Case;  thus: 

Gerund.  Gerundive. 

Gen.  scribendi  epistiilam  scribendae  epistiilae 

Dat   scribendo  epistulam  scribendae  epistulae 

Ace.   ad  scribendum  epistulam  ad  scribendain  epistulam 

Abi.    scribendo  epistulam  scribenda  epistula. 

843.  The  Genitive  of  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive 

used  with  nouns  and  adjectives,  as: 

ars  Vivendi,  the  art  of  living    equitandi  peritus,  skillful  in  riding 

consilium  urbis  delendae,  a    civitatis  regendae  peritus,  skill 

plan  for  destroying  the  city       ful  in  governing  the  state. 

Very  common  are  causa  and  gratia,  on  account  of  for  tM 
sake  of  for  the  purpose  of  with  the  Genitive  of  Gerund  and  Gerun- 
dive to  point  out  design  or  purpose,  as: 
memoriae  exercendae  gratia, /or  the  sake  of  exercising  the  memory. 

844.  The  Dative  of  the  Gerund  or   Gerundive  is 

used  with  adjectives  of  fitness  and  their  opposites: 

Tltnis,  -6,  useful,  good        apttts,  -&,  -iim,  adapted,  suited 
inatnts,  -6,  useless^  unfit  idonStis,  -a,  -iim,  fit,  suitable 


—    245     - 

to  denote  the  object  for  which;  but  the  more  common 
construction  of  these  adjectives  is  that  of  the  Ac- 
cusative with  ad,  to^  thus : 

aqua  utilis  bibendo,  water  good  for  drinking^ 

charta  inutilis  ad  scribendum,  paper  unfit  to  write  upon. 

845.  The  Accusative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive 
is  most  frequently  used  after  ad,  to,  denoting  pur- 
pose, as: 

ad  colendos  agros,  for  cultivating  the  fields; 

me  vocas  ad  scribendum,  you  summon  me  to  write; 

propensus  ad  discendum,  inclined  to  learn. 

846.  The  Ablative  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive 

is  used  as  Ablative  of  means  or  instrument,  and  most 

frequently  after  the  preposition  in,  m,  as: 

mens  discendo  alitur,  the  mind  is  nourished  by  learning 
moderatio  in  jocando,  restraint  in  joking, 

[199,  200.  289-292.] 

Supine. 

847.  The  Supines  are  verbal  nouns  of  the  Fourth 
Declension,  having  only  the  accusative  and  ablative* 
singular,  as:  amatum,  amatu,  to  love. 

The  Former  Supine  (in  iim)  is  used  after  verbs  of  motion  to  ex- 
press the  purpose  of  the  motion;  it  has  an  active  meaning,  as: 
venio  te  rogatum  /  come  to  ask  you. 

With  the  passive  infinitive  iri  (lit.  to  he  gone)  the  Supine  in  Gm 
forms  the  Future  Infinitive  Passive,  amatum  iri,  to  he  about  to  be  loved 
{315). 

The  Latter  Supine  (in  u)  has  a  passive  meaning-,  it  is  used  only 

with  a  few  Adjectives  denoting  ease  or  difficulty,  pleasure  or  dis- 

pleasure,  right  or  wrong;  with  the  nouns  ^s,  right,  ii€fa.s,  wrong, 

sometimes  with  dpiis,  need,  as: 

quid  est  tam  jucundum  audltu?     what  is  so  agreeable  in  hearing^ 


—    246    — 

Equivalents  of  the  Supine. 

848.  The  Former  Supine,  as  an  expression  of  purpose,  is  not  very 
common,  its  place  being  supplied  in  various  ways.  Thus  the  sen- 
tence: 

The  Carthaginians  sent  ambassadors  to  sue  for  peace^ 
may  be  rendered: 
Supine.  Carthaginienses  legates  miserunt  pacem  petitum. 

*th  "d  3^*  legates  miserunt  ad  pacem  petendam. 

„^a  '  1  C.  legates  misgrunt  pacis  petendae  *causa. 
causai     \ 

Put.  Part.       C.  legates  mis6runt  pacem  petituros. 

ut  w.  Snbj.    C.  legates  miserunt,  ut  pacem  petSrent. 

qui  w.  Snbj.  C.  legatos  miserunt,  qui  pacem  peterent. 

The  use  of  the  Latter  Supine  is  confined  to  a  few  verbs,  as:  dictH, 
to  tell;  facta,  to  do;  audita,  to  hear;  visii,  to  see.  With  facilis,  dif- 
ficilis,  jucundiis,  the  construction  of  S,d  with  the  gerund  is  more 
common,  as:  res  est  facilis  ad  cognoscendum  (cognitu),  the  thing  is 
easy  to  Jcnow,  [293,  294.] 

Co-ordinating  Conjunctions. 

849.  The  following  Particles  are  called  Copulative 

Conjunctions:       et,  -que,  atque  (ac),  ani 
neque,  and  not 
gti^m,  quoque,  also 
et  is  simply  and,  the  most  common  and  general  copulative,  and 
connects  independent  words  and  clauses  without  any   additional 
meaning;  -que,  affixed  to  the  word  it  annexes,  combines  things  that 
belong  closely  to  one  another;  atque  adds  a  more  important  to  a 
less  important  member.    The  following  may  serve  as  an  example  to 
illustrate  the  various  usages: 

dies  et  noctes  means  days  and  nights ,  simply; 
dies  noctesque      '*        days  and  nights,  q>8  o,  whole; 
dies  atque  noctes  **        days  and  (also)  nights, 

furem  fur  cognoscit,   et   lupus  thief  knows   thief,    and   wolf 

iupum  knows  wolf 

dum  vires  annique  sinunt,  tole-  work  while  your  strength  and 

rate  laborem  years  permit  you 

intra  moenia  atque  in  sinu  urbis  within  the  walls  and  even  in 

sunt  hostes  the  heart  of  the  city  are  the 

enemies. 


—    247    — 

Sc  does  not  stand  before  a  vowel  or  h;  atqu6  either  before 
vowels  or  consonants.  They  generally  mean  as,  than,  after  adjectives 
and  adverbs  of  likeness  and  unlikeness,  as:  aeque  ac,  as  much  as^ 
equally  as;  seciis  He,  aliter  atque,  otherwise  than. 

e,t\^ixi  iy\i.  and  farther)  eveUj  yet,  stilly  adds  a  new  circumstance, 
and  generally  precedes  the  words  to  which  it  belongs;  qudque,  so 
alsoy  which  refers  only  to  a  single  word  and  follows  that  word,  im- 
plies a  sameness  in  the  whole,  as: 
etiam  mendlcus  mendico  invidet  even  the  beggar  envies  the  beggar 
otia  corpus  alunt,  animus  quo-  rest  strengthens   the    body,   the 
que  parscitur  illis  mind,  too,  is  thus  supported. 

850.  Several  Subjects  or  Objects,  standing  in  the 
same  relations, 

either  talie  et  throughout:  polysyndeton,  i.  q.  joined  in  various  ways; 

or  omit  it  throughout:  asyndeton,  i.  e.  unconnected', 

or  take  que  only  after  the  last  member,  Ihus: 

sumraa  Me  et  constantia  et  justitla  |  ^  .^^  ^J^^    ^^^^^^^  ^^^^J^  ^^, 

summaflde,consania,justitia        ^         stanay  and  justice. 

summa  fide,  constantia,  justitiaque ) 

et  is  used  after  multi  followed  by  another  adjective,  where  in 
English  and  is  usually  omitted;  as:  muitae  et  magnae  arbores, 
m^any  large  trees, 

851.  In  the  second  member  of  a  sentence  and  not  is  expressed 
by  neque,  as:  dicunt,  neque  dubitant,  they  say  and  do  not  doubt 
Mark  the  following  Idiomatic  Expressions: 

and  no  one  neque  quisquam  nor  any  one 

and  no  neque  ullus  nor  any 

and  nothing  neque  quidquam  7ior  any  thing 

and  never  nSque  unquam  nor  ever 

852.  The  following  are  Disjunctive  Conjunctions: 

aut,  vel,  -ve,  sive  (seu),  or. 

aut,  or,  denotes  absolute  exclusion  or  substitution,  as: 
vinceris  aut  vincis,  you  are  conquered  or  conquering. 
vel  (lit.  you  may  choose)  gives  a  choice,  often  with  6tiam,  even, 
potiiis,  rather^  as: 
hie  populus  indomitus  vel  potius   this  untamable  or  rather  savage 
immanis  people. 


—     248     — 

-v5,  which  is  always  aflSxed  to  another  word,  is  only  a  weaker 
form  of  vglj  as:  pins  minusvS,  more  or  less. 

sivg  (seu),  if  you  choose j  indicates  merely  an  alternative  of 
words,  as: 
discessus  sive  potius  turpissima    the  decampment^  or  rather  the 
fuga  most  shameful  flight. 

[295,  296.] 

853.   The  following  are  Adversative  Conjunctions: 
autem,  sed,  verum,  vero,  3.t,  hut 
atqui,  hut  for  all  that 
tameii,  nevertheless 
ceterum,  for  the  rest 

The  weakest  of  them  all  in  adversative  power  is  autSm  which  is 
only  used  to  connect  sentences,  and  commonly  follows  the  first  word, 
spiritus  promptus,  caro  autem    the  spirit  is  willing^   hut  the 
infirma  flesh  is  weak. 

sed  has  two  meanings;  after  affirmative  sentences  it  is  equivalent 
to  hut  (yet)',  after  negative  sentences  to  hut  (on  the  contrary), 
homo  proponit,  sed  Deus  dispO-    man  proposeth,  hut  God  dis- 

nit  poseth 

non  opus  est  verbis,  sed  fustibus    there  is  no  need  of  words,  hut 

of  knocks. 

verQin,  lit:  it  is  true,  always  takes  the  first  place  in  the  sen- 
tence; vero,  lit:  in  truth,  is  generally  put  in  the  second  place: 
verum  praeterita  omittamus  but  let  us  lay  aside  past  things 

illud  vero  plane  ferendum  non    hut  this,  indeed,  is  not  at  all  to 
est  he  suffered. 

at  is  stronger  than  s5d ;  and  atqui,  hut  for  all  that,  is  even 
stronger  again: 

populus   me    sibilat,    at    mihi  the  mob   may   hiss  me,  hut  I 

plaudo  congratulate  myself 

0  rem  difficilem,  inquis,  et  in-  a  hard  case,  you  say,  and  an 

explicabilem.      Atqui    expli-  inexplicable  one.  And  never- 

canda  est  theless  it  ought  to  he  explained. 

tamSn,  yet,  nevertheless,  is  the  usual  correlative  of  a  concessive 
conjunction;  generally  it  comes  first  unless  a  particular  word  is  to 
be  made  emphatic:    nattiram  expellas  furca,  tamen  usque  recurret,  - 
you  may  drive  out  nature  with  a  pitchfork,  for  all  that  she  will 
ever  be  returning. 


249     — 

i 

854.  The  Causal  Conjunctions  are: 

n^iu,  euim,  namque,  etenim,  for 
nSjn  is  always  put  at  the  beginning,  enim  always  follows  the 
first  word  of  the  sentence;    namqug  and  etenim  are  commonly 
put  in  the  first  place. 

855.  The  Illative  Conjunctions  are: 

itaque,  Tgitiir,  ergo,  therefore 
ideo,  idcirco,  on  that  account 
proinde,  accordingly 
itaque  is  put  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence  and  is  used  of 
fads;  ig"itur  follows  one  or  more  words  in  its  clause,  and  is  used 
of  opinions;   ergo,  therefore^  denotes  necessary  consequence  and 
is  more  emphatic  than  igitur;  it  is  put  at  the  beginning  of  the  sen- 
tence or  after  an  emphatic  word;  proinde  is  only  employed  in  ex- 
hortations: 
quot    homines,   tot   sententiae;    many  nien^  many  minds;  there" 

falli  igitur  possumus  fore  we  may  he  mistaken 

negat  haec  filiam  me  suam  esse;    she   says   that   I  am  not  her 
non  ergo  haec  mater  mea  est        daughter,  therefore  she  is  not 

my  mother 
proinde  fac  magno  animo  sis!         accordingly  j  be  of  good  cheer! 

856.  neque  is  used  for  non  with  the  conjunctions:  enim, 
vero,  t^nien,  igitur,  thus: 

neque  enim,  for  not  neque  vero,  but  not 

neque  tamen,  yet  not  neque  igitur,  therefore  not. 

[297,  298,] 

Corresponsive  Conjunctions. 

857.  Some  Conjunctions  frequently  have  a  Corre- 
lative in  the  preceding  clause,  to  which  they  cor- 
respond. 

Copulative. 
6t . .  6t,  both . .  and  nequ6 . .  nec|^u5    }  y^eujier    nor 

cum . .  tum,  both . .  and  especially    nee . .  n6c  j 

modo.  .modo  )  nequ6.  .-quS,  on  the  one  hand 


'V 


nunc . .  nunc    i  not . .  and  on  the  other 

tiim..tum,  then.. then  6t..n6qu6,  on  the  one  hand., 

tam . . quam,  both .  .and  and  on  the  other  hand  not 


: 


—     250     — 

n5n  solum . .  sSd  ettam    J 
non  modo. .  s6d  Stiam     >-  not  only. .  but  also 
nOn  tantiim . .  sed  etiam  ) 
Disjunctive.  Comparative. 

''^l-^^H  either.. or  »*v'^^    .,.       .,.    las..s 

v6l . .  vel  )  quern admodum . .  ita   i 

siv6 . .  SI v6,  whether . .  or  [299,  soo. 


POETICAL  FORMS. 

Prosody. 

858.  Prosody  means  Accent,  and  since  Latin  accent  is  regu 
lated  by  quantity,  Prosody,  in  the  classic  sense^  has  reference  to  the 
length  of  syllables,  measured  by  the  length  of  time  taken  up  in  pro- 
nouncing them.  By  modern  Grammarians,  Prosody  is  used  in  a 
wider  sense  to  include  both  quantity  and  versification. 

Quantity. 

859.  As  a  general  rule,  each  simple  vowel  is  either  long  (-)  or 
short,  (w)  and  each  syllable  is  considered  as  either  long  or  short,  ac- 
cording as  it  contains  either  a  long  or  a  short  vowel  —  (Longs  and 
Shorts  by  Nature).  A  long  syllable  is  generally  reckoned  in  length 
equal  to  two  short  ones. 

860.  All  diphthongs  and  vowels  formed  by  contraction  are  long: 
aurum,  cogo  (c6-ago),  mSlo  (magis  volo),  nil  (nihil),  junior  (juvenior). 

Likewise  e  and  i  when  corresponding  to  Greek  ei : 
Aeneas,  Alexandrea,  Thalia,  Arion. 

861.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel  is  shorty  no  account  being 
taken  of  h,  as:  pius,  deus,  traho.  Even  a  vowel  naturally  long  or 
a  diphthong  becomes  short  before  another  vowel,  as:  d6orsum, 
praeopto. 

Exceptions: 

e  in  ei  of  the  Piffch  Declension  is  long  when  a  vowel  precedes,  as: 
diei,  but  fidei. 

i  in  the  Genitive  form  itis  is  long;  it  is,  however,  sometimes  made  j 
short  in  verse,  but  never  in  alius  (for  alilus). 

In  fio,  i  is  long,  except  when  followed  by  er,  as:  ti5,  fiebam;] 
but  fieri. 

In  the  Vocative  of  proper  names  in  -Igiis,  -eivi»,  a  and  e  are  j 
long:  ©ai,  Pompei. 


—     251     — 


In  words  from  the  Greek,  vowels  are  often  long  before  a  vowel, 
because  long  in  the  original,  as:  aer,  museum,  eos,  Agesilaus, 
Amphion. 

862.  A  syllable  with  a  short  vowel  is  considered  as  long  when 
the  short  vowel  is  followed  by  two  or  more  consonants  or  a  double 
consonant  either  in  the  same  or  in  the  following  syllable,  as:  est, 
essem,  restare,  dux.  The  consonants  may  be  divided  between  two 
words,  as  sub  sld6r6.  A  short  syllable  made  long  by  this  rule  is  said 
to  be  long  hy  Position. 

863.  But  if  the  syllable  ends  in  a  short  vowel,  and  the  next 
syllable  in  the  same  word  begins  with  a  mute  (see  6,)  followed  by  r 
or  1,  the  syllable  before  the  two  consonants  is  common  (anceps)  — 
that  is,  it  may  be  either  long  or  shor^t  (y)  in  verse,  as  in  tenSbrae; 
in  prose  it  is  invariably  short. 

864.  Every  vowel  sound  followed  by  j  is  long;  only  compounds 
of  jugum,  yoke  J  retain  the  short  vowel  before  j,  as:  bijugus, 
two-horse. 

865.  Forms  from  the  same  stem,  whether  Inflections,  Deriva- 
tives, or  Compounds  retain  the  original  quajitity  of  the  radical 
syllable,  even  when  the  vowel  is  changed,  as: 

amor,  amicus,  inimlcus,  inimicitia 
s3>pio,  sapor,  sapiens,  insipiens. 


from  fido 


Middle  Syllables. 

866,    Perfects  and  Supines  of  two  syllables  have  the  first  syllable 
long  even  when  that  of  the  present  is  short,  as:  venT,  vidi,  vici. 
Exceptions:  1  Perfects:  bibi,  dedi,  fidi 

steti,  stiti,  tQli,  scidi. 
10  Supines:   datura,  ratum,  satnm 
citum,  ituin,  statum 
litum,  quitum,  situm,  riitum. 


Exceptions:  pax,  pacis 

from 

paciscor 

fides 

rex,  regis 

u 

rego 

fidelis 

sedes 

u 

sedeo 

perfidus 

v5x,  voois 

u 

voco 

perfidia 

dux,  dficis 

li 

duco 

but: 

n5ta         j 
nOtio       ^ 
ndtare     ) 

confido 

u 

notus 

diffido 

lidus 

ddium 

a 

5di 

infidus 
fiducia 

I 


—     252     — 

867.  Reduplicated  Perfects  shorten  both  syllables,  but  the  second 
may  be  made  long  by  position,  as:  tango,  tgtlgi  — fallo,  fgfelli.  The 
only  exception  is  caedo,  cecidi  in  distinction  from  cado,  cecidi. 

868.  Perfects  in  Qi  have  their  stem  vowel  short,  as: 

vSto-vetuI;  pl5.c6o-piacuI;  c61o-c61iii. 

Exceptions:  debSo,  =  dehibSO;  florae  from  flos;  par^O,  and  pono, 
but  posui. 

869.  Supines  in  ittim  have  i  long  when  from  Perfects  in  Tvl 
(ii),  as:  cupitum,  petitum,  auditum.  recenseo  has  recensitum  from 
recensLii  in  the  Perfect. 

870.  Verbs  in  io  (i6r)  of  the  Third  ConjugatioD  have  a  short 
stem  vowel:  faciO,  cGpIO,  j2.cio,  potior,  &c.  &c. 

871.  The  verb  endings  imus,  itis  have  only  in  the  Present  of 
the  Fourth  Conjugation  a  long  penult;  also  in  simus,  sitis;  posslmus, 
possitis;  velimus,  velitis;  nolimus,  nolitis;  malimus,  malitis;  faxi- 
mus,  faxitis. 

872.  In  rimiis.  and  ritis  of  the  Future  Perfect,  and  Perfect  Suh- 
junctive,  i  of  the  penult  is  common^  i.  e.,  it  may  be  long  in  verse, 
amaverimus,  amav^ritis. 

873.  The  terminations  abtis,  5l)us,  gbtis  in  plural  cases,  have 
a  long  penult,  ibiis  and  tibus  a  short  one. 

filiabus,  duobus,  diebus  —  duclbus,  acGbus. 

874.  Derivative  Adjectives  in  alis,  aris,  anQs,  ivfls,  5siis 

have  the  penult  long:  naturalis,  vulgaris,  hunianus,  nativus,  odi- 
osus; 

those  in  icus  and  idiis  have  it  short:  bellicus,  cupidus. 

Exceptions:  amicus,  anticus,  apricus,  posticus,  pudicus. 

875.  Verbal  Adjectives  in  ilio  have  the  penult  shorty  as  docilis, 
facilis.  But  Derivatives  from  nouns  have  it  long\  as  hostilis,  pueriHs. 

Exceptions:  humilis  from  humus;  parilis  from  par. 

876.  Adjectives  in  intls  have  the  penult  long^  as: 

divinus,  genuinus,  peregrinus,  vicinus. 

But  if  such  Adjectives  denote  time  or  material^  the  penult  ig 
shorty  as:  adamantinus,  crastinus,  diutinus. 

Exceptions:  matutfuus,  yespertiuus,  repentinus, 


—     253     — 

Final  Syllables. 

877.  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  final  a,  e,  and  y  are 
short  J  i,  o,  and  u  are  long: 

1.  a  is  short:  terra,  tecta,  capita. 
Exceptions: 

Ablative  of  the  First  Declension:  terra. 

Vocative  of  Greek  words  in  as:  Aenea. 

Imperative  of  First  Conjugation:  ama. 

Most  uninflected  words  as  triginta,  antea,  contra;  but:  ita,  quiS. 

2.  e  is  short:  rete,  ips€,  antg. 

Exceptions: 

Ablative  of  FiftJi  Declension^  die. 

Imperative  of  Second  Conjugation^  mone. 

Most  Adverbs  from  Adjectives  of  the  Second  Declension^  as:  recte, 
docte.  But  notice:  b6n6,  male,  saepS,  temerg,  supernS,  in- 
fern§.  impune  and  necesse  are  from  old  forms  impunis  and 
necessis. 

Greek  words  in  e  (7) :  Niobe,  Tempe. 

3.  i  is  long:  domini,  viginti,  amari. 
Exceptions: 

nisi,  quasi. 

Dative  and  Vocative  of  Greek  words^  Daphnidi,  Alexi. 

i  is  common  in:  mihi,  tibi,  sibi,  ibi,  ubi. 

Notice  the  Compounds:  of  iibi:  ubinam,  ubivis,  ubique  —  of  ibi: 
alibi,  ibidem  —  of  ut,  utl:  utinam,  utique. 

4.  o  is  long:  bono,  amato. 
Exceptions: 

Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  and  verbal  forms,  as:  leO,  vet6. 

6g6,  du5,  m6d6,  dummodd,  tantummodd,  quandS,  quanddquidgm. 

5.  u  is  always  long:  cornu,  fructii,  auditii. 

878.  All  Final  Syllables  that  end  in  a  single  consonant  other 
than  s  are  short:  Sd,  amat,  consQl,  captit. 

Exceptions: 
Compounds  of  par,  dispar,  impar.— The  Adverbs  illlc,  iliac,  istGc. 

Many  Greek  nouns,  as:  aer,  aether,  crater;  also  alec,  lien. 


—    254    — 

879.  Final  as,  es,  os  are  long;  final  is,  us,  ys  are  short. 

1.  as  is  long:  MessiEs,  silvas,  vocas. 
Exceptions: 

Greek  nouns  in  Ss,  ^dis,  as  Areas,  Arc&dis. 
Greek  accusative  plur. :  heroes,  Arcad3;S. 
anS-s,  anatis. 

2.  es  is  long:  leges,  dies,  doces. 
Exceptions: 

Nom.  Sing.  Tliird  Declension,  when  the  Genitive  has  6tis,  itis, 
idis  with  short  penult,  as  miles,  seges,  obses;  but  abies,  aries, 
paries. 

Compounds  of  es,  he;  as:  ades 

penes  (Preposition). 

Greek  words  in  es  {eg)  Thraees,  ArcadSs. 

3.  OS  is  long:  deos,  nepos. 

Exceptions:  compos,  impds  —  Greek  words  in  6s:  Delos. 

4.  is  is  short:  canis,  legis. 
Exceptions: 

Plural  Cases  of  all  Declensions:  mensis,  servis,  nobis,  omnis, 
partis  (Aocus.  pi.). 

The  Nominative  of  such  substantives  as  have  in  the  Genitive  itis, 
inis,  entis,  as  Salamis,  Samnis,  Simois,  -entis. 

Second  Pers.  Sing.  Pros.  Indie.  Active,  Fourth  Conjugation  audis; 
likewise  veils,  nolis,  malis,  possis  and  the  Compounds  of  sis. 

pulvis  and  sanguis. 

5.  us  is  short:  gladitis,  vulnus,  fructus,  amamiis. 
Exceptions: 

Gen.  Sing.  Nom.  and  Ace.  Plur.  Fourth  Declension.,  fructus. 
Nominative  of  the  Third  Declension  when  the  Genitive  has  a  long 

u:  virtus,  palus,  tellus. 
Greek  words  with  u  long  [ov) :  triptis. 

6.  ys  (in  words  of  Greek  origin)  is  short:  chlamys,  Halys. 

Monosyllables. 

880.  All  words  of  one  syllable  that  end  in  a  vowel,  are  long: 
a,  da,  me,  de,  hi,  pro,  tu. 

The  attached  particles  -qug,  -ve,  -ne,  -ce,  -te,  -pte  are  short. 
On  the  Prefix  r6  see  below  885, 


I 


—       'JDO       — 


881,  Substantives  and  Adjectives  of  one  syllable  are  lonQf  when 
they  end  in  a  consonant  even  if  the  stem-syllable  be  short,  as:  os, 
raos,  ver,  sol,  fur,  plus;  pes  (pedis),  bos  (bovTs),  par  (paris). 

Exceptions:  vir.  l^c,  os  (ossis),  mel 
cof,  v3.s  (vadis),  fel. 
liie,  this  07ie,  is  sometimes  short. 

882.  All  ^other  words  of  one  syllable  that  end  in  a  consonant, 
are  short:  per,  ter,  cis,  in,  fac. 

Exceptions:  6n,  non,  quin  —  eras,  cur,  sin 
the  Adverbs  J  hic,  hue,  hac,  sic. 
die  and  due  have  the  quantity  of  their  verbs ;  es,  he^  is  short. 

Quantity  in  Compounds. 

S83.  Compounds  generally  retain  the  quantity  of  their  compo- 
nent parts,  as:  diico,  dsduco,  conduce;  eo,  abeo,  obeo,  in6o;  dico, 
contradico. 

884.  pro  is  short  in  Greek  words,  as  prophSta;  but  long  in 
Latin  {880)  though  there  are  many  exceptions,  especially  before  f; 
as: 

procella  profestus  profundo 

profanus  pr5fite6r  pronepos 

profari  prdficiscor  propago 

prdfectO  profuglo  proterviis. 

885.  Of  the  inseparable  Prefixes,  di,  se,  and  ve  are  loyig^  rS 
is  short:  didiico,  seduco,  reduco. 

Exceptions:  clirimo,  disertus 

religio,  refert,  reliquiae. 

886.  In  a  few  words,  the  quantity  of  the  second  part  is 
changed.    Such  are:  pejero,  fromjuro;  cogiiitus  from  notus. 

A  remarkable  change  of  quantity  appears  in  the  Compounds  of 
-dicus,  from  dico:  fatidicus,  veridicus,  maledicus,  and  in:  inniiba, 
proniiba,  from  niibo. 

FIGURES  OF  PROSODY. 
^     887.    E 1  i  s  i  0  n  is  the  omission  or  rather  partial  suppression 
of  a  final  vowel  or  a  final  m  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a 
vowel  or  h,  as: 

deserto  in  litore  to  he  read  desert'  in  litore 

certae  occumbere  morti  ''         cert'  occumbere  morti 

supremum  audire  laborem         *^         suprem'  audire  laborem. 


—     256     — 

888.  The  practice  of  elision  is  followed  in  poetry  to  avoid  the 
hiatus  (gaping)  J  or  the  meeting  of  two  vowels  in  separate  syllables. 
But  before  and  after  Interjections  the  hiatus  is  allowed,  as: 

0  et  I  d6  Lati|a,  0  |  et  de  |  g^ntg  Sa|bina. 

889.  Elided  syllables  should  be  sounded  but  lightly.  After  a 
vowel  or  m  final,  the  word  est  drops  its  e  and  is  joined  with  the 
preceding  syllable;  as: 

multa  est,  read  multa'st;  mnltum  est,  read  multum'st. 

890.  Synaeresis,  or  the  contraction  of  two  vowels  which  are 
commonly  pronounced  separately,  is  regular  in  the  following  words: 
deinde,  proinde,  deest,  deesse,  antehac  (=  anthac)  and  in  all  forms 
of  the  verb  anteire  (==  antire). 

891.  In  like  manner  i  and  u  before  vowels  are  sometimes  used 
as  consonants  with  the  sounds  ofy  and  tf\  as:  fluviorum  saij  fltivyo- 
riim;  ablets  =  abyete;  genua  =  genwa. 

892.  One  syllable  is  sometimes  resolved  into  two  by  D  i  a  e  r  e  s  i  s, 
as:  SI  111  ae  =  sil  vae;  in  su.  6  tus  ==  in  sue  tus. 

893.  Syncope,  a  cutting  short  is  the  taking  away  of  one  or 
more  letters  from  the  middle  of  a  word,  as:  saeclum  for  saecGlum; 
prendere  for  prehenderCo 

894.  Apocope,  a  cutting  off,  is  the  cutting  off  a  letter  or 
letters  from  the  end  of  a  word,  as:  viden,  for  videsne;  ain  for  aisne. 

895.  Systole  is  the  shortening  of  &  long  syllable,  as:  dede- 
runt  for  dederant;  Diastole  the  lengthening  of  a  short  syllable, 
as  Priamides  for  Priamides. 

896.  Epenthesis  is  the  insertion  of  a  letter  or  a  syllable 
in  the  middle  of  a  word,  as  in  the  old  forms  siet,  possiet  for  sit, 
possit. 

897.  T  m  S  s  i  s  is  the  separation  of  compound  words  into  their 
parts,  as: 

quam  rem  cunque/or,  quamcunque  rem 
per  mihi  gratum      '^    mihi  pergratum 
super  unus  eram     ^*    unus  superSram, 


—     25t     — 


Essentials  of  Versification. 
898.    A  verse,  or  line  of  poetry  consists  of  a  series  of  measures 
which  are  called  Feet. 

The  feet  most  frequently  employed  in  Latin  verse  are  the  fol- 
lowing: 

Of  two  syllables. 
WW  Pyrrhichius,  jP^rrTitc 

Spondeus,  Spondee 

u«  Iambus, /am6us 

jTrochaeus,  Trochee  \ 


\  C  h  0  r  e  u  s,  Choree 


patSr 
virtus 
amans 

matgr 


W    (w»   _ 

w  _  w 


u 

\J 


Of  three  syllables. 
Tribrachys,  Tribrach 
Molossus,  Molossus 
D  a  c  t  y  1  u  s,  Dactyl 
Anapaestus,  Anapaest 
Amphibrachys,  Amphibrach 
Amphimacrus,  Amphiviacer ) 
CretTcus,  Gretic  ) 

Bacchius,  Bacchius  ' 

Antibacchlus,  Antibacchius 

Of  Feet  of  four  syllables  the  following  are  recognized: 

Proceleusmaticus,  Proceleusmatic  c616rit6r 


adgrit 

mortales 

tempora 

sapiens 

adessg 

tScSrant 

amori 
pGccata 


KJ    KJ    \J    <J 

—    ^  -    U 

U   _  U    _ 

U   U 

\J   U 

^    KJ  \J    -. 


Dispondeus,  Double  Spondee  intgrrumpunt 

Ditrochaeus,  Double  Trochee  Infidelis 

D  i  i  a  m  b  u  s,  Double  Iambus  rgnuntians 

lonicus  a  minor e,  Lesser  Ionic  mStuSntes 

Ionic  us  a  ma  j  ore,  Greater  Ionic  sgntentia 

Choriambus,  Ghoriambus  curriculo 

Antispastus,  Antispast  verecundus. 


899.  The  Unit  of  measure  is  tlie  short  syllable  (-)/  this  is 
called  a  mora  (time).  A  long  syllable  (-)  is  regularly  equal  to  two 
morae.  Accordingly  in  some  verses,  two  short  syllables  may  be  used 
instead  of  a  long,  or  a  long  instead  of  two  short. 

900.  Rhythm  is  the  alternate  elevation  and  depression  of  the 
voice  at  certain  intervals  of  time.  That  part  of  the  foot  which  is 
distinguished  from  the  rest  by  a  greater  stress  of  voice  is  called 

.Arsis,  the  other  part  Thesis.    The  stress  of  voice  laid  upon  the 
arsis  is  called  ictus  (beat);  it  is  marked  thus  L 


—     258     —  ^ 

901,  The  natural  arsis  is  invariably  on  the  long  syllable  or 
syllables  of  a  foot;  hence  the  Trochee  and  Dactyl  have  the  ictus  on 
the  first  syllable,  the  Iambus  and  Anapaest  on  the  last,  and  the  Cretic 
on  the  first  and  last.  Only  those  feet  which  consist  of  both  long  and 
short  Syllables  can  have  Arsis  and  Thesis,  or  Rhythm,  and  are,  there- 
fore, called  Rhythmical  Feet.  Those  consisting  entirely  of  long  or 
entirely  of  short  syllables  are  only  used  as  substitutes  for  rhythmical 
feet,  and  take  the  ictus  of  the  foot  for  which  they  stand;  hence,  a 
Spondee  when  used  for  the  Dactyl  takes  the  ictus  of  the  Dactyl,  viz: 
on  the  first  syllable;  but  when  used  for  the  Anapaest,  it  takes  the 
Anapaestic  rhythm,  viz:  the  ictus  on  the  last  syllable. 

902,  Rhythmical  Feet  are  simple  when  they  have  only  one 
arsis,  and  compound  when  they  have  more  than  one.  If  the  arsis 
follows,  the  rhythm  is  called  ascending,  if  it  precedes,  descending. 

903,  A  Verse  is  simple  when  it  has  one  dominant  measure 
which  determines  the  rhythm  of  the  whole  verse;  and  compound^ 
when  diflTerent  rhythms  are  combined  in  the  same  verse.  The  latter 
are  only  found  in  lyric  poetry. 

904,  A  verse  takes  its  name  ft*om  the  predominant  measure  as 
Iambic,  Trochaic,  Dactylic,  Anapaestic,  and  from  the  number  of 
feet  that  compose  it,  as,  Hexameter,  Pentameter,  Tetra- 
meter, Trimeter,  Dimeter,  Monometer. 

905,  In  Dactyls  and  all  compound  rhythmical  feet  (see  above 
902)  a  measure  is  a  single  foot;  accordingly,  a  verse  having  five 
dactyls  is  called  a  pentameter;  one  having  six  dactyls,  hexa- 
meter. 

906,  Trochaic,  Iambic,  and  Anapaestic  verses  are  measured 
not  by  single  feet,  hut  by  pairs  (d  i  p  o  d  i  a,  dipody).  In  these  rhythms 
a  monomgter  contains  two  feet,  a  dimeter  four,  a  trimeter 
six,  a  tetrameter  eight. 

907,  A  verse  is  termed  Acatalectic  {not  halting  short)  when 
its  last  foot  is  complete;  a  verse  lacking  a  syllable  at  the  end  is 
called  Catalectic;  it  is  catalectic  in  syllabam,  or  in  bisylla- 
b  u  m,  according  to  the  number  of  syllables  in  the  last  foot. 

90S.  The  l^st  syllable  of  a  verse  may  be  long  or  short  indif- 
ferently, and  is,  therefore,  called  syllaba  anceps,  because  the  time 
wanting  is  made  up  by  pause. 


—     259     — 

909.  jVTost  simple  verses  "have  certain  breaks  or  pauses  to  rest 
the  voice,  and  to  prevent  monotony.  The  break  occasioned  by  the 
ending  of  a  word  m  the  middle  of  a  foot,  is  called  Caesura  marked 
thus  t-    The  verse 

Donee  f  eris  f  felix  f  multos  |  numerabis  f  amicos 
has  five  Caesiirae.     Again,  the  coincidence  of  the  end  of  a  word 
with  the  end  of  a  foot  is  called  Diaeresis  marked  thus  ||. 

Tempera  ||  si  fuerint  \\  nubila  ||  solus  eris. 
Every  verse  must  have,  about  its  middle,  one  principal  c  a  e  s  Ci  r  a 
or  d  i  a  e  r  e  s  i  s. 

910.  Caesura  is  prevailing  in  Iambic  smd  Dactylic  verses, 
while  the  Anapaestic  Duneter J  Trochaic  Tetrameter y  Dactylic  Fen- 
tameter  and  the  Ghoriambic  verse  have  a  fixed  diaeresis  in  the 
middle  of  the  verse. 

911.  A  caesura  occurring  after  the  arsis  of  a  foot  is  called 
masculine;  a  caesura  occurring  after  the  thesis  is  called  femi- 
nine: 

Lkj    ^I  —        Gu|  JL       CD j  L  CXJ I  —  ^-^        yj\L  \j 

Una  salus  f  victis  f  nuUam  f  sperare  f  salutem. 
maso.      masc.        masc.  fern. 

A  caesura  may  be  found  in  any  foot  of  the  verse  except  the  first. 

912.  In  Iambic  and  Dactylic  metres,  the  Caesurae  are  named 
according  to  the  number  of  half-feet  before  them,  thus: 

1.  t  r  i  t  h  e  m  i  m  6  r  e  s       (f )  at  the  end  of  the  3d  half  foot 

2.  penthemimeres     (f)  ^'  5th     '^ 

3.  h  e  p  h  t  h  e  m  i  m  6  r  e  s  (J)  "  Ttb     ' ' 

4.  ennehemimgres      (f)  *^  9th     *' 
They  are  all  represented  in  the  following  hexameter: 

Zww|Z        wu|Z         kJj\L       UD\L       uu|Z_ 

Ille  latus  f  niveum  f  molli  f  fultus  f  hyacyntho. 

12  3  4 

913.  To  read  verse  rhythmically  is  an  accomplishment  which 
must  be  taught  orally.  Observing  the  rules  of  quantity  and  versifi- 
cation, take  care  not  to  dwell  on  the  rhythm  of  the  verse  to  the 
neglect  of  accent  and  connection  of  the  words.  The  ordinary  mode 
of  scanning,  as: 

L  Kj  \j  \  Lud\  L  GO   \  L  "^  Kj    \  L  Kj  Kj  \  L   — 
Donece  risfe  lixmul  tosuume  rabisa  micoa 
is  worse  thaa  useless. 


—    260     — 

DACTYLIC  HEXAMETER. 

914,  The  Dactylic  Hexameter  (Heroic  Verse)  or  simply  He- 
xameter consists  regularly  of  six  dactyls  and  is  catalectic  in  bisylla- 
bum.  Spondees  may  be  substituted  for  the  dactyl  in  the  first  four 
feet.  Rarely  a  spondee  is  found  in  the  fifth  place,  and  when  it  is,  the 
verse  is  called  Spondaic.    Accordingly  its  formula  is: 

luD\  Lud\Lud\1^\1^^\1d 

915,  Of  the  great  number  of.  possible  caesurae  in  the  Hexa- 
meter the  following  are  the  most  usual: 

The  principal  caesura  is  the  Penthemimeral,  or  masculine  caesura 
of  the  third  foot,  as: 

L  Kj    Kj  \  L    \j     ^\—       ^^  I  —    ^>^  j  —    ^     yj  \  L  ^ 
Arma  virumque  cano,  \  Trojae  qui  primus  ab  oris. 

The  next  is  the  feminine  caesura  of  the  third  foot,  also  called 

fiETa  rpLTQv  rpoxcuov^  aS: 

0  passi  graviora,  f  dabit  deus  his  quoque  finem. 

Then  comes  the  Hephthemimeral  in  the  arsis  of  the  fourth  foot, 
usually  accompanied  by  the  trithemimSres  after  the  second  arsis,  as: 

Stat  sonipes  f  ac  frena  ferox  f  spumantia  mandit. 

916,  The  last  word  of  a  Hexameter  should  be  either  a  dis- 
syllable,  or  a  trisyllable;  monosyllables  at  the  end  denote  em- 
phasis, as: 

L  <j  ^\—      '^l  —       o3|Z  UD  I  i.u  wj  Z     _ 
Parturiunt  montes  f  nascetur  ridiculus  mus. 

917,  In  the  first  part  of  the  verse  variety  in  the  use  of  dactyls 
and  spondees  has  an  agreeable  effect.  A  light  and  rapid  movement 
is  produced  by  the  frequent  recurrence  of  dactyls,  a  slow  and  heavy 
one  by  that  of  spondees.  The  following  examples  have  been  chosen 
with  especial  reference  to  this  point: 

Quadrupedante  f  putrem  f  sonitu  f  quatit  ungula  campum. 
(Cyclopes)  Illi  inter  f  sese  f  magna  f  vi  brachia  toUunt. 


H|.  ELEGIAC  PENTAMETEE. 

918,  The  Elegiac  Pentameter  consists  of  two  parts  separated 
by  Diaeresis.  Each  part  consists  of  two  dactyls  and  the  arsis  of  a 
third;  tiie  first  part  admits  spondees,  the  second  does  not: 

L    \jKj\L    KjKj\^\\  L\j  ^\  L  Kj    u|y 
Tempora  si  fuerint  nubila  solus  eris. 

It  derives  its  name  from  the  number  of  dactyls.    (2^  +  2^  =  5.) 

919,  The  Elegiac  Pentameter  is  seldom,  if  ever,  used  except 
in  the  Elegiac  Distich^  which  consists  of  the  Hexameter  followed  by 
the  Pentameter: 

L    Kj      kj\L\j3\L       \Jj\  L       \j    \j\L\j      \j\-yL 

^b  Donee  eris  fehx,  multos  numerabis  amicos; 

^K.  L    ^  \j\L  \j \j\L  II  Lkjkj\  Lkj    u|y 

^^B  Tempora  si  fuerint  nubila,  solus  eris. 

920,  No  monosyllables  can  stand  at  the  end  of  either  part  of 
the  Pentameter,  except  when  preceded  by  another,  one,  as: 

L     u     '^l—        Cu|_||Z.     u  \j\L\j    u|  — 

Magna  tamen  spes  est  in  bonitate  Dei. 

921,  Neither  syllaba  anceps  nor  hiatus  is  allowed  at 
the  diaeresis.  Almost  every  Pentameter  ends  in  a  dissyllable, 
and  elision  is  avoided. 

IAMBIC  TRIMETEK. 

922,  The  most  common  form  of  Iambic  verse  is  the  Senarian, 
or  Iambic  Trimeter;  it  is  of  frequent  occurrence  In  lyric  poetry, 
and  is  also  the  ordinary  verse  of  dramatic  dialogue.  Since  the  final 
syllable  must  be  anceps,  the  formula  of  the  verse  is  as  follows: 

\j  L  \j  —\  \j  L  \j  —  \  \j  L  \j  \A 

923,  In  the  Iambic  Trimeter  a  Spondee  or  its  equivalent 
(Anapaest  or  Dactyl  with  Iambic  ictus  _  vi;  u)  may  be  regularly  sub- 
stituted in  the  odd  places  (1st,  3d,  5th  foot),  also  a  Tribrach  {^  \j  ^j) 
anywhere  except  in  the  last  place. 

924,  The  principal  caesura  of  the  Iambic  Trimeter  is  either  the 
penthemimeral  which  falls  on  the  middle  of  the  3d  foot,  or  the 
hephihemimeral  which  falls  on  the  middle  of  the  fourth  foot. 

COMPOUND  VEESES. 

925,  A  verse  is  compound  if  different  measures  are  combined 
in  the   same  to  produce   a  more  artificial  movement   especially 


—     262    — • 

characteristic  of  lyric  poetry.  If  a  dactylic  rhythm  passes  into 
trochees,  the  movements  are  intermediate  between  those  of  prose 
and  poetry.  Hence  the  name  Logaoedic  verse  (from  Adyog^  prose, 
and  aoL8r]j  song).  Sometimes  an  introductory  foot  of  two  syllables 
which  is  called  Basis  and  commonly  marked  thus  X,  is  put  before 
the  dactylic  or  logaoedic  series.  The  Verses  constructed  upon  the 
Logaoedic  form  (especially  those  used  by  Horace)  are  the  following: 

1.  Adonic  (a  dactyl;  a  trochee): 

L  uu  I  Z  u 
Terruit  tirbem. 

2.  Aristophanic  (a  dactyl;  two  trochees): 

L  uu[  L     \j  \  L  <j 
Lydia  die  per  omnes. 

3.  Pherecratean  (basis;  a  dactyl;  a  trochee): 

Z.^_  |Zu  Kj\L  o 
Yix  durare  carinae. 

4.  Glyconic  (basis;  a  dactyl;  trochaic  dipody  catalectic): 

Romae  principis  iirbium. 

5.  Lesser  Sapphic  (double  basis;  a  dactyl;  two  trochees): 

Integer  vitae  scelerisque  piirus. 

6.  Greater  Sapphic  (double  basis;  a  dactyl;  a  trochee  ca^aZec^ic; 

a  dactyl ;  two  trochees) : 

T^  Deos  oro,  Sybarin  cur  properas  amando. 

7.  Lesser  Asclepiadean  (basis;  a  dactyl;  a  trochee  catalectic;  a 

dactyl;  a  trochaic  dipody  catalectic): 

Maecenas  atavis  edite  regibiis. 

8.  Greater  Asclepiadean  (basis;  a  dactyl;  a  trochee  catalectic;  a 

dactyl;  sl  trochee  catalectic;  a  dactyl;  trochaic  dipody  ca- 
talectic) : 

Z?^«  \  L  ^   Kj\l\\l<j    w|Z  II  Z  u  u  I  Z  u  I  y 

Nullam  Vare  sacra  vite  prius  severis  arborem. 

In  the  Greater  Sapphic  and  both  the  Asclepiadeans,  the  dactyl 

with  the  catalectic  trochee  appears  a  simple  Ohoriambus :_  vj  u_; 

hence  these  metres  have  obtained  the  general  name  of  Choriambic. 


—    263    — 
9.    Lesser  Alcaic  (two  dactyls;  two  trochees): 

S^irginibiis  puerisque  canto. 

10.  Greater  Alcaic  (anacrusis;  double  basis;  a  dactyl;  trochaic 

dipody  catalectic) : 

Justum  6t  tenacem  propositi  virum. 
One  or  more  syllables  placed  before   the  proper  beginning  of 
the  measure  are  called  an  anacrusis;  it  is  separated  by  a  colon: 

11.  ArcMlochian  (dactylic  tetrameter;  three  trochees): 

Solvitur  acris  hiems  f  grata  vice  v^ris  ^t  Favoni. 

METBES  OF  HORACE. 

926.  Verses  are  combined  in  two  different  ways.  Either  the 
same  verse  is  repeated  throughout;  such  are  the  Heroic  Hexameter 
and  the  Iambic  Trimeter.  Or  the  same  verse  or  different  verses 
recurring  in  a  certain  order  are  combined  in  a  Stanza  or  Strophe. 
A  strophe  of  two  lines  is  called  a  Distich.;  of  three,  a  Tristich;  of 
four  a  Tetrastich. 

927,  Horace  uses  the  Hexameter  in  his  Epistles  and  Satires, 
The  Odes  include  nineteen  varieties  of  strophe,  viz. : 

L    Alcaic  Strophe,  consisting  of : 

Two  Greater  Alcaics  )  -  •  -^^  -  -  II  -  ^  ^ I-  ^1  ^  I  ^^^  lo 


Uu|y) 


One  Trochaic  Dimeter  with  anacrusis  d:ZuZo|ZuZo 
One  Lesser  Alcaic  j[.uu|Zwu|Zu|Zu         925, 9 

Justitm  et  tenacem  propositi  virum 
Non  civium  ardor  prava  jub^ntium 
Non  viiltus  instantis  tyranni 
Mente  quatit  solida  neqwe  Auster. 
2.    Sapphic  Strophe  (minor),  consisting  of: 


Three  lesser  Sapphics       -^   Z.  ^  _  -  \1^kj^\1\j\1d     Y     ^25. 


^j  — 


One  Adonic  Z  u  w  |  Z  a  92s,  1 

Jam  satis  terris  nivis  atque  dirae 
Grandinis  misit  pater  et  rubente 
D^xtera  sacras  jaculatus  arces 
Terruit  iirbem. 


—     264    — 

3.  Sapphic  Strophe  (major),  consisting  of: 

One  Aristophanic  1  \j  ^u\  1  kj  \lo  925. 2 

One  Greater  SappMc  l}\j  Z.^^  U  ^  u  |  Z  ||  1  w  u  |  Z  u  |  Z  o  925.  q 
Two  pairs  are  combined  into  a  tetrastich. 
Lydia  die  per  omnes 
T6  deos  oro,  Sybarin  cur  properas  amando. 
4   Asclepiadean  Strophe  I.  (minor),  consisting  of: 


Lesser  Asclepiadeans 


jZ.^_|Zwu|Z||Zuu|Zu|y) 

1  z.^_  |Zuu|Z||z^w|iv.|w  p^^-^ 


repeated  in  tetrastichs: 

Maecenas,  atavis  edite  regibiis 

O  et  praesidium  et  diilce  deciis  meiim. 

5.  Asclepiadean  Strophe  II.,  consisting  of: 

One  Glyoonic  Z?l-  |  Z  w  u  |  Z  vj  |  y  925. 4 

One  Lesser  Asclepiadean  Z.  _  !Zuu|Z||Zuu|Z^^|y        925.  i 
alternating,  and  so  forming  tetrastichs. 
Navis,  quae  tibi  cr6ditum 
D6bes  Y^rgilium,  finibus  Atticis 
Reddas  incolumem,  precor, 
Et  serves  animae  dimidiiim  meae. 

6.  Asclepiadean  Strophe  III.,  consisting  of: 

(  Z>^_|Zuu|Z||Zuu|Zu|y) 
Three  Lesser  Asclepiadeans  <  Z.  _  |Zwv|Z||Zwu|Zu|y>-  925, 7 

(  Z.^_|ZuulZ||Zuv^|Z  w|y  ) 
One  Glyconio  Z.^_  |  Z  u  u  |  Z  w  |  y  925. 4 

Quis  desiderio  sit  pudor  aut  modus 
Tam  carl  capitis?  —  Praecipe  lugubr^s 
Cantus,  M61pomene,  cui  liquidam  pat^r 
Yocem  cum  cythara  dedit. 

7.  Asclepiadean  Strophe  IV.,  consisting  of: 

Two  Lesser  Asclepiadeans  \  ~y~  l-'-'^l-ll-^^l-^l-  I  ^25.1 


llX-U 


uw|JL||JLuu|Zuly 


One  Phereoratean  Z.^_  |  Z  u  u  |  Z  o  925. 3 

One  Glyconic  Z.^_  I  Z  ^  u  |  Z  u  |  y  925.4. 

O  fons  Bandusiae  splendidior  vitro 
Dulci  digne  mero,  non  sine  floribus 
Cras  donaberis  haedo 
Cui  frons  turgida  c6rnibiis. 


265     — 


8.  Asclepiadean  Strophe  V.,  consisting  of  the 

i    L^^\lyj^\l\\lu^\l\\lyj<j\l^ 

Greater  Asclepiadean  \  !?^_  \1  kj  ^\1\\1  kj  kj\1\\1  kj  kj\1  kj 

z.^_  I .:  u  u  I  z  m  u  w  I  z  1 1  z  w  u  1  z  ^ 


repeated  in  fours      j  _^X 


925,S 


Til  ne  quaesieris,  scire  nefas  qu6m  mihi,  quern  tibi 
Finem  di  dederint,  Leiiconoe,  nee  Babylonios 
Tentaris  numeros.    At  melius,  quidquid  erit  pati  1 
Sell  plur^s  hiemes,  seii  tribuit  Juppiter  iiltimam. 

9.  Alcmanian  Strophe,  consisting  of: 

Dactylic  Hexameter  1kjo\Lud\1J[Ud\1kjo\1\j\j\1d 
Dactylic  Tetrameter      Iud  \  Iud  \  1  kj  yj  \  Id 

Qu6  nos  ciinque  fer^t  melior  fortuna  par^nte, 
Ibimus  6  socii  comitesque. 

10.  Archilochian  Strophe  I.,  consisting  of: 

>       Dactylic  Hexameter  1uo\1uo\1\uo\1ud\1\j^\1u 
Dactylic  Trimeter  I  u  w  |  Z  u  w  |  y 

Diffugere  niv^s,  redeiint  jam  gramina  campis 
Arboribiisque  comae. 

11.  Archilochian  Strophe  II.,  consisting  of: 

Dactylic  Hexameter  1ud\1uo\1\uj\1uo\1\j\j\1d 
Iambic  Dimeter  DZw_|Dlwy 

Dactylic  Trimeter        Z  w  u  |  Z  u  v^  |  y 

Horrida  tempestas  caelum  contraxit  et  imbres 

Niv6sque  deduciint  Jovem: 

Nunc  mare,  nunc  siluae. 

The  second  and  third  lines  of  this  strophe  are  often  written  as 
one  verse. 

12.  Archilochian  Strophe  III.,  consisting  of: 
Iambic  Trimeter     aJ[.w_|o||Zu_|aIuy 
Dactylic  Trimeter      Z  w  u  |  j!.  u  w  |  y 

Iambic  Dimeter  olw_|aZuy 

Pecti,  nihil  me  sicut  antea  juvat 
Scribere  versiculos 
I^H  Amore  perculsiim  gravi. 

l^pThe  second  and  third  lines  of  this  strophe  are  often  written  as 
one  verse. 


—     266     ■— 

13.  Archilochian  Strophe  IV.,  consisting  of: 

ArchilooMan       1oo\1ud\1J[Ud\1kjkj\\1^\1\j\1d  923,  ii 
Iambic  Trimeter     wlw_|otI^_   |   u  Lo 

Solvitur  acris  hiems  grata  vice  veris  et  Favoni 
Trahuntque  siccas  machinae  carinas. 

Two  pairs  are  combined  to  form  a  tetrastich. 

14.  Iambic  Trimeter  alone  (see  922), 

15.  Iambic  Strophe,  consisting  of: 

Iambic  Trimeter  aiu_|ofZu_|Dlvj<-f 
Iambic  Dimeter  DZw_|oZuy 

Beatus  ille  qui  procul  negotiis 

Ut  prisca  gens  mortalium. 

16.  Pythiambic  Strophe  I.,  consisting  of: 
Dactylic  Hexameter  Iud  \  Iud  \  1  j;  y 
Iambic  Dimeter  yZw_|  oZuy 

Nox  erat,  ^t  caelo  fulgebat  liina  ser^no 
Inter  minora  sidera. 

17.  Pythiambic  Strophe  II.,  consisting  of: 
Dactylic  Hexameter  Lud  \  i.oci|Zfcu|Zvjo|Iu 
Iambic  Trimeter  oZu..  |DfJ[.w_|ui.u!-! 

Altera  jam  teritiir  bellis  civilibus  aetas, 
Suis  et  ipsa  Roma  viribus  ruit. 

18.  Trochaic  Strophe,  consisting  of: 

Trochaic  Dimeter  Z  u  _  o  |  Z  u  y 

Iambic  Trimeter   aZw_[ofIu_|uZa 

N6n  ebur  neque  aiireum 
Mea  renidet  in  domo  lacunar. 

19.  Xiesser  Ionics  (see  898), 
Two  Dipodies    |  ^  "^  7 

'    u  w  JL 

'        \  .,.,  ± 
\j  \j  1 j  wui.-.|| 

Miserarum  est  neqi^e  amori 
Dare  ludum  neque  diiici 
Mala  vino  lavere  aut  exanimari 
Metuentes  patruae  verbera  linguae. 


u  w  Z  _  I  u  u 


f     I 


TwoTripodiesj"^-;-!^"-:-"^^- 


—     267     — 


928.         INDEX  TO  the  METRES  of  HORACE. 

The  references  are  to  the  numbers  in  the  preceding  paragraph. 
Lib.  I. 


1.  Maecenas  atavis:  4. 

2.  Jam  satis  terris:  2. 

3.  Sic  te  diva:  5. 

4.  Solvitur  acris  hiems:  13 

5.  Quis  multa:  7. 

6.  Scriberis  Yario:  6. 

7.  Laudabunt  alii:  9. 
H.  Lydia  die:  3. 

9.  Vides  ut  alta:  1. 

10.  Mercuri  facunde  nepos:  2. 
]  I.  Ta  ne  quaesieris:  8. 

12.  Quern  virum:  2. 

13.  Cum  tu  Lydia:  5. 

11.  0  navis:  7. 

15.  Pastor  cum  traheret:  6. 

16.  0  matre  pulchra:  1. 

17.  Yelox  amoenum:  1. 

18.  Nullam  Yare:  8. 

19.  Mater  saeva:  5. 


1.  Motum  ex  Metello:  1. 

2.  Nullus  argento:  2. 

3.  Aequam  memento:  1. 

4.  Ne  sit  ancillae:  2. 

5.  Nondum  subacta:  1. 

6.  Septimi  Gades:  2. 

7.  O  saepe  mecum:  1. 

8.  Ulla  si  juris:  2. 

9.  Non  semper  imbres:  1. 
10.  Rectius  vives:  2. 


1.  Odi  profanum:  1. 

2.  Angustam  amice:  1. 

3.  Justum  et  tenacem:  1. 

4.  Descende  caelo:  1. 

5.  Caelo  tonantera :  1. 

6.  Delicta  majorum:  1. 


20.  Yile  potabis:  2. 

21.  Dianam  tenerae:  7. 

22.  Integer  vitae:  2. 

23.  Yitas  liinnuleo:  7. 

24.  Quis  desiderio:  6. 

25.  Parcius  junctas:  2. 

26.  Musis  amicus:  1. 

27.  Natis  in  usum:  1. 

28.  Te  maris:  9. 

29.  Icci  beatis:  1. 

30.  0  Yenus:  2. 

31.  Quid  dedicatum:  1. 

32.  Poscimur:  2. 

33.  Albi  ne  doleas:  6. 

34.  Parcus  deorum:  1. 

35.  0  diva:  1. 

36.  Et  ture:  5. 

37.  Nunc  est  bibendum:  1. 

38.  Persicos  odi:  2. 


Lib.  II. 

11.  Quid  belli cosus:  1. 

12.  Nolis  longa:  6. 

13.  lUe  et  nefasto:  1. 

14.  Eheu  fugaces:  1. 

15.  Jam  pauca:  1. 

16.  Otium  divos:  2. 

17.  Cur  me  querelis:  1. 

18.  Non  ebur:  18. 

19.  Bacchum  in  remotis: 

20.  Non  usitata:  1. 

Lib.  nr. 

7.  Quid  fles:  7. 

8.  Martiis  caelebs:  2. 

9.  Donee  gratus:  5. 

10.  Extremum  Tanain:  6 

11.  Mercuri  nam  te:  2. 

12.  Miserarum  est:  19. 


268 


13.  0  fons  Bandusiae:  7. 

14.  Herculis  ritu:  2. 

15.  Uxor  pauperis:  5. 

16.  Inclusam  Danaen:  6. 

17.  Aeli  vetusto:  1. 

18.  Faune  nyrapharum:  2. 

19.  Quantum  distet:  5. 

20.  Non  vides:  2. 

21.  0  nata  mecum:  1. 


1.  Intermissa  Yenus:  5. 

2.  Pindarum  quisquis:  2. 

3.  Quem  tu  Melpomene:  5. 

4.  Qualem  ministrum:  1. 

5.  Divis  orte  bonus:  6. 

6.  Dive  quem  proles:  2. 

7.  DiflfugSre  nives:  10. 

8.  Donarem  pateras:  4. 


1.  Ibis  liburnis:  15. 

2.  Beatus  ille:  15. 

3.  Parentis  olim:  15. 

4.  Lupis  et  agnis:  15. 

5.  At  0  deorum:  15. 

6.  Quid  immerentes:  15. 

7.  Quo  quo  seelesti:  15. 

8.  Rogare  longo:  15. 

9.  Quando  repostum:  15. 


22.  Montium  custos:  2. 

23.  Caelo  supinas:  1. 

24.  Intactis  opulentior:  5. 

25.  Quo  me  Baeche:  5. 

26.  Yixi  puellis:  1. 

27.  Impios  parrae:  2. 

28.  Festo  quid:  5. 

29.  Tyrrhena  regum:  1. 

30.  Exegi  monumentum:  4. 

Lib.  IV. 

9.  Ne  forte  credas:  1. 

10.  0  crudelis  adhuc:  8. 

11.  Est  mihi  nonum:  2. 

12.  Jam  veris  comites:  6. 

13.  Audivgre  Lyce:  7. 

14.  Qua  cura  patrum:  1. 

15.  Phoebus  volentem:  1. 
Carmen  Saeculare:  2. 

Epodes. 

10.  Mala  soluta:  15. 

11.  Pecti  nihil:  12. 

12.  Quid  tibi,  vis:  9. 

13.  Horrida  tempestas:  11. 

14.  Mollis  ineitia:  16. 

15.  Nox  erat:  16. 

16.  Altera  jam:  17. 

17.  Jam  jam  efficaci:  14. 


—    269 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


929.    The  Roman  Year,  by  the  reformed  Calendar  of  Julius 
Caesar^  had  365  days,  divided  as  at  present  into  12  months: 
Januarms,      31  days.  Maius,  31  days.  September,     30  days. 

Februarius,    28     "  Junius,  30    "  October,  31     " 

Martius,  31    "  Quintilis,       31    "  November,      30    " 

Aprilis,  30    "  Sextilis,         31    "  December.      31    '^ 

Every  fourth  year  the  24th  of  February  (YI.  Kal.  Mart.)  was 
counted  twice  giving  29  days  to  that  month.  The  Intercalary 
day  —  25th  of  February  —  was  called  bis  sextus. 

In  early  times  the  year  began  m  March;  hence  the  names, 
Quintilis,  Sextilis,  September,  etc.  Quintilis  and  Sextilis  were  after- 
wards changed  to  Julius  and  Augustus,  in  honor  of  the  first  two 
Caesars. 

930o  The  first  day  of  the  month  was  called  K  a  1  e  n  d  a  e 
(Calends) ;  on  the  fifteenth  day  of  March,  May,  July,  and  October, 
but  the  thirteenth  of  the  other  months,  were  the  Id  us  (Ides);  on 
the  seventh  day  of  March,  May,  July,  and  October,  but  tl[\e  fifth  of 
the  other  months  were  the  N  o  nae  (Nones).  To  these  the  names 
of  the  months  were  added  as  Adjectives,  as:  Kalendae  Januariae  = 
Jan.  1;  Nonae  Februariae  =  Fehr.  5;  Idus  Martiae  =  March  15. 

931.  From  these  three  points  the  days  of  the  month  were 
reckoned  backward  in  the  following  manner:  The  day  before  each 
of  them  was  expressed  by  p  r  i  d  i  e  with  the  Accusative,  as: 

pridie  Kalendas  Januarias  =  Dec.  31. 

pridie  Nonas  Januarias  =  Jan.  4. 

pridie  Idus  Januarias  =  Jan.  IS. 

In  counting  further  backward  the  point  of  departure  was,  by  Ro- 
man custom,  counted  in  the  reckoning  so  that  ante  diem  tertium 
Kal.  Jan.  means  tivo  days  before  the  Calends  of  January;  ante 
diem  quartum  Kal.  Jan.,  three  days  before  the  Calends  of  January , 
and  so  on.  This  combination  is  treated  as  one  indeclinable  word, 
so  that  it  can  be  used  with  prepositions,  as:  ex  ante  diem  III.  Nonas 
Junias  usque  ad  pridie  Kal.  Septembres,  from  June  3  to  August  31, 


—    2Y0 


932.  In  stating  the  day  of  a  month,  two  different  constrnctions 
are  used.  The  original  construction  is  die  tertio  ante  Kalendas 
Martias,  February  27.;  but  die  and  ante  are  regularly  omitted, 
thus:  tertio  Kalendas  Martias,  or  in  figures:  III.  Kal.  Mart.  The 
other  form  is:  ante  diem  tertium  Kalendas  Martias,  or  in  figures: 
a.  d.  III.  Kal.  Mart. 


933. 

( 

:^ALENDAE 

FOB    THE    YEAE, 

Days  of 
our  months. 

January. 

February. 

1. 

Kalendis  Jan. 

Kalendis  Feb. 

2. 

IV.  Nonas  Jan. 

IV.  Nonas  Feb. 

3. 

III. 

((          a 

III.      "•      '' 

4. 

0. 

prid.  ''        " 
NoNis  Jan. 

prid.    ''      '^ 
NoNis  Feb. 

6. 

VIII. 

Idus  Jan. 

VIII.  Idus  Feb. 

7. 

VII. 

VII.       "•      '' 

8. 

VI. 

VI.        "      '^ 

9. 

V. 

V.         ^*      ** 

10. 

IV. 

IV.          '*        " 

11.     • 

III. 

III.     "■    " 

12. 
13. 

prid.   '<•      "■ 
IdTbus  Jan. 

prid.    '*     "' 
Idibus  Feb. 

14. 

XIX. 

Kalendas  Feb.             xvi.  Kalendas  Mart. 

1.5. 

XVIII 

U                      (. 

i                     XV.              ''               *< 

16. 

XVII. 

n               ^ 

(                     XIV.            <*               '' 

17. 

XVI. 

U                      i 

'                      XIII.            "                »* 

18. 

XV. 

(<               ( 

'                     XII.             "                *< 

19. 

XIV. 

li              i 

'                      XI.               "                " 

20. 

XIII. 

((               i 

i                     X.                 "                " 

21. 

XII. 

It              ( 

<                     IX.              "               '' 

22. 

XI. 

(<               < 

i                      VIII.            "                '' 

23. 

X. 

(1              ( 

I                      VII.             "                '« 

24. 

IX. 

((               ( 

i                  VI.            <«             ^• 

25. 

VIII. 

U                       f 

1                     V.                 '*               *^ 

26. 

VII. 

ii               I 

^                     IV.               "               ** 

27. 

VI. 

H                    I 

I             IIJ^         ii          it 

28. 
29. 
30. 
31. 

V.             ''            < 

IV.               ''               ' 

III.       ''        ' 

prid.       *'           ' 
(So  Aug.,  Dec.) 

*  prid.        *^           '' 

'               [prid.  Kal.  Mart,  in  leap- 

*  year,  the  vi.  Kal.  (24th) 

*  being  counted  twice.] 

271 


Days  of 
0U7'  months. 

March, 

April, 

1. 

Kalendis  Mart. 

Kalendis  Apr. 

2. 

VI.  N 

onas  Mart. 

IV.  Nonas  Apr. 

3. 

V. 

a 

it 

III. 

u 

C( 

4. 

IV. 

(( 

n 

prid. 

ii 

U 

5. 

III. 

a 

n 

NoNis  Apr. 

6. 

prid. 

u 

a 

vm. 

Idus  Apr. 

7. 

NoNis  Mart. 

VII. 

li 

8. 

VIII. 

Idus 

Mart. 

VI. 

ii 

9. 

VII. 

u 

11 

V. 

u 

10. 

VI. 

a 

u 

IV. 

ii 

11. 

V. 

li 

u 

III. 

ii 

i        12. 

IV. 

n 

11 

prid. 

ii 

13. 

III. 

u 

'' 

iDiBus  Apr. 

14. 

prid. 

a 

u 

XVIII 

.  Kalendas  Maias. 

15. 

iDiBus  Mart. 

XVII. 

16. 

XVII. 

Kalendas  Aprilis. 

XVI. 

17. 

XVI. 

<< 

a 

XV. 

18. 

XV. 

a 

li 

XIV. 

19. 

XIV. 

11 

li 

XIII. 

20. 

XIII. 

(( 

n 

XII. 

21. 

XII. 

(( 

n 

XI. 

22. 

XI. 

it 

n 

X. 

23. 

X. 

(( 

it 

IX. 

24. 

IX. 

(( 

u 

VIII. 

25. 

VIII. 

<( 

(( 

VII. 

26. 

VII. 

(( 

it 

VI. 

27. 

VI. 

a 

it 

V. 

28. 

V. 

li 

ii 

IV. 

29. 

IV. 

it 

n 

III. 

30. 

III. 

it 

tt 

prid. 

31. 

prid. 

a 

li 

(So  June,  Sept. 

,,  J^ov,) 

(So  May,  July,  Oct,) 
934,    To  turn  Roman  dates  into  English: 
For  Calends:  Add  two  to  the  days  of  the  preceding  month,  and 
subtract  the  given  number. 

For  Ides  and  Nones:  Add  one  to  the  date  of  the  Nones  and  Ides 
of  the  month  in  question,  and  subtract  the  given  number. 
Examples:  a.  d.  YIII.  Kal.  Febr.  (31  +  2  —  8)  -  Jan.  25. 
a.  d.      lY.  Non.  Mart.  (  7  +  1  —  4)  =  March  4» 
a.  d.     lY.  Id.  Sept.      (13  +  1  —  4)  =  Sept.  10. 


—     212     — 

935.  The  Year  was  designated  by  the  names  of  the  Consuls 
for  that  year:  but  was  also  reckoned  from  the  building  of  the 
City  (ab  urbe  condita,  anno  urbis  conditae)  which,  according  to 
Yarro,  corresponds  with  the  753d  year  B.  0.  In  order  to  reduce 
such  dates  to  those  of  the  Christian  era,  if  the  given  number  be  less 
than  754,  subtract  it  from  the  latter,  and  the  remainder  will  be  the 
year  B.  C.  as:  a.  u.  c.  691  (the  year  of  Cicero's  consulship)  =  B.  C. 
63;  if  greater  than  753,  subtract  753  from  it,  and  the  remainder  will 
be  the  year  after  Christ  (A.  D.),  as:  a.  u.  c.  767  (the  year  of  Augustus* 
death)  =  14  A.  D. 

936.  The  "Week  of  seven  days  (hebdQmas)  was  not  in  use  among 
the  Romans  under  the  republic,  but  was  introduced  under  the  em- 
perors. The  days  of  the  week  were  named  from  the  planets: 

dies  Soils,  Sunday  dies  Jovis,  Thursday 

dies  Lunae,  Monday  dies  Veneris,  Friday 

dies  Martis,  Tuesday  dies  Saturni,  Saturday. 
dies  Mercurii,  Wednesday 

ROMA^[  MONEY,    WEIGHTS,    and  MEASURES. 

937.  The  Coins  of  the  Romans  were  in  early  times  of  copper. 
The  as,  being  originally  the  unit  of  currency,  was  nominally  a  pound 
weight,  but  was  reduced  by  degrees  to  one  twenty-fourth  of  its 
original  weight  and  value.  In  the  third  century  silver  coins  were  in- 
troduced; the  denarius  =  10  asses,  and  tte  sestertius  =  ^  asses 
(sestertius  =  semis-tertius,  half  third^  represented  by  IIS  or  HS 
=  duo  et  semis,  2^). 

938.  The  Sestertius  was  the  ordinary  coin  of  the  Romans, 
by  which  the  largest  sums  were  reckoned.  Gold  was  introduced  later, 
the  aureus  being  equal  to  100  sesterces.  The  value  of  these 
«oins  is  seen  in  the  following: 

1  as  nearly  2  cents. 

2\  asses  =  1  sestertius  or  nummus  (HS)  '*      4     ^' 

10  asses  =  4  sestertii  =  I  denarius  ^'    16    ^' 

1000  sestertii  =  1  sestertium  $40.00 

939.  The  Sestertium  was  a  sum  of  money,  not  a  coin. 
Though  probably  the  genitive  plural  of  sestertius,  the  word  is 
inflected  regularly  as  a  neuter  noun,  thus:  tria  sestertia  =  $120.00. 
When  joined  with  the  multiplicative  adverbs  it  denotes  a  sum  of  a 
hundred  thousand^  centena  milia  being  omitted,  thus:  decies  sester- 
tium, a  million  =  $40,000. 


—     273 


940.  The  Eoman  Measures  of  Length  are  the  following: 
12  unciae,  inches  =  1  pes,  Eoman  foot  (11.6  Engl,  inche.s) 

1  cubitus,  cubit  =  l^feet 

1  gradus,  step    —  ^\feet 

1  passus,  jpace    =  5  feet 

mille  passuum,  1000  paces  =  i  mile  (4S50  Engl.  feet). 

941.  The  basis  of  Square  Measure  was  the  j  u  g  6  r  u  m,  an 
area  of  240  Roman  feet  long  and  120  broad,  a  liitle  less  than  |  of 
an  English  acre. 

942.  The  Measures  of  Weight  are: 

12  unciae  (ounces)  =  one  pound  (libra,  about  f  lb.  avoirdupois). 
«      Fractional  parts  (weight  or  coin)  are: 
P   1.  (tV),  uncia;  5.  (tV),  quincunx;         9.  (f),  dodrans; 

2.  (i),  sextans;  6.  (-^),  semissis;  10.  (f),  dextans; 

3.  (i),  quadrans;  7.  (-r^),  septunx;  11.  (H^),  deunx; 

4.  (i),  triens;  8.  (f),  bessis;  12.  As. 
The  Talent  was  a  Greek  weight  =  60  librae. 

943.  The  Measures  of  Capacity  are: 

12  cyathi    =  1  sextarius  (nearly  a  pint). 
16  sextarii^  1  raodius  (peck). 

6  sextarii  =  1  congius  (3  quarts,  liquid  measure). 

8  congii    =  1  amphora  (6  gallons) . 


944. 

A.,  absolve. 

A.  Chr.,  ante  Christum. 

A.  D.,  ante  diem. 

A.  U.  C,  anno  urbis  conditae. 

C,  condemno. 

Cos.,  consul.     Coss.,  consules. 

D.  D.,  dono  dedit. 

D.  D.  D.,  dat,  dicat,  dedicat. 

Des.,  designatus. 

F.,  filius. 

H.  S.,  sestertius. 

Ictus,  jurisconsultus. 

Id.,  idus. 

Imp.,  imperator. 

J.  0.  M.,  Jovi  Optimo  maximo. 

K.,  Kal.,  Kalendae. 

Leg.,  legatus,  legio. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

N.  L.,  non  liquet. 


Non.,  Nonae. 

P.  C,  patres  conscripti. 

P.  M.,  pontifex  maxTmus. 

P.  R.,  populus  Romanus. 

Pr.,  praetor. 

Proc,  proconsul. 

Q.  B.  F.  F.  Q. S.,  quod bonum  felix 

faustumque  sit. 
Quir.,  Quirites. 
Resp.,  respubliea. 
S.,  senatus. 

S.  C,  senatus  consultum. 
S.  D.  P.,  salutem  dicit  plurimam. 
S.  P.  Q.  R.,  Senatus  Populusque 

Romanus. 
Tr.  pL,  tribunus  plebis. 


—        214:        — 

945.  PRINCIPAL  LATIN  AUTHORS. 

T.  Maccius  Plautus B.c.254r-184 

Comedies. 
Q.  Ennius 239-169 

Annals^  Satires j  &c.  (Fragments). 
M.  Porcius  Cato 236-149 

Husbandry^  Antiquities^  Sc. 
M.  Pacuvius 220-130 

Tragedies  (Fragments). 
P.  TerentTus  Afer  (Terence) 195-159 

Comedies. 
C.  Lucilius 149-103 

Satires  (Fragments). 
L.  Attius  (or  Accius) 170-75 

Tragedies  (Fragments). 
M.  Terentius  Varro 116-28 

Husbandry  J  Antiquities^  &c. 
M.  Tullius  Cic6ro 106-43 

Orations^  Letter s^  Dialogues, 
C.  Julius  Caesar 100-44 

Commentaries. 
T.  Lucretius  Cams 99-55 

Poem  ^'De  Rerum  Natura". 
C.  Valerius  Catullus 87-47 

Miscellaneous  Poems. 
C.  Sallustius  Crispus  (Sallust) 86-35 

Histories. 
Cornelius  Nepos 90- 

Lives  of  Famous  Commanders. 
P.  Yergilius  Maro  (Virgil) 70-19 

Eclogues^  Georgis^  Aeneid. 
Q.  Horatms  Flaccus  (Horace) 65_8 

SatireSy  Odes,  Epistles, 
Albius  Tibullus 54-18 

Elegies. 
Sex.  Aurelius  Propertius 49-15 

Elegies. 

T.  Livius  Patavlnus  (Livy)      ,    , b.c.59-a.d.17 

Homan  History, 


—     275     — 

P.  Ovidius  Naso  (Ovid) b.c.43-a.d.16 

Metamorphoses^  Fastis  <fcc, 
C.  Velleius  Paterciilus b.c.19-a.d.31 

Roman  History. 

M.  Yalerlus  Maximus A.D.-31 

Anecdotes^  &c. 
Pomponius  Mela -50 

Husbandry  &  Geography. 
A.  Perslus  Flaccus 34-62 

Satires. 
L.  Annaeus  Sen6ca -65 

Philos,  Letters,  &c.;  Tragedies. 
M.  Annaeus  Lucanns 38-65 

Historical  Poem  *  'Pharsalia". 
Q.  Curtlus  Rufus T 

History  of  Alexander, 
C.  Plinius  Secundus  (Pliny) 23-79 

Nat.  Hist.  J  &G. 
C.  Valerius  Flaccus -88 

Heroic  Poem  **Argonautica". 
P.  Papinius  StatiuB 45-96 

Heroic  Poems  "Thebais",  &c. 

C.  Silius  Italicus 25-100 

Heroic  Poem  "Punica". 

D.  Junius  Juvenalis  (Juvenal) 42-121 

Satires. 
L.  Annaeus  Florua -120 

Historical  Abridgment, 
M.  Valerius  Martialis  (Martial) 43-104 

Epigrams. 
M.  Fabius  Quintilianus 40-118 

Rhetoric. 
C.  Cornelius  Tacitus .    .         57-118 

AnnalSy  History,  Sc. 

.  Plinius  Caecilius  Secundus  (Pliny  Junior)    ....         62-113 
Letters. 

Suetonius  Tranquillus 70-150 

Tlie  Twelve  Ccesars, 


—     276     — 

Apuleius A.  D.  110- 

Philos.  Writings^  "Metamorphoses". 
A.  Gellius -180 

Miscellanies^  **Noctes  Atticae". 
*Q.  Septimms  Florens  TertuUianus 160-220 

Apologist 
*M.  Minucius  Felix -250 

Apologetic  Dialogue^  "Octavius". 
^Firmianus  Lactantius 250-325 

Theology. 
D.  Magnus  Ausoiiius -380 

Miscellaneous  Poems, 
Ammianus  MarcellTnus  . -395 

Roman  History. 
Claudius  Claudianus -408 

PoemSy  Panegyrics,  &c. 
^Aurelius  Prudentius  Clemens    , 348-410 

Christian  Poems, 
^Aurelius  Augustinus 354-430 

Confessions^  Discourses,  &c. 
Anicius  Manlius  Boethius 470-520 

Philosophical  Dialogues, 


Christian  writers. 


—  277   — 


INDEX  OF  VERBS. 

This  Index  contains  all  the  Simple  Verbs  in  common  use  which  involve 
any  important  irregularities,  with  such  of  their  Compounds  as  require  par- 
ticular notice.  —  The  references  are  to  paragraphs. 


A. 

abeo/  -irg,  to  go  away,  407 
abigo,  -6re,  to  drive  away,  383 
abliio,  -ere,  to  wash  (off),  366 
abnuo,  -ere,  to  dissent,  366 
aboleo,  -ere,  to  abolish,  356 
abolesco,  -Sre,  to  disapx>ear,  394 
abscindo,  -erg,  to  tear  off]  374 
abscondo,  -erS,  to  hide ,  372 
absisto,  -ere,  to  cease,  374 
absolve,  -ere,  to  acquit,  366 
abstergSo,  -ere,  to  wipe  off,  360 
abstineo,  -ere,  to  abstain,  358 
absum,  abease,  to  be  absent,  306 
absCimo,  -ere,  to  use  up,  385 
abutdr,  -i,  to  use,  abuse,  396 
accedo,  -ere,  to  approach,  374 
accendo,  -ere,  to  kindle,  373 
accio,  -ire,  to  call  in,  362 
accipio,  -ere,  to  receive,  368 
"acciibo,  -are,  to  lie  near,  347 
accumbo,   -ere,    to    recline    at 

table,  376 
accurro,  -erg,  to  run  to,  387 
acesco,  -ere,  to  turn  sour,  394 
acquire,  -ere,  to  acquire,  389 
acuo,  -erg,  to  sharpen,  366 
adfero,  -re,  to  afford,  404 
adhaereo,  -erg,  to  stick,  360 
adimo,  -erg,  to  take  aivay,  389 
adipiscgr,  -i,  to  obtain,  396 
adjungo,  -grg,  to  join  (to),  378 
adjuvo,  -arg,  to  assist,  348 


admitto,  -ere,  to  admit,  374 
adnuo,  -grg,  to  nod  assent,  366 
adolgo,  -erg,  to  grow  up,  356 
adolesco,  -grg,  to  grow  up,  394 
adorior,  -iri,  to  attack,  399 
adsisto,  -grg,  to  stand  by,  374 
adsiim,  adesse,  to  be  present,  306 
aegresco,  -grg,  to  fall  sick,  395 
affligo,  -grg,  to  dash,  378 
ag6,  come,  417 
aggrediSr,  -i,  to  attack,  396 
agnosco,  -grg,   to  acknowledge, 

393 
ago,  -grg,  to  drive,  do,  383 
ajo,  I  say,  416 

albgo,  -erg,  to  be  white,  354 
alggo,  -erg,  to  be  cold,  360 
allego,  -grg,  to  choose,  383 
allicio,  -grg,  to  allure,  368 
allldo,  -grg,  to  dash  against,  371 
allino,  -grg,  to  besmear,  388 
alloquor,  -i,  to  address,  396 
alo,  -grg,  to  nourish,  386 
ambigo,  -grg,  to  contend,  383 
ambio,  -irg,  to  go  about,  408 
amicio,  -Irg,  to  clothe,  398 
amitto,  -grg,  to  lose,  374 
amplector,  -i,  to  embrace,  396 
ango,  -grg,  to  torment,  vex,  381 
anquiro,-grg,  to  search  after,  389 
antecello,  -grg,  to  excel,  386 
antgpOno,  -grg,  to  prefer,  386 
antisto,  -arg,  to  excel,  349 


278   — 


apage,  he  gone^  417 
apgrio,  -ire,  to  opeUy  398 
apiscor,  ~i,  to  reach  after,  396 
applando,  -ere,  to  applaud,  371 
applico,  -are,  to  apply,  347 
appono,  -ere,  to  put  by,  386 
arceo,  -ere,  to  keep  off,  353 
arcesso,  -ere,  to  summon,  390 
ardeo,  -ere,  to  burn,  360 
areo,  -erg,  to  he  dry,  353 
aresco,  -ere,  to  become  dry,  394 
arguo,  -ere,  to  accuse,  366 
arrldeo,  -ere,  to  smile  upon,  360 
arripio,  -ere,  to  seize,  368 
ascendo,  -ere,  to  ascend,  373 
aspicio,  -ere,  to  look,  368 
assentior,  -iri,  to  assent,  399 
assequor,  -i,  to  pursue,  396 
assideo,  -ere,  to  sit  by,  361 
assldo,  -ere,  to  sit  down,  374 
assuesco,  -Sre,  to  be  accustomed, 

393 
attendo,  -ere,  to  attend  to,  371 
attineo,  -ere,  to  belong,  358 
attingo,  -ere,  to  touch,  382 
aiideo,  -ere,  to  dare,  363 
auf ero,  -re,  to  carry  away,  404 
augeo  -ere,  to  increase,  359 
augesco,  -ere,  to  augment,  394 
avS,  hail,  417 

avello,  -ere,  to  pull  down,  389 
aveo,  -ere,  to  long  for,  354 

B. 

bibo,  -ere,  to  drink,  376 

C. 
cado,  -erS,  to  fall,  371 
caedo,  -ere,  to  fell,  371 
calesco,  -ere,  to  become  warm, 

394 
callgo,  -er§,  ^o  he  versed^  363 


^o  rouse,   362 


calveo,  -  erg,  ^o  6^  bald,   354 

candeo,  -ere,  /o  shine,   353 

cando,  I  burn,   373 

caneo,  -ere,  ^o  6e  ^ra^/,  354 

cano,  -ere,  to  sing,  387 

capesso,  -ere,  to  lay  hold  of,  390 

capio,  -ere,  to  take,  331,  368 

carpo,  -ere,  to  pluck,  375 

caveo,-ere,  to  take  heed,  357 

cedo,  give,  417 

c6do,  -ere,  /o  yield,  374 

cello,  I  impel,  386 

ceno,  -are,  ^o  cZine,  278 

censeo,-ere,  to  value,  think,  358 

cerno,  -ere,  to  see,  discern,  388 

cette,  ^it'^,  417 

cieo,  -ere  ] 

CIO,  -Tre 

cingo,  -ere,  to  gird,  378 

circumdo,-are,  to  surround,  349 

circumfundo,  -ere,  to  surround, 

373 
circumsedeo,-ere,  to  si^  around, 

361 
circumsto,-are,  to  s^an^  around, 

349 
clango,  -erg,  to  clang,  381 
claudo,  -ere,  to  shut,  close,  371 
coalesce,  -ere,  to  ^row;  together, 

394 
coarguo,  -ere,  /o  convict,  366 
c6emo,-ere,  to  fei^y  together,  389 
coepi,  coepisse,  to  7ia?;e  begun,  415 
cognosce,  -ere,  to  know,  393 
cogo, -ere,  to  force  (c6-ago),  383 
cohaereo,  -ere,  to  s^ic/i,  360 
collTdo,  -ere,  to  ^as/t  together, 

371 
colligo,  -ere,  to  collect,  383 
colo,  -ere,  to  cultivate,  386 
comburo,  -ere,  to  twr/i  [wholly), 

389 


—   279   — 


commTniscSr,  -i,  to  devise^  396 
committo,  -ere,  to  commit^  374 
cOmo,  -ere,  to  adorn,  385 
compesco,  -ere,  to  restrain,  393 
compingo, -ere^to  drive  tight,  382 
compleo,  -ere,  to  fill  (up),  356 
comprlmo,  -ere,    to   press    to- 
gether, 389 
concino,  -ere,  to  sound  together, 

387 
concio,  -ire,  to  call  together,  362 
concludo,  -ere,  to  shut  up,  371 
concupisco,  -ere,  to  covet,  394 
concurro,  -6re,  to  run  together, 

387 
concutio,  -ere,  to  shake,  368 
condo,  -erS,  to  found,  372 
cond61esco,-ere,  to  feel  pain,  394 
confero,  -re,  to  collect,  404 
conflcio,  -ere,  to  make,  368 
confido,  -ere,   to  confide,  373 
confiteor,  -eri,  to  confess,  364 
confligo,  -ere,  to  fight,  378 
confodio,  -ere,  to  pick  out,  368 
confringo,  -ere,  to  break  in  two, 

383 
congero,  -ere,  to  bring  together, 

389 
congruo,  -ere,  to  agree,  366 
cOniveo,  -ere,  to  shut  the  eyes, 

357 
conscisco,  -ere,  to  bring  upon^ 

394 
censer ibo,  -ere,  to  frame,  375 
eonsero,  -ere,  to  plant,  388 
consido,  -ere,  to  settle,  374 
conspergo,  -^re,  to  sprinkle,  384 
eonsto,  -are,  to  consist,  349 
construo,  -ere,  to  construct,  367 
consueseo,  -Sre,  to  be  wont,  393 
consiilo,  -ere,  to  counsel,  386 
consumS,  -Srg,  to  consume,  385 


contemn5,  -ere,  to  despise,  385 
contendo,  -ere,  to  exert,  371 
eontgro,  -ere,  to  rub  off,  388 
conticesco,  -ere,  to  become  stilly 

394 
contmeO,  -ere,  to  hold  together, 

358 
contraho,  -ere,  to  contract,  378 
contremisco,-ere,  to  tremble,  394 
contribuo,  -ere,  to    contribute, 

366 
eontundo,  -erg,  to  break  down, 

371 
convaleseo,  -ere,  to  recover,  394 
coquo,  -ere,  to  cook,  bake,  378 
oorrigo,  -ere,  to  correct,  378 
corrumpo,  -ere,  to  corrupt,  376 
eorrrio,-ere,  to  fall  to  the  ground, 

366 
erebresco,  -ere,  to  become  fre- 
quent, 395 
credo,  -ere,  to  believe,  372 
crepo,  -are,   to  creak,  347 
cresco,  -ere,  to  grow,  393 
cubo,  -are,  to  lie  down,  347 
cudo,  -ere,  to  forge,  373 
cupio,  -ere,  to  desire,  332,  368 
curro,  -ere,  to  run,  370,  387 

D. 

decern o, -ere,  ^>  determine,  388 
decerpo,  -ere,  to  pluck,  375 
decet,  it  becomes,  420 
decido,  -ere,  to  cut  down,  371 
decipio,  -ere,  to  deceive,  368 
dedecet,  it  is  unbecoming,  420 
dedisco,  -ere,  to  unlearn,  393 
defendo,  -ere,  to  defend,  373 
det^tiscor,  -i,  to  be  worn  out,  396 
dSfungSr,  -i,  to  discharge,  396 
deglubo,  -ere,  to  skin,  375 
deg5,-6rS,  to  spend  {d^'^gO),  383 


—    280 


del65,  -erg,  to  destroy^  351,  356 
deligS,  -€r6,  to  choose,  383 
dGlitesco,  -Srg,  to  hide  away,  394 
demo,  -€r€,  ^o  ^aA:e  attJay,  385 
depello,  -erc^,  to  dispel,  387 
dCpendeo,  -erg,  ^o  M??^  dow7i^ 

361 
dCposco,  -erg,  to  request,  393 
depso,  -gre,  to  knead,  390 
deridgo,  -erg,  to  ?aw(7/i  at,  360 
describo,  -grg,  to  describe,  375 
dSs6co,  -arg,  to  cut  down,  347 
desSro,  -grg,  to  forsake,  388 
desliio,  -grg,  to  leave  off,  388 
desipio,  -grg,  to  &e  foolish ,  368 
despicio,  -grg,  to  despise,  368 
desporidgo,  -erg,  topromise,  361 
desLim,  deessg,  to  &e  wanting,  306 
detSgo,  -grg,  to  discover,  378 
detgro,  -grg,  to  loear  att^ay,  388 
devincio,  -Trg,  to  ?)in(Z,  398 
devovgo,-erg,toroio,  devote^  357 
dlco,  -grg,  to  sa2/,  toZZ,  336,  378 
diflfgro,  -rg,  to  de/er,  404 
diflfltgor,  -eri,  to  disavow,  364 
diffundo,  -grg,  to  pour  forth,  373 
dilabdr,  -T,  to/aZ^  asunder,  396 
diligo,  -grg,  to  Zoye,  383 
dlraico,  -arg,  to  Ji^/i<,  347 
dirigo,  -grg,  to  direct,  378 
diruo,  -grg,  to  destroy,  366 
discerno,-grg,  to  distinguish,  388 
discerpo,  -grg,  to  toar  asunder, 

375 
discindo,  -grg,  to  spZif,  374 
disco,  -grg,  to  Z(?ar7i,  370,  393 
discrepo,  -arg,  to  disagree,  347 
dissero,  -grg,  to  discourse,  388 
dissidgo,  -erg,  to  disag7^ee,  361 
dissilio,  -Trg,  to  6urs^  asunder, 

398 
dissuadgo,  -erg,  to  dissuade^  360 


distinguS,  -gre,  to  distinguish, 

378 
disto,  -arg,  to  6e  distant,  349 
distribuo,  -grg,  to  distribute,  360 
ditesco,  -grg,  to  grow  rich,  39;") 
(livid 6,  -grg,  to  divide,  371 
do,  -arg,  to  grh-e,  349,  370 
docgo,  -erg,  to  toac7i,  358 
domo,  -arg,  to  tome,  347 
duco,  -grg,  to  ?ea^,  336,  378 
dulcesco,  -grg,  to  become  sweet, 

395 
duresco,  -grg,  to  ^roii;  hard,  395 

E. 

ediscS,  -grg,  to  Z6«?'n  &?/  7iear^, 

393 
6do,  -grg,  to  ea^,  373,  410 
edo,  -grg,  to  (/it'e  out,  372 
educ5,  -grg,  to  lead  forth,  378 
eflf6r6,  -rg,  to  carry  out,  404 
effervesco,  -erg,  to  6oiZ  t^p,  394 
effloresco,    -grg,    to    te^'in    to 

6toom,  394 
effodio,  -grg,  to  ^?*(7  out,  368 
effringo,-grg,  to  bi'cakopen,  383 
eflfuudo,  -grg,  to  270?<r  out,  373 
6ggo,  -erg,  to  be  in  want,  353 
elicio,  -grg,  to  en^toe  ow<,  368 
elido,  -grg,  to  strike  out,  371 
eligo,  -grg,  to  eZecf,  383 
emico,  -arg,  to  67iine  forth,  347 
emingo,  -erg,  to  be  prominent, 

353 
gmo,  -grg,  to  buy,  389 
en6co,  -arg,  to  5?a?/,  347 
60,  ir6,  to  g'O,  406 
erubesco,  -grg,  to  furn  re?^,  394 
erumpS,  -grg,  to  6reaA:  oi^^,  376 
eruo,  -grg,  to  (^ig^  ou^,  366 
esuriS,  -irg,  to  t(;an^  to  eai,  398 
evado,  -grg,  to  ^lern  ou^,  371 


—   281    — 


CvanescO,  -Sr5,  to  vanish^  395 
6 vert o,  -gr€,  to  overthrow ^  373 
6v6mo,  -ere,  to  vomit  up,  386 
exardesco,  -5r5,  to  take  fire,  394 
excel lo,  -<5r6,  <o  ej:cd,  386 
excldo,  -grg,  ^o  Aeio  ou^,  371 
excindo,  -€re,  <o  destroy,  374 
exhaurio,  -irg,  <o  exhaust,  398 
expergisc6r,  -i,  ^o  awake,  396 
exp6ri5r,  -iri,  /o  ^ri/,  399 
explico,  -ar6,  ^o  unfold,  347 
explode,  -€r5,  /o  7ii.95  off,  371 
exposco,  -€r5,  ^o  request  earn- 
estly, 393 
exprlmo,  -€r5,  <o  pre«5  ow^,  389 
exsisto,  -€r€,  ^o  come  forth,  374 
exstinguo,  -€r€,  io  pu^  ow<,  378 
exsto,  -are,  to  exist,  349 
extends, '-€rS,  to  stretch  out,  371 
extimesco,  -€re,  to  fear,  394 
exuo,  ~€re,  /o  /)i^^  o^,  366 


fucesso,  -5r5,  to  accomplish,  390 
facto,  -€re,  ^o  do,  maA:^?,  368 
fallo,  -ere,  to  cheat,  387 
farcio,  -irg,  ^o  5^u^,  398 
larl,  to  speak,  416 
fatgdr,  -eri,  io  confess,  364 
favSo,  -erg,  ^o  favor ^  357 
fendO,  //encZ,  373 
f^rio,  -ir6,  to  strike,  heat,  398 
f^ro,  -re,  to  hear,  336,  389,  403 
f^rOcio,  -Tr6,  to  6e  unruly,  398 
ferveo,  -erg,  to  glow,  357 
fido,  -grg,  to  trust,  con-fide,  373 
figo,  -grg,  to  ^07,  379 
findo,  -erg,  to  67)?!^,  cleave  374 
fingo,  -grg,  to  fashion,  379 
tlo,  fI(!TT,  to  become,  368,  411 
flaveo,  -erg,  to  6e  golden  yellow, 
354 


flavescS,  -grg,  to  become  yellow, 

394 
flecto,  -grg,  to  bend,  380 
flgo,  -erg,  to  weep,  356 
fligo,  -grg,  to  strike,  378 
flOrgo,  -erg,  to  blossom,  353 
tliictuo,  -arg,  to  wave,  365 
flflo,  -grg,  to  flow,  367 
fodio,  -grg,  to  dig,  332,  368 
lSr6m,  I  should  be,  418 
f6vgo,  -erg,  to  cherish,  357 
frango,  -grg,  to  break,  385 
fr^mo,  -grg,  to  growl,  386 
frico,  -arg,  to  rub,  347 
friggo,  -erg,  to  be  cold,  359 
fru5r,  -1,  to  eryo^/,  396 
fugio,  -grg,  to  /ee,  332,  368 
fulclo,  -irg,  to  support,  398 
fulggo,  -erg  to  shine,  360 
fundo,  -grg,  to  pour,  373 
fungdr,  -i,  to  discharge,  396 
furo,  -grg,  to  ragre,  389 

G. 

gaudgo,  -erg,  to  rejoice,  363 
ggrao,  -grg,  to  groan,  386 
g6ro,  -grg,  to  crirr?/  on,  389 
gignS,  -grg,  to  &e^e<,  386 
glisco,  -grg,  to  ^row?  up,  393 
glubo,  -grg,  to  peel,  375 
gradidr,  -1,  to  step,  396 
grandesco,  -grg,  to  grow,  395 
gravescS,  -grg,  to  grow  heavy, 

395 
gruO  or  riiO  ?  366 

H. 

haergo,  -erg,  to  /langr,  360 
haurio,  -irg,  to  draw,  398 
hSbgo,  -erg,  to  6<?  6Zw7i^,  354 
I  h^besco,  -grg,  to  grroi/;  dull,  394 
I  hiscS,  -grg,  to  yaii;n,  394 


282 


horrSo,  -ere,  to  shudder^  353 
horresco,  -ere,  to  stand  on  endj 

394 
htimeo,  -ere,  to  be  moistj  354 

I. 

ICO,  -ere,  to  strike^  383 
illino,  -ere,  to  bedaub^  388 
illucesco,   -ere,   to  grow  light, 

394 
illudo,  -ere,  to  mock,  371 
imbuo,  -ere,  to  dip,  dye,  366 
immineo,  -erS,  to  threaten,  354 
imminuo,  -ere,  to  lessen,  366 
impendeo,  -ere,  to  hang  over, 

361 
impleo,  -ere,  to  jill  (up),  356 
implico,  -are,  to  involve,  347 
incesso,  -ere,  to  fall  upon,  390 
incido,  -ere,  to  fall  into,  371 
incido,  -ere,  to  engrave,  371 
incipio,  -erg,  to  begin,  368 
incolo,  -ere,  to  inhabit,  386 
increpo,  -are,  to  scold,  347 
inciibo,  -are,  to  lie  upon,  347 
indico,  -ere,  to  declare,  378 
indigSo,  -ere,  to  be  in  want,  353 
indolesco,  -ere,  to  feel  pain,  394 
indulgeo,  -ere,  to  indulge,  359 
indiio,  -ere,  to  put  on,  366 
ineo,  -ire,  to  go  into,  407 
infero,  -re,  to  carry  into,  404 
ingSmisco,  -ere,  to  groan,  394 
ingruo,  -ere,  to  rush,  366 
innotesco,-ere,to  becomeknown, 

395 
inquam,  I  say,  416 
inquire,  -ere,  to  inquire,  389 
ins6ro,  -ere,  to  plant  in,  388 
insero,  -gre,  to  insert,  388 
insidgo,  -ere,  to  sit  upon,  361 
instruo,  -erg,  to  instruct^  367 


insiim,  inesse,  to  he  in,  306 
integrasco,  -Sre,  to  begin  anew, 

395 
intellego,  -ere,  to  understand, 

383 
intergo,  -ire,  to  perish,  407 
interficio,  -ere,  to  kill,  368,  413 
intersum,mteress6,  to bebetween, 

306 
intiimesco,  -ere,  to  swell,  394 
invgnio,  -ire,  to  find  out,  398 
iuv^terasco,  -ere,  to  grow  old, 

394 
invideo,  -ere,  to  envy,  361 
Irascor,  -i,  to  grow  angry,  396 
irrepo,  -erg,  to  creep  into,  375 

J. 

jacio,  -ere,  to  throw,  368 
jiibeo,  -ere,  to  order,  360 
jungo,  -ere,  to  join,  378 
juro,  -are,  to  swear,  278 
jCivenesco,  -ere,  to  grow  young, 

395 
juvo,  -arg,  to  assist,  348 

li. 

labSr,  -1,  ^0  glide,  roll  on,  396 
lacesso,  -ere,  to  excite,  390 
lacio,  /  entice,  368 
laedo,  -ere,  to  violate,  hurt,  371 
lambo,  -ere,  to  lick,  376 
langueo,  -ere,  to  be  weary,  353 
lateo,  -ere,  to  be  hid,  353 
lavo,  -are,  to  wash,  348 
lego,  -erg,  to  read,  383 
libet,  it  pleases,  420 
licet,  it  is  lawful,  420 
lino,  -ere,  to  smear,  388 
linquo,  -erg,  to  leave,  383 
ITquefacio,  -gre,  to  liquefy,  413 
liqugo,  -erg,  to  be  fluid,  353 


—     283     — 


liquet,  it  is  clear^  420 
llveo,  -ere,  to  he  pale,  354 
16qu6r,  -i,  to  speak,  396 
luceo,  -ere,  to  shines  359 
liido,  -ere,  to  play,  371 
lugeo,  -ere,  to  mourn,  359 
luo,  -ere,   to  atone  for,  366 
liio,  -ere,  to  wash,  366 

M. 

macresco,  -ere,  to  grow  meager, 

395 
madeo,  -ere,  to  be  wet,  353 
maerSo,  -ere,  to  grieve,  354 
male,  malle,  to  be  more  willing, 

405 
mando,  -ere,  to  chew,  373 
maneo,  -ere,  to  remain,  360 
mansugfacio,  -ere,  to  tame,  413 
maturesco,  -ere,  to  ripen,  395 
mgdeor,  -eri,  to  cure,  364 
memini,  -isse,  to  remember,  415 
merge,  -ere,  to  dip  in,  384 
metier,  -iri,  to  measure,  399 
meto,  -ere,  to  reap,  374 
metuo,  -ere,  to  fear,  366 
mico,  -are,  to  shine,  347 
mlniseor,  /  recollect,  396 
minuo,  -ere,  to  lessen,  366 
misceo,  -ere,  to  mix,  358 
misereor,  -eri,  to  have  pity,  364 
miseret,  it  excites  pity,  420 
mitesco,  -ere,  to  become  mild, 

395 
mitto,  -ere,  to  send,  374 
molo,  -ere,  to  grind,  386 
mordeOs  -ere,  to  bite,  361 
morior,  -i,  to  die,  396 
moveo,  -ere,  to  move,  357 
mulceo,  -ere,   to  soothe,  360 
mulgeo,  -ere,  to  milk,  360 


nancisc5r,-i,  to  get,  396 
nascdr,  -I,  to  be  born,  396 
necto,  -ere,  to  tie,  380 
neglego,  -ere,  to  neglect,  383 
neo,  -ere,  to  spin,  356 
nequeo,  -Tre,  not  to  be  able,  409 
nigreseo,  -ere,  to  become  black, 

395 
ningo,  -ere,  to  snow,  381 
niteo,  -ere,  to  glitter,  353 
nltor,  -i,  to  stay  one's  self  on,  396 
nolo,  nollg,  to  be  unwilling,  405 
nosco,  -ere,  to  (learn  to)  know, 

393 
nubo,  -erg,  to  marry,  375 
nuo,  /  nod,  366 

O. 

obdormisco,  -ere,  to  fall  asleep, 

394       ,     • 
obeo,  -ire,  to  meet,  407 
objicio,  -ere,  to  throw  to,  368 
obllviscor,  -i,  to  forget,  396 
obmutesco,  -ere,  to  grow  dumb, 

395 
obriio,  -ere,   to  cover,  366 
obsideo,  -ere,  to  besiege,  361 
obsisto,  -ere,  to  oppose,  374 
obsoleo,  -ere,  to  go  out  of  use^ 

356 
obsolesco,    -ere,  to  become  oh' 

solete,  394 
obsum,  6bess6,  to  be  in  the  way^ 

306 
obtineo,  -ere,  to  occupy,  358 
obtundo,  -ere,  to  stun,  371 
occido,  -ere,  to  set,  371 
occido,  -ere,  to  kill,  371 
occulo,  -ere,  to  conceal,  386 
occurro,  -ere,  to  meet,  387 
Odi,  -isse,  to  hate^  415 


^     284 


oflfendo,  -erg,  to  offend^  373 
oleo,  -ere,  to  smelly  353 
61eo,  /  grovjj  356* 
oportet,  it  is  needful^  420 
opperior,  -Tri,  to  await^  399 
oppono,  -ere,  to  oppose,  386 
ordior,  -iri,  to  hegin,  399 
orior,  -iri,  to  rise,  399 
ostendo,  -ere,  to  shoWy  371 


paciscor,  -T,  to  strike  a  bargain, 

396 
paenitet,  it  causes  sorrow,  420 
palleo,  -ere,  to  look  pale,  353 
pallesco,  -ere,  to  turn  pale,  394 
pando,  -ere,  to  spread,  374 
pango,-ere,  to  strike,  drive,  382 
pango,  -ere,  to  bargain,  382 
parco,  -ere,  to  spare,  382 
pario,  -ere,  to  bring  forth,  368 
pasco,  -ere,  to  graze,  393 
pascor,  -1,  to  feed,  396 
patefacio,  -ere,  to  open,  332,  368 
pateo,  -ere,  to  stand  open,  353 
patior,  -i,  to  suffer,  396 
paveo,  -ere,  to  fear,  357 
pecto,  -ere,  to  comb,  380 
pellTcio,  -ere,  to  allure,  368 
pello,  -ere,  to  drive  (away),  387 
pendeo,  -ere,  to  hang,  361 
pendo,  -ere,  to  weigh,  371 
perago,  -ere,  to  accomplish,  383 
percello,  -ere,  to  beat  down,  386 
percenseo,  -ere,  to  survey,  358 
perdo,  -ere,  to  ruin,  372 
pgreo,  -ir6,  to  perish,  408 
perficio,  -ere,  to  finish,  368 
perfruor,  -T,  to  enjoy  fully,  396 
pergo,  see  perrigo 
pgrimo,  -ere,  to  slay,  389 
perl  ego, -ere,  io  read  through,SS3 


permitto,  -Sre,  to  permit,  374 
permulceo,  -ere,  to  appease,  360 
perpetior,  -i,  to  endure,  396 
(perrigo)  pergo,  -ere,  to  go  on, 

378 
perrumpo,-ere,/o  bi^eak  through, 

376 
persuadeo,-ere,  to  persuade,  360 
pertlneo,  -ere,  to  pei^iain,  358 
pessumdo,  -are,  to  ruin,  349 
peto,  -ere,  to  seek,  374 
piget,  it  grieves,  420 
pingo,  -ere,  to  paint,  379 
pinguesco,  -ere,  to  groiv  fat,  395 
pinso,  -ere,  to  pound,  390 
plango,  -ere,  to  beat,  lament,  378 
plaudo,  -ere,  to  applaud,  371 
plecto,  -ere,  to  beat,  380 
plector,  396 
pleo,  I  fill,  356 
plicO,  I  fold,  347 
plumesco,  -ere,  to  get  feathers, 

395 
pluo,  -ere,  to  rain,  366 
polleo,  -ere,  to  be  powerful,  354 
pono,  -ere,  to  place,  386 
posco,  -ere,  to  demand,  370,  393 
possideo,  -ere,  to  possess,  361 
possum,  posse,  to  be  able,  401 
pOto,  -are,  to  drink,  278,  347 
praecello,  -ere,  to  excel,  386 
praeciiio,-ere,  to  sing  to  one,  387 
praedico,  -ere,  to  predict,  378 
praefero,  -re,  to  prefer,  404 
praescribo,  -ere,  to  prescri  6e,  375 
praesideo^  -ere,  to  preside,  361 
praesto,  -are,  to  afford,  349 
praesum,   praeessS,   to  be  over, 

306 
praetereo,  -ire,  to  pass  by,  407 
prandeo,  -ere,  to  breakfast,  361 
prehendo,  -ere,  to  seize,  373 


I 


285    — 


prSmo,  -erS,  to  press,  389 
proficiscfir,  -i,  to  set  out,  start, 

396 
profllgo,-are,  to  strike  down,318 
prOmitto,  -ere,  to  promise,  374 
promo,  -ere,  to  take  out,  385 
prosterno,  -ere,  to  overthrow, 

388 
prosum,  prodesse,  to  he  useful, 

306 
protego,  -ere,  to  protect,  378 
provideo,  -ere,  to  provide,  361 
psallo,  -ere,  to  play  on  the  ci- 
thern, 389 
pudet,  it  shames,  420 
pu6rasco,    -ere,    to    become    a 

child,  395 
pungo,  -ere,  to  pierce,  sting,  382 
putresco,  -ere,  to  rot,  394 

Q. 

quaere,  -ere,  to  seek,  desire,  389 
quaeso,  I  beseech^  418 
quatio,  -ere,  to  shake,  332,  368 
queo,  -ire,  to  be  able,  409 
queror,  -i,  to  complain,  396 
quiesco,  -ere,  to  rest,  393 

R. 

rado,  -ere,  to  scrape,  371 
rS,pio,  -ere,  to  seize,  332,  368 
recenseo,  -ere,  to  review,  358 
recrudesce,  -ere,  to  break  open 

afreshj  395 
recurro,  -ere,  to  run  back,  387 
rSdarguo,  -ere,  to  refute,  366 
reddo,  -ere,  to  give  back,  372 
redeo,  -ire,  to  return,  407 
rSdimo,  -ere,  to  buy  back,  389 
refello,  -ere,  to  refute,  387 
refer cio,  -irg,  to  cram,  398 
rgfSro,  -re,  to  bring  back,  404 


refluo,  -ere,  to  flow  hack,  367 
rego,  -ere,   to  rule,  govern,  378 
relego,  -ere,  to  read  over,  383 
relinquo,  -ere,  to  leave  {behind)^ 

383 
remaneo,  -ere,  to  remain,  360 
rgminiscor,  -i,  to  remember,  396 
renideo,  -ere,  to  shine,  354 
reor,  -eri,  to  think,  364 
repello,  -ere,  to  repel,  387 
reperio,  -ire,  to  find,  398 
repeto,  -ere,  to  repeat,  374 
repleo,  -ere,  to  fill  (up),  356 
repo,  -ere,  to  creep,  crawl,  375 
reposco,  -ere,  to  demand  hack^ 

393 
requTesco,  -ere,  to  rest,  393 
resideo,  -ere,  to  remain  behind^ 

361 
resipisco,  -ere,  to  come  to  one's 

self  again,  394 
resono,  -are,  to  resound,  347 
respicio,  -ere,  to  consider,  368 
respondeo,  -ere,  to  answer,  361 
restituo,  -ere,  to  restore,  366 
reverter,  -i^  to  turn  hack,  396 
revlvisco,  -ere,  to  revive,  394 
rideo,  -ere,  to  laugh,  360 
rigeo,  -ere,  to  he  stiff,  353 
rodo,  -ere,  to  gnaw,  371 
riibeo,  -ere,  to  he  red,  353 
rumpo,  -ere,  to  break,  376 
ruo,  -ere,  to  rush  forth^  366 

S. 
saepio,  -ire,  to  hedge  in,  398 
salio,  -ire,  to  leap,  398 
salve,  hail,  417 
sancio,  -ire,  to  sanction,  398 
sapio,  -ere,  to  be  wise,  368 
sarcio,  -ire,  to  mend,  398 
satisdo,  -^are,  to  give  bail,  349 


286    — 


scabs,  -ere,  to  scratchy  376 
scalpo,  -ere,  to  carve,  375 
scando,  -ere,  to  climb,  373 
scateo,  -ere,  to  gush,  354 
scindo,  -ere,  to  cut,  374 
scio,  -ire,  to  know,  338 
scisco,  -ere,  to  decree,  394 
scribo,  -erg,  to  write,  375 
sculpo,  -ere,  to  chisel,  375 
seco,  -are,  to  cut,  347 
sedeo,  -ere,  to  sit,  361 
senesco,  -ere,  to  grow  old,  394 
seutio,-ire,  to  feel,  perceive,  398 
sepelio,  -ire,  to  bury,  398 
sgquor,  -i,  to  follow,  396 
Bero,  -ere,  to  sow,  388 
s6ro,  -ere,  to  join,  388 
serpo,  -ere,  to  creep,  375 
sido,  -ere,  to  sit  down,  374 
sileo,  -erg,  to  be  silent,  353 
siao,  -ere,  to  let,  388 
sisto,  -ere,  to  stop,  374 
soleo,  -ere,  to  be  wont,  363 
solve,  -ere,  to  loose,  366 
sono,  -are,  to  sound,  347 
sorbeo,  -ere,  to  sip,  353 
sordeo,  -ere,  to  be  dirty,  353 
spargo,  -ere,  to  scatter,  384 
specio,  /  see,  368 
sperno,  -ere,  to  despise,  388 
splendSo,  -ere,  'to  gleam,  353 
spondeo,  -ere,  to  pledge,  361 
spiio,  -ere,  to  spit,  366 
squaleo,  -ere,  to  be  filthy,  354 
statuo,  -ere,  to  set,  place,  366 
sterno,  -ere,  to  strew,  388 
sternuo,  -erg,  to  sneeze,  366 
sterto,  -ere,  to  snore,  373 
stinguo,  I  put  out,  378 
sto,  stare,  to  stand,  349,  370 
str6po,-gre,  to  make  a  noise,  376 
BtrTdSo,  -ere,  to  whiz,  creak,  361 


Btringo,  -erg,  <o  6i77C?,  379 
struo,  -grg,  to  build,  367 
studgo,  -ere,  to  he  zealous,  353 
stupeo,  -erg,  to  be  amazed,  353 
suadgo,  -erg,  to  advise,  360 
subgo,  -irg,  to  come  under,  407 
subigo,  -erg,  to  subdue,  383 
subjicio,  -grg,  to  subject,  368 
subsum,  subesse,  to  be  under,  306 
succensgo,  -erg,  to  be  angry,  353 
succurro,  -grg,  to  succor,  387 
suesco,  -grg,  to  become  used,  393 
siigo,  -grg,  to  suck,  378 
sum,  esse,  to  be,  303 
sumo,  -grg,  to  take,  385 
suo,  -grg,  to  sew,  366 
siiperbio,  -irg,  to  be  proud,  398 
supersedgo,  -erg,  to  forbear,  361 
supersum,  superesse,  to  remain 

over,  306 
supprimo,  -grg,  to  keep  back,  389 
(surrigo)  surgo,  -grg,  to  rise,  378 
Buspendo,  -grg,  to  hang,  371 

T. 

taedet,  it  wearies,  420 
tango,  -grg,  to  touch,  382 
tego,  -erg,  to  cover,  378 
temno,  I  despise,  385 
tendo,  -grg,  to  spread,  371 
tengo,  -erg,  to  hold,  358 
t^neresco,  -grg,  to  grow  tender , 
395 

f^^!^^:^!^l^omii>e,360,  384 

tero,  -grg,  to  rub,  wear  out,  388 
texo,  -grg,  to  weave,  390 
timgo,  -erg,  to  fear,  353 
tingo  (tinguo),  -grg,  to  stain,  378 
tollo,  -grg,  to  lift,  take  away,  389 
tondgo,  -erg,  to  shear,  361 
tono,  -arg,  to  thunder,  347 


I 


—  28r  — 


torpeo,  -ere,  to  he  numbj  353 
torqueo,  -ere,  to  torture^  359 
torreo,  -ere,  to  roast,  358 
trado,  -ere,  to  deliver,  372 
traho,  -ere,  to  draw,  378 
transeo,  -Ire,  to  pass  over,  407 
tremo,  -ere,  to  tremble,  386 
tribuo,  -ere,  to  confer  on,  366 
trudo,  -ere,  to  thrust,  371 
tumeo,  -ere,  to  swell,  353 
tundo,  -ere,  to  thump,  371 
turgeo,  -ere,  to  swell,  360 

U. 

ulcisc5r,  -1,  to  avenge,  396 
ungo(unguo),  -ere,  to  anoint,  378 
urgeo,  -ere,  to  urge,  360 
firo,  -ere,  to  burn,  389 
utor,  -1,  to  use  J  396 


vado,  -ere,  to  go,  371 

vale,  farewell,  417 


veho,  -ere,  to  carry,  378 
vello,  -Srg,  to  pluck,  pull,  389 
vendo,  -er6,  to  sell,  372 
veneo,  -ire,  to  be  for  sale,  408 
venio,  -ire,  to  come,  398 
venumdo,  -Sre,  to  sell,  349 
vergo,  -gre,  to  verge,  384 
verro,  -ere,  to  sioeep,  389 
verto,  -ere,  to  turn,  373 
vesc6r,  -i,  to  feed  upon,  eatj  396 
veto,  -are,  to  forbid,  347 
vId€o,  -ere,  to  see,  361 
vigeo,  -ere,  to  be  vigorous,  353 
vllesco,  -€re,  i^o  become  vile,  395 
vincio,  -ire,  ifo  bind,  398 
vinco,  -ere,  ^o  conquer,  383 
vireo,  -ere,  to  be  green,  353 
viso,  -ere,  to  visit,  390 
VIVO,  -ere,  to  live,  367 
volo,  vellg,  to  be  willing,  405 
volvo,  -ere,  to  roll,  turn,  366 
vomo,  -ere,  to  vomit,  386 
voveo,  -ere,  to  vow,  357 


I 


288    — 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS. 

The  references  are  to  paragraphs. 


A. 

-a,  Nouns  in,  of  1st  decl.,  56;  of  3d 
decL,  83;  ace.  sing.  3d  decl.,  153; 
changed  in  compounds,  517 

a,  ab,  abs,  655;  with  abl.  of  se- 
paration^  620;  of  agentj  603; 
in  compounds,  519;  with  nega- 
tive force,  531.  2 

Abbreviations,  944 

abesse  —  non  multum  abest  quin, 
nihil  abestquin, 766;  tantum  ab- 
est ut.  .ut,  760 

abliinc,  denoting  tinie^  674 

abhorrere,  with  abl,  620,  621 

Ablative,  49 ;  sing,  of  3d  decl.,  140, 
144;  Syntax,  603-628;  abl.  of 
agentj  603;  of  cause,  603,  604; 
of  comparison,  609-612;  oi  dif- 
ference, 612;  of  limitation,  608; 
of  manner,  613,  614;  with  opus 
est,  624;  of  means  or  instru- 
ment, 605-607;  of  plenty  and 
t(;aM^,622,623;  of  price,  617-619; 
of  quality,  615,  616;  of  separa- 
tion, 620,621;  in  special  con- 
structions, 625;  oftime,^'12\  with 
prepositions,  445, 446,  655-671; 
of  place,  687,  688;  with  names 
of  towns,  683-686 ;  of  distance 
how  far,  681 

Ablative  absolute,  836,  837 

absolvgre,  with  gen.,  570 

absque,  656 


abstinSre,  with  abl.,  620 

Abstract  substantives,  37;  for 
concretes,  691,  693;  in  the  plur., 
694,  695;  derivation,  488,  493 

abundare,  with  abl,  622 

-abus  for  -is,  Ist  decl,  59 

abiiti,  with  abl,  626 

ac,  atque,  849 

Acatalectic  verses,  907 

Accent,  rules  of,  29-31 

acceptus,  with  dai,  598 

accidit,  with  ut,  759 

accipere,  with  dat.  of  purpose^ 
595;  with  ace.  &  infin.,  812;  with 
gerundive,  841 

accusare,  with  gen.,  570 

Accusative,  49;  sing.  3d  decl,  143; 
plur.,  148;  in  -Ss,  157;  Syntax, 
574-586;  with  active  transitive 
verbs,  574;  with  intransitive 
verbs,  575,  576;  with  compound 
verbs,  577;  with  verbs  of  nam- 
ing, 578;  with  verbs  of  teaching 
and  asking,  579-582;  with  iin- 
personal  verbs,  583^  584;  in  ex- 
clamations, 585;  used  adver- 
bially, 586;  with  prepositions^ 
629-654;  with  names  of  towns, 
683;  to  denote  space,  679,  680; 
time  how  long,  674;  how  old,  678 

Accusative  with  Infin.,  810-820; 
as  subject,  811;  as  object,  812; 
after  verbs   of  wishing,   &c., 


—    289 


814,  815;  tenses,   818,  819;  in 
indirect  discourse,  825;  how  to 
translate  J  816 
Active  voice,  272;  its  participles, 

829 
ad,   629;    assimilated   in    com- 
position,   520  ;    in  compounds 
with  dat.,  592;  with  gerund,  845; 
with  interest,  573;  with  adjec- 
tives signifying  useful.suiiahle, 
599 
adducere,  with  ut,  758 
-3-des,  suffix  in  patronymics,  4:81 
adipisci,  with  ut,  758 
Adjectives,  32,   198-227;  of  1st 
and  2d  decL,  72-77;  of  3d  decL, 
137-142;  of  three  terminations, 
199;  of  two  terminations,  200; 
of  one  termination,  141, 201;  de- 
fective, 203,  204;  indeclinable, 
205;  indefinite,  268;  pronominal, 
269;  comparison,  207-227;  used 
as  substantives^  701,  702;  used 
instead  of  adverbs,  550;  used 
instead  of  possessives,  703;  de- 
noting a  part  of  a  thing,  704; 
appositive,  550 ;  attributive,  546; 
predicative,   536,    544;  in  re- 
lative clauses,  554;  with  gen., 
567;    with  dai,   598-600;   with 
abl,  623,  625;  position,  559,  561; 
derivation,     496-511;     special 
uses,  701-709;  in  abl.  absol.,  836 
Adjuncts  of  the  predicate,  558; 

of  the  subject,  558 
adjuvare,  with  ace,  589 
admonere,  with  gen.,  568;  with  ut, 

758;  with  aco.  &  inf.,  814 
Adonic  verse,  925.  i 
adspergere,  with  dat.  &  ace,  593 
adulescens  for  in    adulescentia, 
691;  in  adulescentia,  673 


Advantage,  dative  of,  587 

advenire,  with  in  &  ace,  690 

adventu,  abl.  of  time,  673 

Adverbial  accusative,  586;  phra- 
ses, 431 

Adverbs,  32,  424-446;  derivation 
of,  425-434;  from  adjectives  of 
the  1st  &  2d  decl,  425;  of  the  3d 
decl,  426;  of  time,  437;  of  man- 
ner, 438;  of  order,  242;  nu- 
meral, 241;  of  place,  436;  used 
as  ^prepositions,  436;  compari- 
son, 440-442;  with  gen.,  566.  6; 
correlative,  439;  position,  562 

Adversative  conjunctions,  451,853 

adversus,  adversum,  632 

ae,  changed  In  compounds,  517 

aedes  &  templum  omitted,  566.  9 

aeger,  with  abl. ,  604 

aequalis,  w.  gen.,  598 

aequare,  w.  ace.  589 

aeque  ac,  849 

aestimare,  w.  gen.,  569;  w.  abl,  617 

aetate,  abl.  of  time,  673 

-aeus,  suffix,  508 

aflutim,  w.  gen.,  566.  6 

afferre,  w.  dat.,  592 

affic^re,  w.  abl.,  607 

affirmare,  with  ace.  &  infin.,  812 

Agent,  abl.  of,  with  a  or  S-b,  603; 
dat.of,596,597;  w.  opera,  per,  606 

agere,  with  annus,  to  express  how 
old,  678;  id  aggre,  with  ut,  758 

agnomen,  194 

Agreement  of  predicate  and  sub- 
ject, 536-539;  of  attribute  and 
substantive,  546,  547;  of  appo- 
sition and  substantive,  548-550 ; 
of  pronoun  &  antecedent,  551- 
557 

ajo,  conjugated,  416;  its  use,  823 

-ai,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.j  91 


290     — 


Alcaic  verses,  925.9.10;  stanza,  92  7.1 

Alcmanian  stanza,  927.  9 

ail-  in  aliquis  rejected,  723,  762 

alienare,  with  a  and  abl,  621 

alienus,  with  abl.,  925 

allquanto,  with  comparatives y1  OS 

aliquantum,  w.  gen.,  566.  6 

aliquid,  with  gen.,  566. 5;  used  ad- 
verbiallyj  586 

aliquis,  266;  its  use,  722;  after  si 
emphatic^  723 

-alls,  suffix^  501 

aliter  atque,  849 

alius,  202,  728;  alius .. alius,  alii. . 
alii,  729;  quantity  in  gen.,  861 

Alphabet,  3;  vowels  and  diph- 
thongs, 4,  5;  consonants,  6,  7 

alter,  202,  728;  alter,  .alter,  729 

Alternative  questions,  798 

altero  tanto,  612 

alteruter,  202 

amans,  w.  gen.,  567.  2 

amicus,  w.  dat.  &  gen.,  598 

amplius,  without  quam,  610 

an,  inierrog.,  797,  798;  annon,  798 

Anacrusis,  925.  lo 

anceps  syllaba,  908 

animadvertere,  w.  ace.  &  inf.,  812 

Animals,  Names  of,  47 

ammo,  abl.  of  manner,  613;  animo 
aequo,  without  cum,  613 

Answer,  Form  of,  799 

ante,  631;  in  composition,  521;  in 
compounds  with  dat.  592 ;  to  de- 
note distance  oftimey  675;  with 
quam,  675;  ante  diem,  931 

Antecedent  of  relative,  553;  in- 
corporated in  the  relative 
clause,  719;  agreement,  551-557 

antepenult,  25 

antequam,  779,  780 

-anus,  suffix^  504,  505,  507 


anxius,  with  abL,  604 

Apocope,  894 

Apodosis,  787 

apparere,  with  two  nom.,  540 

apparet,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

appellare,  with  two  ace.,  578 

appellari,  with  two  nom.,  540 

Appendix  to  3d  conjugation,  331 

Apposition,548;  in  relative  clause, 
554;  gen.  of  specification  in  its 
stead,  566.  ?;  expressing  time, 
549;  with  names  of  towns,  684, 
685;  agreement,  548-550 

aptus,  with  dat.,  598;  with  gerund. 
&  gerundive,  844;  with  qui  &  sub- 
junct.,  793 

apud,  630 

-ar.  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  94,  95 

arbitrari,  with  two  ace,  578;  with 
ace.  &inf.,  812 

arcessgre,  with  gen.,  570 

Archilochian  verse,  925.  u;  stan- 
zas, 927.  10-13 

argugre,  with  gen.,  570 

-aris,  suffix,  501 

Aristophanic  verse,  925.  2 

-arium,  suffix,  482 

-arius,  suffix,  501 

Arsis,  900 

Article,  not  in  Latin,  57 

as.  Unit  of  value,  937 

-as,  Nouns  in,  Ist  decl.,  60;  3d 
dec!.,  105-107;  -as,  Greek  ace.  pi. 
added,  157;  suffix,  507 

Asclepiadean  verses,  925.  7.  s; 
stanzas,  827.  ^t-s 

-asco,  "Verbs  in,  472 

assgqui,  with  ut,  758 

Assimilation  of  prepositions,  518 

assuescSre,  with  inf.,  809 

Asyndeton,  850 

at,  853 


I 


291    — 


atque,  849;  atque  is,  715 

atqui,  853 

Attraction  of  mood,  826 

Attribute,  its  agreement,  546, 547 

Attributive  adjective,  546 

-atus,  suffix  J  503 

au,  changed  in  compounds,  517 

audere,  with  inf.,  809 

audlre,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812;  with 

pres.  participle,  813,  835 
auditu,  848 
aureus,  the  coin,  938 
-aus,  Nouns  in,  3d  decL,  123 
^ut,  852 

autem,  853;  its  place,  564 
Authors,  Latin,  945 
Auxiliary  esse,  303 
-ax,  Nouns  in,  3d  deoL,  132;  suffix, 

498 


b  changed  to  p,  375 

belli,  in  connection  with  domi, 
686;  bello  Antiochi,  673;  bello 
Persico,  673;  in  bello,  673 

bene,  compared  441;  with  em6re 
&  vendere,  619 

benedicgre,  with  dat.,  589 

-b6r.  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  96 

-bills,  suffix,  498 

bini,  instead  of  duo,  238 

bia  die,  abl.  of  timej  673 

blandtri,  with  dai,  589 

-bs,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  124-126 

-bulum,  suffix,  494 

-bundus,  suffiXj  496 

C. 

-c.  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  89 
caelum,  decl,  191 
Caesura,  909-911;    of  the  hexa- 
meter, 915;  of  the  trimeter,  924 


Calendar,  Roman,  929-936 
Calends,  929 

capio,  -ere,  conjugated,  331 
Capital  initial  letters,  3 
capitis  et  capite  damnare,  570 
caput,  129 

Cardinal  numerals,  228-233 
carSre,  with  abl,  622 
cams,  with  dai,  598 
Case-endings   of  the  5  declen- 
sions, 54 
Cases,  35,49;  dependent,  50;  in- 
dependent, 50;  of  adjectives  & 
nouns   used    adverbially,  430; 
construction  of,  566-690 
casu,  abl.  of  manner,  614 
casus  obliqui,  50;  recti,  50 
Catalectic  verses,  907 
causa,  w.  gen.  &mea,tua  &c.,  566.  8, 
604;  w.  gerund  &  gerundive,  843 
Causal  clauses, w.  suhjunctiveyl 82 
Causal    conjunctions,    452,   456; 

their  uses,  781-786,  851 
cave, cave  ne,  in  prohibitions,  806 
cave  re,  with  dat.  &  ace,  591 
-ce,  -cine,  appended  to  hie,  254 
celare,  with  two  ace,  579 
celer,  special  forms  of,  138, 140 
-ceps,  Compounds  in,  3d  decl,  126 
eernere,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812;  with 

pres.  part.,  813 
cerneres,  potential  subjunct,  750 
certe,  certo,  430 
certum  est,  w.  ace.  &  inf.,  811 
cetgri,  defective,  204,  728 
Characteristic  of  stem;  52 
circa,  circum,  634;  in  composi- 
tion, 522;  compounds  of,  w.  ace, 
577 
circiter,  635 
circulre,  522 
circumdare,  w.  ace,  593 


^    292 


cis,  citra,  633 

Classification  op  Verbs,  346- 
399 

coarguere,  w.  gen.,  570 

cogere,  with  in  &  ace,  690 

cogitare,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 

cognomen,  194;  with  dat.,  594 

cognosc6re,  with  aco.  &  inf.,  812 

Collective  noun,  38;  with  plural 
verb,  543 

collocare,  to  let,  w.  abl.,  617;  with 
in  &  abl,  689 

c5in  z=z  cum,  in  composition,  523 ; 
in  compounds  w.  dat.,  592 

Common  gender, 45;  common  noun, 
38;  common  quantity,  27,  863 

commonere,  commonefacere,with 
gen.,  568 

communis,  w.  gen.,  667.  3;  w.  dat., 
598 

Comparative,  how  formed,  209; 
how  declined,  139;  wanting, 224; 
with  abl,  609;  with  the  force  of 
too,  unusually,  somewhat,  705 ; 
used  in  reference  to  only  two 
objects,  709;  its  force  increased, 
706;  with -cuius,  510;  followed 
by  quam  ut,  quam  qui  w.  sub- 
junct.,  795 

Comparative  conjunctions,  461, 
772;  comparative  value  with 
verbs  ofhuying  and  selling ,619 

Comparison  of  adjectives,  207- 
227;  irregular  and  defective, 
220-227;  of  participles,  227;  of 
adverbs,  227,  440-442;  of  two 
qualities  of  the  same  object, 
708 

comperire,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 

complere,  with  abl,  622 

complures,  decl,  221 

compos,  with  gen.,  567, 1 


Composition  op  Words,  465, 512- 

531 
Compound  adjectives,  531 ;  comp. 
forms    of  the  verb,   303-315; 
comp.  numerals,  231,232;  comp. 
substantives,  530;  declined,  192; 
comp.  tenses   of  the  passive, 
309;  comp.verbs,  513-529;  comp. 
verses,  903,  925 
Compounds,  Quantity,  883;  sylla- 
hification,  24;  of  dare,  572;  of 
esse,  306;  of  facere,  413;  of  ire, 
407;  of  prepositions  with  dat., 
592;  of  prepositions  with  aco., 
577 
con  see  com 
concedgre,  with  ut,  758 
Concessive     conjunctions,     458; 

uses,  767-771 
Concessive  subjunctive,  753 
Concrete  substantives,  37;  used 

for  abstracts,  691 
condemnare,  with  gen. ,  570 
Conditional  conjunctions,457;  use, 
787-790;  conditional  sentences, 
787-788;  conditional  wishes  w, 
dum,  modo,  790 
conducere,  to  hire,  with  abl,  617;  1 
with  gerundive,  841  I 

conducit,  with  ace.  &  inf ,  811        ' 
confidSre,  with.  dat.  or  abl,  628 
congregari,  with  in  &  ace. ,  690 
Conjugation,  35,  270,  295;  First, 
316,  317,  327,  346-350;  Second, 
318,319,328,351-364;  Third,320, 
321,  329,  365-396;  appendix  to 
Third,  verbs  in  10,   331,  332; 
i^owr/;i, 322,323,330,397,  398;  of 
deponents,  324-330;  periphra- 
stic, 311-314;  special  forms  in 
conjug.,  333-338;   of  irregular 
verbs,   400-413;    of   defective 


I 


293    — 


verbs,  414-418;  of  impersonal 

verhSy  419-423 
Conjunctions,  32,  447-462;  co-or- 
dinating, 448-453;  use  of,  849- 

857 ;    subordinating,    454-462; 

use  of,  749-790;  place  of,  564 
Conjunctive  clauses,  755  ff. 
Consecutive    conjunctions,    460; 

use  of,  756-766 
consequi,  witli  ut,  758 
considere,  with  in  &  abl,  689 
consilio,  abl  of  manner^  613 
Consonants,  Classification  of,  6 
Consonant-stems,  3d  deol.,  79,  81; 

of  verbs,  339,  345 
constare,  to  cost,  with  abl,  617 
constat,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 
constituere,  with  in  &•  abl,  689 
Construction  of  Cases,  566-690 
consul,  used  for  consulatus,  692 
consulere,  its  construction,  591; 

with  ut,  758 
contendere,  with  ut,  758 
contentus,  with  abl,  625 
Continental  pronunciation,  15 
continere ;  vix  me  contineo  quin, 

766 
contingit,  with  ut,  759 
contra,  636 
Contracted  syllables,  Quantity  of, 

860 ;  contracted  vowels  in  con- 

jugatiouj  344 
convenire,  with  in  &  aee.,  690 
convenit,  w.  aee.  &  inf.  811 
convinc6re,  with  gen.,  570 
Co-ordinating  conjunctions,  448- 

453:  use  of,  849-857 
Copulative  conjunctions,  449;  use 

of,  849-851 
coram,  658 
Correlatives,  269,  439 
Corresponsive  conjunctions,  858 


Countries,  Gender  of  names  of,  42 

creare,  with  two  ace.,  578 

creari,  with  two  nom.,  540 

credere,  with  dat.,  589;  with  two 
ace,  578;  in  the  pass.  w.  two  nom., 
540;  with  aee.  &  inf,  812 

craderes,  potential  subjunct.,  750 

credibile  est,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

crime  or  charge,  gen.  of,  570 

crimine  or  nomine,  with  gen.,  570 

-crum,  suffix,  495 

cujas,  patrial  adject.,  264 

-culiim,  suffix,  494 

-cuius,  su-ffix,  480,  510 

cum,  prep.,  659;  with  abl  of  man- 
ner, 613;  in  composition,  523 

cum,  conjunction;  cum  temporal, 
774;  cum,  whenever,  740;  cum 
causal,  786;  cum  concessive, 
769;  cum  historical,  774;  cum 
primum,  773;  cum  quis,  723,  762 

cum-tum,  857 

cunctus.  Nouns  with,  in  abl  with- 
out prep.,  687 

-cundiis,  suffix,  496 

-cunque,  appended  to  pronouns, 
258;  followed  by  indie.,  748 

cupere,  w.  inf.  or  w.  ace.  &  inf,  814 

cupidus,  with  gen.,  567.  i 

cura,  ut,  imperat.  phrase,  806 

curare,  w.ut,  758;  w.  gerundive,  841 

D. 

Dactylic  Hexameter,  914  ff. 

damnare,  with  gen.,  570.  i 

dare,  349;  with  two  ace,  578;  with 

two  dat.,  595;  with  gerundive,  841 
Dates,  Koman,  931;  of  year,  935; 

how  to  turn  into  English,  934 
Dative,  49 ;  pi  3d  decl,  149 ;  4tli  decl , 

172;  Syntax,  587-602;  indirect 

object,   advantage^    587;   with 


—    294     — 


intransitive  verbs,  589;  with 
transitive  verbs,  588 ;  with  com- 
pounds of  ad,  ante,  &c.,  592; 
with  verbs  of  twofold  construc- 
tion, 593;  of  purpose,  with  verbs 
0^  giving  and  receiving^  595; 
ethical,  602;  of  agency,  with 
gerundive,  596,  741,  840;  with  pas- 
sives, 590,  597;  of  2^ossession, 
594;  with  adjectiveSy  598-600; 
with  substantives^  601 
de,  657;  with  accusare,  570;  ne- 
gative meaning  in  compounds, 
531.  2 
dea,  deus,  dec!.,  59,  67 
debSre,    with  inf.,  809;    with  the 

force  of  the  potential,  747 
deced^re,  with  abl,  620 
decet,  dedecet,  with  ace,  583 
declarare,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 
Declension,  35,51;  general  rules, 
55;  First,   56-62;  Second,  63- 
71;     Third,    78-170;    Fourth, 
171-175;  Fifth,  176-180;  of  ad- 
jectives,12-ll,  137-142;  of  com- 
pounds, 192.    Case-endings  of 
the  5  declensions,  54 
Defective  substantives,  in   case, 
182-185;  in  number,  186-188 
defective  adjectives,   203,  204 
defective  comparison,  224,  225 
of    adverbs,     442 ;     defective 
verbs,  414-418 
deficere,  with  ace,  589 
defigere,  with  in  &  abl.,  689 
Degree  of  difference,  in  the  abl  ,612 
delectari,  with  abl,  604 
demergere,  with  in  &  abl,  689 
demonstrare,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 
Demonstrative    pronouns,     252- 
254;  position,  561;  agreement, 
551,  552;  where  not  used,  716 


Denominative  inceptives,  391 
395;  denominative  verbs,  475- 
479 

depellere,  with  abl,  620 

Dependent  cases,  50 

Dependent  clause,  742;  in  indi 
rect  discourse,  825;  dependen 
uses  of  the  subjunctive,  755  fi 

Deponents,  276;  conjugation  of, 
324-330;  of  the  first  conj.,  350 
of  the  secondj  364;  of  the  third, 
396;  of  thejfourth,  399;  parti- 
ciples,  831 

Derivation  of  AYords,  465,  467- 
511;  of  adjectives,  496-511;  of 
verbs,  470-479 ;  of  substantives, 
480-495;  of  adverbs,  425-434 

Desiderative  verbs,  473 

designare,  with  two  ace.,  578 

desinere,  with  inf.,  809 

Determinative  pronouns,  255 

deterrgre,  with  abl,  620 ;  with  ne 
or  quommus,  764 

dcus,  decl,  59,  67 

Diaeresis,  in  pronunciation,  13; 
in  prosody,  892,  909 

Diastole,  895 

dicere,  with  twoaoc,  578;  with  ace. 
&  inf.,  812 

dici,  with  two  nom.,  540;  with  nom. 
&  inf.,  821 

dictu,  848 

-dicus.  Adjectives  in,  216;  quan- 
tity, 886 

dies,  180;  in  diem,  670;  ante 
diem,  931 

differre,  with  a  &  abl,  621 

difficilis,  215;  adverb.,  429;  with 
dat.,  598;  with  gerund,  or  supine, 
848 

diffidere,  with  dat.,  589,  628 

dignari,  with  abl,  625 


—    295 


dignus,  with  abl.,  625;  dignus  qui, 

with  subjunct.,  793.  c 
diligens,  with  gen.,  567.  2 
Dimeter,  904 
Diminutive  substantives,  480, 481 ; 

adjectives,  510;  verbs,  474 
Diphthongs,  5 
Dipody,  906 

Direct  discourse,  823;  dir.  object, 
in    the    ace,    574-577;    direct 
questions,  796-800 
dis-,  inseparable  prep.,  516;  com- 
pounds of,  with  a  &  abl,  621 
discSre,  with  inf.,   809;    with  a, 

for  doc6ri,  679 
discernere,  with  a  &  abl.,  621 
discessu,  abl.  of  time,  673 
discrepare,  with  a  &  abl.,  621 
Disjunctive    conjunctions,     450; 

use  of,  852 
dispar,  with  dat.,  598 
displicSre,  with  dat. ,  589 
displicet,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 
dissentire,  with  a  and  abl,  621 
dissimilis,  215;  with  dat.,  598 
Distance  Jiow  far  in  the  ace.  or 
abl,  681;  of  time  how  long  be- 
fore or  after,  675 
distare,  with  a  &  abl,  621 
Distich,  926;  Elegiac  D.,  919 
distinguere,  with  a  &  abl.,  621 
Distributive  numerals,  237,  238 
docere,  with  two  ace.,  579 
dolere,  with  ace,  575;  with  abl, 
604;  with  ace.  &  inf.,  815;  with 
quod,  783 
dolo,  fraude,  abl  of  manner,  614 
domi  bellique,  686;  domus,  173; 

used  like  name  of  town,  686 
donare,   with    twofold   construc- 
tion, 593 
donee  =  quamdiu,  776,  777 


Double  questions,  798 
Dubitative  subjunctive,  754 
dubito  &  non  dubito  quin,  766 
dubium  non  est  quin,  766 
ducere,  with  dat.  of  purpose,  595; 

with  gen.,  569 
dulcis,  with  dat.,  589 
dum,  while,  with  pres.,  734,  776; 

until,  777;  if  only,  790 
dummodo,  790 

E. 

e.  Quantity  of,  in  -ei,  5th  decl,  178, 

861;  changed  to -i,  517 
-e,  Greek  nouns  in,  1st  decl,  60 
-e,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  84;  abl.  sing., 

3d  decl,  144 
e,  ex,  660;   in  composition,  524; 

with  negative  power,  531.  2 
edicSre,  with  ut,  758 
edocere,  with  two  ace,  579 
efficSre,  with  two  ace,  578;  with 

ut,  758 
egSnus,  compar.,  217 
egere,  with  abl  or  gen.,  622 
-eis,  suffix  in  patronymics,  484 
ejicere,  with  abl,  620 
ejus,  eorum,  earum,    as  posses- 

sives,  247,  711 
ejusmodi,  w.  ut  or  qui  &  subjunct., 

793.  a 
-eia,  suffix,  489 

Elegiac  Distich,  919;  E.  Penta- 
meter, 918 

eligere,  with  two  ace,  578 
Elision,  887-889 
-eims,  suffix,  481,  510 
emere,  w.  abl,  617 ;  bene,  male,  619 
Emotion,  verbs  of,  with  ace  &  inf., 

815;  with  quod,  785 
Emphasis,  as  affected  by  the  or(?er 

of  words,  565 


296 


.-en,  Nouns  in,  3d  dec!.,  93 
Enclitics,  control  accent,  31;  quan- 
tity, 880 
Endings  in  declension,  54;  in  com- 
parison, 209;  in  conjugation, 294 
-endus,  -undus,  endings  of  ge- 

rundive,  337 
English  method  of  pronunciation, 

16-20 
enim  &  nam,  854;  position,  564 
Ennehemimeres,  912 
-eiisis,  sufflXj  501,  507 
-entior,  -entissimtis,  216 
-entiis,  suffix,  502 
Epenthesis,  896 
Epicene  nouns,  47 
Epistolary  tenses,  740 
eques,  in  collective  sense,  698 
Equivalents  of  supine,  848 
-er,  Nouns  in,  2d  decL,  64,  65 
-er,  -er.  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  96-98 
-er,  -a,  -um,  Adject,  in,  74-76 
-€r,  -is,  -e.  Adjectives  in,  138; 

superl.,  213 
-ere  for  -erunt  (Perf.  Ind.),  334 
erg-a,  637 

ergo,  855;  with  gen.,  566.  8 
erudire,  w.  abl.,  607 
erumpere,  with  a  &  abl.,  620 
-es,  Greek  nouns  in,  1st  dec!.,  60; 
-es,  -es,  nouns  in,  3d  dec!.,  108- 
110;  -es,noiii.pliir., Greek  nouns, 
157;  proper  names  in  -es,  151 
-esco,  verbs  in,  472 
ess6,  conjugated,  303;  with   abl., 
617;  with  gen.  as  predicate,  571 ; 
with  gen.    of  value,  569;  with 
gen.  &  abl.   of  quality,  556.  5., 
615;  with  dat.  of  possessor,  594; 
with  dat.  of  pitrpose,  595;  the 
infin.  esse  as  subject,  808;  as 
object,  809 


est,  qui,  with  subjunot.,  793.  b. 
St,  849;  used  after  multi,  850;  et 

is,  et  is  non,  715 
etSnim,  854 
Ethical  Dative,  602 
etiam,  849;  with  compar.,  706 
etiamsi,  w.  indie.  &  subjunot.,  770 
etsi,  771 

-etiim,  suffix,  482 
Etymology,  1,  32-464 
eu,  11;  vocative-ending,  69 
-eus,  Greek  nouns  in,  2d  decl.,  69 
-eus,  suffix,  500;  -eus,  suffix,  506 
evadere,  with  two  nom.,  540 
evenit,  with  ut,  759 
-ex,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  133 
Exclamations,  in  ace,  585 
Existence,   General    expressions 

of,  w.  subjunot.,  793.  b 
existimare,   with   two    ace,   578; 

pass.  w.  two  nom.,  540 
expgdit,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 
expers,  with  gen.,  567.  i 
explore,  with  abl.,  622 
exsistere,  with  two  nom.,  540 
exsistunt  qui,  with  subjunot.,  793 
exspectatiOne,   abl.  of  compari- 
son, 611 
External  qualities  in  the  abl.,  616 
extra,  638 

extreraus,   with  subst.  to  denote 
part  thereof,  704 


faba,  in  a  collective  sense,  698 
fac,  with  ut  or  subjunot.,  806 
facere,  with  two  ace,   578;  with 
gen.,   569;    with  ut,   758;   with 
pres.  partic,  835 ;  facere  non  pos- 
sum quin,  766 
facilis,  215;  adv.,  429;  w.  dat.  598; 
w.  ad  &  gerund  or  w.  supine,  848 


297    ~ 


factu,  848 

fallit,  with  aoc,  583 

fama  est,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

familiaris,  with  gen.  or  dat.,  598 

familias,  old  gen.,  58 

fas  est,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811;  with 

supine,  847 
fatCri,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 
favSre,  with  dat.,  589 
Feet,  metrical,  898 
Feminine,  Rule  of  gender,  42,  43 
fertur,  with  nom.  &  inf.,  821 
-ficus,  Adjectives  in,  compared^ 

216 
fiddre,  with  dat.  or  abl.,  589,  628 
figri,  with  two  nom.,  540;  with  gen., 

571;  with  dat.  ot^  purpose,  595; 

quantity,  412,  861 
fi^ri  non  potest  quin,  766 
Fifth  Declension,  176-178 
Figures  of  prosody,  887-897 
filia,  films,  59,  67 
Final  conjunctions,  459;  use  of, 

756-766 
Final  syllables,  Quantity,  877-879 
Finite  verb,  285 
First  Conjugation,  Active,   316; 

Passive,  317;  Deponent,  327; 

Verbs  of,  346-350 
First  Declension,  56-62 
fit,  with  ut,  759 
flagitare,  with  two  ace.,  580;  with 

ut,  758 
flocci,  gen.  of  value,  569 
for,  corresponding  to  dat.,  588 
fore  ut,  to  express  fut.  inf.,  819 
Formation   of    the  Genitive,  3d 

dec!.,  82-136;    of  tha  Principal 

Parts,  339-399;  of  the  Tenses, 

298-302 
the  former,  hie,  ille,  713 
Fourth  Conjugation,  Active,  322; 


Passive^  323;  Deponent,  330; 
Verbs  of,  347-399 

Fourth  Declension,  171-175 

Fractions,  denoted  by  ordinals, 
236;  of  weight,  942 

fraude,  abl.  of  manner,  614 

Frequentative  verbs,  471 

fretus,  w.  abl. ,  625 

frugi,  indeel.,  205;  oompar.,  222 

frui,  with  abl.,  626 

fugit,  with  ace.,  583 

fungi,  with  abl,  626. 

Future  I  &  II,  280;  how  formed, 
298,  300;  wanting  in  the  sub- 
junct.,  302,  746;  Fut.  Inf.,  819; 
Fut.  Inf  rass.,315,847;  Fut.Inf 
of  deponents,  325;  Fut.  Parti- 
ciple, 301;  syntax,  736-739 

futurum  esse,  ut  for  fut.  inf.,  819 

G. 

gallina,  in  a  collective  sense,  698 

gaudere,  with  abl.,  604;  with  quod, 
783;  with  ace.  &  inf,  815 

Gender,  35;  natural  or  gramma- 
tical, 39,  48;  of  adjectives,  48; 
in  Ist  decl.,  61,  62;  in  2d  deel, 
70,  71;  in  3d  dec!.,  158-170;  in 
4th  decl,  174,  175;  in  6tli  decl, 
179,  180;  of  the  predicate,  544 

General  relatives,  258,  259;  fol- 
lowed by  the  indie,  748 

General  value,  expressed  by  the 
abl,  618 

Genitive,  49;  endings  of,  51;  for- 
mation in  3d  decl ,  82 ;  gen.  pi  in 
-um  for  -orum,  2d  decl,  68 ;  of 
3d  decl.  in -iGm,  146,  147;  in -on, 
156;  in  -lus,  77;  Syntax,  566- 
573 ;  with  substantives,  5  ^^ ;  sub- 
jective, 566.  1.  4;  in  predicate 
571 ;  objective,  566. 2;  of  personal 


298    — 


pronouns,  566.3;  partitive,  566.6; 
of  quality,  566.  5;  answering  the 
qnestion  how  old?  678;  of  spe- 
cification, 566.  7;  with  adjecti- 
ves, 567;  with  verbs  of  valuing, 
569;  with  verbs  of  remember' 
inQj  568;  with  verbs  of  accus- 
ing, 570;  with  esse  &  fieri,  571; 
with  impersonalSj  512 j  584; 
of  gerund,  843 

Gerund  &  Gerundive,  288,  289, 
298;  uses,  839-846;  with  est, 
840;  gerund  changed  into  ge- 
rundive, 842;  gen.,  843;  dat., 
844;  ace,  845;  abl.,  846;  gerun- 
dive with  verbs  of  giving^  tak- 
ing^ sending  &c.,  841 

gloriari,  w.  abl,  604;  w.  quod,  783 

Glyconic  verse,  925.  ^ 

gracilis,  superlat.,  215 

gratia,  with  gen.,  566.  8;  with  ge- 
rund &  gerundive,  843 

gratiam  agere,  with  quod,  783; 
with  ace.  &  inf.,  815 

gratus,  with  dat.,  598 

gravis,  with  dat.,  598 

Greek  nouns  of  let  decl.,  60;  of  2d 
dec!.,  69;  of  3d  decl.,  83,  88,  117, 
122,  150-157 

H. 

habere,  with  two  ace,  578;  pass, 
with  two  nom.,  540;  with  gen., 
569;  with  dat.  of  purpose^  595; 
liabSo  quod, with  subjunci,  793.  b 

Hephthemimeres,  912 

Heroic  verse,  914 

Heteroclites,  190 

Heterogeneous  nouns,  191 

Hexameter,  904;  Dactylic  Hexa- 
meter, 914-917 

hiatus,  888 


hie,  252;  its  use  712;  hie,  ille,  the 
latter^  the  former^  713;  hieine, 

hicce,  254 

Historical  Infinitive,  809 ;  Histori- 
cal Perfect,  737;  Historical  Pre- 
sent, 732 ;  Historical  tenses,  743 

hora  nona,  abl.  of  time^  673 

Horace,  Metres  of,  926-928 

horrere,  with  ace,  575 

hortari,  with  ut,  758 

Hortatory  subjunctive,  752 

hostis,  in  a  collective  sense,  698 

how  old?  678 

hurai,  like  name  of  town^  686 

humilis,  Buperl,  215 

Hypothetical  sentences,  787,  788 


i  &  j,  but  one  character,  2,  891 

i,  gen.  ending  of  the  2d  decl.,  63;  for 
-11  from  nouns  in  -ius,  -lum, 
63 ;  voc.  ending,  2d  decl,  67;  dat. 
ending,  2d  decl.,  77;  stems  in  i, 
3d  decl,  79,  80;  Greek  nouns  in  i, 
3d  decl,  88;  voc.  ending  of  3d 
decl,  154;  abl.  ending  of  the 
same,  140,  142,  144;  i,  connect- 
ing vowel  in  compound  subst., 
530 

-la,  neut.  pi.  3d  decl.,  140,  142,  145 

-ia,  suffix^  488 

-iades,  suffix^  487 

Iambic  Strophe,  927.  i5 

Iambic  Trimeter,  922-924 

-iantis,  suffix^  505 

-ias,  suffix^  487 

-iciQs,  suffiXy  501  '' 

Ictus,  900 

-icGs,  suffix,  501,  506,  509 

id,  adverbially,  586 

id  agere,  with  ut  &  subjunct.,  758 

id  quod  — .  quod,  581 


-       299 


idem,  255,  533;  used  adverbially ^ 
717 

Ides  of  the  Calendar,  929 

-ides,  -ides,  suffixes,  487 

idoiieus,  with  ad,  599;  idoneiis 
qui, with  subjunct.,  793.  c;  witli  ge- 
rund &  gerundive,  844 

-idus,  suffix  J  497 

igitur,  855;  its  place,  564 

igiiarus,  with  gen.,  567 

-lie,  suffix,  484 

-Tlis,  -ills,  suffices,  498,  501;  su- 
per!, of  adjectives  in  -ilis,  215 

Illative  conjunctions,  453,  855 

ille,  255;  its  use,  712,  713 

-illimus,  superl.  ending,  215 

-illiis,  suffix,  481 

-im,  aco  ending,  3d  dec!.,  143;  ad- 
verbs in,  432,  433 

immemor,  with  gen.,  567.  i 

imminere,  with  dai,  589 

immo,  in  answers,  800 

Imparisyllabic  nouns,  3d  decL,  81 

impatiens,  with  gen.,  567.  i 

impedlre,  w.  quominus  or  ne,  764 

impellere,  with  ut,  758 

iraperare,  with  dai,  589;  with  ut, 
758 

Imperative,  283;  personal  en- 
dings, 294;  of  dicere,  ducere, 
&c.,  336;  of  scire,  338;  uses, 
804-806;  supplied  by  cura  ut, 
fac  ut,  806;  by  the  subjunctive, 
752,  805 

Imperative  phrases,  806 

Imperative  sentence  in  indirect 
discourse,  825 

Imperfect,  280,  298,  299;  its  use, 
735;  in  letters,  740;  Imperf. 
Subjunct.  in  conditional  sen- 
tences, 788.  Ill 

Impersonal  verbs,  419-423;  their 


conjugation,  421;  with  aco.  583; 
with  ace.  &  gen.,  584 

impetrare,  with  ut,  758 

implere,  with  abl,  622 

imponere,  with  dat.,  592 

impos,  impdtens,  with  gen.,  567.  i 

imprimere,  vrith  in  &  abl.,  689 

imus,  to  denote  Si  part,  704 

in,  with  the  ace,  670;  with  verbs 
of  assembling,  690;  to  denote 
time  for  how  long,  677;  with 
the  abl.,  671;  to  denote  time 
'i(;/ien,  673;  with  verbs  of  plor 
cing,  689;  to  denote  place,  682; 
in  composition,  525;  with  ne- 
gative power,  531.  2;  in  com- 
pounds with  dai,  592 

-inS,  suffix,  485 

inanis,  with  abl.,  62o 

Inceptive  (Inchoative)  verbs,  392- 
395,  472 

incipere,  with  infin.,  809 

incitare,  with  ut,  758 

incusare,  with  gen.,  570 

Indeclinable  nouns,  181;  gender 
of,  44;  adjectives,  205,  226 

Indefinite  adjectives,  268;  Inde- 
finite pronouns,  265-267;  use, 
721 

Independent  cases,  50 

Independent  uses  of  the  Subjunc- 
tive, 749-754 

Index  of  verbs,  pag.  ^74;  Index 
to  the  metres  of  Horace,  928 

Indicative,  282;  use  of,  747,  748 

indigere,  with  abl.  or  gen.,  622 

indignus,  with  abl,  625;  indigna»s 
qui,  with  subjunct.,  793.  c 

Indirect  discourse,  824-829 

Indirect  object,  587 

Indirect  questions,  801-803 

inducere,  with  pres.  partic,  835 


300     — 


indugre,  construction  of,  593 
indulgere,  with  dai,  589 
ab  infante,  691 

inflmus,  to  denote  a  jpart^  704 
Infinitive,  287;  its  use,  807-809; 
as  object,  809;  as  subject,  808; 
its  tenses,  818;   historical  inf., 
809;  fut.  inf.  with  fore,  819 
Inflection,  34,  35 
infra,  641 

ingratus,  with  dai,  598 
inimlcus,  with  dai  or  gen.,  598 
initio,  abl.  of  time^  673 
injucundus,  with  dai,  598 
injuria,  abl.  of  manner^  614 
inquam,  416;  its  use,  823 
inscius,  with  gen.,  567.  i 
inscribere,  with  in  &  abl.,  689 
Inseparable  prepositions,  516 
insimulare,  with  gen.,  570 
instituere,  with  abl.,  607 
intellegere,  with  ace.  k  inf.,  812 
inter,  640;  in   compounds  with 
dai,  592;  inter  se,  iov  recipro- 
cal action,  711 
interdicere,  constr.,  621 
interesse,  with  dai,  592 
interest,  with  gen.,  572;  degree  of 
importance, ^1^]  with  reference 
to  lohichj  573 
Interjections,  32,  463-464 
intermittere  nihil  quin,  766 
interrogare,  with  two  ace.,  580 
Interrogative  adverbs,  796;  con- 
junctions,   462,  797;   pronouns, 
260-264,796;  place  thereof, 562; 
use  of  Interrogatives,  796-803 
Interrogative  sentences,  796  ff., 

in  indirect  questions,  825 
intra,  639 

Intransitive  verbs,  273;   imper- 
sonal passive,  590;  with  dai. 


589;  w,  aoc.  of  kindred  mean- 
ing, 576;  becoming  transitive 
by  composition,  577 

-intis,  sufflx,  504,  505,  507 

inutilis,  with  dai,  598,  599;  with 
gerund,  844 

invidere,  with  dai,  589 

-io,  Yerbs  in,  of  3d  conjug.,  331 

Ionic  rhythm,  927.  i9 

ipse,  255;  use,  with  reflexive,  718 

-ir,  Nouns  in,  2d  decl.,  64,  66 

irasci,  with  dat.,  589 

Irregular  adjectives,  77;  irreg. 
comparison,  220-223;  of  ad- 
verbs, 441;  irreg.  conjugation, 
400;  irreg.  nouns,  181-192 

is,  247;  use,  553,  714;  is  qui,  with 
subjunci  793.  a 

-is,  -is,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  111- 
114;  -is,  ace.  pi.  ending,  3d  decl., 
148;  Greek  nouns  in,  3d  decl., 
154;  -iSjSufflx  in  patronymics^ 
487 

-is,  -e.  Adjectives  in,  139, 140 

-isco,  Yerbs  in,  391 

Islands,  Gender  of  names  of,  42 ; 
constr.  like  names  of  towns,  683 

isque,  715 

-isslmus,  in  snperl,  211 

iste,  252;  use  of,  712 

ita  ut,  759;  ita  est,  yes,  799 

itaque,  855 

-itare,  Frequentatives  in,  471 

-itas,  -itia,  -ities,  -ittido,  suf- 
fixes, 488 

-itus,  suffix,  503;  adverbs  in,  434 

-iiim,  gen.  pi.  3d  decl.,  98, 140,  146 

-iiiin,  gen.  of  nouns  in,  63;  suffix, 
486 

-ills,  gen.  smg.  2d  decl,  77 

-ius,  gen.  of  nouns  in,  63 ;  proper 
nouns  in,  67;  suffix^  501, 508, 509 


f 


301 


ivus,  sufflXj  501 

ix,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  134 

J. 

j  &  i,  2 ;  affecting  the  quantity  of 
the  syllable,  864 

jubare,  with  ace. ,  589 ;  with  ace.  & 
inf.,  814;  with  nom.  &  inf.,  822 

jucundus,  with  dat.,  598;  with  ge- 
rund or  supine,  848 

judicare,  with  two  ace.,  578;  pass, 
w.  two  nom.,  540 

jugum,  its  quantity,  864 

Juppiter,  97 

juratus,  active^  278 

jure,  abl.  of  manner ,  614 

jussu,  abl.  of  cause  J  604 

justum  est,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

juvare,  with  ace,  589 

Juvenaiis,  abl.  sing.,  144.  4 

juvenis,  abl.  sing.,  144.  3;  gen.  pi, 
146.  2;  how  compared,  224.  iii 

juxta,  642 

L. 

-1,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  90-92;  adjec- 
tives in,  141 

laborare,  w.  abl,  604;  w.  ut,  758 

laetari,  with  abl,  604 

laetus,  with  abl,  604 

Latin  Authors,  945 

Latin  Grammar,  1 

the  latter,  hie,  ille,  713 

Lesser  Ionics,  927.  19 

Letters,  3-7;  names  of,  3;  gender 
of,  181 

liber,  with  abl,  623 

liberare,  with  abl,  620 

libel,  with  dat.,  421 

libra,  weighty  942 

licere,  to  be  for  sale,  with  abl,  617 


Like  cases  in  substantives,  55 

liquet,  with  dat.,  421 

locare,  to  let,  with  abl,  617;  with 

gerundive,  841 
Locative  case,  683 
loco,  locis,  687 
Logaoedic  verse,  925 
Long  vowels,  10,  859 
longe,  with  superl,  707 
longius,  without  quam,  610 
longum  est,  747 
longus,  with  ace,  679 
-Is,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  127 
ludis,  abl  of  time,  673 

M. 

maergre,  with  abl,  604 
magis,  maxime,  in  adverbial  com- 
parison, 218,  708 
magni,  parvi,  gen.  of  value,  569 
magno,  parvo,  abl  of  value,  618 
major,  minor  natu,  608,  678 
male  emere,  vendere,  619 
maledicere,  with  dat.,  598 
malle,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  814 
mandare,  with  ut,  758 
manere,  with  two  nom.,  540 
Masculine  caesura,  911 
Masculine  gender,  40,  41 
Materials,  Names  of,  38 
matiirus,  compared,  214 
maximam    partem,    adverbially, 

586 
maxime,  in  forming  superl,  218 
Means  or  instrument,  abl.  of,  605- 

607 
Measure  in  prosody,  905, 906;  Ro- 


man   measures,    937  -  943  ; 
length  how  expressed,  680 
mederi,  with  dat.,  589 
medius,  to  denote  a  part,  704 
licet,  w.  dat.,  421;  conjunction,  768    ^  memini,  with  gen.  or  ace,  568 


of 


—     302 


memor,  with  gen.,  567.  i 
-men,  suffix^  494 
mente,  abl.  of  manner,  613 
-mentum,  suffix^  494 
mercari,  with  gen.  &  abl.,  617 
-met,  appended  to  pronouns,  251 
Metres  of  Horace,  926,  927 
Metrical  Feet,  898 
metuere,   with  dat.    &  ace,   591; 

with  ut  &  ne,  761 
metus  est,  with  ut  &  ne,  761 
meum  est,  571 
Middle  syllables,  Quantity,  866- 

876 
miles,  in  collective  sense,  698 
mille,  230 

minari,  with  dat,  589 
minimi,  gen.  of  value^  569 
minimo,  abl.  of  value^  618 
minor  natu,  608,  678 
minoris,  gen.  of  value^  569 
misSret,  with  aco.  &  gen.,  584 
mittere,  w.  dat.  of  purpose,  595; 

with  gerundive,  841 
Mobilia  substantiva,  46 
moderari,  with  dat.  &  ace,  591 
Modification  in  compounds,  512 
modo,  abl.  of  manner,  613 
modo,  if  only  J  w.  subjunct.,  790 
molestus,  with  dat.,  598 
monere,  with  ut,  758 
Money,  Roman,  937 
-monia,  suffix,  488 
Monometer,  904 
Monosyllabic    nouns,    defective, 

184,  185 
Monosyllables,  Quantity  of,  880- 

882 
Months,  Gender    of,  40;    in  Ro- 
man* calendar,  929 
Moods  of  the  verb,  35,  281-285; 

attraction  of,  826 


mora,  899 

more,  abl.  of  manner,  613 

mori,  w.  two  nom.,  540 

mos  est,  with  ut,  759 

movere,  with  ut,  758 

-ms.  Nouns  in,  3d  dec!.,  124-126 

multare,  with  abl,  570 

multi  et..,  850 

Multiplicative  numerals,  239 

multo,  degree  of  difference,  612; 

abl.  of  price,  618;  with  compar. 

&  super!.,  706,  707 
muta  cum  liquida,'i?i_prosor7y,863 


nam,  appended  to  inierrogatives, 
263;  nam,  namque,  854 

Names  of  men  and  women,  193- 
196 

Names  of  towns.  Construction  of, 
683-686 

Names  of  verses,  904 

narrare^  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 

nasci,  w.  two  nom. ,  540 

natus,  with  ace,  678;  natu,  with 
grandis,  608 

navibus,  abl.  of  manner,  614 

ne,  that  not,  756,  762 ;  after  verbs 
of  hindering,  764;  after  verbs 
of  fearing,  761;  in  prohibi- 
tions, 805 ;  ne  quis,  723, 762 ;  with 
optative  subjunct,  751;  with 
concessive  subjunct.,  753,  769 

n6,  interrogative  particle,  797; 
ne..an,  798;  ne..quidem,  564 

nee.  .nee,  857 

necessarius,  with  gen.  or  dat.,  598 

necesse  est,  with  ace.  k  inf ,  811 

necne,  or  not,  798,  803 

neciibi,  762 

nefas,  181;  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811; 
with  supine,  847 


303 


negare,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 

Negative  Conditions  (nisi,  si 
non),789;  nep;siti\e  Imperative, 
with  ne,  752,  805;  negative  of 
Optative  subjunct,  ne,  751;  ne- 
gative of  Potential  subjunct, 
non,  750;  negative  of  Conces- 
sive subjunct.,  ne,  753;  negative 
of  Dubitative  subjunct,  non, 
754;  negative  with  partic,  834 

nemo,  182 ;  equivalent  to  nullus, 
700;  nemo  est  qui,  with  sub- 
junct., 793.  b 

nequam,  indecl.,  205,  222 

neque,  and  not,  neque  quisquam, 
neque  uUus,  etc.,  851;  neque. . 
neque,  857 

neque  is,  715;  neque  enim,  &c., 
856 

nescius,  w.  gen.,  567.  i 

Neuter  adjectives  or  pronouns 
used  adverbially,  429,  586 

Neuter  gender,  44;  like  cases,  55 

Neutral  passives,  279 

neve,  with  subjunct.,  757 

nihil,  181;  its  oblique  cases,  700; 
used  adverbially,  586;  nihil  ab- 
est  quin,  766;  nihil  antiquius 
habere  quam,  w.  ut,  758;  ni- 
hil est  quod,  w.  subjunct.,  793.  b; 
nihil  praetermitto,  intermitto 
quin,  766 

nihili,  gen.  of  value,  569 

nihilo,  abl.  of  value,  618 

nimis,  with  gen.,  566.  6 

nisi  &  si  non,  787,  789;  nisi  quis, 
723,  762 

niti,  with  abl,  627;  with  ut,  758 

no,  799 

nobilitas,  used  for  nobiles,  693 

nocere,  with  dat.,  589 

noli,  with  inf,  in  prohibitions,  806 


nolle,  with  aco.  &  inf.,  814 
nomen,  194;  nomenest,w.dat.,594 
nominare,  with  two  ace,  578;  pass. 

with  two  nom.,  540 
Nominative,  49 ;  plur.  in  -ia,  3d 

decl.,  140,  142,  145;  in-es,  157; 

case  of  subject,  534;  of  the  pre- 
dicate, 540 
Nominative  with  Infin.,  821,  822 
non  quin,  with  subjunct.,  785 
non  quo,  non  quod,w.  subjunct., 785 
Nones,  in  the  Roman  montli,  929 
nonne,  interrog.  particle,  797 
nostras,  patrial  adjective,  250 
nostri,  nostrum,  566. 3 
Noun,  see  Substantive 
Nouns  substantive  &  adjective,  33 
-ns,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  127,  128 
nub  ere,  with  dai,  589 
nudare,  with  abl,  622 
nudus,  with  abl,  623 
■  num,  797;  num  quis,  723,  762 
Number,  35,  49 ;  of  the  predicate, 

541,  542 
Numbers  &  persons  of  verbs,  293 
Numerals,  228-242 ;  numeral  ad- 

jectives,228-233;  num.  adverbs, 

241;  position,  561 
nuntiare,  with  in  &  ace. ,  690 ;  with 

ace.  &  inf.,  812 
-nus,  suffix,  501 
nusquam,  with  gen.,  566.  6 

O. 

-5,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  85-87;  -o, 

Greek  nouns  in,  152 
0,  with  ace.  in  exclamations,  585 
ob,  643;  in  composition,  526;  in 

compounds  with  dai,  592 
Object,  direct,  574;  indirect,  587; 

of  transitive   verbs    becomes 

subject  in  pass.,  574 


304     — 


Objective  genitive,  566.  2 

oblivisci,  with  gen.,  568 

oboedire,  with  dat.,  589 

obsecrare,  with  ut,  758 

obsistere,  obstare,  with  ne,  quo- 
minus,  764 

obtrectare,  with  dat.,  589 

odiosus,  with  dat.,  598 

Official  titles  to  indicate  time,  692 

-51us,  suffix,  481,  510 

omnes,  726 

-on,  for  -urn,  Greek  ending,  2d 
decl.,69;  -on,  gen.  pi, 3d  dec!.,  156 

onustus,  with  abl.,  623 

opera  aliciijus,  to  denote  the 
agent,  606 

operam  dare,  with  ut,  758 

opinio  est,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

opinione,  abl.  of  comparison,  611 

oportet,  w.  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

oppidum,  in  apposition  with  na- 
mes of  towns,  684,  685 

optare,  with  ut,  758 

Optative  subjunctive,  751 

opus,  with  supine,  847;  opus  est, 
with  abl.,  624;  with  ace.  &  infin., 
811 

-or,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  99-101; 
suffix,  489 

-or,  -us.  Adjectives  in,  139,  209, 
210 

orare,  with  two  ace.,  580;  with  ut, 
758 

oratio  obliqua,  824;  or.  recta,  823 

orbare,  with  abl.,  622 

orbus,  with  abl,  623 

Order  of  words,  558-565 

Ordinal  numerals,  234-236 

ordlne,  abl  of  manner,  614 

Origin,  expressed  by  abl,  604 

Orpheus,  154 

-os,for-us,6rreeA;  ending, 2d  decl, 


69;  -OS,  Latin  nouns,  3d  decl, 
115-117;  Greek  nouns,  3d  decl, 
153;  -OS,  gen.  3d  decl,  153;  nom. 
3d  decl,  155 

-osus,  suffix,  502 

-ox.  Nouns  in,  3d  decl,  135 

P, 

in  pace,  abl  of  time,  673 

paenitet,  with  ace.  &  gen.,  584 

par,  with  dat.,  598;  with  ace.  & 
inf.,  811;  par  est,  it  would  be 
fair,  747 

Paradigm  Charts,  54,  302 

parcere,  with  dat.,  589 

Parisyllabic  nouns,  3d  decl,  80 

particeps,  with  gen.,  567. 1 

Participial  adjectives  with  gen., 
567.  2 

Participle,  290,  291  ;  of  depo- 
nents, 325;  how  declined,  198; 
comparison,  227;  use  of,  829- 
835;  used  appositively,  833;  at- 
tributively, 832 ;  with  negative, 
834;  in  compound  infin.,  817 

Particles,  36 

Partitive  genitive,  566.  6 

Parts  of  the  body  in  the  plur.,  696 

Parts  of  speech,  32 

parvi,  parvo,  gen.  &  abl  of  value, 
569,  618 

a  parvulo,  691 

Passive  voice,  271,  276;  pass, 
tenses  how  formed,  302,  309; 
pass,  participles,  830;  passive 
used  impersonally,  423 ;  of  in- 
transitives,  590;  followed  by 
dat,  597 

paterfamilias,  58 

pati,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  814 

patiens,  with  gen.,  567.  2 

Patrial  adjectives,  250,  264,  507 


I 


305     — 


Patronymics,  487 

pauci,  defective^  204 

pedes,  in  collective  sense,  698 

pedibus,  abl.  of  manner,  614 

pendgre,  with  gen.,  569 

penes,  644;  quantity,  879.  2 

Pentameter, 904;  Elegiac, 918-921 

Penthemimeres,  912 

penult,  25 

per,  645, 674;  in  composition,  527; 
in  compounds  with  ace,  577;  to 
denote  the  agents  606 

Perfect,  280;  its  formation,  344; 
tenses  formed  upon  it,  300; 
Perf.  Ind.  special  terminations, 
294;  special  forms,  333;  Perfect 
Infin.,300;  Perf. Part., 301;  Perf 
Subjunct,  300;  its  uses,  737; 
Perf  definite,  737;  its  sequence 
of  tenses,  744;  in  letters,  740 

perficSre,  with  ut,  758 

perfrui,  with  abl,  626 

perfungi,  with  abl,  626 

pergere,  with  infin.,  809 

periciilum  est,  with  ut  &  ne,  761 

Periphrastic  conjugation,  311- 
315;  uses,  741;  Indie,  747 

perire,  pass,  to  perdere,  408 

perltus,  with  gen.,  567.  1 

permittere,  with  ut,  758;  with  ge- 
rundive, 841 

Personal  endings  of  the  verb,  294 

Personal  pronouns,  244-247;  not 
expressed,  710;  expressed  in 
ace.  with  inf.,  820 

Persons,  35,  243,  293;  names  of, 
193-196;  with  different  termi- 
nations, 46 

persuadgre,  w.  dai,  589;  w.  ut,758 

pet6re,w.  two  ace,  580;  with  ut,758 

Pherecratean  verse,  925.  3 

Phonetic  pronunciation,  9-14 


Phonology,  1,  2-31 
piget,  with  ace.  &  gen.,  584 
Place,  Eolations  of,  682-690 
placere,  with  dat.,  589 
placet,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 
plenus,  with  gen.,  567.  1 
plerlque,  defective,  204 
Pluperfect,  280,  300;  use,  738 
Plural,  49;  with  change  of  mean- 
ing, 189;  wanting,  187;  plural 
expressions  to  be  noted,  697; 
of  proper  names,  699 
Plural la  tantum,  188 
plurimi,  gen.  of  value,  569 
plurimo,  abl.  of  value,  618 
pluris,  gen.  of  value,  569,  619 
plus,  221;  without  quam,  618 
Poetical  Forms,  858-927 . 
Polysyndeton,  850 
ponere,  with  in  &  abl,  689 
porcus,  in  a  collective  sense,  698 
poscere,  with  two  ace,  580 
Position,  in  prosody,  862 
Positive,  208;  wanting,  224 
Possessive  pronoun,  249 ;  not  ex- 
pressed, 710;  as  subjective  gen., 
566.4 
Possessor,  dat.  of,  594 
possum,    poteram,    /    might,    I 

could,  747;  with  infin.,  809 
post,  646;  to  denote  distance  ot 
time,   675;  in  compounds  with 
dat.,  592 
posteritas,  used  for  posted,  693 
postquam   (posteaquam)  w.  perf., 

737,  773 
postulare,  w.  two  ace,  580;  with 

ut,  758 
Potential  subjunctive,  750 
potiri,  with  gen.  &  abl.,  626 
potis,  pote,  308 
potus  &  pransus,  active,  278 


—     306     — 


prae,  662;  in  composition,  vert/, 
531.  3;  in  compounds  with  dai, 
592 

praebere  se,  with  ace,  578 

praecipere,  with  ut,  758 

praeditus,  with  abl,  623 

praenomen,  194 

Praenomens  abbreviated,  197 

praestare  se,  with  ace,  578 

praeter,647;  in  compounds  with 
ace.,  577 

praet^rit,  with  ace,  583 

praetermittere  nihil  quin,  766 

praetor,  for  in  praetura,  692 

l)recari,  with  ut,  758 

Predicate,  534;  its  place,  558; 
its  number,  541-543;  its  gen- 
der, 544;  with  dijfferent  per- 
sons, 545;  predicate  adjective 
&  substantive  in  ace.  &  inf.,  817; 
predicate  gen.,  571 ;  pred.  abl.,  616 

Prepositions,  32 ;  List  of,  443-446 ; 
uses,  629-671;  with  the  ace., 
629-654;  with  the  abl.,  655-664; 
with  the  ace.  &  abl.,  665-671; 
place,  563;  in  composition,  516; 
assimilation  of,  518 

Present  Indicative,  280;  tenses 
formed  upon  it,  298;  Pres.  Sub- 
junct.,  298;  Pres.  Imperat,  299; 
Pres.  Infinitive,  tenses  formed 
upon  it,  299;  Pres.  Partic,  298; 
Present,  its  uses,  731-734;  to 
express  a  past  action,  733 ;  for 
the  historical  perfect,  732 ;  with 
dum,  734 

Price,  abl.  of,  617 

pridie,  with  ace,  930 

prima  pueritia,  673 

Primitive  adverbs,  424;  primi- 
tive verbs,  470;  primitive  and 
derivative  words,  466 


primus,  to  denote  a  part,  704 

Principal  clause,  742,  in  indirect 
discourse,  825 

Principal  parts  of  verb,  296;  their 
formation,  339-399 

Principal  tenses,  743 

Principal  term  of  compounds,  512 

principio,  abl.  of  time,  673 

prior  &  primus  instead    of  ad- 
verbs, 550 

priusquam,  779,  780 

privare,  with  abl,  622 

pro,  661;  its  quantity  in  com- 
pounds, 884 

prodesse,  with  dat,  589 

prodest,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

prohibere,  with  quommus,  764 

Prohibitions,  805 

proinde,  855;  proinde  ac  si,  772 

Pronominal  adjectives,  269 

Pronouns,  32,  243-269;  special 
uses,  710-729;  personal,  244; 
reflexive,  248;  demonstrative, 
252;  determinative,  255;  rela- 
tive, 265;  interrogative,  260; 
indefinite,  256;  their  agreement, 
551-557 

Pronunciation  of  Latin,  8 

prope,  648 

Proper  names,   38,   193-197;  in 
plur.,  699 

propior,  propius,  with  ace,  600 

Proportional  numerals,  240 

proprius,  oivn,  567.  3 

propter,  649 

Prosody,  858-897;  figures  of, 887- 
897 

prospicere,  with  ut,  758 

Protasis,  787 

providere,  with  dat.  &  ace,  591,- 
with  ut,  758 

providus,  compared,  217 


I 


SOT    — 


proximug,  proxime,  with  ace,  600 
-ps,  Nouns  in,  3d  decL,  124-126 
-pte,  appended  to  pronouns,  251 
pudet,  with  gen.  &  ace,  584 
puer,  instead  of  in  pueritia,  691 
in  pueritia,  prima  pueritia,  673 
,     Punishment,  abl.  of,  570 

Purpose,  subjunctive  of,  with  ut, 
ne,  758;  quo,  763;  with  relative, 
792;  expressed  by  ad  with  ge- 
rund, 845 
putare,  with  gen.,  569;  with  two 
ace,  578;  pass., with  two  nom.,  540 
putares,    potential    subjunctive, 

750 
Pythiambic  strophe,  927.  lo.  n 

Qo 

quaerere,  with  two  ace,  580 

Quahty,  gen.  of,  566.  5;  abl.  of,  615 

quam,  with  comparatives,  609; 
regularly  omitted  in  relative 
sentences,  610;  omitted  after 
plus,  amplius,  longius,  610;  with 
posse  &  super!.,  707;  quam  quis- 
quam,  uUus,  724;  quam  qui, 
quam  ut,  w.  subjunct.,  79^  759 
,.  quamquam,  771 
I'     quam  vis,  768 

quandoquidem,  781 

quanti,  gen.  of  value,  659,  619 

Quantity,  859-896;  general  rules, 
28;  in  compounds,  883;  of  the 
radical  syllable,  865 ;  of  middle 
syllables,  866-876;  of  final  syl- 
lables, 877-879;  of  monosyllab- 
les, 880-882;  marks  of,  10 

quantumvis,  768 

quantus  potuit,  with  super!.,  707 

quasi,  772 

que,  849 

quemadmodum,  with  indie,  772 


Question,  532;  direct,  796,  797; 
alternative,  798;  question  and 
answer,  799;  indirect,  801,  802; 
indirect  disjunctive,  803;  in  in- 
direct discourse,  825 

qui,  256;  its  agreement,  551;  =^ 
cum  ego,  &c.  with  subjunct.  792; 
=  ut  ego,  &c.  with  subjunct.,  792 ; 
qui?  720;  qui  dicitur,  555 

quia,  781 

quidam,  725 

quidem,  its  place,  564 

quilibet,  726 

quin  —  qui  non  in  clause  of  re- 
sult, 765;  after  verbs  o^  hinder- 
ing,  764;  after  negative  clau- 
ses, 765 

quippe  qui,  with  subjunct.,  791 

quls  ~  quibus,  257 

quis,  720,  723 

quisquam,  724 

quisque,  727 

quisquis,  with  indie,  748 

quivis,  726 

quo  —  ut  eo,  with  subjunct.,  763 

quoad,  w.  indie  &  subjunct.,  776-778 

quod,  in  explanatory  clauses, 
784;  quod,  quia,  because^  781; 
quod,  as  to,  785 

quodsi,  787 

quommus  r^r  ut  eo  minus,  764 

quoniam,  since,  781 

quoque,  849 ;  its  place,  564 

quotiens,  with  perf.  &  pluperf,  740 

quotquot,  with  indie,  748 

-qvius,  adjectives  in,  219 

R. 

-r,  Nouns  in,  3d  dec!.,  94-103;  ad- 
jectives, 141 
Radical  syllables,  quantity  of,  865 
ratiOne,  abl.  of  manner ,  613 


—    308    — 


-rg,  for  -ris  in  the  pass.,  335 

re-,  red-,  inseparable  prep.,  516 

Reading-charts,  8 

Reciprocal,  how  expressed,  640 

recordari,  with  gen.,  568 

recusare,  w.  ne  &  quominus,  764 

reddere,  with  two  ace,  578 

redimere,  with  abl,  617 

Reduphcated  perfects,  349,  361, 
370;  quantity  of,  867 

Reduplication  in  compounds,  349, 
361 

refert,  with  gen.,  572 

refertus,  with  abl.,  623 

Reflexive  pronouns,  248,  711;  in 
indirect  discourse,  828 

Reflexive  verb,  275 

Relative  pronoun,  256-259;  agree- 
ment, 551,  552 ;  relative  for  de- 
monstr.  at  the  beginning  of 
sentence,  556;  in  abl.  oi  compa- 
rison^ 610;  never  omitted,  557; 
place,  562;  general  relatives  w. 
indie,  748;  relative  clauses  with 
subjnnct,  791-795 

rehnquere,  with  two  ace,  578;  with 
dat.  of  pwrpo,96,  595;  with  ge- 
rundive, 841 

reliquus,  to  denote  a  part^  704; 
reliquum  est,  ut,  759 

reminisci,  with  gen.,  568 

reperiuntur  qui,  w.  subjunct.,  793.  b 

replere,  with  abl.,  622 

resistere,  with  dat.,  589 

respondere,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  812 

Responsives,  799 

restat,  with  ut,  759 

Result,  subjunct.  of,  with  conjunc- 
tions^ 759,  760 

retingri  non  possum  quin,  766 

reum  facere,  with  gen.,  570 

Rhythm,  900;  Ionic,  927.  i9 


Rhythmical  feet,  902 
rid^re,  with  ace,  575 
-rimiis,  superl.  ending,  213 
ritu,  abl.  of  manner,  613 
Rivers,  gender  of  names  of,  40 
rogare,  with  two  ace,  580;  with 

ut,  758 
rogatu,  abl  of  cause^  604 
Roman  method  of  pronunciation, 

9-14 
Root,  467,  468 
-rs,  Nouns  in,  3d  dec!.,  127 
rus,  like  name  of  town^  686 

S. 

-s.  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  103-128;  ad- 
jectives in,  141 

salutaris,  with  dat.,  598 

Sapphic  stanza,  927.  2.  3;  verse, 
925.  5.  6 

satiare,  with  abl.,  622 

satis,  with  gen.,  b^^.  6 

Scanning,  913 

scire,  w.  infin.,  809;  scito  for  sci, 
338 

-SCO,  Inceptives  in,  391 

scribere,  with  ace  &  inf.,  812 

se-,  sed-,  inseparable  prep.,  516; 
compounds  of  se  with  a  &  abl., 
621 

secernere,  with  a  &  abl.,  621 

Second  Conjugation;  Active^  318; 
Passive^  319;  Deponent^  328: 
Verbs  of^  351-364 

Second  Declension,  63-77 

secundum,  650 

secus  ac,  849 

sed,  853 

sejungere,  with  a  &  abl.,  621 

Semi-deponents,  277,  278;  2d  con- 
jug,  363;  3d  conjug.,  373 

in  senectute,  673 


—     309     — 


senex,  instead  of  in  senecttite, 
691;  compared,  224 

Sentence,  532,  533;  of  result,  se- 
quence of  tenses,  745 

sententia  mea,  608 

sentire,  with  ace.  &  inf ,  812 

separare,  with  a  &  abl,  621 

vSeparation,  abl.  of,  620 

Sequence  of  tenses,  742-746;  in 
sentences  of  result,  745 ;  in  sen- 
tences of  comparison,  772 

sequitur,  with  ut,  759 

sescenti,  indefinitely^  233 

sestertius,  sestertium,  938,  939 

Short  vowels,  10,  861 

si,  with  indie.  &  subjuDCt,  787;  si 
quis,  723,  762 

si  modo,  790 

si  non  &  nisi,  787,  789 

sic  ut,  759 

sicut,  with  indie.,  772 

silentio,  abl.  of  manner^  614 

sirailis,  8uperl.215;  with  dat.  or  gen., 
598,  600 

Simple  feet,  902;  simple  forms  of 
verb,  298-302;  simple  verse,  903 

simulac,  simulatque,  773;  with 
perf.,  737,  740 

sin,  787 

sine,  664;  sine,w.  quisquam,ullus, 
724 

sinere,  with  aee.  &  inf.,  814;  with 
nom.  &  inf.,  822 

Singular,  49 ;  used  for  the  plural, 
698;  wanting,  188 

Singularia  tantum,  187 

singLili,  defective ^  204 

si qu idem,  since^  781 

sitire,  with  aee.,  575 

sive,  852;  sive.  .sive,  w.  indie.,  748 

Small  islands.  Names  of,  683 

so-called^  qui  dicltur,  555 


solito,  abl.  of  comparison^  611 

solus  qui,  with  subjunet.,  793.  a 

~s6r,  suffix^  489 

Space,  Relation  of,  679-681 

spe,  abl.  of  comparison^  611 

Special  Forms  in  conjugation, 
333-338 

Specification,  gen.  of,  566.  7 

id  spectare,  with  ut,  758 

spes  est,  with  aee.  &  inf,  811 

spoliare,  with  abl,  622 

Spondaic  Hexameter,  914 

Stanza,  926;  stanzas  of  Horace,  927 

stare,  cost^  with  abl,  617 

statuere,  with  in  &  abl.,  689;  with 
infin.,  809 

Stem,  52,  468;  in  the  5  declen- 
sions, 53;  1st  deel.,  56;  2d  deel, 
63;  3d  deel,  79;  4tli  deel.,  171; 
5tli  deel.,  176;  in  the  4  conju- 
gations, 295;  in  a,  340;  in  e, 
341;  in  i,  342;  in  u  (v),  343, 
365-367;  in  consonants,365-396; 
in  d,  t,  369-374;  in  b,  p,  375, 
376;  in  c,  g",  q,  li,  ct,  377-384; 
in  1,  m,  n,  r,  385-389 ;  in  s,  x, 
(cs),  390;  insc,  391-395 

Stem-words,  466 

Strophe,  see  Stanza 

studere,  with  dat.,  589 

studiosus,  with  gen.,  567.  i 
I  suadere,  w.  dat.,  589;  w.  ut,  758 

sub,  666-667;  in  composition,  528; 
in  compounds  w.  dat,  592 

Subject  and  Predicate,  534, 535 ; 
place,  558;  adjuncts,  558 

Subjective  genitive,  566.  i;  as 
predicate,  571 

Subjunctive,  283;  of  the  future 
tenses  wanting,  746;  uses,  749- 
803;  with  conjunctions,  755-790; 
with    relatives ,    791-795 ;    in 


—    310    — 


indirect  questions,  801-803;  to 
express  the  thought  of  some 
other  person,  794,  827;  in  cau- 
sal clauses,  782 

Subordinating  conjunctions,  454- 
462;  uses,  755-790 

Subordination  ,of  sentences,  742 

Substantiva  mobilia,  46 

Substantives,  32,  37,  38;  gender, 
39-48;  number,  49;  declen- 
sions, 51-192 ;  indeclinable,  181 ; 
defective,  182-186;  heteroclites, 
190;  heterogeneous,  191;  deri- 
ved from  adjectives,  488;  deri- 
ved from  substantives,  480-48 7; 
derived  from  verbs,  489-495; 
used  as  adjectives,  206;  sub- 
stantive predicate,  536;  with 
dai,  601;  special  uses,  691-700; 
in  abl.  absol,  836 

subter,  669 

Suffixes,  469 

6ui,  sibi,  se,  711;  w.  quisque,  727 

sumere,  with  two  ace,  578 

summus,  top  of^  704 

sunt  qui,  with  subjunct.,  793.  b 

super  ,668;incompoundsw.dat.,592 

snperbus,  with  abl.,  604 

superlative,  211;  its  declension, 
212 ;  with  the  force  of  very^  705 ; 
strengthened,  707 ;  wanting, 
224;  requires  more  than  two 
objects,  709 

Supine,  292,  344;  tenses  formed 
upon  it,  301;  its  uses,  847;  its 
equivalents,  848;  not  changed 
in  ace.  &  inf.,  817 

supplicare,  with  dai,  589 

supra,  651 

-sura,  suffix  J  494 

-stis  &  -ttis.  Nouns  in,  4th  dec!., 
183;  suffixes  J  493 


suns,  its  use,  711 

Syllables,  21-25;  long  &  short,  860, 

861,  899;  long  by  position,  862; 

common,  863;  middle,  866-876; 

final,877-879;  syllaba  anceps,908 
Synaeresis,  890,  891 
Syncope,  893 

Synopsis  of  Declensions,  54 
Synopsis  of  Tenses,  298-302 
Syntax,  1,  532-857 
Systole,  895 

T. 

-t.  Nouns  in,  3d  decL,  129 

taedet,  with  ace.  &  gen.,  584 

talis,  269;  talis  qui,  with  subjunct., 
793. a;  talis  ut,  with  subjunet.,759 

tam  w.  adject.  &  qui,  793.  a 

tarn  w.  adject.  &  ut,  759 

tamen,  853 

tametsi,  771 

tamquam,  772 

tanti,  tantidem,  gen.  of  value^  569, 
619 

tantum  abest,  ut.  .ut,  760 

tantus  qui,  with  subjunct.,  793.  a; 
tantus  ut,  with  subjunct.,  759 

-te,  appended  to  pronouns,  251 

temperare,  with  various  cases, 
591;  temperare  mihi  non  pos- 
sum quin,  766 

templum,  omitted^  566.  9 

Temporal  conjunctions,  455;  uses, 
773-780 

in  tempore,  temporibus,  673 

Tenses,  35, 280;  formation  of,  298- 
302;  principal  and  historical^ 
743;  uses,  730-741;  sequence 
of  tenses,  742-746;  tenses  of 
the  infin.,  818,  819;  tenses  in 
letters,  741 

tenus,  663 


—    311 


I 

f  ^t6r,  Nouns  in,  3d  decL,  96,  97 

P    terra  marique,  688 

Tetrameter,  904 

Tetrastich,  926 

that  &  thosej  not  expressed  in  La- 
[  .     tin,  716 

Thesis,  900 

Third  Conjugation,  Active^  320; 
Passive,  321;  Deponent^  329; 
in-io(appenclix),331,332;  Verbs 
of,  365-396 

Third  Declension,  78-170 

Time,  Relation  of,  672-678;  for 
how  long,  677;  how  long,  674; 
how  long  before^  675;  how  long 
sincej  674;  when,672,673;  with- 
in which,  676 

timere,  with  ut,  ne,  761 

-ti5,  suffix^  493 

Tmesis,  897 

-t6r,  suffix,  490,  491 

totus,  202 ;  nouns  with,  in  aW.  with- 
out prep.,  687 

Towns,  Names  of,  Gender,  42 ;  con- 
struction of,  683 

trans,  652;  in  composition,  529; 
in  compounds  with  ace,  577 

Transitive  verbs,  271;  transitive 
&  intransitive,  575 

Trees,  Gender  of  names  of,  42 

Trimeter,  904;  Iambic,  922-924 

trini,  for  terni,  238 

Tristich,  926 

Trithemimeres,  912 

-trix,  suffix,  492 

Trochaic  strophe,  927. 18 

-trftm,  suffix,  495 

-tura,  suffix,  493 

turpis,  with  dat.,  598 

-tiSs,  suffix,  493 


U, 


u  &  V,  but  one  character,  2,  891 

u.  Stems,  3d  decL,  79;  3d  conjug.,343 

-ii.  Nouns  in,  4th  dec!.,  171 

ubi,  with  gen.,  566.  e;  when,  773; 
ubi,  ubi  primum,  with  perf ,  737 

-tibus,  dat.  &  abl  pi,  4tli  dec!.,  172 

uUus,  202 ;  its  use,  724 

ultima,  25 

ultimus,  to  denote  a  part,  704 

ultor,  ultrix,  adject,  206 

ultra,  654 

-uliiin,  suffix,  494 

-Glus,  suffix,  480,  499,  510 

-um,  suffix,  489 

-um,  for  -arum,  -orum,  1st  & 
2d  decL,  68;  -um,  gen.  pi.  of  ad- 
ject., 3d  decL,  147 

-undi,  -undus,  for  -endi,  -en- 
dus,  337 

Unit  of  measure,  899 

unus,  202;  in  the  plur.,  229;  in- 
stead of  singuli,  238;  unus  om- 
nium, with  Buperl.,  707;  unus  qui, 
with  subjunct.,  793.  a 

unusquisque,  267;  its  use,  726 

-uo,  Yerbs  in,  1st  conjug.,  3G5 

-ur.  Nouns  in,  2d  decL,  ^^',  3d  decL, 
102,  103 

urbs,  in  apposition  with  names 
of  towns,  684,  685 

-urio,  Yerbs  in,  473 

-us,  Nouns  in,  2d  decl.,  63;  3d  decL, 
118-122;  4tlidecl.,  171 

-Qs,  -a,  -Gm,  Adjectives  in,  72 

ut,  comparat,  772;  final  &  con- 
secutive, 756-761;  concessive, 
769;  temporal,  773;  as  soon 
as,  737 

ut  primum,  773;  with  perf.,  737 

ut  si,  w.  subjunct.,  772 

uti,  with  abl.,  626 


312    — 


Ulilis,  with  dat.  or  ad  &  ace,  598; 

with  gerund  &  gerundive,  844;  uti- 

lius  fuit,  747 
utiriam,  with  subjunci,  751 
utpote  qui,  with  subjunct.,  792.  ii 
utrum,  797;  utrum..an,  798 
-iitiis,  sufflXy  503 
-ux,  Nouns  in,  3d  decl.,  136 

V, 

vacare,  with  abL,  622 

vacuus,  with  abL,  623 

Yalue,  in  the  gen.,  569,  619;  in  the 
abl.,  618 

vapulare,  neutral  pass.,  279 

ve,  852 

vel,  852;  with  superl,  707 

velle,  with  inf.  or  ace.  &  inf.,  809, 
814 

velut  si,  with  subjunct.,  772 

venclere,w.abl.,617;bene,male,619 

veneo,  pass,  to  vendere,  408 

venire,  with  dat.  oi purpose^  595 

Verba  sentiendiet  declarandi,812 

Verbal  nouns  &  adjectives,  286- 
292 

Verbal  inceptives,  392-394 

Verbal  predicate,  536 

Verbs,  32,  270-423;  voices,  271; 
tenses,  280;  moods,  281;  finite 
verb,  285;  persons,  293;  conju- 
gations, 295;  formation  of  the 
tenses,  298;  verb-stem,  295;  for- 
mation of  the  principal  parts, 
339;  of  the  1st  conjug.,  346-349; 
of  the  2d  conjug.,  351-364;  of  the 
3d  conjug.,  365-396;  of  the  4tli 
conjug.,  397-399;  in  -lo,  3d  con- 
jug., 331,  368;  compounded 
with  prepositions,  516;  derived 
from  verhs^  471-474;  derived 
from    subst.   &  adj.y   475-479; 


place,  558;  Syntax,  730-848; 
Verbs  of  reminding ,  remem- 
bering, forgetting  with  gen., 
568;  of  accusing y  convicting^ 
condemning^  acquitting^  with 
gen.,  570;  of  valuing^  with  gen., 
569;  of  naming,  Tnalcing,  tak- 
ing^ choosing y  with  two  accus., 
578;  of  asking  J  demanding^ 
requesting,  inquiring^  with 
two  ace,  580;  of  benefitting, 
pleasing,  obeying,  command- 
ing (fee,  with  dat. ,  589 ;  of  giving 
k  putting  ,^N\i\\  dat.,  593;  of  buy- 
ing &  selling,  with  abl.,  617;  of 
removing,  abstaining,  with 
abl,  620;  of  plenty  &  want,  HI- 
ling  and  depriving,  with  abl., 
622;  of  placing,  with  in  &  abl., 
689 ;  of  assembling,  with  in  & 
ace,  690;  of  willing,  wishing, 
ivarning,  beseeching,  urging^ 
demanding,  resolving,  endea- 
voring, forcing,  permitting, 
with  ut  &  Tie,  758;  of  wishing, 
desiring,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  814;  of 
fearing,  with  ut,  ne,  761 ;  of  hin- 
dering, with  quommus,  764;  of 
emotion,  joy,  grief,  with  quod, 
783;  with  ace.  &  inf.,  815;  verbs 
mgnifyingtobe  able,  must,dare, 
begin,  continue,  cease,  be  accu- 
stomed, learn,  wish,  desire, 
resolve,  with  infin.,  809;  verbs 
of  perceiving,  with  pres.  part., 
813,835;  of  perceiving  and  de- 
claring, with  ace.  &  infin.,  812; 
withnom.  &inf.,  821 
vergri,  with  ut  &  ne,761 
vero,  verum,  853,  564;  place,  564 
Verses,  898;  names  of,  904;  com- 
pound, 903;  simple,  903 


313    — 


Versification,  898  flf. 

versus,  653, 

vertgre,  with  dat.  of  purpose,  595 

verum,  vero,  564,  853 

verum  est,  with  ace.  &  inf.,  811 

vesci,  with  abl.,  626 

vestis,  in  a  collective  sense,  698 

vestras,  patrial  adject.,  250 

vestrum  &  vestri,  566.  3 

vetare,  with  ace,  589;  with  ace.  & 

infin.,  814;  with  nom.  &  inf.,  822 
vetus,  superl.,  240 
vi,  vi  et  armis,  abl.  of  manner, 

614 
via,  without  prep. ,  688 
via  et  ratione,  abl.  of  manner,  614 
vicinitas  =:  vicini,  693 
vicinus,  with  dat.  &  gen. ,  598 
victor,  victrix,  adjectives,  206 
videre,  with  ut,  758;   with  ace.  & 

infin.,  812;  with  pres.  part.,  813, 

835 
vidgres,  potential  subjunct.,  750 
videri,  with  two  nom.,  540;  with  nom. 

&  infin.,  822 
vis,  114;  per  vim,  645 
visu,  848 

vix,  with  quisquam,  ullus,  724 
vocare,  with  two  ace,  578;  vocari, 

with  two  nom.,  540 


j  Yocative,  49;  of  nouns  in  -iiis, 
I      2ddecl.,  67;  in  3d  deel.,  154 

Voices,  35,  271-279 

voluntate,  abl.  of  manner ,  614 

-volus.  Adjectives  in,  216 

Vowel- changes  in  compound 
verbs,  517 

Vowels,  4 

Vowel-stems,  in  deel.,  79,  80;  in 
conjug.,  339,  344 

vox,  with  gen.,  566.  7 

W. 

w,  not  in  Latin,  2 
Way  by  which,  abl.,  688 
Week,  Days  of  the,  936 
Weights,  Koman,  942 
Winds,  Gender  of  names  of,  40 
without,  with  partic.  834 
Women,  Names  of,  196 
Word-formation,  1,  465-531 

X. 

-X,  Nouns  in,  3d  deel,  130,131, 141 

Y. 

-y.  Nouns  in,  of  Greek  origin,  88 

Year,  Date  of,  935 

yes,  799 

-ys,  Nouns  in,  154 


v^ 


14  DAY  USE 


RETURN 


ORROWED 


r6xrwt 

^W  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
This  book  ^s^cl^^  ^^^^  ^^  ^j^.^^  ^^^,^^. 

Renewed  books  are  subjea  to  immedme^ecaU^ 


JSSep^:^!^-^ 


___REgD  i:g — 


LD  21-100m-6,'56 
(B9311sl0)476 


General  Library     . 
University  of  California 
Berkeley 


VB  00227 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


